JP6655585B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a display device (display means) capable of displaying a variable display game based on a plurality of identification information, and generates a state advantageous to the player according to the result of the variable display game. What is possible is known.
In a gaming machine of this type, for example, as described in Patent Document 1, various effects including a notice suggesting a result of the variable display game and the like are performed as the effect at the time of the variable display game. Done in

JP 2013-192622 A

By the way, in this type of gaming machine, the effects are diversified, but more interesting effects are required.
SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to provide a gaming machine with high interest in gaming.

The invention described in claim 1 is
In a gaming machine capable of executing a variable display game based on satisfaction of a predetermined execution condition,
Starting storage means for storing information on the execution of the variable display game based on the establishment of the execution condition as a start memory and storing a predetermined number as an upper limit;
A variable display game control means for performing control for executing the variable display game based on the start memory stored in the start storage means;
An effect control unit capable of executing control for displaying a hold image corresponding to the start memory,
The variable display game control means,
When a plurality of start memories are stored in the start storage means, in response to the execution of one of the change display games, a hold shift is performed to raise the execution order of the start memories that do not correspond to the executed variable display game. ,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a movement display for moving a suspended image corresponding to a start memory for moving up the execution order with the suspension shift to a display position corresponding to the execution order after the advancement,
In the standby state in which the moving display is not executed, the respective reserved images do not overlap each other, and are displayed at respective display positions of the respective reserved images,
Wherein during movement display is running, Ri executable der display the hold image moving display overlaps another hold image, in order from the pending images corresponding to new the start memory, the corresponding reach a new display position It is moved to and said Rukoto.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the gaming machine with high game interest can be provided.

It is a front side perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a back view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing a control system (mainly a game control device) of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of an effect control device. It is a flowchart showing a main process of the game control device. It is a flowchart showing a main process of the game control device. It is a flowchart which shows a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an input process. It is a flowchart which shows a switch reading process. It is a flowchart which shows an output process. It is a flowchart which shows a payout command transmission process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating random number update processing 1. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a random number update process 2. It is a flowchart showing a winning opening switch / status monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a fraud & winning monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart showing a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart which shows a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure game process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure starting port switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure suspension information determination process. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 change start process and the special figure 2 change start process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit flag 1 setting process and a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process shift setting process during special figure fluctuation (special figure 1, special figure 2). It is a flowchart which shows the process during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows a process shift setting process during special figure display. It is a flowchart which shows a process during special figure display. It is a flowchart which shows a process during special figure display. It is a flowchart which shows a high probability change frequency update process. It is a flow chart which shows production mode information check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fanfare / interval process shift setting process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart which shows processing change setting processing during a special winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the process during opening of a special winning opening. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening remaining ball processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fanfare / interval process shift setting process 2. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows big hit end setting processing 1 and 2. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit fanfare middle process and a small hit middle process shift setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hitting process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit operation | movement setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit remaining ball process shift setting process. It is a flowchart which shows small hit remaining ball processing and small hit end processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 3. It is a flowchart which shows an effect command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart which shows a distribution process and a 2-byte distribution process. It is a flowchart which shows a general-purpose game process. It is a flowchart which shows a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure normal process shift setting process 1. It is a flowchart which shows a process change setting process during a normal figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the process during normal figure change and the process shift setting process during general figure display. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a normal figure display. It is a flowchart which shows a process shift setting process during a normal drawing. It is a flowchart which shows a middle process per ordinary figure. It is a flowchart which shows a normal power operation shift setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric remaining sphere process and an end process change setting process per per figure. It is a flowchart which shows the general figure per end process and the general figure normal processing shift setting processing 2. It is a flowchart which shows a segment LED editing process. It is a flowchart which shows a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a main award ball signal editing process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting-port signal edit process. It is a flowchart showing a main process of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows a reception command check process. It is a flowchart which shows a received command analysis process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating one-shot command processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating one-shot command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a customer waiting demonstration setting process. It is a flowchart which shows scenario data for customer waiting. It is a flowchart which shows a scenario data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a ball lending information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol type command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation system command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a reach start effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows SD1 fluctuation setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a scenario setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a scenario analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a scenario analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a motion registration process. 5 is a flowchart showing motion data initialization processing 1 and 2; It is a flowchart which shows a motion deletion process and a motion continuation process. It is a flowchart which shows a constant weight process and a variable weight process. It is a flowchart which shows a PB waiting process and a PB determination branch process. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol back calculation replacement process. It is a flowchart which shows a change scenario switching process. It is a flowchart which shows a repetition process and an end process. It is a flowchart which shows a motion control process. It is a flowchart which shows a motion command execution process. It is a flowchart which shows a motion command execution process. It is a flowchart which shows a bitmap addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a moving image addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1 point designation | designated object moving process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect type designation process and an effect parameter designation process. It is a flowchart which shows an object deletion process and an object change process. It is a flowchart which shows an object moving image decoding process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a behavior index setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect display edit process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect display edit process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect display edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a character drawing process. It is a flowchart which shows a display left symbol conversion process, a PB color conversion process, and a reach character conversion process. It is a front view of a game board (a movable character stands upright). It is a figure showing a starting port distribution device. It is a figure explaining an operation of a starting port distribution device. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of a still image ROM member list table. It is a figure showing an example of a moving image ROM member list table. It is a figure showing an example of a list table for motion. It is a figure which shows the example of a scenario table at the time of a customer waiting demonstration. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a specific example of a special scenario 1 normal fluctuation scenario table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the motion table at the time of the left symbol normal fluctuation start. It is a figure which shows the example of a display at the time of the left symbol change start. It is a figure explaining the relation of the present design, the previous design, and the next design at the time of normal change. It is a figure showing the example (connection example) of the motion table at the time of a left symbol normal change. It is a figure which shows an example of a scenario at the time of a push button notice, and a motion table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the scenario table at the time of variable display ending. It is a figure explaining a display layer. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating states of an image and a display layer. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a scenario table. It is a figure showing the example of a motion table. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating states of an image and a display layer. It is a figure showing the example of a motion table. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a figure showing the example of a motion table. It is a figure showing the example of a motion table. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a scenario table. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a scenario table. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a scenario table. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a flowchart which shows a reduction effect control process. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. 6 is a timing chart illustrating synchronization of a hold (startup memory) display. It is a flowchart which shows a hold effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a hold effect setting process. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a figure explaining a suspension (start memory) animation timer. It is a flowchart which shows a hold effect setting process. It is a figure which shows comparison of a big hit expectation degree etc. by the difference of the mode of hold | maintenance display. It is a figure which shows comparison of a big hit expectation degree etc. by the difference of the mode of hold | maintenance display. It is a figure which shows comparison of a big hit expectation degree etc. by the difference of the mode of hold | maintenance display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a timing chart explaining movement (shift) of hold display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect display.

Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings.
A. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment.
The pachinko machine 1 is fixed to an island on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the pachinko machine 1 is rotatably supported at the hinge portion 3 on the machine frame 2 so as to be rotatable with respect to the machine frame 2. And a front frame 4 which can be freely opened and closed. A game board 20 (shown in FIGS. 2 and 3) is attached to the front frame 4. The game board 20 is stored in a storage section (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 4.

A glass frame 5 is attached to the front frame 4 so as to open and close so as to cover the upper front surface. Note that a later-described game area 22 of the game board 20 is visible from the front through a glass plate (a transparent plastic board may be used, a symbol is omitted) held by the glass frame 5. The glass frame 5 is pivotally supported by the front frame 4 at the hinge portion 3 so as to be openable and closable.
Here, the front frame 4 may be referred to as a game frame (or a main body frame), and the glass frame 5 may be referred to as a front frame. However, in the present embodiment, the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 will be described. are doing.
An operation panel 6 is provided below the glass frame 5.
The pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a CR unit (also referred to as a card-type ball lending control unit or a card unit) as a game medium lending device (ball lending machine), but is not shown here. This CR unit is connected to a payout control device 200 (shown in FIG. 4) described later via a card unit connection board (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 20 is formed by implanting game nails on a front surface of a plate-shaped base material (so-called veneer), and a substantially circular area on the front surface is surrounded by a guide rail 21 so that a game area is formed. 22 are formed. The game area 22 is an area for judging out or safe (judging whether or not a prize has been won) while dropping the hit game ball from above. When the game ball enters the winning opening, it is effectively safe. Is configured such that a predetermined number of game balls are discharged to the upper plate 7 provided below the glass frame 5 (that is, discharged as prize balls).
Further, a key insertion portion 8 of a locking device (not shown) for the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 is formed at an opening / closing side (right side in FIG. 1) of the front frame 4.

The upper plate 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5 temporarily holds game balls before firing discharged as prize balls or rental balls. A push button effect button 9 operated by a player is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 7. The effect button 9 incorporates an effect button switch (effect button SW46) described later. Further, on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 9, a touch panel 9a for receiving a contact operation input from a player is provided.
In addition, the operation panel 6 is provided with a lower plate 10 to which a game ball on the upper plate 7 can be transferred by a player's operation, and a firing operation handle 11 (operation unit) for performing a shooting operation of the game ball. . Here, the firing operation handle 11 is provided with a touch switch 11a (also referred to as a touch sensor) for detecting whether or not a player's hand or the like touches (contacts) the shooting operation handle 11. If the touch switch 11a detects a state in which there is a contact with the firing operation handle 11, it can be determined that the player is playing a game (that is, firing a game ball). The touch switch 11a corresponds to a contact detection unit.
In FIG. 1, reference numerals 12a and 12b denote speakers that output sound effects and the like. Reference numeral 12a is an upper speaker provided on the upper left and right sides of the glass frame 5. Reference numeral 12b denotes a lower speaker provided at the right end of the operation panel 6 (to the right of the lower plate 10).

In the present embodiment, the touch panel 9a is provided integrally with the effect button 9. However, the touch panel 9a may be provided separately from the effect button 9, for example, by providing a sub-display device near the effect button 9, A touch panel 9a may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.
On the right side of the effect button 9, a ball lending button 16 operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge button operated to discharge a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine 17. Balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card
Etc. are provided. In the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) according to this embodiment, a player rotates the operation unit (the firing operation handle 11) so that a firing device (not shown) is supplied from the upper plate 7 to a game ball. Is fired toward the game area 22 on the front of the game board 20. Further, when the player operates the effect button 9 or the touch panel 9a, the operation of the player is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display unit 41a (see FIG. 2) of the display device 41. Can be performed.
In FIG. 1, the reference numeral 13 denotes a decorative lamp using LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the front left and right sides of the glass frame 5 as a light source, and the reference numeral 14 denotes a decorative lamp 13 on the right side. Is a logo display portion 14 (a portion for displaying the brand of the pachinko machine) formed on the side of. In addition, a moving light may be provided on the front of the pachinko machine 1. The moving light includes an LED as a light emitting source and a motor as a driving source. Here, if the decoration mechanism is divided based on the concept of the board and the frame of the pachinko machine 1, the decoration lamp 13 and the moving light constitute a frame decoration device 43 (frame-side decoration device) shown in FIG. Also constitutes a frame effect device (frame-side effect device) not shown.

B. 2, a reference numeral 21 denotes a guide rail of the game board 20. As described above, a substantially circular area on the front face of the game board is surrounded by the guide rail 21, so that a game area 22 is formed. ing.
In the game area 22, as shown in FIG. 2, the out ball inflow port 23, the center case 24, the starting port distributing device 600 (including a special figure 1 starting port 607 and a special figure 2 starting port 608 described later), Ordinary variable winning device 26 (including a starting winning port 26a) as a motorized accessory (general power), variable winning device 27, general winning ports 28 to 31, general-purpose starting gate 32, warp entrance 33, display lamp section 34, many (Not shown) and the like are provided. A collective display device 35 is provided outside the game area 22 of the game board 20. In addition, a plurality of game nails are used for the game balls that have flown into the upper portion of the game area 22 and fall down while hitting the game nails, and a plurality of nails are implanted in the game area excluding a mounting portion such as a center case.

  The center case 24 is a member (game effect structure) that surrounds a front surface of a display unit 41a (shown in FIG. 2) of a display device 41 (shown in FIG. 5) attached to the back side of the game board 20. Although not shown in the drawings, the center case 24 includes lamps using LEDs as a light source for effects or decoration, and a movable part that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41. An object (an accessory having a movable part operated by a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid) is provided. In the case of this example, as shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 130, as the movable role, a movable role 700 having a decorative portion 701 with a rose motif, an upper movable role 801, and a left movable role An object 802 and a right movable role 803 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 130, the movable accessory 700 has a substantially disc-shaped decorative portion 701 having a decoration representing a rose on its surface, and the decorative portion 701 is integrally provided on the distal end side. An arm 703 is provided, and the decoration unit 701 is movable with respect to the display unit 41a (display screen, display area) of the display device 41 (display unit). Specifically, the movable accessory 700 is provided at a lower portion in the center case 24, and the arm portion 703 can swing along the front surface of the display portion 41a by a mechanism and a drive source not shown. At least an upright state in which the arm portion 703 and the decorative portion 701 are upright as shown in FIG. 130, and an initial state in which the arm portion 703 and the decorative portion 701 are tilted substantially horizontally to the left as viewed from the front as shown in FIG. A normal state) and a state between the standing state and the initial state (for example, a state inclined at an angle of 40 degrees) can be stopped by being displaced. In the upright state, the decoration unit 701 is exposed to the front so as to partially cover the lower front surface of the display unit 41a (display screen, display area) (becomes visible to a player), while in the initial state. The decorative portion 701 (at least the main portion) is hidden in the lower left portion of the center case 24 and is not exposed to the front (not visible to the player).

  The upper movable role 801 is provided on the upper side in the center case 24, and a movable effect member imitating a rose (rose), which is the theme of the game board 20 of this example, falls or rotates to the front side of the display unit 41a. It is a movable movable object. The left movable role 802 is provided on the left side when viewed from the front inside the center case 24, and a movable production member imitating a vine of a rose (rose) is movable, for example, parallel to the front side of the display unit 41a. It is an accessory. The right movable movable object 803 is provided on the right side when viewed from the front inside the center case 24, and a movable effect member that imitates a vine of a rose is movable parallel to the front side of the display unit 41a, for example. It is an accessory. It should be noted that the movable movable members such as the upper movable movable member 801, the left movable movable member 802, and the right movable movable member 803 are not limited to such an aspect, and may have various modifications. For example, a mode in which all of the upper, left, and right movable effect members can be rotated or moved in parallel so as to interlock with each other to form a single rose on the front surface of the display unit 41a (a mode in which a single large rose is formed). Good. Further, the upper movable role 801, the left movable role 802, and the right movable role 803 may move in conjunction with the movable role 700 to express something.

  Note that lamps for effects or decorations are also provided on portions of the game board 20 other than the center case 24 (they may be outside the game area 22). Further, lamps for effect or decoration (including lamps of the display lamp unit 34 in this example) provided on the game board 20 (including the center case 24) correspond to an effect mechanism on the board side. The decoration device 42 (shown in FIG. 5) is configured. In addition, the movable roles (for example, the movable role 700, the upper movable role 801, the left movable role 802, and the right movable role 803) provided in the center case 24 correspond to a production mechanism on the side of the panel. The effect device 44 (shown in FIG. 5) is configured. It should be noted that the movable auditorium constituting the board effect device 44 may be provided at a location other than the center case 24 of the gaming board 20.

Next, the starting port distribution device 600 and the normal fluctuation winning device 26 are start winning devices including a special drawing starting winning device as described later, and in this example, as shown in FIG. Are arranged below the center of the center case 24, and the normal fluctuation winning device 26 is arranged on the upper right side of the starter sorting device 600 (below the right side of the center case 24).
The starting port distributing apparatus 600 has a front surface covered with a decorative cover 601 and, as described later, a special ball 1 starting port 607 or a special figure 2 inside the game ball flowing from the upper surface (on the back side of the decorative cover 601). It is a prize winning device that flows into the starting port 608 (shown in FIG. 131). Details of the starter port distributing device 600 will be described later. Further, the normal variable winning device 26 has one starting winning port 26a.
Here, the special figure 1 starting port 607, the special figure 2 starting port 608, and the starting winning port 26a function as a starting winning port (sometimes called a starting port or a starting area) of the special figure as described later. The mouth (winning area). Strictly speaking, there is a starting area (an area where a game ball is detected as a start winning) inside the starting winning opening, and when a game ball enters the starting winning opening, it is detected as a start winning. The inflow port of the game ball on the upper surface of the starting port distributing apparatus 600 (game ball inflow port 606 to be described later; FIG. 131) is always open, and the gaming machine flowing into the starting port distributing apparatus 600 from there starts the special figure 1. The player wins either the mouth 607 or the special figure 2 starting mouth 608. The starting winning opening 26a of the normal variable winning device 26 is in a state where a prize is possible when the opening / closing member 26b described later is opened (open state where the possibility of winning a game ball is high), and when the opening / closing member 26b is closed, a prize is won. An impossible state (a closed state in which the prize possibility of the game ball is lower than the open state, a prize possibility may be zero, or a prize possibility in the present embodiment).

  The normal variable winning device 26 is a device (so-called mini attacker) having a starting winning opening 26a that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 26b (opening / closing door), and is also referred to as a normal electric accessory (generic power). In the following, “opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 26”, “opening of ordinary power”, “opening of the winning opening 26a”, and “opening of the opening / closing member 26b” all refer to the opening of the opening / closing member 26b. Means to do. In addition, the normal variable winning device 26 may be of a type in which the starting winning opening 26a is opened and closed by an opening and closing member that opens in an inverted C shape.

  In this example, the variable winning device 27 is provided below the normal variable winning device 26 (to the right of the starting port distributing device 600), and has a large winning opening 27a that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 27b (opening door). Device (so-called attacker). The big winning port 27a is opened on condition that a big hit described later is reached, and a game ball can be won. The opening / closing member 27b is driven by the special winning opening solenoid 133 (FIG. 4). Here, FIG. 2 illustrates only one variation winning device including a special winning opening (special variation winning device), but there may be a plurality of special variation winning devices in the game area 22. . In addition, the special variable winning device may be of a type in which a large winning opening is opened and closed by an opening and closing member that opens in an inverted C shape.

The warp entrance 33 is formed on the left side of the center case 24, and allows game balls flowing down the left side of the center case 24 to flow in. The game balls flowing from the warp entrance 33 are guided to a stage 24 a provided at the bottom of the center case 24 via a warp channel (not shown) in the center case 24. The game ball guided to the stage 24a flows downward from the center case 24 through rolling on the stage 24a, and flows into, for example, the starter sorting device 600 depending on the flowing position.
The display lamp unit 34 includes, for example, a plurality of lamps using an LED as a light emitting source, and performs the fourth symbol in FIGS.

The display device 41 (production means, display means) includes, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and is generally called a variable display device. The name of the display device 41 is, for example, a special symbol display device, a special symbol display device, a symbol variation device, a variable symbol display device, an identification information variation device, or an identification information variation display device. Although there are various types, those having the same function are in the same category.
The display device 41 has a display unit 41a (display screen, display area) capable of displaying identification information (referred to as a special figure) such as numbers and characters, and is capable of displaying a plurality of rows of special figures. For example, a special figure is displayed in three columns vertically on the left, center and right sides, and a special figure consisting of numbers, characters, and the like is displayed in a stopped state (stop display) in each column, or a special figure is displayed in a stopped state (for example, in a vertical direction). (In a scrolling state) (ie, a variable display).
Further, on the display unit 41a, images for effect or information notification such as background images and character images can be displayed separately from the special map.

Further, a configuration may be employed in which an image corresponding to a so-called ordinary figure can be displayed on the display device 41. However, when the general drawing is displayed on the display device 41, it is a decorative general drawing. When the display device 41 is configured to display a general symbol, the display device 41 corresponds to a normal symbol variable display device.
Here, the special figure is identification information (special symbol) variably displayed in the variable display game related to the big hit, and the ordinary figure is variably displayed in the variable display game related to the common figure (not the big hit). This is identification information (usually a symbol).
In this example, the general drawing is not displayed on the display unit 41a of the display device 41, but is displayed on the collective display device 35. The general map displayed on the collective display device 35 is referred to as a general map as described later.

As described above, the general display is also displayed on the collective display device 35 (details will be described later) in addition to the special figure. The general figure game will be described below.
When the game ball passes through the general-purpose starting gate 32, a general-purpose variation display game (hereinafter referred to as a general-purpose variation display game) based on the general-purpose variation display is performed on the collective display device 35, and the stopped general-purpose figure is determined. In the mode (specific display mode), a privilege called per-usual drawing is provided.
If the display device 41 is configured to display a general-purpose figure, a variation display of the general-purpose figure (decorative general-purpose figure) is performed on the screen of the display device 41. However, an original general-purpose display may be arranged separately from the display device 41.

At the time of ordinary drawing, a game in which the opening and closing member 26b of the normal fluctuation winning device 26 is opened is temporarily held for a predetermined opening time, and the game ball is easily started and won, and accordingly, The number of executions of the special display variable display game increases, and the possibility of a big hit increases.
In addition, when a game ball further wins at the general-purpose starting gate 32 during the above-described general-purpose change display game, the display of the general-purpose starting memory is held by the display of the collective display device 35 described later, and for example, 4 After the end of the general-purpose variable display game, the general-purpose variable display game is repeated based on the storage. It should be noted that, if the probability of the ordinary figure is set to a high probability, it becomes easier to win the ordinary figure.
In addition, the hold | maintenance display of the general-purpose start memory displayed by the display of the collective display apparatus 35 is this general-purpose start memory. Apart from the collective display device 35, a unique general-purpose start memory display for displaying the decorative general-purpose start memory may be arranged in the game area 22.

Here, the time reduction will be described as follows.
The time saving is an abbreviation of "time reduction". After the end of the big hit, the fluctuating time of a special figure or a general figure is shortened more than usual, and the time efficiency is increased, and the probability of the general figure winning is increased to increase the probability of the general figure winning. ) By opening the starting winning port 26a (including extending the opening time of ordinary power than usual) to support the winning of the starting port, so that the number of times the predetermined special figure variable display game is performed can be maintained. It is a function to fluctuate the special map efficiently without reducing the number of balls (number of balls). That is, the time saving is, in a narrow sense, to shorten the fluctuation time of a special figure or a general figure than usual, but a special time performed in a so-called general electric power support state (electric support state) which increases the possibility of winning a general electric power. It may mean the whole control. The special control performed in the normal power support state is, as described above, a control that advantageously changes the normal pattern fluctuation pattern (normal time fluctuation time, general time stop time, etc.) to the player (for example, shortens the normal time fluctuation time) Control, etc.), control to increase the probability of opening per day, control to change the opening pattern (opening time, number of times of opening, etc.) of the ordinary power to the player (for example, control to increase the opening time, or control to increase the number of opening times) )).

Next, the collective display device 35 displays a so-called ordinary figure or a special figure, furthermore, displays a special figure or a general figure on the start of the memory (in some cases, a special figure hold display or a general figure hold display), a game, or the like. For example, a plurality of indicators (for example, an indicator comprising one small lamp, or a seven-segment display capable of displaying a number or the like as a special figure) for displaying a state. Container). For example, of the LED segments in the collective display device 35, the one that displays the special figure 1 is arranged as a special figure 1 display, and the one that displays the special figure 2 is arranged as a special figure 2 display.
The hold display of the start memory (in some cases, simply referred to as “start memory display” or “hold display”) is used to notify the number of start memories that are held in a state where the variable display game has not been executed. This is a display, and is generally displayed by turning on a lamp or the like every time the engine is started. That is, if there are three start memories, the operation is performed by turning on three lamps or displaying three figures. However, not only the start memory in which the variable display game is not performed but also the start memory in which the variable display game is being executed may be displayed. For example, in the display unit 41a (display area) of the fluctuation display device 41 that performs fluctuation display of a special figure, as one type of effect, a start memory during execution of the fluctuation display game may be displayed as fluctuation suspension, This display is also a start storage display (hold display) in a broad sense.

Also, what is displayed on the display of the collective display device 35 is the present special map and the general map (formal special map and general map), whereas the display unit 41a of the variable display device 41 and the like are described. The display of the special map and the general map (in the case where the configuration for displaying the general map on the variable display device 41) is performed is a dummy display for effect for the player. For this reason, the special map and the ordinary map, when viewed from the player, refer to the dummy display. In the following, when emphasizing the dummy display, for example, "decorative special map" and "decorative general map" are described.
As described above, the collective display device 35 is not intended for a player, but is used for inspection of the game board 20 or the like. The display of the starting memory of the special figure for the player (special figure hold display) is, for example, the display unit 41a of the variable display device 41 or a plurality of lamps provided on the game board 20 (in the case of this example, for example, the display lamp described above) Of the part 34).

Next, the configuration and operation of the starting port distribution device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 131 (a), 132 (a), and 132 (b) are front views of the start-up port distributing device 600 with the decorative cover 601 removed. FIG. 131 (b) is a top view of a distribution member 603 and the like described below as viewed from above.
The starting port distributing apparatus 600 includes a base member 602, a distributing member 603, a base member side magnet 604, and a distributing member side magnet shown in FIG. 131 (a) in addition to the above-described decorative cover 601 (shown in FIG. 2). 605.
The base member 602 is a box-shaped member as a whole. A game ball inflow port 606 into which a game ball (pachinko ball) can flow in from above is formed on the upper surface, and the base member 602 is located on the left and right sides on the lower inside (as viewed from the front). A special figure 1 starting port 607 and a special figure 2 starting port 608 are provided side by side at the lower left and lower right positions of the minute member 603.

  The distributing member 603 is arranged at a position substantially directly below the game ball inlet 606 in the base member 602, and has a rotational axis 603a in the front-rear direction perpendicular to the game board surface (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 131A). It is attached to the base member 602 so as to be rotatable about a central axis by a predetermined angle. Here, the predetermined angle is an angle range from a leftward state to a rightward state described later. On the front side of the distribution member 603 and on the outer peripheral side of the rotating shaft 603a, as shown in FIG. 131 (a), a distribution plate portion 610, a left guide wall portion 611, and a right guide wall portion 612 are provided. Is provided. The distribution plate-shaped portion 610 has its left and right surfaces parallel to the front-rear direction perpendicular to the game board surface, and extends radially from near the outer periphery of the rotating shaft 603a as shown in FIG. In addition, a distribution member-side magnet 605 is fixed at a position on the back side of the distal end of the distribution plate-shaped portion 610. The game balls flowing down from the game ball inlet 606 flow down to any one of the left and right sides of the distribution plate 610. The left guide wall portion 611 and the right guide wall portion 612 have upper surfaces parallel to the front-rear direction perpendicular to the game board surface, and game balls flowing down from the game ball inflow port 606 are subjected to the left guide wall portion 611 or the right side. The guide wall 612 is configured to abut on one of the upper surfaces. In the neutral state in which the distribution plate-shaped portion 610 faces straight upward when viewed from the front, the left guide wall portion 611 is located below and to the left of the distribution plate-shaped portion 610 (left side of the rotation shaft 603a). The upper surface of the guide wall portion 611 extends obliquely downward and leftward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rotation shaft 603a, while the right guide wall portion 612 is located at the lower right of the distribution plate portion 610 (to the right of the rotation shaft 603a). The upper surface of the right guide wall portion 612 is configured to extend obliquely downward to the right from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rotating shaft 603a.

The base member-side magnet 604 and the distribution member-side magnet 605 are permanent magnets. As shown in FIG. In the neutral state, the distribution member-side magnet 605 comes to a position (neutral position) substantially in front of the base member-side magnet 604 in the neutral state. In addition, the distribution member side magnet 605 is fixed at a position on the back side of the distribution member 603 that is separated from the central axis of the rotating shaft 603a by a predetermined distance (a position on the back side of the distal end portion of the distribution plate portion 610). In FIG. 131 (b), only the base member-side magnet 604 and the distribution member-side magnet 605 and their surroundings (including the special figure 1 starting port 607 and the special figure 2 starting port 608) are shown to avoid complication. Others are not shown.
As shown in FIGS. 132A and 132B, the distribution member side magnet 605 faces substantially directly in front of the base member side magnet 604 as the distribution member 603 rotates with respect to the base member 602. It is configured to be able to move so as to swing left and right by a predetermined angle around a position (neutral position) where the robot moves. Here, the base member-side magnet 604 and the distribution member-side magnet 605 are fixed in such a posture that the sides facing each other have the same polarity, and are configured to repel each other by magnetic force. Further, the game balls flowing down from the game ball inlet 606 to the inside of the starting port sorting device 600 (that is, the inside of the base member 602) are positioned at the position indicated by the reference symbol P in FIG. 131 (b) (the front surface of the sorting member 603). Side and a position immediately below the game ball inlet 606).

  In the starter port distributing apparatus 600 having the above-described configuration, by setting detailed dimensions, positional relationships, and the like of the respective components, the following configuration can be used for distributing the following game balls P without a driving source such as a motor. A minute operation is realized. That is, in the natural state where the game ball P does not flow, the distribution member 603 is in a natural state where the distribution member-side magnet 605 is on the right side of the base member-side magnet 604 when viewed from the front due to the repulsion by the magnetic force (see FIG. 131 (a)) or a leftward state in which the distribution member-side magnet 605 is on the left side of the base member-side magnet 604 when viewed from the front (a state opposite to the left and right in FIG. 131 (a)). And stopped. In other words, in a natural state in which the game balls P do not flow, the distribution member 603 is maintained in the above-described neutral position (the rightward state or the leftward state) due to the repulsion by the magnetic force. However, when the game ball P flows in from the game ball inlet 606 and falls, the game ball P falls to either the left side or the right side as viewed from the front of the distribution plate-shaped portion 610, and the left guide wall portion 611 or the right side By abutting on and depressing one of the upper surfaces of the guide wall portions 612, rotation of the distribution member 603 in one direction (that is, rotational movement of the distribution member-side magnet 605) occurs. As shown in FIG. 132 (a) or (b), the dropped game ball P is distributed to one of the special figure 1 starting port 607 and the special figure 2 starting port 608 and flows in (wins). By such an operation when the game ball P enters one of the starting ports, the distribution member 603 switches from the rightward state to the leftward state, or conversely, from the leftward state to the rightward state, and the game ball P Each time is entered through the game ball inlet 606 and falls, a similar operation in a different direction is performed alternately. That is, by such an operation of the starting port distribution device 600, the game balls flowing into the game ball inlet 606 alternately flow into the special figure 1 starting port 607 or the special figure 2 starting port 608. In other words, if the game ball flowing into the game ball inlet 606 wins the special figure 1 starting port 607, the game ball flowing next into the game ball inlet 606 wins the special figure 2 starting port 608, Assuming that the game ball flowing into the ball inlet 606 wins the special figure 2 starting port 608, the game ball flowing into the game ball inlet 606 next wins the special figure 1 starting port 607.

C. Next, FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the back side of the game board 20 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment.
The main components of the back mechanism in the pachinko machine 1 include a storage tank (not shown), a guide path (not shown), a dispensing unit (not shown), a card unit connection board (not shown), and an external information terminal plate 55 (see FIG. 4), a payout control device 200 (shown in FIG. 4), a game control device 100, an effect control device 300, and a power supply device 500 (shown in FIG. 4). Of these, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 are provided on the back surface of the game board 20, as shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 3, the box of the effect control device 300 is not directly visible, and a box for storing the board of the effect control device 300 is disposed behind a cover member (not shown). The cover member has a function of preventing game balls from entering the back surface of the gaming machine, and has a structure that can be opened and closed like a door, for example. However, as shown in FIG. 3, the volume switch (volume SW) 388 and the setting confirmation LED 339 of the effect control device 300 are exposed on the back side of the game board 20, and are, for example, used by a worker of a game machine manufacturing factory or a game shop. The store clerk can operate the volume SW 338 while viewing the setting confirmation LED 339. The volume switch 388 is used to set the volume or volume range of the sound output from the speakers 12a and 12b, and the setting confirmation LED 339 is turned on when the volume SW 338 reaches a predetermined operation position. That is, if the setting value changed by the volume switch 338 does not match the default setting value registered in the backup RAM (for example, FeRAM 327 described later) by the control (not shown) of the effect control device 300, the setting confirmation LED 339 is used. Is turned off, and when the set value changed by the volume SW 338 matches the default set value, the setting confirmation LED 339 is turned on. As described above, the setting confirmation LED 339 is turned on in the default setting, so that the operator can set the volume SW 338 to the default value even if the operator does not see the small number on the scale of the volume SW 338 (or even if this number is not visible). It is very easy to switch to the setting.

The storage tank stores the balls before they are dispensed in advance, and the shortage of the number of balls in the storage tank is detected by a replenishment sensor (not shown). The ball is replenished. The ball in the storage tank is guided by the guide path, and is discharged to the upper plate 7 by the payout unit. The payout unit can discharge a number of game balls corresponding to the rotation amount of a built-in payout motor. ).
The external information terminal board 55 has a function as a relay terminal board (external terminal board) when transmitting various information of the pachinko machine 1 to the hall management device.

The payout control device 200 performs control (including control of the payout unit) necessary for paying out game balls (both prize ball payout and loaned ball payout), and a circuit that realizes this control function in a predetermined case. The board is accommodated and configured. The payout control device 200 is connected to the game control device 100 as shown in FIG. 4, and discharges a predetermined number of game balls to the upper plate 7 as prize balls based on a payout control command transmitted from the game control device 100. Controls prize ball payout. Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout of a ball for letting a predetermined number of game balls be discharged to the upper plate 7 as a ball to be loaned, based on a BRDY signal or a BRQ signal from the card unit.
The game control device 100 controls a solenoid and the like disposed on the game board 20 and sends control information (command) to another control device to manage and control the progress of the game as a whole ( (Details will be described later), and a substrate on which a circuit including a microcomputer for performing these controls is formed is housed in a predetermined case.

The effect control device 300 controls the display device 41, the decorative lamp, the effect devices, and the speakers 12a and 12b based on a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The control function is provided in a predetermined case. The circuit board to be realized is housed and configured.
The card unit connection board is a board for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1 side and the CR unit (card unit) side that lends the ball. If the above-mentioned wiring connection is not made on the card unit connection board, the pachinko machine 1 is controlled so that the game balls cannot be fired.
In general, when changing the model of a pachinko machine, the entire pachinko machine excluding the card unit is replaced, or the game board side (including the game board and the game board) while leaving the frame side of the pachinko machine (including the payout control device). In some cases, only the main controller (including the controller) is replaced.

D. Configuration of Control System Next, a control system of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the drawings and the following description, “SW” means a switch. Also, in the drawings, if the names of the members are long, it is difficult to show them, so they may be appropriately shortened (not shown).
The pachinko machine 1 includes a game control device 100, a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, a launch control device (not shown), and a power supply device 500 as main components of a control system.

(Game control device)
First, the configuration of the game control device 100 of the pachinko machine 1 and devices connected to the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in a comprehensive manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 101 and an inspection device connection terminal (not shown). I have. The game control device 100 corresponds to a control device or control means. The detailed configuration of the game control device 100 will be described later.
The inspection device connection terminal is configured to include, for example, a photocoupler 179 (shown in FIG. 4), and is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various game information obtained from the game microcomputer 101 to the inspection device 185 is connected. .

The game control device 100 includes a first starting port switch 120 (a starting port 1 switch in FIG. 4), a second starting port switch 121 (a starting port 2 switch in FIG. 4), a gate switch 122, a winning opening switch 123, and a large winning prize. Detection signals from the mouth switch 124, the magnetic sensor 126, the panel radio wave sensor 127, the glass frame opening detection switch 211, and the front frame opening detection switch 212 (the body frame opening detection switch in FIG. 4) are input.
Here, the first starting port switch 120 is a sensor for detecting a winning ball that detects one game ball winning the special figure 1 starting port 607, and the second starting port switch 121 is connected to the starting winning port 26a or It is a sensor for detecting a winning ball that detects one game ball winning the special figure 2 starting port 608 one by one. In the case of this example, the second starting port switch 121 (starting port 2 switch) has been described as being common to the starting winning port 26a and the special figure 2 starting port 608, but the starting winning port 26a and the special figure 2 A mode in which two ports are provided separately from the starting port 608 and may be provided separately.
The special winning opening switch 124 is a similar sensor (a so-called count switch) that detects a game ball that has won the special winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27. When there are a plurality of special winning ports, the number of the special winning port switches 124 is about one or two, and x is provided as a whole.
Further, the winning port switch 123 is a similar sensor provided for the general winning ports 28 to 31. When there are n general winning ports, one switch is provided for each of them, and n switches are provided as a whole. Instead of providing one sensor for each general winning opening, one sensor may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings as a whole. The gate switch 122 is a sensor that detects one game ball at a time passing through the general-purpose starting gate 32.
Each of the sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, and 124 for detecting these game balls is a proximity switch in this example, and outputs a negative logic detection signal such as a high level of 11 V and a low level of 7 V. It is configured.

In addition, the magnetic sensor 126 and the board radio wave sensor 127 are sensors provided on the back surface of the game board 20 or the like, and detect fraud by magnetism or radio waves. For example, the magnetic sensors 126 are arranged at the general winning openings 28, 30, 31 in the gaming board 20 and the large winning openings 27a of the variable winning device 27 (ie, arranged at four locations), and the general winning openings 28, 30, 31,. It is a sensor for detecting irregularities such as stacking game balls around a large winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27 using a magnet and facilitating winning in each winning opening. Note that the magnetic sensors 126 are not necessarily arranged at four places as described above, but may be arranged at more places.
When the number of the magnetic sensors 126 is k, the number of the magnetic sensors 126 is one each, and k magnetic sensors 126 are provided as a whole. Similarly, when there are m installation points, the board radio sensors 127 are also provided one by one, and m in total.
Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 211 is a sensor for detecting that the glass frame 5 on the front of the pachinko machine is open. The front frame (main frame) opening detection switch 212 is a sensor that detects that the front frame 4 to which the glass frame 5 is attached is open.
The game control device 100 includes a proximity I / F 163 for processing signals from the sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, and 127, which will be described in detail later.

Here, a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 500 is applied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids 132 and 133 described later, which are driven by the game control device 100. Supplied and made operational.
The power supply device 500 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V DC from a 24 V AC power supply, and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower-level DC voltage such as 12 V DC or 5 V DC from the 32 V DC voltage. Unit 501, a backup power supply unit 502 for supplying a power supply voltage to a RAM (RAM 101C described later) in the game microcomputer 101 at the time of a power failure, and a game control device 100 having a power failure monitoring circuit for generating and recovering a power failure. A control signal generation unit 503 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal to be notified is provided.

The RAM clear switch (RAM initialization switch) 504 for initializing the RAM and the like inside the game microcomputer 101 is provided in the game control device 100 in this example. Switch 504 may be provided in the power supply device 500.
In the first embodiment, the power supply device 500 is configured separately from the game control device 100. However, the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, May be provided on the main substrate. Since the game board 20 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are provided on the power supply device 500 or a board different from the main board. Accordingly, the cost can be reduced by excluding from the exchange target when changing the model.

  The backup power supply unit 502 can be constituted by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 101 (especially the built-in RAM 101C) of the game control device 100, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 503 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 501, and when the voltage drops to, for example, 17 V or less, detects the occurrence of a power failure and changes the power failure monitoring signal (for example, turns on). At the same time, it outputs a reset signal after a predetermined time. Also, at the time of turning on the power or recovering from the power failure, the reset signal is output after a lapse of a predetermined time from that point.

An initialization switch signal is output from the RAM clear switch 504. The initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the RAM clear switch 504 is turned on. Information stored in a RAM area such as the work RAM 101C and similar RAM areas in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized.
In the case of this example, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeated in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 101 or the payout microcomputer (the microcomputer of the payout control device 200). Is read. The reset signal is a kind of the forced read signal, and resets the entire control system.

Next, the game control device 100 is connected to the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, the general-purpose solenoid 132, the special winning opening solenoid 133, and the collective display device 35.
In addition, the game control device 100 can be connected to a test shooting test device (not shown) (connected at the time of a test in a test organization) via a relay board 170. The test firing test device is used by a certified organization to perform a test firing test of a game machine.
Further, external information of the game control device 100 is output from the game control device 100 to the management device as an external device via the external information terminal plate 55.
The external information terminal board 55 is connected to the game control device 100 by a cable, and relays when transmitting external information to a management device (not shown, for example, a device called a hall computer) as an external device.
The management device collects information (for example, external information) from a large number of pachinko machines installed in the amusement arcade, and performs processing such as calculation processing of information necessary for sales and total display.

Here, as the external information, for example, a signal for notifying a signal input to the game control device 100 to the outside, a jackpot signal for notifying a jackpot generated in the course of the game progress, and a condition for rotating a symbol (special figure) A starting port signal notifying a winning to the starting port, a symbol starting rotation, or a symbol confirmation frequency signal notifying the symbol rotation triggered by the stop of the symbol rotation, and a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. These are signals to be notified to the outside, such as a privilege status signal indicating a so-called probable change state, a time reduction state, and the like, and these are collectively referred to as a gaming machine status signal.
Further, data (for example, a payout command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 by serial communication. On the other hand, the payout control device 200 outputs a payout abnormal status signal, a shot ball out switch signal, an overflow switch signal, a frame radio signal, a payout busy signal, and a touch switch signal to the game control device 100. The contents of each signal will be described later.

Next, a solenoid connected to the game control device 100 will be described.
The general-purpose solenoid 132 is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening and closing member 26b of the normal variable winning device 26, the large winning opening solenoid 133 is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening and closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27, and the collective display device 35 is a so-called general The display of the figure and the special figure, the hold display of the starting memory of the special figure and the ordinary figure, and the display of the game state are performed.
In addition, data (command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication.

(Production control device)
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 and the devices connected to the effect control device 300 will be described.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer 311, a VDP 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41, a sound source LSI 313 for controlling output of various melodies, sound effects, and the like. However, the detailed configuration will be described later with reference to FIG. Effect control device 300 corresponds to a control device and a control unit.
The effect control device 300 analyzes a control command (comprising MODE and ACTION data described later) from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100, determines the effect content, and controls the output video content of the display device 41. Or instructs the sound source LSI 313 to reproduce sound, drives the speakers 12a and 12b to produce sound effects, and controls the drive of the above-described board decoration device 42, frame decoration device 43, and board production device 44. Execute the process. Further, when receiving an instruction for error notification from game control device 100, effect control device 300 outputs a signal to an error notification LED (not shown) to turn it on.
Here, in addition to a single command (for example, a stop command), the command transmitted from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 does not start the effect alone, and exhibits an effect in a group. This is, for example, a “fluctuating pattern command + symbol designating command” at the start of the special figure fluctuation.

Another major command will be described below. There is a probability information command. This flag is prepared corresponding to the special figure game mode flag (see steps S25, S30, S694, S779, A248, etc., which will be described later), and is a flag reflecting the probability state at that time.
In addition, even if the effect control device 300 receives the probability information command transmitted from the game control device 100, for example, the command alone does not immediately change the screen of the display device 41. Just change the parameters. After that, when a command that changes the screen (such as a fluctuating command or a customer waiting demo command) is received, it is reflected as a probability state at that time.
In addition, since a low probability is determined during a big hit, an internal parameter may be forcibly rewritten to a low probability when a big hit command is received without receiving a probability information command.
Information known by the probability information command includes, for example, the following.
・ "Low probability, with reduced working hours (meaning so-called 100-hour reduced working hours)"
・ "High probability, shortened working hours (so-called probable change)"
Here, the “probability information” of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) includes not only “probability change” but also information “time saving time”. The state of the gaming machine is roughly divided into four types: "low probability / no time saving", "low probability / time saving", "high probability / time saving", and "high probability / no time saving". In the present embodiment, three of the above (for example, those excluding "low probability / no time saving") are used, and the probability information command further includes effect mode information (described later). The probability information command is transmitted from the game control device 100 at a timing when each state changes.
The command communication may be a serial communication method or a parallel communication method. In this embodiment, a serial communication system is adopted as command communication.

(Payout control device)
Next, the configuration of the payout control device 200 and devices connected to the payout control device 200 will be described.
Although not shown, the payout control device 200 includes a payout microcomputer (referred to as a payout microcomputer) for controlling payout of game balls (winning ball payout or ball loan payout), an error number display, an error release switch, An inspection device connection terminal is provided. The payout control device 200 corresponds to a control device.
Here, the inspection device connection terminal is a terminal configured to include, for example, a photocoupler, and to which a cable for transmitting various kinds of information related to payout obtained from the payout microcomputer to the inspection device is connected. When there is an error in the payout control process, the error number display turns on a specific number according to the content of the error. The error release switch is for outputting a signal for releasing the error when operated, for example, when the processing is stopped due to an error in the payout control processing.

Although not shown, the devices connected to the input side of the payout control device 200 include an overflow switch, a frame radio wave sensor, a payout ball detection switch, and a shot ball out switch.
Here, the overflow switch is a switch for detecting that the game balls on the lower plate 10 are excessive, the frame radio wave sensor is a sensor provided on the front frame 4 or the glass frame 5 for detecting abnormal radio waves such as fraud, and a payout. The ball detection switch is a switch for detecting game balls (prize balls or lending balls) to be paid out toward the upper plate 7 one by one by the payout unit. Is a switch that detects that there is no game ball.
Note that the frame radio wave sensor is a sensor that detects a fraud such as acquiring a specified number or more of game balls by preventing the sensors from reacting by radio waves when the paid game balls pass through the paid-out ball detection switch. The frame radio wave sensor may detect other unauthorized radio waves.

The devices connected to the output side of the dispensing control device 200 are not shown, but the dispensing motor of the dispensing unit, the card unit connection board, the firing control device, and the external information terminal plate 55 (shown in FIG. 4) ).
The payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a signal (payout control command) from the game control device 100 to perform control for paying out prize balls. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor based on a BRQ signal (loan request signal) from a card unit (CR unit) connected to the card unit connection board, and pays out a lent ball. Perform control.

An operation panel substrate (not shown) is connected to the card unit connection substrate. The operation panel substrate includes a ball lending LED, a balance indicator, a ball lending switch, a return switch (return switch) provided in the pachinko machine 1. Are connected. The operation panel board receives signals such as a ball lending LED and a balance display from the card unit (CR unit) and sends operation signals from the ball lending switch and the return switch to the card unit (CR unit) to pay out the ball lending. Necessary control is performed. Here, the ball lending switch is a switch that is activated by operating the ball lending button 16 (FIG. 1). The return switch is a switch that is activated by operating the above-described ejection button 17 (FIG. 1).
Although not shown, backup power is also supplied from the power supply device 500 to the RAM area of the payout control device 200 in the event of a power failure.

The payout control device 200 outputs a prize ball signal (ball number information paid out as a prize ball) created based on the payout command received from the game control device 100 to the management device as an external device via the external information terminal board 55. I do.
The external information terminal plate 55 is also connected to the payout control device 200 by a cable, and relays when transmitting the prize ball signal to a management device as an external device.

  The firing control device (not shown) receives necessary power from the payout control device 200, and also receives a firing permission signal and a power failure detection signal. The launch control device controls the launch motor of the launch device that launches the game ball in accordance with the operation of the launch operation handle 11, and the launch control device includes a touch switch 11a and a launch stop switch (not shown) provided on the launch operation handle 11. Is input. The firing stop switch temporarily stops the firing of the game ball, and is operated by the player. The touch switch 11a detects whether or not the player's hand or the like is touching the firing operation handle 11, and corresponds to contact detection means. In the present embodiment, the detection information of the touch switch 11a (contact detection means) is transmitted from the payout control device 200 to the game control device 100 as a touch switch signal (shown in FIG. 4), and further the effect control is performed by the game control device 100. It is configured to be transmitted as command data to the device 300 (see gaming machine state check processing described later). Thus, the effect control device 300 can always monitor whether or not the player touches the firing operation handle 11 (operation unit).

Next, a detailed configuration of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
The game control device 100 is a main control device that comprehensively controls a game, and corresponds to a main board (that is, a circuit formed on the main board), and specifically includes a circuit shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the game control device 100 includes a CPU 150 having a game microcomputer (that is, a game microcomputer) 101, an input 151 having an input port, an output 152 having an output port, and the like. It comprises a data bus 153 for connecting the CPU unit 150, the input unit 151, and the output unit 152.

The CPU section 150 includes the game microcomputer 101 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and operates to generate an operation clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock which is a reference of a random number generation circuit. And a circuit 113. A signal (start winning detection signal) from a proximity I / F 163, which will be described later, is input to the gaming microcomputer 101, and the CPU unit 150 is further provided with an inversion circuit such as an inverter that logically inverts this signal. Is also good.
The gaming microcomputer 101 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 101A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 101B, and a RAM (random access memory) 101C that can be read and written at any time. The ROM 101B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, and the like) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 101C stores a work area of the CPU 101A and a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control. Used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 101B or the RAM 101C.

The CPU 101A executes a game control program in the ROM 101B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates a general-purpose solenoid 132, a special winning opening solenoid 133, and a collective display device 35. The control of the entire pachinko machine 1 is performed by generating a drive signal for the pachinko machine 1.
Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 101 includes a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in a special figure change display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, a hit random number for determining a hit in a normal figure change display game, and the like. And a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 101A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and an update timing of the random number generation circuit. And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives

  Here, electronic components such as the game control device 100 and the general-purpose solenoid 132 and the special winning opening solenoid 133 driven by the game control device 100 have predetermined levels such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 500. Are supplied and made operable.

Next, the input unit 151 of the game control device 100 is provided with a first input port 160, a second input port 161, and a third input port 162 as input ports. The input section 151 includes a first starting port switch 120, a second starting port switch 121, a gate switch 122, a winning port switch 123, a large winning port switch 124, a magnetic sensor 126, a panel radio wave sensor 127, and a glass frame open detecting switch. A detection signal is input from an opening detection switch 211 and a front frame (main body frame) opening detection switch 212.
The input unit 151 is provided with an interface chip (proximity I / F) 163 that converts a detection signal input from each of the switches 120 to 124 and 127 into a positive logic signal of 0 V to 5 V. The proximity I / F 163 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so that the lead wires of the proximity switches (each of the switches 120 to 124 and 127) are illegally short-circuited, the switches are disconnected from the connector, and the leads are disconnected. It is configured to detect an abnormal state in which a line is cut off and becomes floating, and output an abnormality detection signal when such an abnormal state is detected. In addition, in order to enable the signal level conversion function as described above, a voltage of 12 V is supplied from the power supply device 500 to the proximity I / F 163 in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal operation of the IC. ing.

Here, a part of the output (except for the abnormality detection signal) of the proximity I / F 163 (the output from each of the switches 120 to 124) is supplied to the third input port 162, and the game microcomputer is connected via the data bus 153. In addition to being read by 101, the game is supplied from the game control device 100 as a main board to a trial test apparatus (not shown) via a relay board 170.
The detection signal of the board radio sensor 127 among the outputs of the proximity I / F 163 is supplied to the second input port 161 and is read by the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153.

The detection signals of the first starting port switch 120 and the second starting port switch 121 among the outputs of the proximity I / F 163 are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 101 in addition to the third input port 162 without the inverting circuit. ing. It is necessary to provide an inverting circuit here, assuming that the signal input terminal of the game microcomputer 101 receives a signal from a microswitch or the like, and sets a negative logic, that is, a low level (0 V) to an effective level. This is the case where it is designed to detect as. In this example, since the signal input terminal of the game microcomputer 101 can detect positive logic as an effective level, an inversion circuit is not required.
Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 163, the above-described abnormality detection signal output when the proximity I / F 163 detects an abnormality of each of the switches 120 to 124 and the sensor 127 is supplied to the second input port 161, The game microcomputer 101 reads the information via the bus 153.

Next, to the second input port 161, a signal from the glass frame opening detection switch 211, a front frame (body frame) opening detection switch 212, a signal from the magnetic sensor 126, and a signal from the panel radio wave sensor 127 are input. Is input via the proximity I / F 163, and the abnormality detection signal is input from the proximity I / F 163.
It should be noted that the magnetic sensor 126 will be described. In FIG. 4, the number of the magnetic sensor 126 is shown as one. However, this is only one input to the game control device 100, (In this example, four sensors) are mounted, and are wired-OR connected on a relay board (between the sensor and the main board; not shown).
Here, the data held by the second input port 161 asserts a corresponding enable signal (not shown) by the gaming microcomputer 101 decoding an address assigned to the second input port 161 (effective level). ), It is possible to read (the same applies to other ports).

  On the other hand, a signal from the payout control device 200 and a signal (initialization switch signal) from the RAM initialization switch 504 are input to the first input port 160. These signals are supplied from the first input port 160 to the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153. The signals from the payout control device 200 include a frame radio signal, a payout busy signal, a payout abnormality status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shot ball out switch signal indicating an insufficient shortage of game balls before payout, an overflow switch signal indicating an overflow, There is the touch switch signal described above. Here, the overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 10 (that is, when the game balls are full). The frame radio wave unauthorized signal is a signal output based on detection of a radio wave by a frame radio sensor (not shown) provided on the front frame 4 or the like. As described above, the touch switch signal is a signal output by the above-described touch switch 11a when the player's hand or the like contacts the firing operation handle 11.

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is ready to accept a command. The payout busy signal is a signal that is basically turned on when a payout operation of a game ball (prize ball or lending ball) is executed unless an error related to the payout operation of the game ball occurs. For this reason, no error has occurred (that is, the abnormal payout status signal, the shot ball out switch signal, the overflow switch signal, and the like have not been turned on), and the game control device 100 issues a prize ball payout command to the payout control device. If the payout busy signal is raised (turned on) in a state where it is not transmitted to 200 and award ball payout is instructed, the game control device 100 determines that the payout operation of the lending ball has been executed. Can be.

  The input unit 151 is provided with a Schmitt trigger circuit (Schmitt buffer) 164 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 500 or a reset signal to the game microcomputer 101 or the like. 164 has a function of removing noise from these input signals. The power failure monitoring signal among the signals from the power supply device 500 is once input to the first input port 160 and is taken into the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit on the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 101 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt trigger circuit 164 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 101, and at the same time, the ports of the output unit 152 (ports 175, 176, 177, 180). In addition, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 170 without passing through the output unit 152, thereby turning off the trial test signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 170 for output to the trial test apparatus. It is configured as follows.
Further, the configuration may be such that the reset signal RESET can be output to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 170. Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to each of the input ports 160 to 162 of the input unit 151. The data set to each port of the output unit 152 by the gaming microcomputer 101 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 151 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 101 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 101.

Next, the output unit 152 of the game control device 100 includes a first port 175, a second port 176, a third port 177, and a fourth port 180 as output ports connected to the data bus 153. Note that data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300 via serial communication via a Schmitt buffer (Schmitt trigger buffer) 173.
The Schmitt buffer 173 is used to prevent a signal from being input from the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100, that is, in order to secure one-way communication, a data signal from the game control device 100 is provided. Is a unidirectional buffer that allows only output to the payout control device 200 and the production control device 300.

The first port 175 is an output port for outputting each opening / closing data of the large winning opening solenoid 133 for opening and closing the opening and closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27 and the general electric solenoid 132 for opening and closing the opening and closing member 26b of the normal variable winning device 26. It is.
The second port 176 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 35.
The third port 177 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 35 is connected.
The fourth port 180 is an output port for outputting external information regarding the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 55 as an external information signal. The information output from the external information terminal board 55 is supplied to, for example, an information collection terminal or a management device installed in a game arcade. Further, a photo relay 55a is mounted on the external information terminal board 55, and external information is transmitted to a management device (not shown) as an external device via the photo relay 55a. It should be noted that the photocoupler has a polarity, so it is necessary to pay attention to the connection. However, if the photorelay 55a is used as described above, there is an advantage that the polarity is unnecessary and the device is convenient.

  The output unit 152 is connected to the data bus 153 and outputs data indicating the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test shooting test device of the accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating a jackpot probability state, and the like via the relay board 170. The buffer 174 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 174 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device 100 (main board) of the pachinko machine 1 as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in a game store. The detection signals of the switches 120 to 124 that do not need to be processed, such as the starting port SW, output from the proximity I / F 163 are passed through the buffer 174 by the pattern branch on the proximity I / F 163 output side shown in FIG. Instead, it is supplied to the test firing test device via the relay board 170.

  On the other hand, a detection signal which cannot be directly supplied to the test shooting test device, such as the magnetic sensor 126 or the panel radio wave sensor 127, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 101 and processed into other signals or information. The data signal is supplied from the data bus 153 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 174 and the relay board 170 as an error signal indicating that it is not possible. The relay board 170 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 174 and supplies the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from the game microcomputer 101 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 170 so that the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the trial test apparatus. Has become.

  The output unit 152 includes a plurality of drive circuits (first driver 178a to fourth driver 178d). The first driver 178a receives each opening / closing data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 133 and the general-purpose solenoid 132 output from the first port 175, and generates and outputs each solenoid driving signal. The second driver 178b outputs an on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 35 output from the second port 176. The third driver 178c outputs an on / off driving signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 35, which is output from the third port 177. The fourth driver 178d outputs an external information signal supplied from the fourth port 180 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 55.

The first driver 178a is supplied with 32V DC from the power supply device 500 as a power supply voltage in order to drive the special winning opening solenoid 133 and the ordinary power solenoid 132 operating at 32V.
In addition, 12 V DC is supplied to the second driver 178b that drives the segment line. Since the third driver 178c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V. In the batch display device 35, a current is supplied to the anode terminal of a predetermined LED through the segment line by the second driver 178b that outputs 12V, and the cathode terminal of the predetermined LED is output by the third driver 178c that outputs the ground potential. When the current is extracted from the LED through the segment line, the power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected by the dynamic driving method, and a predetermined LED is turned on. In addition, the fourth driver 178d is supplied with DC12V in order to give a level of 12V to the external information signal.

  Further, the output unit 152 is provided with a photocoupler 179 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 185. The photocoupler 179 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 101 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 185 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 like a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 160 to 162 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 and the devices connected to the effect control device 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC), like the gaming microcomputer 101, and image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the CPU 311. (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the sound processing, a sound source LSI 313 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 12a and 12b, and a signal conversion circuit 315. .
Here, in addition to the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311, a video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) that exclusively performs video control under the control of the CPU 311 is provided, and two CPUs are provided. The VDP receives commands from the second CPU. A configuration may be adopted in which image processing for video display on the display device 41 is performed in accordance with data and data. However, in the present embodiment, only the CPU 311 with high performance is provided, which is advantageous in terms of layout space and cost. ing.

The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 has a PROM (programmable read only memory) 321 storing programs to be executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 326 for providing a work area, and a memory content even if power is not supplied during a power failure. A holdable FeRAM 327, a real time clock (RTC) 325, and a watchdog timer (WDT) circuit 328 are connected, and a VDP 312 is connected.
The RTC 325 is a clock element that ticks the time, and can be adjusted to the actual time by setting. The clock signal is sent to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 uses a signal from the RTC 325, Production control relating to time, such as event notification and special production at a game arcade, is possible.

On the other hand, the VDP 312 is connected to a VRAM 329 in addition to an image ROM 322 in which character images and video data are stored, and the sound source LSI 313 is connected to a voice ROM 323 in which voice data is stored. The image ROM 322 stores a plurality of moving images (movies) as video data.
Here, the character data is stored in the image ROM 322, but the motion data representing the information on the movement of the character and the scenario data defining the connection of the motion data are stored in the PROM 321.
The image ROM 322 corresponds to a character data storage unit, and the PROM (control ROM) 321 corresponds to a motion table storage unit and a scenario table storage unit.

The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes an effect command (a data signal output from the buffer 173) which is a control command from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100, determines the effect contents, and outputs the output contents of the display device 41. Processing such as instructing the contents of the video, instructing the sound source LSI 313 to reproduce sound, and controlling the drive of the board decoration device 42, the frame decoration device 43, and the board presentation device 44 described above are executed.
Here, in the present embodiment, the display device 41, the board decoration device 42, the frame decoration device 43, the board production device 44, the speakers 12a and 12b, and the like constitute a production means.

For example, when executing the fluctuation display game, a command (for example, a fluctuation pattern command to be described later) including data of a combination of stop symbols (result mode) and data of a reach system (or fluctuation time) from the game control device 100. Is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the main control microcomputer 311 having received the instruction selects the stop mode and the change mode that satisfies the change time, and the display apparatus 41 via the VDP 312. The control of a special-figure variation display game in which a predetermined special figure is fluctuated and displayed, and finally a specific combination of symbols (result mode) is derived and displayed.
In addition, the mode such as the variable display of the special figure actually executed under the control of the effect control device 300 may be uniquely determined by a command from the game control device 100, but the condition given by the above command is Within the range, the configuration is such that the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 finally selects a mode by random number extraction or the like (a mode in which the mode is also selected for the effect control device 300, with a certain degree of discretion). I have.

Here, as a RAM that provides a work area for the main control microcomputer 311, there is also a RAM 311 a inside the chip.
The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 313 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 313 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the above-mentioned upper speaker 12a and lower speaker 12b. 12a and the lower speaker 12b.
The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 313 may be configured to transmit and receive commands and data by a handshake method. In that case, the call signal CTS and the response signal RTS are exchanged.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. In general, by transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.
The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. The VDP 312 is connected to a signal conversion circuit 315 in addition to the image ROM 322 and the VRAM 329 described above. Here, the VRAM 329 is an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 322. The signal conversion circuit 315 is a circuit that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. The VRAM 329 and the signal conversion circuit 315 may be provided in the VDP 312.

The video data, the horizontal synchronizing signal HSYNC, and the vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 315, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 315. Is displayed.
From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the lamps provided on the glass frame 5 and the game board 20, and a synchronizing signal for giving data transmission / reception timing STS is input. Note that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 of the interrupt signals INT0 to INT for notifying the processing status such as the end of the drawing to the VRAM and the state of waiting for the reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A wait signal WAIT or the like for notification is also input.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface circuit (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command (a data signal output from the buffer 173) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 101 of the gaming control device 100. ing. Through the command I / F 331, the main control microcomputer 311 receives control commands (effect commands) from the gaming microcomputer 101, such as a customer waiting demonstration command and a fluctuation pattern command.

The command transmitted from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 is stored in the RAM 311a or the RAM 326 as necessary.
In addition, since the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 operates at 5 VDC and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at 3.3 VDC, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Have been.

  Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the LEDs of the above-described board decoration device 42, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling the LEDs of the above-described frame decoration device 43, A board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a motor and a solenoid of the effect device 44 is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 are connected to a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 via an address / data bus 340. It should be noted that a light emitting source other than the LED may be used as the light emitting source of the board decoration device 42 or the frame decoration device 43. Further, a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a moving light or an effect device) on the glass frame 5 is provided, and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device is provided. May be.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a SW input circuit 336.
The SW input circuit 336 includes an on / off state of the effect button SW 46 built in the effect button 9 provided on the glass frame 5, an operation state of the touch panel 9 a provided on the glass frame 5, and a motor of the board effect device 44. This is a circuit for detecting the on / off state of the special effect SW (producing motor SW) 47 for detecting the initial position of the microcomputer and inputting a detection signal to the microcomputer 311 for main control.
The volume input SW 338 is also connected to the SW input circuit 336. The SW input circuit 336 detects the state of the volume SW 338 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.
In this example, the setting confirmation LED 339 described in FIG. 3 is controlled by the main control microcomputer 311 via the above-described board decoration LED control circuit 332 as one of the elements constituting the board decoration device 42. Configuration.

  The normal power supply unit 501 of the power supply device 500 drives a motor and a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and to electronic components controlled by the same. In addition to the DC 32 V, the DC 12 V for driving the display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, the DC 5 V serving as the power supply voltage of the command I / F 331, and the DC 15 V voltage for driving the above-described LED and the speakers 12 a and 12 b are generated. It is configured as follows. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 501.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 503 of the power supply device 500 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. The reset signal is output from the main control microcomputer 311 as a VDPRESET signal to the VDP 312, an SNDRESET signal to the sound source LSI 313 and the amplifier circuit 337, and an IORESET signal to each of the control circuits 332 to 334. 300, respectively, and reset these devices.
Note that a configuration may also be adopted in which the backup power is supplied to the RAM (at least one of the RAM 311a and the RAM 326) of the effect control device 300 from the backup power supply unit 502 of the power supply device 500 at the time of a power failure.
Further, a cooling FAN 48 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 1 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 48 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.
Further, in this embodiment, a configuration is employed in which a general-purpose port of the main control microcomputer 311 is used to generate and supply a reset signal to the VDP 312. Thereby, the cooperation between the operations of the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 can be improved.

  In the case of this example, the circuit board configuring the effect control device 300 corresponds to a sub-control board (also referred to as a sub-board). As described above, the effect control device 300 (sub-control board) that controls the display device 41 controls the speakers, lamps, movable parts for decoration, and the like, and the main board that constitutes the game control device 100. Transmits the control command to the sub-control board to indirectly control the movable part and the like. For this reason, the hardware configuration such as the wiring pattern of the main board is basically the same even if the model is different, and by installing a game program for each model in the gaming machine microcomputer 101, the main board is technically And can be shared even if the brand is different.

E. FIG. Next, an outline of a game performed by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment and a flow of the game will be described.
First, at the beginning of the game (or before the start of the game), the game is in a customer waiting state (during demonstration), and a command for instructing display of a customer waiting screen is sent to the buffer of the game control device 100 (the buffer in FIG. 4). 173) to the effect control device 300, and a customer waiting screen (moving image or still image) is displayed on the display unit 41a of the display device. In the waiting state for the customer, movable movable object 700 is in an initial state shown in FIG.

  Then, a game ball driven into the game area 22 via the guide rail 21 is used as a special winning start port (special figure 1 starting port 607, special figure 2 starting port 608, or starting winning port 26a). ) (That is, when there is a special prize start winning), a command for instructing the display of the special figure to be changed is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the special figure (numerals and characters) is displayed on the display unit 41a. , Symbols, patterns, etc.) are changed (for example, scrolled) (so-called variable display), and a special figure variable display game (hereinafter referred to as a special figure variable display game) is performed. .

Then, if the stop result mode (combination of special figures derived by the variable display) of the special figure variable display game is a special result mode (for example, "3, 3, 3" or the like), it is called a big hit. Benefits are granted to the player. For control, for example, on condition that there is a start winning, a value such as a big hit random number is extracted and stored. Based on the comparison determination result, it is determined in advance whether or not to make a big hit, and in response to this determination, the above-described special figure variation display game is started.
In the normal mode, if the stop result mode of the variable display game is a specific mode of the special result mode (for example, the “7, 7, 7” slot), the above-mentioned big hit is achieved and after the big hit game After the special prize period described later, the gaming state shifts from the normal mode to the certainty changing mode. In this probability change mode, control is performed to increase the probability that the special figure will be a big hit (hereinafter, referred to as a special figure big hit probability). Also, in some cases, so-called time savings (things that increase the frequency of the variable display game by shortening the variable display time of a special figure or the like to make it easier to hit) are also performed.

  When the big hit occurs and the state changes to the big hit state, after a fanfare period (a period during which an output of a sound effect for producing a big hit is executed), the big winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27 is set to the specified time ( Within a range not exceeding (for example, 30 seconds), an opening operation (big hit round) is performed in which the player is temporarily opened only for a period of time, for example, up to 10 winnings. This opening operation is repeatedly performed for a specified number of rounds. In this big hit state, a command for instructing the display of a big hit screen for producing a big hit state or notifying a player of the number of big hit rounds is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the performance control device 300, and the display unit At 41a, such a big hit display is executed.

The period in which the jackpot is in the state (the fanfare period, the period of the jackpot round in which the big winning opening is opened, the interval period between the jackpot round and the next jackpot round, and the ending period) is the special prize period. Is equivalent to
The number of rounds of the jackpot is, for example, usually 15 round jackpots as a main jackpot, but a configuration of generating a 16R jackpot as a premier or other configurations (for example, 6R or 4R) may be employed. A so-called sudden hit (a sudden change in the jackpot probability via a jackpot with few payouts) may be a two-round jackpot or the like.
Further, when the second variable winning device is present, if the stop result mode of the variable display game by the display device 41 becomes a special mode (for example, a special eye such as “3, special symbol, 3”), a special jackpot is generated. An opening operation (big hit round) in which a special so-called privilege is generated and the opening and closing member of the second variable winning device does not exceed a specified time (for example, 30 seconds) and is temporarily opened only for a period of up to five winnings, for example. Is performed. This opening operation is repeatedly performed for a specified number of rounds.

On the other hand, when a game ball further wins in any of the starting winning openings of the special figure during the above-mentioned special figure changing display game or big hit, the display of the special figure starting memory is displayed on the display unit 41a or the like. After the variable display game or the big hit state is ended, for example, the variable display game of the above-described special figure is repeated based on the start memory, or the state returns to the customer waiting state (during customer waiting demonstration effect). I do.
In other words, if the variable display game ends with a big hit, the state shifts to the big hit state. If the variable display game ends with a miss and the start memory is stored, the variable display game is executed again. If the big hit ends and there is a start memory, the variable display game is executed again. If the big hit ends and there is no start memory, the flow returns to the customer waiting state.

  In the present embodiment, for example, two types of display of the special figure start storage (special figure start storage) and two types of display (special figure 1 hold display and special figure 2 hold display) are performed. A variable display game (a first variable display game and a second variable display game) is executed. That is, when a special figure start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 607 occurs, a first variable display game based on the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed on the display device 41. Then, when the game ball wins the special figure 1 starting port 607 during any special figure changing display game or the like, one first starting memory (a starting memory corresponding to the special figure 1 hold display) is stored. On the other hand, after the end of the special figure variation display game, the display device 41 performs the first variation display game based on the variation display of the special figure 1.

In addition, when there is a special figure starting prize (second starting prize) due to the game ball entering the starting winning prize port 26a (the starting port of the ordinary power) or the special figure 2 starting port 608, the display device 41 displays the special figure prize. A second variable display game based on the variable display is performed. Then, when the game ball wins the start winning port 26a or the special figure 2 start port 608 during any of the special figure change display games, one second start memory (a start memory corresponding to the special figure 2 hold display) is provided. On the other hand, the second variable display game is performed on the display device 41 by the variable display of the special figure 2 on the display device 41 after the special figure variable display game is finished.
When both the first start memory and the second start memory are present, one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is executed first according to a preset rule. For example, a mode in which the second fluctuation display game corresponding to the start winning port 26a and the special figure 2 start port 608 is preferentially performed (that is, a mode in which the second start memory is preferentially consumed), or two types of fluctuations There may be a mode in which the display games are played in the winning order.

On the other hand, during the game, when the game ball passes the general-purpose starting gate 32, a general-purpose variation display game (hereinafter, a general-purpose variation display game) is displayed on the display unit 41a or the like. . Then, if the result of the general-floor display game (stopped general-figure) is a predetermined mode (specific display mode), a privilege called per-figure-per-game is provided.
At this time, a game is played in which the opening / closing member 26b for opening / closing the start winning port 26a is temporarily opened for a predetermined opening time. This makes it easier for the game balls to start and win, and accordingly, the number of executions of the special figure variable display game increases and the possibility of a big hit increases.
In addition, when a game ball further wins at the general-purpose starting gate 32 during the general-purpose change display game, the collective display device 35 executes the suspension display of the general-purpose starting memory, and stores, for example, up to four. After the normal-figure variable display game ends, the normal-figure variable display game is repeated based on the memory.

F. Operation of Control System Next, control contents of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIGS.
The control process executed by the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms). Become.
First, the concept of the main components used in the description of the following flowcharts is clarified as follows.
(A) Display of special map As described above, the collective display 35 displays the special map and the general map. In the following flow chart of the game control device 100, a special figure refers to the "main special figure" displayed on the collective display device 35 in principle. In addition, the term “decorative special map” is used to refer to the effect dummy display for the player displayed on the display device 41. However, when describing the gaming machine, if necessary, the description may include the “decorative special map”.

(B) Display device of general drawing When referring to the general drawing in the following flowchart of the game control device 100, it refers to the "main general drawing" displayed on the collective display device 35 in principle. In addition, when the display device 41 adopts a configuration for displaying a general-purpose figure, and indicates a dummy display for an effect for a player displayed on the display device 41, it is referred to as “decorative general-purpose figure”, for example.
However, in the present embodiment, the display of such a general figure is not displayed on the display device 41. Note that a display for displaying a general map (in this case, a decorative general map) may be provided. In the description of the gaming machine, if necessary, the description may include a device for displaying a “decorative drawing”.
(C) Puden The device corresponding to the Puden is the ordinary variable prize device 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (Puden).
As described above, a special control (such as a control for shortening the fluctuation time of the general figure) that facilitates the winning of the general electric power is performed to support the start winning a prize. It may simply be called Densapo).

(D) Special figure storage In the following flowchart of the game control device 100, in the case of special figure hold (sometimes simply referred to as “hold”), special figure storage, or special figure start storage, the batch display device 35 is used in principle. Indicates the “book map storage” indicated by. In addition, when pointing to a dummy display for staging for a player, which is displayed on the display device 41 or the like, it is referred to as “decorative special figure hold” or “decorative special figure storage”.
(E) General map storage In the following flowchart of the game control device 100, in the case of storing the general map, storing the general map, or storing the start of the general map, in principle, the "full general memory" displayed on the collective display device 35 is displayed. Pointing towards. In addition, when pointing to the dummy display for staging for a player, which is displayed on the display device 41 or the like, it is referred to as “decorative ordinary figure holding” or “decorative ordinary figure storage”.
However, in this embodiment, the display memory 41 does not display such a general-purpose start memory display. Note that a display for displaying a general-purpose start memory (in this case, decorative general-purpose memory storage) may be provided. In the description of the gaming machine, if necessary, the description may include a device for displaying "decorative general map memory".
(F) Variable winning device The variable winning device 27 is a device (so-called attacker) having a large winning opening 27a that is opened and closed by an opening and closing member 27b. The variable winning device 27 may be a special variable winning device to distinguish it from the normal variable winning device 26.

[Main processing of the game control device]
First, the main processing of the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 101) will be described with reference to FIGS.
The main process is started based on the forcible reset of the gaming microcomputer 101. That is, when a power switch (not shown) of the power supply device 500 is turned on, a reset signal is output from the control signal generation unit 503 of the power supply device 500 at a predetermined timing (during a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When the reset terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 is turned on and the reset signal is subsequently released, the gaming microcomputer 101 starts up. When the power is restored from a power failure, similarly, the reset signal is turned on after the reset signal is turned on, and the gaming microcomputer 101 is started. When the worker attempts to initialize the user work RAM or the like (for example, the RAM 101C) of the game control device 100, the power supply is turned on while turning on the RAM clear switch 504 (initialization switch) of the game control device 100. The switch needs to be turned on.

  When the gaming microcomputer 101 is started, first, processing for inhibiting interrupts is performed (step S1), and then, when an interrupt occurs, a stack pointer is set which is a start address of an area for saving values of registers and the like. The processing (step S2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the address range of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order. In step S4, the leading 00h is set. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop firing, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 160) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the slave control unit (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit is executed. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, and the like). It forms a waiting means for setting a waiting time.

  The timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not a validity determination target) that is not a target of the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. Thus, when calculating the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 504 is input to the first input port 160, and the state of the first input port 160 is read before the start of the standby time to initialize the first input port 160. The operation of the switch (RAM initialization switch 504) can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch is read after the elapse of the standby time, the initialization switch may be operated after the elapse of the standby time, or the initialization switch may be continuously operated until the elapse of the standby time from power-on. There is a need to. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, the operation can be detected immediately after the power is turned on without performing such a troublesome operation, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on can be detected. Can be prevented.

  After performing the process of setting the power supply delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) are performed. First, the number of times (for example, two times) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 500 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Is performed (step S9). Note that even when the power supply delay timer is set in step S7 and the timer is counting, the power failure monitoring in step S9 is also performed.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; YES), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not been continued for the number of checks (step S10; NO), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (step S10; YES), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is cut off. Wait for it. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately cope with a failure at power-on. can do.

  That is, since the game control device 100 forms a power failure monitoring unit that monitors the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time, a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that is the main control unit is delayed is performed. And it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM (for example, the RAM 101C) is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the storage contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained. And the like need not be performed. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the load on control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; NO), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and then the timer value is set to 0. It is determined whether there is (Step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; NO), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; YES), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable and writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or an EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), And outputs OFF data to all output ports (outputs a signal corresponding to binary signal “0”: that is, sets no output) (step S14).
Here, in this embodiment, the RWM refers to the RAM 101C, but is not limited to the RAM, and may include a readable and writable storage element such as an EEPROM as the RWM.
Since each output port is turned off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output an off signal to each output port by software, but here, step S14 is provided just in case. .

Subsequently, a serial port (a port mounted in the gaming microcomputer 101 in advance and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15). That is, since it is necessary to perform serial communication with the effect control device 300 and the like, the state is set to use the serial port.
Next, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch (RAM initialization switch 504) has been turned on based on the state of the first input port 160 previously read (step S16). This is to determine whether or not the initialization switch is on according to the state of the initialization switch signal. If the initialization switch is on, the process proceeds to step S26, and if not, the process proceeds to step S17. .
The process proceeds to step S26 when the initialization switch is turned on and the gaming microcomputer 101 is started, and the power failure inspection area 1 and the power failure inspection area 2 of the RWM are normal in steps S17 and S18 described later. This is the case when it is determined that the checksum is not normal, or when it is determined that the checksum is not normal in step S20 described later. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S26, processing such as initializing data in the RWM of the gaming microcomputer 101 is performed in steps S26 to S30.

If the initialization switch has not been turned on, the process proceeds to step S17, where it is checked whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 of the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah). Is determined not to be normal, the process jumps to step S26. On the other hand, if the check result in step S17 is normal, it is checked in next step S18 whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 of the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h). If the check result is not normal in step S18, the process jumps to step S26. If the check result is normal, the process proceeds to step S19.
As described above, if all the values of the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RWM are normal, it is determined that the power failure has been recovered, and the process proceeds to step S19. On the other hand, if the values of the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RWM are abnormal (if they are not stored normally), it is determined that the power is normally turned on, and the process jumps to step S26.
The power failure inspection area check data 1 and 2 are set in steps S41 and S42 described later. In these steps S17 and S18, it is determined whether or not to recover from a power failure based on the plurality of check data 1 and 2 as described above, so that the determination as to whether or not to recover from a power failure is made with high reliability.

Next, in step S19, the checksum of the RWM data is calculated. In step S20, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum at the time of power-off, and it is determined whether or not the value is normal (match). If the checksum is not normal (ie, if the RWM data is corrupted), the process proceeds to step S26. If the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG. Perform the process when recovery is performed.
In step S21, an initial value at the time of restoration from power failure is saved in an area to be initialized. The areas to be initialized here are the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2, the checksum area, and the area related to error monitoring. The areas related to error fraud monitoring include, for example, the following areas.
・ External information area door ・ Frame open signal, security signal ・ Game machine error status signal in the test signal area ・ Status scan counter (game frame status monitoring scan counter)
-Front frame (glass frame) opening monitoring area-Game frame (front frame) opening monitoring area-Shooting ball out monitoring area-Overflow monitoring area-Dispensing abnormality monitoring area-Switch 1, 2 abnormality monitoring area-Big winning opening illegal winning monitoring Area / Privilege illegal prize monitoring area / Magnet illegal monitoring area / Radio illegal monitoring area / Grand prize opening illegal monitoring area / Public illegal monitoring area

  In step S21, the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is determined. It is in an undefined state indicating that there is no data. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal indicating the presence or absence of contact with the firing operation handle 11 is also cleared, and the state is changed to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

  After step S21, an area for storing the game state in the RWM is checked to determine whether or not the game state is a high probability state (step S22). Here, if the probability is not high (step S22; NO), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. If the probability is high (step S22; YES), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and for example, the high probability notification LED (not shown) provided in the batch display device 35 is turned on (not shown). (Lighting) Data is saved in the segment area (step S24). As a result, a treatment corresponding to the current high probability state is performed. For example, a high probability notification LED provided in the collective display device 35 is turned on to display an indication of the high probability state.

  Next, a power failure recovery command corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S25), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (if a customer waits, a customer wait demonstration screen command, Then, a plurality of commands such as a command on the recovery screen) are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, if the process jumps from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to be permitted to access (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, an initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in an area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area having a value other than the value (0) written in step S27 as an initial value, and in this embodiment, an area related to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration and the production mode. is there. Specific examples of these regions are, for example, as follows.
<Area to be initialized>
-Customer waiting demo flag area (used in step S472 and the like described below)
• Effect mode transition information area (area in which effect mode transition information is saved in step S529 and the like described later)
• Security signal control timer (used in step C68 and the like described below)
-Next mode transition information area (see step S778 and the like described later)
-Special figure game mode flag area (see step S759 described later)
-Special figure game mode flag evacuation area (see step S701 and the like described later)

Next, the RAM initialization command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed, and a predetermined time ( For example, a command for notifying the RAM initialization by light and sound (for 30 seconds) is transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted.
When the RAM initialization command is transmitted, the effect control device 300 performs initialization such as setting the operation position of the motor of the effect device to the initial position, and starts an effect to notify that RWM has been cleared. I do.

When the process proceeds from step S25 or step S30 to step S31, in step S31, a process of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) is performed.
The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the game microcomputer 101. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 101A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process of activating and setting the random number generation circuit in the game microcomputer 101 is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 101A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. That is, in the process of step S32, a hard random number bit transposition pattern is set, and the big hit random number bit transposition is also performed.
Here, the bit transposition pattern refers to a method of replacing the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing the extracted random number as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition). It is a pattern to be determined. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be allowed to make any setting.

  Next, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted and saved in a predetermined area of the RWM as initial values (start values) of various corresponding initial random numbers ( Step S33). In the case of the present embodiment, as the various initial value random numbers, initial value random numbers (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) for determining the hit symbol of the special figure (that is, big hit symbol initial value random number, small hit symbol initial value) Random number), the initial random number of the random number (hit random number) that determines the hit of the ordinary figure (that is, the initial random number of hit), and the initial value random number of the random number that determines the hit symbol of the ordinary figure (the hit random number) (that is, the hit random number) Symbol initial value random number). In addition, as for the random number related to the general figure, the word “general figure” may be omitted, for example, such that “random number per general figure” is simply referred to as “random number per hit”.

  In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 101A used in this embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is changed every time the power is turned on. By setting the (start value), the regularity of random numbers updated by software can be broken, and it is difficult for a player to obtain an illegal random number.

Next, an interrupt is permitted in step S34, and in the next step S35, an initial value random number updating process is performed. The initial value random number updating process is for updating the value of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers so that it is difficult to intentionally aim at a big hit etc. at the timing of launching a game ball. is there.
In the initial value random number updating process in step S35, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid the execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. The initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed, and if only the main process is performed, there is no problem if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update process, thereby simplifying the main process. There is an advantage that it is made.

In addition, although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the random number generated in the random number generation circuit in the CPU 101A is used for the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number. Is generated. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit random number, the small hit random number, the hit random number, and the hit random number are processed by the program. This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing as a unit. In addition, in the case of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is used in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (updated by software) every time the random number goes round. "Has been adopted. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random-type update in which all values in a range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.
Also, when there are two types of special figures, the random numbers related to the special figures may be common to the special figures 1 and 2 or may be provided separately. However, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that they are common. ing.

Next, in step S36, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 500 is read via the port and the data bus, the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (for example, twice) is set, and in the next step S37, the power failure monitoring signal It is determined whether or not is turned on. If it is turned on, the process proceeds to step S38 for final determination of power failure, and if not, the process returns to step S35. During normal operation, steps S35 to S37 are repeated.
That is, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; NO), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the check of the power failure monitoring signal (loop process) are repeatedly performed. By permitting an interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number updating process (step S35), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt is executed. Is kept waiting by the initial value random number update process, thereby avoiding pressure on the interrupt process.

When proceeding to step S38, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has continued for the number of checks, and if this determination result is affirmative, it is finally determined that a power failure has occurred, and the flow proceeds to step S39. If negative, it is determined that a power failure has not occurred, and the process returns to step S37.
When the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, the power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the processing being executed and to forcefully execute the power failure processing after step S39. However, according to the configuration of this example, the on state of the power failure monitoring signal is checked a plurality of times in step S38, so that the power failure monitoring signal is temporarily and instantaneously turned on due to noise or the like even though no power failure has actually occurred. In this case, there is an advantage that the power failure is not erroneously determined.

When the process proceeds to step S39, after interrupts are prohibited, in the next step S40, all outputs are turned off (off data is output to all output ports), and then the power failure information setting process is executed in steps S41, S42. I do. In the power failure information setting processing, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 in step S41, and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 in step S42.
After step S42, a process of calculating a checksum when the RWM is turned off is performed in the next step S43, and then the checksum calculated in step S44 is saved in a predetermined checksum area.
Then, after prohibiting access to the RWM in step S45, the process waits (waits for the power of the gaming machine to be cut off).
In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure restoration inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power-off, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power-off is correctly backed up. It can be determined when the power is turned on again.
The power failure processing in steps S39 to S45 described above is performed before the power supply voltage falls below the operating voltage of the gaming microcomputer 101 due to the power failure.

[Checksum calculation processing]
Next, the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address in step S51, and the number of repetitions is set in step S52. The number of repetitions is set in accordance with the number of RWM bytes used. Next, "0" is set as the calculated value in step S53, and then the calculated value + the content of the calculated address is calculated as a new calculated value in step S54. In this way, the content of each address is added as a calculated value. Next, in step S55, the calculated address is updated by "+1", and in step S56, the number of repetitions is updated by "-1" to check whether the calculation is completed. In step S57, it is determined whether the calculation is completed. If the decision result in the step S57 is NO, the process returns to the step S54 to repeat the routine. Then, when the number of repetitions becomes equal to the number of bytes of RWM, it is determined that the calculation is completed, and the process exits from step S57 to YES and ends the routine.
In this way, the checksum is calculated when the power of the RWM is cut off.

[Initial value random number update processing]
Next, the initial value random number updating process (step S35) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the big hit symbol initial value random number (step S61), a process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the small hit symbol initial value random number (step S62), A process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the initial random number (step S63) and a process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the winning initial random number (step S64) are sequentially performed.
Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is, as described above, a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure, and is updated in the range of 0 to 99. The “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines a hit in the ordinary figure changing game, and is updated in the range of 0 to 250. In this way, the randomness of the random number is increased by continuing to increment the initial random number as long as time permits in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, a timer interrupt process of the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 101) will be described with reference to FIG.
In the timer interrupt processing, the periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 101A to generate an interrupt (timer interrupt) by the processing of steps S31 and S34 in the main processing described above. Started with When the timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 101, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step S70). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register save processing for transferring a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main processing) to the RWM. Next, an upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step S71). In step S71, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different.
Next, an input process is executed in step S72. In this input processing, a detection signal (state of each input port) of each of the above-described sensors (starting port switches 120 and 121, gate switch 122, winning port switch 123, large winning port switch 124, and the like) is read. Specifically, the output value of each sensor is determined for each timer interrupt cycle, and when the output value of the same level continues for a specified number of times (for example, twice), the level of this output value is detected by each sensor. Read as the definitive value of the signal. When it is determined that any one of the sensors is on, a flag (input flag) indicating that the sensor is on is set.

Next, in step S73, an output process of setting and outputting the output data set in each step described later to the corresponding output port is executed. This is a process for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 133, general-purpose solenoid 132) based on output data set in various processes.
When a signal for stopping firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal for permitting firing is output by performing this output process (see step S138a to be described later), and a state in which the firing permitting signal can be set to a permitted state is output. It is said. This firing permission signal is output to the firing control device via the payout control device. At this time, no processing of the signal or the like is performed. The firing permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the game control device, and the second signal indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the payout control device (also a firing permission signal) is also used. Generated in the payout control device and output to the launch control device. That is, two firing permission signals are output to the firing control device, and when both are permitted to fire, the game ball is configured to be ready to fire.

Next, in step S74, a payout command transmission process is performed. This is a process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer of the gaming microcomputer 101 in the various processes to the payout control device 200.
Next, random number update processes 1 and 2 are executed in steps S75 and S76, respectively. Although details will be described later, in the random number update processing 1, setting of initial values of each random number (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, common hit random number, common hit random number) by initial value random number, random number update processing 2 Then, the update of the variation pattern random number is performed by software. Among them, according to the random number updating process 1, the updating of the initial value of each random number by the above-mentioned "initial value changing method" is realized. Further, according to the random number update process 2, the variation pattern random number changes each time the timer interrupt process routine is repeated, and the extracted value of the variation pattern random number maintains the at randomness.

  In this example, there are three types of variation pattern random numbers: variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3. Among them, the variation pattern random number 1 is a random number for selecting the reach system of the latter half variation (the variation after the start of the reach), and the variation pattern random number 2 is a distribution of detailed effects from the reach systems (for example, plus one frame). To stop the special figure or to stop the special figure at minus one frame), and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is a random number for selecting the mode of the first half fluctuation (the fluctuation before the start of the reach). is there. Further, the variation pattern random number may directly determine all of the variation modes, but in this example, the specific mode is determined by the effect control device 300. For example, only the variation time and the reach system (rough type of reach) are determined by the variation pattern random number 1, and the effect control device 300 determines a specific variation mode based on the determined variation time and the reach system.

  Next, in step S77, a winning opening switch monitoring process and a status monitoring process are executed. The winning opening switch monitoring process monitors the input flags (starting opening switches 120 and 121, winning opening switch 123, and winning opening switch 124 in the special drawings) set as described above. When the flag is set, processing such as preparation for requesting the payout control device 200 to pay out 15 prize balls is executed. The state monitoring process includes the above-described undetected error of each sensor, an excessive error of prize ball discharge, an open state of the glass frame 5, and an illegal prize other than the opening of the special winning opening 27a and the ordinary telephone 26. This is a process for monitoring.

Next, in a step S78, a special figure game process is performed. In this special figure game process, comprehensive control of the entire special figure variable display game is performed. That is, when the change start condition (the start condition of the change display game) is satisfied, a process of determining a jackpot random number, setting a combination of stop symbols of the special figure (result mode), and setting a change mode of the special figure is performed. (Details will be described later).
Here, when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the fluctuation display game is started when the start opening prize is awarded in the customer waiting state and the fluctuation display game ends, the start memory is stored, and the fluctuation display game is executed again. There are three types when the big hit is completed, the starting memory is stored, and the variable display game is executed again.
In the special figure game process, processing for setting various output data related to the special figure variable display game is also performed. That is, for example, the content (command data) of a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 or the like is set in accordance with the gaming state of the special display variable display game.

Next, in a step S79, a process for an ordinary figure variable display game is performed. That is, processing for setting the content of the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 or the like in accordance with the state of the fluctuation display game in the ordinary figure is performed.
Next, in step S80, a segment LED editing process is executed. This means that the special figure symbol determined in the special figure game processing in step S78, the general figure determined in the general figure game processing in step S79, and other information are displayed on the collective display device 35 in the main special figure. This is a process for displaying on a display (LED, 7-segment display).
Next, in step S81, a magnet illegal monitoring process is executed. This is to check the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 126 to determine whether there is any abnormality. For example, if the input flag of the magnetic sensor 126 is set, it is determined that a magnetic error has occurred and a predetermined process ( Preparation of an unauthorized notification command).

Next, in step S82, a board radio wave fraud monitoring process is executed. This is to check the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 127 to determine whether there is any abnormality. For example, if the input flag of the panel radio wave sensor 127 is set, it is assumed that fraud using radio waves has occurred. Then, a predetermined process (preparation of a command for improper notification, etc.) is executed.
Next, in step S83, an external information editing process is executed. This is for editing data to be output from the game control device 100 to the outside.
After step S83, the timer interrupt processing ends.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by the interrupt return. Automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Some gaming machines require an instruction to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the designation of the register bank, depending on the CPU used.

[Input processing]
Next, an input process (step S72) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input processing, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 160 is read (step S91). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S92).
Here, the switches monitored by the input port 1 (first input port 160) are as follows.
・ Frame radio signal (bit 0)
・ Payout busy signal (bit 1)
・ Dispensing abnormal status signal (bit 2)
-Shooting ball out switch signal (bit 3)
• Overflow switch signal (bit 4)
・ Touch switch signal (bit 5)
• RAM initialization switch (bit 6)
• Power failure monitoring signal (bit 7)
Note that bits 6 and 7 are treated as unused in this input processing and are cleared in step S92.

Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S93).
Next, in step S94, the address of the input port 2, that is, the address of the second input port 161 is prepared, and in step S95, the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared.
Here, in this embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value to a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set to an RWM or another memory.
Next, unused bit data is prepared in step S96, and bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S97. For example, since the panel radio wave sensor 127 needs to invert the detection signal, bit data of such a sensor / switch is prepared.
Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port. These data have the same names in the flowchart, but are different data for each input port. However, the data may have the same value as a result.

Next, switch reading processing is performed in step S98.
Here, the switches monitored by the input port 2 (the second input port 161) are as follows.
-Panel radio wave sensor (bit 0) (inverted bit):
-Switch abnormality detection signal (bit 1): In Fig. 4, "abnormality detection signal"
-Magnetic sensor (bit 2):
・ Glass frame open detection switch (bit 3)
・ Front frame (body frame) open detection switch (bit 4)
・ Unused (bits 5 to 7)

Next, in step S99, the address of the input port 3, that is, the address of the third input port 162 is prepared. In step S100, the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared. In step S101, unused bit data is prepared. After that, bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S102, and a switch reading process is performed in step S103, and the input process ends.
Here, the switches monitored at the input port 3 (the third input port 162) are as follows.
Starting port 2 switch (bit 0): second starting port switch 121
Starter 1 switch (bit 1): first starter switch 120
-Left winning opening switch (bit 2): winning opening switch 123-1
Right winning opening switch (bit 3): winning opening switch 123-2
Gate switch (bit 4): gate switch 122
-Winning prize mouth switch (bit 5): Winning prize mouth switch 124
-Unused (bits 6 and 7)
As shown in FIG. 4, the signals of the switches of bits 0 to 5 are transmitted through the relay board 170 by the pattern branch at the input side of the third input port 162 (the output side of the proximity I / F 163). It is configured to be output as a test signal to the device. That is, the signal of the opening 2 switch (bit 0) is “starting 2 winning signal” and “normal electric accessory 1 winning signal 1”, and the signal of the opening 1 switch (bit 1) is “starting 1 winning signal”. , The signal of the left winning port switch (bit 2) is referred to as a "normal winning port 1 winning signal", the signal of the right winning port switch (bit 3) is referred to as a "normal winning port 2 winning signal", and the gate switch (bit 4). ) Is output to the trial test apparatus as the "gate passing signal 1 for the ordinary pattern 1" and the signal of the big winning opening switch (bit 5) is output as the "special electric accessory 1 winning signal 1". Has become.

[Switch read processing]
Next, the switch reading process (steps S98 and S103) in the above input process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the switch reading process, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S111). This corresponds to the first reading. Next, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of the bit is cleared (step S112), and the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S113). Save (store) in port input state 1 (step S114). After that, it waits for a delay time (0.1 ms; s represents seconds) elapses until the second reading (step S115).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read for the second time (step S116). If there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S117), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S118), and the port input state of the target switch control area is changed. 2 is saved (stored) (step S119). Thereafter, the bits changed in the first and second readings, that is, signals are detected, and a fixed bit pattern is created (step S120). Specifically, among the states of the input port to be read, a fixed bit pattern is created in which the first and second times the state of the same bit is “1” and the different bit is “0”. Next, the logical product of the determined bit pattern and the port input state 2 is calculated to be the currently determined bit (step S121).

  Next, an undefined bit pattern in which the same bit is set to 0 and the different bit is set to 1 in the first and second readings is created (step S122), and the logical product of the undefined bit pattern and the determined state at the time of the previous interrupt is created. And set it as a previously held bit (step S123). This makes it possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to switch chattering or the like has been removed. Then, the currently determined bit and the previously held bit are combined, saved in the RWM as the currently determined state (step S124), and the exclusive OR of the previous and current determined states is obtained and saved in the RWM as a rising edge ( Step S125), the switch reading process ends.

When a timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the signal is read by reading the switch once for each interrupt processing and comparing the result with the result of the previous read. There is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been performed. However, if the state of the switch read in the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that a correct determination may not be made. In addition, since the input pulse of the switch must be held for at least twice as long as the timer interrupt cycle by a simple calculation, the electric circuit design for extending the pulse and the speed of the game ball passing through the switch are reduced. Structural design of the spherical channel is required.
On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference, the processable amount in the interrupt by extending the timer interrupt cycle is increased. The increase and the simplicity of the structural design can be achieved at the same time, and the above-mentioned problems can be avoided.

[Output processing]
Next, an output process (step S73) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the output processing, first, all output data of the port 176 (see FIG. 4) for outputting the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 35 is turned off (step S131). Subsequently, data to be output to the first port 175 having a function of outputting data of the special winning opening solenoid 133 and the general-purpose solenoid 132 is synthesized and output (step S132).
Next, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 35 is updated ((+1) update in the range of 0 to 3) (step S133), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated. Is obtained (step S134). Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S134a). The external information to be synthesized here is a “door / frame open signal” (that is, an open signal of the glass frame 5 (door) / front frame 4 (frame)) and a “security signal” (various illegal occurrence, RAM (A signal output for a predetermined time when power is turned on by clearing).
In the present application, “acquiring” data in the control process means extracting data from a ROM (the ROM 101B in the game control device 100 of the present example).

Thereafter, the data synthesized in step S134a is output to the digit output port (third port 177) and the external information output port (fourth port 180) (step S135). The third port 177 is an output port for outputting on / off data of a digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 35 is connected.
Next, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment data area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S136), and the loaded segment output data is output to the segment output port (second port 176) ( Step S137). The second port 176 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 35.
In the present application, "loading" data in the control process as in step S136 means extracting data from the RAM (the RAM 101C in the game control device 100 of this embodiment).
In addition, by the processing up to step S137, a predetermined LED in the collective display device 35 is dynamically lit. The display executed by this lighting includes, for example, a special symbol display, a normal symbol display, and a special figure hold. Display, ordinary map hold display, round display, game status display (time saving display, high probability display) and the like.

Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 55 is combined (step S138), and the combined data is further combined with the emission permission output data (step S138a), and the data combined in step S138a is combined with the external information. The signal is output to the port (fourth port 180) for outputting the firing permission signal (step S138b). The fourth port 180 outputs information relating to the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 55 as an external information signal, and outputs a firing permission signal from the game control device 100 via the payout control device 200 to the firing control device. Output port for output to
The external information to be synthesized in step S138 is "big hit signal 1", "big hit signal 2", "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal 4", "symbol fixed number signal", "starting port" Signal "and" main prize ball signal ".

Next, the output data 1 to 3 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 1 provided on the relay board 170 (step S139). Further, after that, the output data 4 to 6 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 2 provided on the relay board 170 (step S140).
Next, the output data 7 to 8 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 3 provided on the relay board 170 (step S141). Also, the output data 9 to 10 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 4 provided on the relay board 170 (step S142). Further, the output data 11 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 5 provided on the relay board 170 (step S143), and FIG. Ends the output processing.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, the payout command transmission process (step S74) in the above timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that, in brief, in FIG. 14, the left column (steps S151 to S161) is a process for updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal, and the right column (steps S162 to S172) is a process for transmitting a payout command. .
In the payout command transmission processing, first, a prize number counter area 2 in which a plurality of storage areas as a prize number counter are provided according to the number of prize balls (for example, three prize balls, ten prize balls, and fourteen prize balls). It is determined whether there is a count number other than “0” among the counters of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked (step S151).
The structure of the winning counter area 2 (also shown in FIG. 14) is, for example, as follows.
・ 3 prize ball counters ・ 10 prize ball counters ・ 14 prize ball counters Each of the winning number counters can store up to 255 winnings. When checking the winning number counter area 2, the above counter is counted from the top. Check in order (from three prize ball counters).

  Returning to the flow, if there is no count number (step S151: NO), the address of the counter in the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S152), and the count numbers of all the counters in the winning number counter area 2 are updated. It is determined whether the check has been completed (step S153). If it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S153; YES), the process proceeds to step S162. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S153; NO), the process returns to step S151 and repeats the above processing.

If it is determined in step S151 that there is a count number (step S151; YES), the count number of the target prize number counter is subtracted (−1) (step S154), and the prize number counter area 2 is deleted. The number of payouts (for example, 3, 10, or 14) corresponding to the address is obtained (step S155).
After step S155, the value of the prize ball remaining area is added to the payout number acquired in step S155 (step S156). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction less than a predetermined number (in this case, 10) serving as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is stored. The value of the payout number of the newly generated prize ball is added to the value of the remaining ball number area. Then, the added value is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step S157).

  Thereafter, a predetermined number 10 serving as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the value of the prize ball remaining area (step S158), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S159). If the subtraction result is not equal to or greater than 0 (step S159; NO), the main prize ball remaining number update ends, and the process proceeds to step S162. If the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S159; YES), the value of the main winning ball signal output count area is updated by +1 (step S160), and the subtraction result is saved in the winning ball remaining area (step S160). S161), and returns to step S158.

In the process of updating the number of remaining main prize balls (mainly steps S156 to S161), each time the number of prize balls (planned number of payouts) generated by winning a prize hole reaches a predetermined number (here, 10), the external device is updated. Set the main prize ball signal to be output to That is, each time the number of remaining prize balls reaches 10, step S160 is executed, and the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is incremented by one. In addition to the main prize ball signal, an external device (such as a gaming machine management device) also receives a prize ball every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). A signal is output, and by checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor an illegal payout. In other words, the main prize ball remaining number updating process transmits the prize ball signal from the game control device 100 to the external device based on the payout schedule, thereby realizing the payout (the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200). This is a process performed to ensure consistency with ()).
The game control device 100 serving as the main board outputs one pulse every 10 payouts scheduled, and the payout control device 200 outputs one pulse every 10 payouts. ing.

Next, it is determined that all the counters in the winning number counter area 2 do not have counts and that all the counters have been checked (step S153; YES), or that the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step S159; NO). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0, the timer is updated by -1 (step S162), and it is determined whether the timer has reached 0 (time-up) (step S163). If it is determined in this determination that the timer (payout command transmission timer) has expired (step S163; YES), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timer has not expired (step S163; NO), it is determined whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S164). If it is determined that the payout busy signal is busy (step S164; YES), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the payout busy signal is not busy (step S164; NO), the process proceeds to step S165 to check the winning number counter area 1 described later.
In the determination of step S164, instead of checking the state of the port of the first input port 160, when the ON state of the payout busy signal is detected, the payout busy signal flag set in the input processing of FIG. 10 is checked. Is determined.

When the process proceeds to step S165, each of the prize number counter areas 1 in which a plurality of storage areas are provided as prize number counters according to the number of prize balls (for example, three prize balls, ten prize balls, and fourteen prize balls). Among the counters, it is determined whether or not the counter of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked has a count number other than “0” (step S165).
The structure of the winning number counter area 1 (also shown in FIG. 14) is, for example, as follows.
・ 3 prize ball counters ・ 10 prize ball counters ・ 14 prize ball counters Each of the winning number counters can store up to 65,535 winning numbers. When checking the winning number counter area 1, the above counter is counted from the top. Check in order (from three prize ball counters). The difference between the winning number counter area 2 and the winning number counter area 1 is the storage capacity of each counter.

  Returning to the flow, if there is no count number (step S165: NO), the counter address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S166), and the count numbers of all counters in the winning number counter area 1 are updated. It is determined whether or not the check has been completed (step S167). If it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S167; YES), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S167; NO), the process returns to step S165 to repeat the above processing.

  If it is determined in step S165 that there is a count number (step S165; YES), the count number of the target prize number counter is decremented (-1) (step S168), and the prize number counter area 1 is deleted. The payout number command corresponding to the address is obtained (step S169), and the obtained payout number command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S170). After step S170, the initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area used in steps S162 and S163 (step S171), and the request flag (payout request flag) data (payout request flag) is stored in the payout request flag area. The information indicating that the flag has been set) is saved (step S172), and the command transmission process ends. Here, in step S172, the game control device 100 can determine in another process that the game control device 100 itself has issued a payout request to the payout control device 200 (commanded the payout operation of the prize ball). To do so, the data of the payout request flag is set (the flag is set up).

  Through the processing in steps S162 to S171 described above, a payout number command (a kind of payout command) instructing payout of a game ball (prize ball) corresponding to a winning is transmitted to the payout control device 200. Game balls (prize balls) are paid out based on the number commands. As described above, the number-of-payouts command is not transmitted every time the timer is interrupted, but is transmitted after a predetermined time (for example, 200 ms). Also, the condition that the payout control board can pay out the prize balls (that is, the payout busy signal is not busy) is also a necessary condition for transmitting the payout number command.

Note that the payout busy signal is turned on (busy) on condition that it becomes one or more of the following states.
・ Payout operation ・ Ball lending operation ・ Shoot ball out error ・ Overflow error ・ Frame radio wave irregularity occurring ・ Payout ball detection switch is abnormal (abnormality of the switch to monitor the paid ball)
・ Insufficient payout error ・ Excessive payout error ・ Count of the number of award balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board (number of unpaid award balls = number of game balls remaining)
When there is (when it is not 0)

[Random number update processing 1]
Next, a random number update process 1 (step S75) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number updating process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number which are the targets of the initial value random number updating process of FIG. .
In the random number updating process 1, first, it is determined whether the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S185).

  If the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S185; NO), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S191). If the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S185; YES), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S186), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is corresponded. It is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding a start value of a random number counter (random number area) to be executed (step S187). Thereafter, it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S191).

  If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S191; NO), it is determined whether the normal random number winning symbol is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S194). If the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S191; YES), the small hit symbol random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S192), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is loaded. The value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S193). Thereafter, it is determined whether the winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S194).

  If the hit random number of the ordinary figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S194; NO), it is determined whether the winning symbol random number of the ordinary figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S197). If the hit random number of the ordinary figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S194; YES), the initial random number of the hit is loaded as the next initial value (step S195), and the next initial value of the loaded random number of the ordinary figure is loaded. The value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S196). Thereafter, it is determined whether the winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S197).

  If the winning symbol random number in the ordinary figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S197; NO), the random number updating process 1 is ended. If the hit symbol random number of the ordinary symbol is waiting for the initial value setting (step S197; YES), the hit symbol random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S198), and the next initial value of the loaded hit symbol random number is initialized. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S199), and the random number update processing 1 ends.

[Random number update processing 2]
Next, random number update processing 2 (step S76) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.
In the present embodiment, as described above, there are three types of variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3, but a 1-byte random number (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and a 2-byte random number (variation pattern random numbers) There is a random number 1), and the random number update processing 2 in FIG. 16 sets both as update targets, and switches the update target every time an interrupt occurs to perform processing. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for the upper byte and the lower byte at different interrupts. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (the random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to be.

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is updated (step S201). Here, updating is performed in the range of 0 to 3.
The types of random numbers to be updated are as follows.
• When 0: random number of fluctuation pattern 1 (upper)
・ When 1: random number of fluctuation pattern 1 (lower order)
• When 2: random number of fluctuation pattern 2
• When 3: Random pattern random number 3
Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S202). Then, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is obtained from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S203). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether the random number has completed one cycle.
Here, the effect random number update table has data for the type of random number to be updated (four blocks), and details are as follows.
• Upper limit judgment value • Mask value of M1 counter • Type information of random number area to be updated (details below)
1-byte random number 2-byte random number (upper)
2-byte random number (lower)
・ Update area address

Subsequently, the value of the M1 counter in the gaming microcomputer 101 is loaded (step S204), a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired from the corresponding effect random number update table, and the value of the M1 counter is masked. (Step S205).
In the present embodiment, the microcomputer assumed as the gaming microcomputer 101 does not have a refresh register (hereinafter, referred to as an R register), and therefore uses an M1 counter instead. Here, the R register is used for refreshing the DRAM provided in the microcomputer of the Z80 system and the like, and is a register whose value is constantly updated, and a random value is acquired every time it is read. The M1 counter is a counter whose value is updated each time a program instruction is fetched, and is a counter whose value changes each time it is read, similarly to the R register. If the gaming microcomputer 101 has an R register, the R register may be used instead of the M1 counter. In any case, the random number can be given randomness by using the value of the M1 counter or the R register.

Further, the mask value is different from the number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter (or R register, the same applies hereinafter), and When updating the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number.
When updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When updating the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower byte of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is checked whether the random number area to be updated is higher than the 2-byte random number (step S206). If the value is higher than the 2-byte random number (step S206; YES), the process proceeds to step S207, and the value remaining by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value (hereinafter referred to as a masked value) is “1”. Are added as an added value (upper), and “0” is set as an added value (lower), and the process proceeds to step S208.
The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is that the masked value may become “0”, and if “0” is added later, the value does not change from the value before the addition, so that it is avoided.
On the other hand, if the random number area to be updated is lower than the 2-byte random number or 1-byte random number (step S206; NO), the process branches to step S209, where “0” is added (upper) and “1” is set as the mask value. The result of the addition is set as an added value (lower order), and the process proceeds to step S208.

In the next step S208, it is checked whether the random number area to be updated (random number counter) is a 2-byte random number. Here, if it is not a 2-byte random number, the process jumps to step S210 (step S208; NO). On the other hand, when the random number area is a 2-byte random number, the process proceeds to step S211 (step S208; YES). In step S210, “0” is set as a random value (upper), and the value obtained by adding “1” to the mask value is set as a value (lower) of the random number area to be updated, and the process proceeds to step S212.
If the random number area is a 2-byte random number, in step S211, the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set as a random number value, and the flow advances to step S212.

Next, in step S212, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in steps S207 and S209 to the random number value is calculated to obtain a new random number value. It is determined whether or not this random number value exceeds the upper limit determination value acquired in step S203. A determination is made (step S213).
If the newly calculated random number value exceeds the upper limit determination value, the upper limit determination value is subtracted from the calculated random number value to obtain the current random number value (step S214), and thereafter, the process proceeds to step S215. On the other hand, if the newly calculated random number value does not exceed the upper limit determination value, the calculated random number value is set as the current random number value, and the process jumps from step S214 to step S215.
In step S215, the lower order of the random number value is saved in the corresponding random number area. Here, the data is saved in either the 1-byte random number area or the lower area of the 2-byte random number. Subsequently, it is checked whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S216). If the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S216; YES), the higher random number value is set to the higher (2-byte random number (upper)) side of the random number area. (Step S217). Here, the data is saved in the upper area of the 2-byte random number. After step S217, the random number update process 2 ends.
On the other hand, if the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step S216; NO), step S217 is skipped, the process is not performed, and the random number update process 2 ends.

As described above, the CPU 101A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In addition, as described later, a variation pattern of “no reach” and a variation pattern (reach variation mode) in various reach states such as “normal reach” and a large number of “special (SP) reach” are defined as described later. ing.
Accordingly, the CPU 101A determines that the game ball has flowed into the starting area (the special figure 1 starting port 607, the special figure 2 starting port 608, or the starting winning port 26a) of the starting port distribution device 600 or the normal fluctuation winning device 26. The random number updating means updates a reach variation mode determining random number (variation pattern random number) for determining the reach variation mode in the reach state among the extracted various random numbers.

[Winning port switch / status monitoring processing]
Next, the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S77) in the above timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning opening switch / status monitoring process is a process of monitoring whether there is a signal input (change in signal) from switches provided in various winning openings, and monitoring an error.

In the winning opening switch / state monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 (for example, detection from one of the winning opening switches 124) corresponding to one of the winning opening switches 124 in the winning opening (variable winning device 27). (Data indicating the number of the port to which the signal is input and the bit position of the signal in the port are stored) (step S221). In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is only one special winning opening, but in the present embodiment, two special winning opening switches 124 are provided, and any of the gaming balls flowing into the special winning opening of the variable winning device 27 is any one. In this case, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the winning opening switches 124 is prepared.
Next, even if the special winning opening is not open, it monitors whether there is an illegal winning in the special winning opening and executes a fraud & winning monitoring process for detecting a normal winning (step S222).

After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other winning opening switch 124 in the winning opening (the variable winning device 27) is prepared (step S223), and it is monitored for an improper winning, and a normal winning is determined. The detected fraud & winning monitoring process (step S224) is executed.
As described above, there are two special winning opening switches 124, and two special winning opening switches 124 arranged in the special winning opening 27a.
Next, a winning port monitoring table of the winning port switch in the public telephone is prepared (step S227). As the winning opening switch in the public telephone, there is a second starting opening switch 121 for detecting a winning in the starting winning opening 26a of the ordinary variable winning device 26 as the ordinary electric power.
Next, while monitoring whether there is an improper winning or not, an improper & winning monitoring process for detecting a normal winning (Step S228) is executed.

  Then, a winning port monitoring table (for example, a list indicating switches that do not require monitoring for fraud) is prepared for winning port switches that do not require fraud monitoring (step S229). The winning opening switches that do not need to be monitored for fraud include, for example, the first starting opening switch 120 and the winning opening switches 123 provided for the general winning openings 28 to 31. For the winning opening switch which does not need to be monitored for fraud, the fraud monitoring is not performed but the winning detection process is performed. Therefore, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for the process in step S229, and the winning number is updated in the next step. A number counter updating process (step S230) is executed. The detailed procedure of the winning counter updating process will be described later.

After the winning number counter updating process (step S230), a state scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among a plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for errors is to be monitored this time is set. Update (update "+1" in the range of 0 to 3) and prepare (step S231). Subsequently, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 is prepared (step S232).
The following types are set as the types of errors to be monitored in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 according to the value of the status scan counter. , A payout abnormal status signal of the payout control device 200, and the like.
(B) 0: Switch error 1 error (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
(B) At 1: Shooting out-of-ball error (C) At 2: Overflow error (D) At 3: Payout error

Next, an error check of the type defined in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 is performed (step S233), and thereafter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 is prepared (step S235).
The types of errors monitored in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 are as follows.
(E) 0: Glass frame open (front frame open)
(F) At 1: Front frame open (Main frame open)
(G) 2: frame radio fraud (h) 3: touch switch

Next, an error check of the type defined in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 is performed (step S236), and it is determined whether or not the state scan counter has become “0” (step S237). If the status scan counter is determined to be "0", the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S235).
The types of errors monitored by the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 include the following.
(I) When 0: Switch error 2 error (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
That is, as the types of errors to be monitored in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, only those whose status scan counter value corresponds to "0" are set.

Next, an error check of the type defined in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is performed (step S239), and a payout busy signal check processing (step S240) is executed. Return to the loading process.
On the other hand, if the status scan counter has not become "0" in step S237, there is no error to be monitored in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, so that the timer interrupt processing is performed without passing through steps S238 and 239. To return.
Note that the gaming machine state check processing of Table 3 in step S239 and the payout busy signal check processing in step S240 are executed only when the state scan counter is "0", that is, only once in four timer interrupts. Therefore, when the timer interrupt period is 4 ms, the monitoring by these check processes is the monitoring of the 16 ms period.

[Illegal & winning surveillance processing]
Next, the fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S222, step S224, step S228) in the winning port switch / status monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning monitoring process is a process performed for each of the two winning opening switches 124 of the winning opening (variable winning device 27) and the second start-up switch 121 in the public telephone. With respect to the large winning prize port (variable prize winning device 27) and the ordinary electric power (normal variable prize winning device 26), it is easy to forcibly open the opening / closing member, insert a game ball, and pay out a prize ball. Watch for other fraud.
Here, in describing the fraud & winning monitoring process in the winning port switch / status monitoring process, the information defined in the fraud monitoring table of the prepared winning port monitoring tables is as follows.
.Data for determining whether there is an input (monitoring switch bit)
・ Lower address of fraud monitoring information ・ Lower address of fraudulent winning number area ・ Fraudulent winning error notification command ・ Ultimate winning number upper limit (fraud occurrence judgment number)
・ Address of winning opening switch table ・ Notification timer update information (permission / update)

  In the fraud and winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch to be monitored for error is checked (step S241), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S242). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than the special gaming state in which the variable winning device 27 is opened when the winning switch for error monitoring is the special winning switch 124. Further, when the winning opening switch to be monitored for error is the second starting opening switch 121, it is a period other than a state in which the opening control of the ordinary variable winning device 26 is being executed based on the normal situation.

  If it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S242; YES), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S243). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S243; NO), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S252). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S243; YES), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step S244), and the added illegal winning number is added to the monitoring target fraud occurrence determination number (for example, (5) or more (step S245).

The determination number is set to, for example, five, because, for example, when a large winning opening in an open state is changed to a closed state, a game ball is caught in a door member of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball is counted by a count switch (large winning opening). This is because when a prize is passed after the validity period of the switch 124) or when noise is present on the signal, it is not determined that the signal is invalid. The number of determinations may be different for each switch.
If it is determined that the number is not equal to or larger than the determined number (step S245; NO), the process jumps to step S250, and prepares a winning monitoring table (winning port monitoring table) of the target winning opening switch. If the number exceeds the determined number (step S245; YES), the number of illegal winnings is kept at the number of determined fraud occurrence (step S246), and an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target illegal winning notification timer area (step S245). S247). Next, a target fraudulent command is prepared (step S248), a fraud prize occurrence flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S249), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S260). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step S242; NO), a winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S250), and a winning number counter updating process for setting a winning ball is performed (step S251). Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S252), and it is determined whether or not the update of the notification timer is permitted (step S253). If the updating of the notification timer is not permitted (step S253; NO), the fraudulent and winning monitoring process is terminated. When the update of the notification timer is permitted (step S253; YES), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S254). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.

The update of the notification timer is not permitted when the winning-monitoring switch to be monitored for error is one of the special winning-gate switches 124, and is permitted when the winning-monitoring switch to be monitored for error is the other special winning-switch. You. This prevents the notification timer from being updated twice as frequently with respect to the fraudulent notification of the variable winning device 27, thereby preventing the time from being increased by half the specified time (for example, 60000 ms).
That is, since the error monitoring for the special winning opening (the variable winning device 27) is performed by the two special winning opening switches 124, when the timer is updated by both switches, the timer is updated twice. The timer is updated only at the timing when the monitoring process of the other special winning opening switch 124, which performs the monitoring process later, is performed because the illegal timer expires in half of the specified time. .
When the winning port switch to be monitored for error is the second starting port switch 121 in the public telephone, the updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S255). If the value is not 0 (step S255; NO), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S255; YES), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired, a target unauthorized release command is prepared (step S256), and the unauthorized winning release flag is set as the unauthorized flag. Prepare (step S257). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S258).

  When the value of the notification timer has become 0 (step S258; YES), that is, when the value of the notification timer has become 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared ( In step S259, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S260). When the value of the notification timer is not the moment when the value of the notification timer has become 0 (step S258; NO), that is, when the value of the notification timer has become 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is set as a target. The value is compared with the value in the invalid flag area (step S260).

If the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (Step S260; YES), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step S260; NO), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S261), and the effect command setting processing is performed. (Step S262), the fraudulent and winning monitoring process is terminated.
With the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an unauthorized winning error release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is released, and the start and end of the error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter updating process (step S230) in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process and the winning number counter updating process (step S251) in the fraud & winning monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input counter updating process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table acquired in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S271).
Here, the information defined in the winning table out of the winning port monitoring tables prepared in the winning port switch / state monitoring process and the like is as follows.
• Number of repetitions • Data to determine whether there is an input (monitoring switch bit)
-Lower address of winning number counter area 1-Lower address of winning number counter area 2 (If there are a plurality of winning opening switches for one table, they are defined for each switch except for the number of repetitions)

  Next, it is checked whether or not there is a detection signal input (correctly, an input change) from the winning port switch to be monitored (step S272). If it is determined that there is no input (S272; NO), the process jumps to step S281, and if it is determined that there is an input (S272; YES), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded in the next step S273. .

In the next step S274, the loaded winning number counter is updated (+1), and it is checked whether or not an overflow occurs in a succeeding step S275. If it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S275; NO), the flow proceeds to step S276, where the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1, and then the flow proceeds to step S277.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S275 that a counter overflow has occurred (S275; YES), step S276 is skipped and the process jumps to step S277. The maximum storage number (for example, 255 for 1 byte size and 65,535 for 2 byte size) is determined by the size of the provided winning number counter area. If it exceeds that, the value returns to "0" and payment is made. A large amount of information on the number of prize balls should be lost. In order to avoid this, in step S274, the content of the area is not updated immediately, and after updating (+1) outside the area and confirming whether it becomes "0", the update is performed.

In step S277, in steps S277 to S280, the same processing as in the above steps S273 to S276 is executed for the winning number counter area 2. That is, first, the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded in step S277, and in the next step S278, the loaded winning number counter is updated (+1), and it is checked in step S279 whether or not overflow occurs. If it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S279; NO), the process proceeds to step S280 to save the updated value in the winning number counter area 2, and then proceeds to step S281.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S279 that the counter overflow has occurred (S279; YES), the process skips step S280 and jumps to step S281.
In step S281, the table address of the winning opening monitoring table is updated to the address of the next record. Next, in step S282, it is determined whether the monitoring processing of all the switches has been completed, and if it has been completed (step S282; YES). Ends the input number counter update processing, and if not completed (step S282; NO), returns to step S272 and repeats the above processing.

By the above processing, a prize ball corresponding to the winning is set.
More specifically, according to the processing of the first half (steps S273 to S276), the value of the winning number counter for the winning ball (transmission of the payout command) (that is, the value of the winning number counter area 1) is updated. This counter size is 2 bytes and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535.
Further, according to the processing of the latter half (steps S277 to S280), the value of the winning number counter for the main winning ball signal (that is, the value of the winning number counter area 2) is updated. This counter size is 1 byte and takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. The value of the winning number counter area 2 is used, for example, in the above-described step S155 for the main winning ball signal.

[Game machine status check processing]
Next, the gaming machine state check processing (step S233, step S236, step S239) in the above described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the gaming machine state check processing, first, a plurality of switches to be monitored for errors and a game corresponding to a state scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the switches or signals are to be monitored this time are to be monitored. An equipment status monitoring table is acquired (step S301).
Information defined on the gaming machine state monitoring table prepared in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process includes the following.
(B) Mask data for extracting only the bits of the signal of the lower address (c) of the port input state area of the switch control area in which the signal information of the lower address of the head address of the state monitoring area (b) is stored. ) Signal on judgment data (e) State off command (in the case of error, meaning of command to end error notification)
(F) Status ON command (in the case of an error, the meaning of the command to start error notification)
(G) Status off monitoring timer comparison value (h) Status on monitoring timer comparison value

Next, the state of the target switch acquired this time is checked, and it is determined whether the signal to be monitored (including the state of the switch) is on (step S302). Here, "signal is on" means an error (abnormal, illegal) state with respect to an error system, and a touched state (with the player's hand on the firing operation handle 11) with respect to the touch switch signal. Is in contact). Further, “signal is off” means a state in which an error is not an error (normal) for the error system, and a state in which the touch switch signal is not touched (the player's hand is on the firing operation handle 11). Contact state).
If the switch is not on (step S302: NO), a state-off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S303), and a target state-off command is acquired and prepared (step S304). After that, the target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S305), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S309).

On the other hand, when the signal is on (step S302: YES), a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step S306). For example, as one of the errors defined in the gaming machine state monitoring table, in the case of a shot ball running out, the shoot ball out switch detects that there is no game ball in the chute for supplying the game ball to the storage tank and turns on. Then, step S302 becomes YES. If YES, a state on flag is prepared in step S306.
Next, a target state ON command is prepared (step S307). After that, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S308), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S309).

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the current signal (step S309; YES), that is, if the state of the signal has not changed, the timer for determining whether or not an error treatment or the like is necessary is determined. Then, the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S312), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target status monitoring timer has reached a monitoring timer comparison value (a reference value for determining that an error treatment or the like is necessary) (step S312). Step S313). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the state of the current signal (step S309; NO), that is, if the state of the signal has changed, it is determined that it is not necessary to take action for an error yet, and the target signal is determined. The current signal status is saved in the control area (step S310), the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S311), the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S312), and the target status monitoring timer is updated. Is determined to have reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S313).

When the value of the target state monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S313; NO), the gaming machine state check processing ends. When the value of the target status monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S313: YES), the status monitoring timer is updated by −1 and kept at the value of the comparison value −1 (step S314) to prepare. The status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S315).
Here, when it is determined in step S313 that the target state monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, it is determined that the state of the signal (in the case of an error, the state of occurrence or cancellation of an error) is determined. Become. However, in the case of an error system, for example, there may be a situation in which the occurrence of an error is determined when an error has already occurred, or the cancellation of the error is determined when the error is not occurring. After the processing, in step S315, the prepared state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag area to check whether the state of the signal determined this time is the same as the state of the current error flag.

If the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (step S315; YES), it means that the status of the signal (error status in the case of an error) has not changed. , It is determined that there is no need for any action (correspondence to a change in the state of the signal), and the gaming machine state check processing ends. When the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (unless the state flags are the same) (step S315; NO), the state of the signal changes (changes to a new error state). Or the touch switch signal has changed from off to on or from on to off), and the prepared status flag is saved in the target status flag area (step S316), and the process proceeds to step S317. That is, the value of the target state flag area is changed to that of the signal state determined this time, and the process proceeds to step S317. In step S317, a command setting process is performed to set a command corresponding to the state of the signal determined this time. That is, processing is performed to transmit either the state-off command or the state-on command prepared above. As a result, a measure corresponding to the current signal state is performed. For example, if the shot is out of the ball, an error display notifying the fact is reported or released. After step S317, the gaming machine state check processing ends.
In this way, when a signal such as an error is turned on, a corresponding state on flag is set to prepare a state on command, and when a signal such as an error is turned off, a corresponding state off flag is set and a state off command is set. It is. In particular, in this gaming machine state check processing, not only ON of a signal (error occurrence or contact of the hand with the firing operation handle 11) is monitored, but signal OFF (error cancellation or firing operation) is not performed. The operation and the state of releasing the hand from the handle 11 are also monitored, so that the processing is common.
Note that such a gaming machine state check process is the same for other errors such as, for example, opening of a glass frame and opening of a front frame.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
Next, the payout busy signal check processing (step S240) in the above described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In this processing, first, the state of the above-mentioned payout busy signal from the payout control device 200 is checked by a corresponding flag, and it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is on (step S285).
If the payout busy signal is not on (step S285: NO), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S285), and a specified off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S285). S286), the value of the busy signal state area is compared with the state of the current signal (step S287).

  On the other hand, when the payout busy signal is on (step S302: YES), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S285a). Next, a prescribed ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S286a), and the value of the busy signal state area is compared with the state of the current busy signal (step S287). In this step S287, it is checked whether the same state continues for a plurality of interrupts.

If the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current busy signal (step S287; YES), that is, if the state of the busy signal has not changed, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S290). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the set monitoring timer comparison value (the OFF-determination monitoring timer comparison value or the ON-determination monitoring timer comparison value) (step S291).
If the value of the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current busy signal (step S287; NO), that is, if the state of the signal changes, the state of the current busy signal is saved in the busy signal control area. (Step S288) Then, the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (Step S289), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (Step S290), and the value of the busy signal monitoring timer reaches the set monitoring timer comparison value. It is determined whether the process has been performed (step S291).

When the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S291; NO), the payout busy signal check process ends. If the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S291: YES), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by −1 and kept at the value of the comparison value −1 (step S292) to prepare. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S293), and it is determined whether the prepared status flag indicates a busy status (step S294).
Here, when it is determined in step S291 that the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, it means that the state of the busy signal has been determined.

If the prepared state flag does not indicate the busy state (step S294; NO), the payout busy signal check process ends. If the prepared state flag indicates a busy state (step S294; YES), it means that the busy signal has changed from off to on, and the change is indicated by the ball lending operation of the player (ball lending button). The process proceeds to step 295 in order to determine whether the change is due to (operation of pressing 16).
In step S295, the data of the payout request flag (saved by the above-mentioned payout command transmission process) is loaded and then cleared (step S295). (Step S296).

If the payout request flag data includes the request flag (step S296; YES), the payout control device 200 is executing the prize ball payout operation requested by itself (the game control device 100), so that the busy state is performed. Therefore, the payout busy signal check process ends without executing steps S298 and S299 described later.
On the other hand, if the data of the payout request flag does not include the request flag (step S296; NO), there is a possibility that the player has performed the ball lending operation, and the error during which the busy signal turns on next is occurring. Is checked (step S297).

If an error that causes the busy signal to be turned on is occurring (step S297; YES), it is determined that the error is occurring and it is in a busy state, so that steps S298 and S299 to be described later are not executed. Then, the payout busy signal check processing ends.
On the other hand, when the error that the busy signal is turned on is not occurring (step S297; NO), it is determined that the ball lending operation of the player is performed (the busy signal is turned on by the ball lending operation of the player). Therefore, a ball lending button pressing command (a command indicating that the ball lending button 16 has been pressed and a ball lending operation has been performed) is prepared (step S298), and an effect command to transmit this command to the effect control device 200. The setting process is executed (step S299), and then the payout busy signal check process ends.

When the payout busy signal is turned on (busy), it is as already described in the description of the payout command transmission processing. Except during the occurrence of an error or an abnormality, the prize ball is being paid out or the ball lending operation is being performed. Medium (during the operation of paying out a ball). Therefore, to check the state of the payout request flag and whether an error in which the busy signal is turned on is occurring (e.g., a shot ball out error, an overflow error, or a payout abnormal status signal is in an on state), We can judge whether it is busy by lending.
Therefore, according to the payout busy signal check process, the state of the payout busy signal received from the payout control device 200 is checked, and data of a predetermined flag is set according to the state. It is determined whether or not the ball lending operation of the player (ball lending operation by pressing the ball lending button 16) is performed based on the state, and the ball lending is performed each time the ball lending operation of the player is performed. The button press command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the special figure game processing (step S78) in the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure game process, the input of the first starting port switch 120 and the second starting port switch 121 is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure changing display game is controlled, and the setting of the special figure display is performed.
In the special figure game process, first, in step S321, a starting port switch monitoring process of monitoring winning of the first starting port switch 120 and the second starting port switch 121 is performed.
In the starting port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 607, the special figure 2 starting port 608, or the starting winning port 26a, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number) are extracted and the winning is determined. At the stage before the start of the special figure change display game based on the special figure, the game result preliminary determination is performed to determine the game result based on the winning in advance. The details of the starting port switch monitoring process (step S321) will be described later.
Next, in step S322, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed. This is a process for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the special winning opening switch 124 provided in the variable winning device 27.

Next, in step S323, if the special figure game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated. Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is 0 (step S324). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is 0 (step S324; YES), that is, if the time is up or the time has already elapsed, the special figure referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number is referred to. A diagram game sequence branch table (a specific example is shown in the upper right of FIG. 22) is set in a register (step S325), and a branch destination address of a process corresponding to the special figure game process number is obtained using the table (step S326). . Then, a subroutine call is performed according to the game processing number (step S328).
In the special figure game processing timer, a timer value is set to a predetermined value in each of the processes (steps S329 to S339: corresponding to the process number = 0 to the process number = 10) after branching by the process number described later. Yes, it is set so that when the time of the special figure game processing timer expires, the timing at which step S329 and subsequent steps should be executed is reached. Accordingly, if it is time to execute step S325 and subsequent steps when step S323 is executed, the determination result in step S324 becomes positive, and steps S325 and later (including steps S340 to S343) are executed. . If it is not the time to execute steps S325 to S339 at the time when step S323 is executed, the result of the determination in step S324 is negative, and only steps S340 to S343 are executed.

  In the subroutine call based on the process number in step S328, the process number 0 goes to step S329 (the special figure ordinary process), the process number 1 goes to step S330 (the special figure changing process), and the process number 2 goes to step S331 (the special figure is being displayed). To step S332 (processing during fanfare / interval) with processing number 3, to step S333 (processing during opening of special winning opening) with processing number 4, and to step S334 (processing for remaining large winning opening ball) with processing number 5. The process number 6 goes to step S335 (big hit end process), the process number 7 goes to step S336 (small hit fanfare mid-process), the process number 8 goes to step S337 (small hit process), and the process number 9 goes to step S338 ( The process proceeds to step S339 (small hitting end process) with the process number 10 to the small hitting remaining ball process. The process number 0 is in the customer waiting state (during demonstration).

The specific contents of each process executed by the subroutine call at the process number are as follows.
In step S329 (special figure ordinary processing), when the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure starting memories that are suspended without executing the special figure fluctuation display game) is zero and the special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed, Processing for displaying the waiting state on the display device 41 is performed. In this special figure ordinary processing, processing for starting the next special figure variation display game (special figure variation start processing) is performed. In this special figure change start processing, the start memories of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are monitored, and if any of the special figure start memories are present, the corresponding change display (first or second change display) is started. (Such as setting of a fluctuation pattern command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300), and returns after setting the processing number to 1. When the number of reserved special figure is zero and the next special figure change display game is not executed, the process returns as it is (the processing number remains 0).

Next, in step S330 (process during special figure change), a process for variably displaying the special figure is performed until the change time set in the special figure change start processing elapses. Then, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, a process of transmitting a command (symbol stop command) for stopping the design of the special figure to the effect control device 300 is executed, and then the process number is set to 2 and the process returns.
Further, in step S331 (process during special figure display), a process for displaying the variable display result of the special figure for a fixed time (1 second to 2 seconds) is performed. If the game result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, the setting of a fan fare command according to the type of the big hit, the setting of the fan fare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, and the processing during the fan fare / interval Setting of information necessary for performing the above. Then, the process number is set to 3 for a big hit, the process number is set to 7 for a small hit, and the process number is set to 0 for a miss.

Next, in step S332 (fanfare / interval processing), a fanfare process for outputting a fanfare sound or the like from the speaker 12a or the like is executed immediately after the big hit, and an interval period display or the like is realized in the big hit interval period. Interval processing is executed, and the processing number is set to 4 at the timing when the winning opening of the variable winning device 27 is started. Here, setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the special winning opening, and the like are performed.
Next, step S333 (processing during opening of the special winning opening) is processing while the special winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27 and the second variable winning device 33 are opened. In this case, if the jackpot round is not the final round, an interval command is set, while if the jackpot round is the final round, an ending command is set, and information necessary for performing the winning prize opening remaining ball processing is set. . After the opening of the special winning opening, the processing number is set to 5.

Next, in step S334 (large winning opening residual ball processing), a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening or a jackpot ending process if the jackpot round is the last round is performed. The necessary information is set. Specifically, for example, a process of waiting for a certain period of time to reliably count the game balls that have entered the special winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27 just before the end of the opening of the special winning opening is performed. When the jackpot round remains, the processing number is set to 3, and when no jackpot round remains, the processing number is set to 6, and the process returns.
Next, in step S335 (big hit end process), information necessary for performing the special map ordinary process is set, the process number is returned to 0, and the process returns.

Next, in step S336 (small hit fanfare middle processing), the setting of the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, setting of the fanfare command, and small hit middle processing are performed.
Next, in step S337 (small hitting process), an ending command is set, information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process, and the like are set.

Next, in step S338 (small hit remaining ball processing), in order to perform processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls winning in the big winning opening during the small hit middle processing, and performing the small hit end processing. The necessary information is set.
Next, in step S339 (small hit end processing), information necessary for performing the special map ordinary processing is set, the processing number is returned to 0, and the routine returns.

Next, when any of the above-described processes corresponding to the process numbers is completed, the process proceeds to step S340, and a table for controlling the display of the special figure 1 on the collective display device 35 (the display of the special figure 1) (the special figure 1). 1 fluctuation control table), and in the next step S341, control processing (symbol fluctuation control processing) for the fluctuation display of this special figure 1 is performed.
Next, in step S342, a table (variable control table for special figure 2) for controlling the display of the special figure 2 on the collective display device 35 (display of the special figure 2) is prepared. A control process (symbol variation control process) for the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed, and then the process returns.
On the other hand, in step S324, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not “0” (step S324; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step S340, and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special figure change display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device is operated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory is used. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device is set (the accessory continuous operating device is operated). The condition device not operating means that the above-described flag is not set, for example, in a case where the small hit lottery is won. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag which is turned on / off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch which is turned on / off electrically. In addition, the "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to the present specification. May be used as a term having a meaning.

[Start port switch monitoring processing]
Next, the starting port switch monitoring processing (step S321) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the starting port switch monitoring processing, first, a winning monitoring table (starting port 1 winning monitoring table) of the first starting port (Tokuzu 1 starting port 607) is prepared (step S351), and a hard random number acquisition processing (step S352) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the first starting port (step S353). Here, the determination of the start winning prize in step S353 is performed based on, for example, information set in step S376 described later.
If it is determined in step S353 that there is no winning in the first starting port (step S353; N), the process proceeds to step S359, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S353 that there is a prize in the first starting opening (step S353; Y), during special figure time saving (general power support; low probability or high probability) ) Is determined (step S354).

If it is determined in step S354 that the special figure time is not working (step S354; N), the process proceeds to step S357, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S354 that the special figure time reduction is in progress (step S354; Y), a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step S355), and effect command setting processing (step S356) is performed. . That is, if it is a time saving state, a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step S355) and an effect command setting process (step S356) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure change display game. In the case of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the starting ports (starting port 607, starting port 608) of the starting port distributing device 600 do not win unless the player is left-handed. The winning opening (start winning opening 26a) does not win unless the player makes a right-hand operation. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the right-handed game is more advantageous than the left-handed game. However, when the first starting port (the special figure 1 starting port 607) has a prize during the time-saving state (that is, the time-saving state). In the case of a left-handed middle), a right-turn instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a notification (warning) for instructing right-handing is performed by the effect control device 300.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information of suspension by the first starting port (the special figure 1 starting port 607) (step S357), the special figure starting port switch common processing (step S358) is performed.

Next, a winning monitoring table (starting port 2 winning monitoring table) for the second starting port (start winning port 26a, special figure 2 starting port 608) is prepared (step S359), and a hard random number acquisition process (step S360) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the second starting port (step S361). Here, the determination of the start winning prize in step S361 is performed based on, for example, information set in step S376 described later. If it is determined in step S361 that there is no winning in the second starting port (step S361; N), the starting port switch monitoring process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S361 that there is a prize in the second starting port (step S361; Y), it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric accessory is in operation, that is, the ordinary variable winning device 26 It is determined whether or not the opening / closing member 26b is operated to be in an open state in which a game ball can be won (step S362), and if it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step S362; Y), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S364 to perform the subsequent processes. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S362 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step S362; N), it is determined whether or not a general power fraud is occurring (step S363).

  If it is determined in step S361 that there is a prize in the ordinary telephone prize, it is determined that there is a prize in the starting prize port 26a. Is greater than or equal to the fraud occurrence determination number (for example, five), it is determined that fraud is occurring. In the case of the present example, the normal variable winning device 26 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. If the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit), it is determined that fraud has occurred. If it is determined in step S361 that there is a prize, the prize is to the special figure 2 starting port 608 of the starting port distributing device 600. It is not in the middle (step S363; N).

  In step S363, if it is determined that unauthorized fraud has not occurred (step S363; N), a table for setting information of suspension by the second starting port (start winning port 26a, special figure 2 starting port 608) is prepared. (Step S364), the special figure starting port switch common processing (Step S365) is performed, and the starting port switch monitoring processing is ended. If it is determined in step S363 that an unauthorized fraud has occurred (step S363; Y), the startup opening switch monitoring process ends. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps S352 and S360) in the above-described start-up switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, among the first starting port (special figure 1 starting port 607) and the second starting port (starting winning port 26a, special figure 2 starting port 608), Is set (step S371), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitored start switch among the start 1 switch 120 and the start 2 switch 121 (step S372). . If there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step S372; N), the hard random number acquisition processing ends. On the other hand, if there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step S372; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step S373), and it is determined whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step S374). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step S374; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step S374; Y), the extracted jackpot random numbers are loaded into the hard random number latch register to be monitored and prepared (step S375). Then, the winning entry information of the monitoring target starting port is set from the first starting port and the second starting port (step S376), and the hard random number acquiring process is ended.
The extracted value of the jackpot random number prepared in step S375 is used in the special figure starting port switch common processing executed after returning.

[Tokuzu start switch common processing]
Next, the special figure starting port switch common processing (steps S358 and S365) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing will be described with reference to FIG.
The special process start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 120 or the start port 2 switch 121.

  In the special figure starting port switch common processing, first, the information regarding the number of winnings to the monitoring target starting port switch of the starting port 1 switch 120 and the starting port 2 switch 121 is transmitted to the external management device of the gaming machine 1. The start port signal output count, which is the output count, is loaded (step S381), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S382), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step S383). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step S383; N), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output number area of the RWM (step S384), and the process proceeds to step S385. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step S383; Y), the process proceeds to step S385. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output count area. When the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows. For this reason, here, the configuration is such that if the loop becomes “0” due to the update, step S384 is skipped and the save is not performed.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations (starting storage) corresponding to the monitored start-up switch among the start-up 1 switch 120 and the start-up 2 switch 121 is less than the upper limit (step S385). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step S385; N), a start-up over winning command corresponding to the target start-up switch is prepared (step S399), and effect command setting processing (step S398). Is performed, and the common process for the special figure starting port switch ends. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step S385; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is updated by +1 ( In step S386, the target starting port winning flag is saved (step S387). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step S388), and the big hit random number prepared in step S375 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM ( Step S389). Next, a jackpot symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step S390), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step S391). The extracted value of the jackpot symbol random number prepared in step S390 is used in the special figure suspension information determination processing.

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning is to the first starting port (the special figure 1 starting port 607) (step S392).
If it is determined in step S392 that the winning is not to the first starting port (step S392; N), the process proceeds to step S395.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S392 that the winning is to the first starting port (step S392; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step S393), and the small hit symbol of the RWM is prepared. The data is saved in the random number storage area (step S394). The extracted value of the small hit symbol random number prepared in step S393 is used in the special figure suspension information determination processing.

Next, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step S395), and the special figure reservation information determination processing (step S396) is performed.
Next, a start-up switch to be monitored and a decoration special-drawing hold number command corresponding to the special-drawing hold number are prepared (step S397), an effect command setting process (step S398) is performed, and the special-drawing start switch common processing is performed. finish.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 101C) has a start winning area (starting port 607, special figure 2 starting port 608) of the starting port distributing apparatus 600 and a starting winning area (starting area) of the normal variable winning apparatus 26. On the basis of the inflow of the game ball into the winning opening 26a), a predetermined winning random number is extracted, and a starting winning storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as starting memory which is a right to execute the variable display game. The start winning storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of game balls into the first start port (special figure 1 start port 607) in a first start up to a predetermined number. Various random numbers extracted based on winning of game balls to the second starting port (start winning port 26a, special figure 2 starting port 608) are stored as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit. .

[Special figure pending information judgment processing]
Next, the special figure holding information determination processing (step S396) in the above-described special figure starting port switch common processing will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure suspension information determination processing is a look-ahead processing for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 26, first, the starting port winning flag saved in step S387 of the special figure starting port switch common processing is checked to determine whether or not the first starting port (special figure 1 starting port 607) has been won. Is determined (step S401).
If it is determined in step S401 that the winning is not to the first starting port (step S401; N), the process proceeds to step S404.
On the other hand, in step S401, when it is determined that the winning is to the first starting port (step S401; Y), it is determined whether the special figure is on time (step S402).

If it is determined in step S402 that the special figure is being reduced (step S402; Y), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the special figure is not working (step S402; N), it is determined whether a large hit or a small hit is in progress (step S403).
If it is determined in step S403 that a big hit or a small hit is being made (step S403; Y), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends.
On the other hand, in step S403, when it is determined that the big hit is not being performed or the small hit is not being made (step S403; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is a big hit based on whether or not the big random number value matches the big hit determination value. A big hit determination process (step S404) is performed. If the result of the determination is a big hit (step S405; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start-up switch is set (step S406), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step S390 is set. The stop symbol information is acquired (Step S407), and the process proceeds to Step S414.

On the other hand, when the result of the determination is not a big hit (step S405; N), it is determined whether or not the first start port (the special figure 1 start port 607) has been won (step S408).
If it is determined in step S408 that the winning is not to the first opening (step S408; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step S413), and the process proceeds to step S414.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S408 that the winning is to the first starting port (step S408; Y), it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value to determine whether the small hit is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step S409) for determining whether or not the small hit is performed. If the result of the determination is not a small hit (step S410; N), the stop symbol information for the loss is set (step S413), and the process proceeds to step S414.
On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step S410; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step S411), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step S393 is set. After acquiring (step S412), the process proceeds to step S414.

  Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step S414), and effect command setting processing is performed (step S415). Next, special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed (step S416), and fluctuation pattern setting processing for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed (step S416). S417).

  Thereafter, a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step S418), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step S419), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends. Note that the special figure information setting processing in step S416 and the fluctuation pattern setting processing in step S417 are the same as the processing executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary processing.

  With the above processing, a pre-reading symbol command including the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the pre-reading target and a pre-reading fluctuation pattern command including the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared. Then, it is transmitted to effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (pre-read result) of the result-related information (whether a big hit or a variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is rendered before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start storage display displayed on the display device 41, and to provide the player with the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure change display game. It becomes possible to inform.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage device (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judge whether or not). In addition, the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning where the start memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Grand prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step S322) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening (the variable winning device 27) is being opened (step S421). If it is not during the special winning opening process (step S421; NO), it is determined whether the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step S422).
If the special winning port remaining ball is not being processed (step S422; NO), it is determined whether or not the small hitting medium is being processed (step S423).
If the small hit is not being processed (step S423; NO), it is determined whether the small hit remaining sphere is being processed (step S424). If the small hit remaining ball is not being processed (step S424; NO), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends.

Then, when the special winning opening is being processed (step S421; YES), when the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step S422; YES), and when the small winning opening is being processed (step S423; YES). , And if the small hit remaining ball is being processed (step S424; YES), the process proceeds to step S425.
Here, each determination in steps S421 to S424 is checked by the value of the special figure game processing number. Since the process number does not shift to the next time until the special figure game processing timer reaches 0, the progress of the game can be checked.

Next, 0 is set to a winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the special winning opening added in the current special winning opening switch monitoring process (step S425). The winning counter is a counter provided to count the number of balls entered in one round opening of the special winning opening and to add the counted number to the special winning opening count in the process of step S437 described later.
Next, it is determined whether there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (one of the special winning opening switches 124) (step S426).

If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (step S426; YES), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step S427), the effect command setting processing (step S428) is performed, and the winning counter is updated by +1 (step S428). Step S429), and proceed to step S430. When there is no input to the special winning opening switch 1 (step S425; NO), the process proceeds to step S430.
In step 430, it is determined whether there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 124) (step S430). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step S430; YES), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step S431), the effect command setting process (step S432) is performed, and the winning counter is updated by +1 (step S432). S433), and proceeds to step S434. If there is no input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step S430; NO), the process proceeds to step S434.

  In step 434, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step S434). If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step S434; NO), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step S435). If the large winning prize remaining ball is not being processed (step S435; NO), it is determined whether the small hit remaining ball is being processed (step S436). If the small hit remaining ball is not being processed (step S436; NO), the value of the winning counter is added to the large winning opening count (step S437). This is because when a ball is won in the special winning opening, a command indicating that the ball has been won is transmitted to the payout control device 200 and counted by the winning counter (steps S429 and S433). Is added to the special winning opening count in step S437. Here, the value of the winning counter for the special winning opening switch 1 or the special winning opening switch 2 is added to the large winning opening count.

On the other hand, when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step S434; YES), when the large winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step S435; YES), and when the small hit remaining ball is being processed (step S436; YES). ), The special winning opening switch monitoring process ends.
Next, after step S437, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening count is equal to or more than an upper limit value (corresponding to the number of game balls that can be won in one round: for example, 9) (step S438).

If the special winning opening count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step S438; NO), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If the special winning opening count is equal to or more than the upper limit (step S438; YES), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (step S439), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step S439). S440), it is determined whether the small hitting process is being performed (step S441).
If it is not during the small hitting process (step S441; NO), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If the small hitting process is being performed (step S441; YES), the value of the small hit opening operation end is saved in the special winning opening control pointer area (step S442), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round ends.

(Tokuzu usual processing)
Next, details of the special figure ordinary processing (step S329) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure ordinary process, first, it is checked whether or not the number of reserved special figure 2 (the number of second start storages) is 0 (step S461).
If it is determined that the number of reserved special figure 2 is 0 (step S461; YES), it is determined whether the number of reserved special figure 1 (first startup storage number) is 0 (step S466). If it is determined that the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (step S466; YES), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step S471). If the customer waiting demonstration has not been started (step S471; NO) saves the customer waiting demonstration flag in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step S472).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step S473), effect command setting processing (step S474) is performed, special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step S475) is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends. . On the other hand, when the customer waiting demonstration has been started in step S471 (step S471; YES), the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step S475) is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends. The details of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 1 (step S475) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not “0” in step S461 (step S461; NO), special figure 2 change start processing (step S462) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is performed. The number-of-reservation command is prepared (step S463), and effect command setting processing (step S464) is performed. Then, a special figure changing process transition setting processing (step S465) of the special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends.
If the number of special figure 1 reservations is not “0” in step S466 (step S466; NO), special figure 1 change start processing (step S467) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations is performed. The number-of-reservations command is prepared (step S468), and effect command setting processing (step S469) is performed. Then, a special figure changing process transition setting processing of the special figure 1 (step S470) is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends.

  As described above, the special figure 2 reservation number is checked before the special figure 1 reservation number is checked, and if the special figure 2 reservation number is not “0”, the special figure 2 change start process (step S462). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure change display game is executed prior to the first special figure change display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the game controller 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display game based on the first start memory. The priority control means performs the priority control over the game.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, details of the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step S475) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step S481, “0” is set as the process number (for example, a table for shifting to the special figure ordinary process is prepared, and the process number “0” related to the special figure ordinary process is stored in the table. Is set), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area in step S482.
Next, in step S483, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared, and in step S484, the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area. After step S484, the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 1 ends.
Thereby, various data for shifting to the special figure ordinary processing, for example, the processing number “0” related to the special figure ordinary processing is set, and the flag (large winning opening illegality monitoring information) defining the special winning opening illegality monitoring period is set. A process for setting is performed.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 change start processing (step S467) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
The special figure 1 change start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure change display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, first, the type of the special figure change display game to be executed (here, the special figure change display game is executed). The special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating FIG. 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step S491), and information or deviation from the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit is obtained. A jackpot flag 1 setting process for setting information (step S492) is performed. The details of the big hit flag 1 setting process in step S492 will be described later.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S493) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed. An information setting process (step S494) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which various information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game are set. (Step S495). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step S496) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting processing for setting fluctuation start information of the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed. (Step S497) is performed, and the special figure 1 change start process ends.
The details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing in step S493, the special figure information setting processing in step S494, the fluctuation pattern setting processing in step S496, and the fluctuation start information setting processing in step S497 will be described later.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 change start processing (step S462) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
The special figure 2 change start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure change display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, first, the type of the special figure change display game to be executed (here, The special figure 2 change flag indicating FIG. 2) is saved in the change symbol discrimination area (step S491a), and the big hit flag 2 for discriminating whether or not the second special figure change display game is a big hit is information or a big hit. A big hit flag 2 setting process for setting information (step S492a) is performed. The details of the big hit flag 2 setting process in step S492a will be described later.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S493a) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed. An information setting process (step S494a) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game are set. (Step S495a). After that, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step S496a) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting processing for setting fluctuation start information of the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed. (Step S497a) is performed, and the special figure 2 change start process ends.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (step S492) in the above-described special figure 1 change start process will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag area (step S501), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step S502). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) of the RWM and prepared (step S503), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) is cleared to 0. (Step S504). The storage number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the first special figure 1). Then, a big hit determination process (step S505) is performed to determine whether or not the big hit is determined according to whether or not the prepared big random number value matches the big hit determination value.

  If the result of the jackpot determination process (step S505) is a jackpot (step S506; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the outlier information was saved in step S502 (step S507). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination process (step S505) is not a big hit (step S506; N), whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not is a small hit or not. Is performed (step S508).

  If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step S508) is a small hit (step S509; Y), the small hit information is overwritten on the small hit flag area where the loss information was saved in step S501, and saved. (Step S510), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the small hit determination process (step S508) is not a small hit (step S509; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed while the loss information is saved in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special figure change display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (step S492a) in the above-described special figure 2 change start process will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step S502a). Next, a big hit random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) of the RWM (step S503a), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0. (Step S504a). Then, a big hit determination process (step S505a) for determining whether or not the big hit is a big hit according to whether or not the prepared big random number value matches the big hit determination value is performed.

  If the result of the jackpot determination process (step S505a) is a jackpot (step S506a; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the outlier information was saved in step S502a (step S507a). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (step S505a) is not a jackpot (step S506a; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process ends while saving the information on the jackpot flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure change display game is one of “big hit” and “missing”.

[Big hit determination process]
Next, details of the big hit determination processing executed in steps S505 and S505a in the big hit flag 1 setting processing and the big hit flag 2 setting processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, a process of setting a lower limit determination value for determining a big hit is performed in step S511. Thereafter, in step S512, it is checked whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value. That is, the value of the jackpot random number read in steps S503 and S503a is equal to the lower limit value of the hit determination value of the jackpot random number. Check if it is less than.
The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit determination value that is the lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than the upper limit determination value that is the upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. , Is determined to be a big hit.
If it is determined in step S512 that the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value, the flow branches to step S517, where a loss (meaning other than the big hit) is set as the determination result, and the process returns.

On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value in step S512, the process proceeds to step S513 to determine whether the probability is high. This is to determine whether the big hit probability is high due to the probability change, that is, whether the probability of the hit result in the special figure change display game is in the high probability state (probability change state). It is to judge. If it is during the high probability, in step S514, a process of setting an upper limit determination value for the jackpot determination during the high probability is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S516.
If it is determined in step S513 that the probability is not high, the process branches to step S515 to perform a process of setting an upper limit determination value for determining a big hit while the probability is low, and then proceeds to step S516.
In this way, when the upper judgment value during the high probability and the lower judgment value during the low probability are set, if the value of the target big hit random number is between the lower judgment value and the upper judgment value (zone), the big hit is determined. You can judge.
Therefore, in step S516, it is checked whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (whether or not the upper limit judgment value is exceeded), and in step S516, it is judged that the big hit random number value is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S516). ; YES), it can be determined that the hit is not a big hit, so the flow advances to step S517 to set a loss as a result of the determination, and returns.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S516 that the value of the target jackpot random number is equal to or smaller than the upper limit determination value (not exceeding the upper limit determination value) (step S516; NO), the value of the target jackpot random number is determined to be the lower limit determination value and the upper limit determination. During the period (zone) between the values, a big hit is determined, and a big hit is set as a result of the determination in step S518, and the process returns.

[Small hit determination processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination processing executed in step S508 and the like in the above-described big hit flag 1 setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. Here, "step A" is used as the step number.
In the small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A11). Note that the small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. That is, a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or larger than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or smaller than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit has occurred. Of course, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value are set so as not to be covered.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A11; Y), that is, if the big hit is a miss, a miss is set as the judgment result (step A13), and the small hit judgment processing ends.
When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (Step A11; N), the small hit upper limit judgment value is set, and it is determined whether the target big hit random number value is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value. (Step A12).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A12; Y), that is, if the big hit is a miss, a miss is set as the judgment result (step A13), and the small hit judgment processing ends.
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A12; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step A14), and the small hit judgment processing ends. I do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (step S493) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step S521). ) Is loaded with a jackpot symbol random number (step S522). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step S523), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step S524). Here, the information defined on the special figure 1 big hit symbol table includes the following.
-Judgment value of random number (indicating distribution rate)
Stop Symbol Number Corresponding to Judgment Value The stop symbol number is used to set a stop symbol on a special figure display (here, a seven-segment special figure 1 display on the collective display device 35).

  Thereafter, a special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step S525), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S526). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 1 display) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained, saved in the round number upper limit information area (step S527), and the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained, and the time reduction determination is performed. It is saved in the data area (step S528), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step S529). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. In the case of the present embodiment, the effect mode shifts at the timing of the hit, and the shift destination of the effect mode to shift to after the end of the hit changes according to the type of the hit symbol (the type of the big hit symbol or the small hit). In addition, when a specific big hit symbol (for example, a 4R surely changing design) among the big hits in the special map 1 is used, the effect mode of the transition destination is determined to be a certain change depending on whether or not the game state is being changed. It is determined whether or not to enter the effect mode, or to shift to the effect mode in which it is difficult to discriminate whether the change is a positive change or not. Then, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S538).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step S521; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step S530). If the big hit is a small hit (step S531; Y), the special figure 1 The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step S531). Next, a special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step S532), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stopped symbol number area (step S533).
After that, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S534), and effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step S535). Then, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S538).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step S530; N), the stop symbol number at the time of a loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step S536), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stored in the stop symbol pattern area. Save (step S537), and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step S538). There are, for example, 11 types of decorative special figure commands, and the special figure type in the effect control device 300 can be determined based on the difference of these types. By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step S539), and effect command setting processing (step S540) is performed. The decoration special figure command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step S541), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step S542). The small hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step S543), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (step S493a) in the above-described special figure 2 change start processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step S551). ) Is loaded with a jackpot symbol random number (step S552). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step S553), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stopped symbol number area (step S554). Here, the information defined on the special figure 2 big hit symbol table includes the following.
-Judgment value of random number (indicating distribution rate)
Stop Symbol Number Corresponding to Judgment Value The stop symbol number is used to set a stop symbol on a special figure display (here, a 7-segment special figure 2 display in the collective display device 35).

  Thereafter, a special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step S555), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S556). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained, saved in the round number upper limit information area (step S557), and the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained, and the time reduction determination is performed. It is saved in the data area (step S558), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step S559). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, in the big hit in the special map 2, the effect mode of the transition destination is a special effect mode in which the change in probability is determined for any of the big hit symbols. Then, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S562).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step S551; N), the stop symbol number at the time of a loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step S560), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S562). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step S563),
An effect command setting process (step S564) is performed. The decoration special figure command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step S565), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step S566). The two-stop symbol setting process ends.

  That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start port (the special figure 1 start port 607), and executes the second start port (start winning port). 26a, a variable display game executing means for executing the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the special figure 2 start port 608). In addition, the game control device 100 forms a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure information setting processing executed in steps S494 and S494a in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing and special figure 2 change start processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the case of the present embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with / without time reduction) does not affect the distribution of the fluctuation, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of the fluctuation. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes according to the probability state, the presence or absence of the time reduction state, the progress of the special figure change display game, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 36, in the special figure information setting process, first, a first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step S571), and a first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step S572).
Next, a first-half variation group selection offset table is set (step S573), and offset data corresponding to the target number of reserved special figures and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step S574).
Next, the first-half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step S575), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 1 area (step S576). As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the fluctuation distribution information 1 generated based on the type of the stop symbol, the number of suspensions, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating a first half fluctuation (a fluctuation mode before the start of reach), and is used for selecting a fluctuation group later. However, depending on the specifications of the model, when the number of reservations is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of out-of-office. In other cases, the number of reservations does not affect the distribution of the first-half fluctuation. Note that a fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns. When determining a fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Next, a second half variable group selection pointer table is set (step S577), and a second half variable group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step S578).
Next, a second half variation group selection offset table is set (step S579), and offset data corresponding to the target number of reserved special figures and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step S580).
Next, the second-half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step S581), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step S582), and the special figure information setting process ends. As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area, the fluctuation distribution information 2 generated based on the type of the stop symbol, the number of suspensions, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter fluctuation (the type of reach (including no reach)) and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the rate of occurrence of reach changes according to the number of holds only in the case of misses (the rate of occurrence of reach decreases when the number of holds is large). Does not affect

[Variation pattern setting processing]
Next, details of the fluctuation pattern setting processing executed in steps S496 and S496a in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG.
The change pattern is a first half change pattern that is a change mode from the start of the special figure change display game to the reach state, and a second half change pattern that is a change mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure change display game. The first half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  In this variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step S591), an address of the second half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is obtained and prepared (step S592), and the target The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared (step S593). In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half change group table is different between the hit and non-hit types. Specifically, the hitting data has a 1-byte size and the hitting data has a 2-byte size. The rate of occurrence per hit is lower than the rate of occurrence of losing, and even one byte is sufficient. Therefore, from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity, the size of the hit is one byte. Therefore, at the time of hit, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the occurrence rate of outliers is higher than the occurrence rate of hits, and in order to make more diverse effects appear, the size of outliers is 2 bytes.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is a miss (step S594). If the result is a miss (step S594; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step S595) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S597. Move on to processing. If it is not a loss (step S594; N), a distribution process (step S596) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S597.

  Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is obtained and prepared (step S597), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1), Prepare (step S598). Then, a distribution process (step S599) is performed, a second-half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and saved in the second-half variation number area (step S600). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

  Next, a first half variation group table is set (step S601), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (step S602). Then, an address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step S603), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1), and is prepared. (Step S604). Thereafter, a distribution process (step S605) is performed, the first variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained, saved in the first variation number area (step S606), and the variation pattern setting process ends. By this processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 forms a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from a plurality of variations.

[Change start information setting process]
Next, the details of the change start information setting processing executed in steps S497 and S497a in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing and special figure 2 change start processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step S611). Next, a first half fluctuation time value table is set (step S612), and a first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step S613). Further, a second half variation time value table is set (step S614), and a second half variation time value corresponding to the second half variation number is obtained (step S615).

  Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step S616), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S617). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step S618), and a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step S619), and effect command setting processing is performed (step S620). ). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (step S621), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is set (step S622). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step S623), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step S624), and the change start information setting processing ends.

  Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure change display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 forms a determination unit that determines various random numbers stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory. In steps S621 to S624, the oldest (starting winning order is the special order of special figures (special figure 1 or special figure 2) corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag) among the special figure reservations (special figure starting storage). With the execution of the special figure change display game related to the special figure reservation 1 (earliest), the special figure reservation 2 which is on hold after the special figure reservation 1 (the special figure reservation whose starting winning order is the earliest). A process for moving up the ranks of 1 to 4 one by one (a process for a so-called hold shift; a shift process) is performed. By this processing, for example, the value from the special figure reserved number 2 to the special figure reserved number 4 in the special random number storage area of the special figure is changed from the special figure reserved number 1 to the special figure reserved number 3 in the per random number storage area. Will move. Then, the value for the special figure reservation number 4 in the hit random number storage area is cleared, and the special figure reservation number is decremented by one. In other words, the execution of the variable display game corresponding to the oldest start memory (start memory with the earliest start prize) among the held start memories causes the order of the remaining start memories (start prize). The order is incremented by one, and the number of special figure reservations is changed to a value smaller by one. This shift process is executed for each type of special figure (that is, separately for the start storage of the special figure 1 and the start storage of the special figure 2).

  Then, the information on the start of the special figure change display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined change pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special figure change display game. Set the details of the effect in the decoration special figure change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure change display game includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information regarding the number of storages to be started (the number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information regarding a stop symbol, and a change in the special figure change display game. A fluctuation command including information on the pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of the stop time are given, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the change command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Transition setting during special figure fluctuation (Special figure 1)]
Next, the details of the special figure change processing transition setting processing (special figure 1) (step S470) in the above described special figure ordinary processing will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
When the routine starts, “1” (corresponding to the processing number relating to the special figure change processing) is set as the processing number in step S631, and the processing number (here, “1”) is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S632. Save. Next, in step S633, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared, and in step S634, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 change is saved in the test signal output data area. By this step S634, the special symbol 1 changing signal is turned on.
Next, in step S635, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area, and in step S636, the blinking control timer (special figure 1 display which is an LED segment in the collective display device 35) is stored in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. The initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the timer of the lamp blinking cycle is saved, and the routine ends.
In this way, the processing for shifting to the special figure changing processing is performed for the special figure 1.

[Transition setting process during special figure fluctuation (Special figure 2)]
Next, the details of the special figure change processing transition setting processing (special figure 2) (step S465) in the special figure ordinary processing will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
When the routine starts, “1” (corresponding to the processing number related to the special figure changing processing) is set as the processing number in step S641, and the processing number (here, “1”) is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S642. Save. Next, in step S643, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared, and in step S644, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 change is saved in the test signal output data area. By this step S644, the special symbol 2 changing signal is turned on.
Next, in step S645, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area, and in step S646, the blinking control timer (special figure 2 display which is an LED segment in the collective display device 35) is stored in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. The initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the timer of the lamp blinking cycle is saved, and the routine ends.
In this way, the processing for shifting to the special figure changing processing is performed for the special figure 2.

(Processing during special figure fluctuation)
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step S330) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure changing process, first, a display time corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is set (step S651), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S652). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a lost symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and when the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time. If the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time.
Next, a special figure displaying process shift setting process (step S653) is performed, and the special figure displaying process ends. That is, the game control device 100 forms a stop time setting unit that sets a stop time for displaying a stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Transition setting processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process transition setting process (step S653) in the special figure changing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “2” (corresponding to the processing number related to the processing during special figure display) is set in step S661, and the processing number (here, “2”) is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S662. Save. Next, in step S663, the signal relating to the special figure 1 fluctuation end processing is saved in the test signal output data area (that is, the signal during the special symbol 1 fluctuation is turned off), and in step S664 the signal relating to the special figure 2 fluctuation end processing is converted into a test signal. Save in the output data area (that is, turn off the special symbol 2 changing signal).
Next, in step S665, the control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol determination count signal control timer area. After that, in step S666, the special figure 1 change control flag area includes special information as control information of the special figure 1 change display game on the special figure 1 display (the special figure 1 display which is an LED segment in the collective display device 35). The stop flag relating to the fluctuation stop in the display of FIG. 1 is saved, and in step S667, the stop flag is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG.
In this way, the processing for shifting to the special figure displaying processing is performed.

[Processing during special map display]
Next, details of the special figure displaying process (step S331) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the special figure display processing, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 change start processing is loaded (step S681), and the small hit flag area of the RWM is cleared (step S681). S682) is performed.
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 change start processing and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting processing in the special figure 2 change start processing are loaded. (Step S683), a process of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM (step S684). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step S685). If it is determined that the big hit is a big hit (step S685; Y), the big hit (the special figure 2 big hit) of the second special figure variable display game is started. (For example, turning on the condition device operating signal, turning on the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, turning on the special symbol 2 hit signal) in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step S688), A round number upper limit value table is set (step S689).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S685 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot as a result of the check of the jackpot flag 2 (step S685; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step S686), and it is a jackpot (step S686). If it is determined to be S686; Y), a test signal (for example, a signal during the operation of the condition device is turned ON, a signal during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is turned on, The signal per special symbol (ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step S687), and a process of setting a round number upper limit value table (step S689) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step S689), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained, and the RWM is obtained. (Step S690). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step S691).

  Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step S692), and effect command setting processing (step S693) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command relating to information for setting the probability of a winning result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step S694), and the production command setting processing is performed. (Step S695) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step S696), and the effect command setting process (step S696). S697) is performed.

Next, the special winning opening opening information indicating the big hit pattern and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a winning result in the ordinary figure change display game and the special figure change display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step S698). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S698, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is ON when a big hit with a payout (a big win opening information other than the big win opening information 1) is ON, and a big hit without a payout (a so-called sudden big hit, etc., big win opening). When the information is the special winning opening information 1), it is ON when a big hit occurs during the time saving state, and is OFF otherwise.
Also, the big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit has a payout, and is OFF when the big hit has no payout.
The special winning opening opening information will be described later in the description of the fanfare / interval processing.

  Thereafter, the special winning opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of a winning result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. It is set (step S699), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S700). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step S701). As a result, information on the probability state and the time saving state of the special map when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 27) corresponding to the special winning opening information is cleared (step S702), and the special winning opening corresponding to the special winning opening information is cleared. The flag outside the unauthorized monitoring period is saved in the mouth unauthorized monitoring period flag area (step S703). Then, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step S704) is performed, and the special figure display processing ends.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step S686 (step S686; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step S725).
When it is determined in step S725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step S725; Y), the process of updating the number of high-probability fluctuations (step S726), the effect mode information check process regarding the effect mode setting (step S727) ) To determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure change display game is the high probability state (step S728).

If it is determined in step S728 that the special figure is not in the high probability state (step S728; N), the decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area and prepared (step S729), and the production command setting is performed. The processing (step S730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step S731), an effect command setting process (step S732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S733.
If it is determined in step S728 that the special figure is in the high probability state (step S728; Y), the process proceeds to step S733. As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure change display game is the high probability state, the small winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is determined by the game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed so as not to make the user aware.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step S733). After that, the small hit fanfare mid-process shift setting process 1 (step S734) is performed, and the special figure displaying process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step S725; N), the high-probability variation count updating process (step S735), the effect mode information check process regarding the effect mode setting (step S735) S736) is performed to set the remaining number of revolutions for switching preparation corresponding to the effect mode number (step S737), and it is determined whether the remaining number of revolutions for production matches the remaining number of revolutions for switching preparation (step S738). It should be noted that the switching preparation remaining rotation speed may be a different value (rotation speed) in all of the plurality of effect modes, or may be the same value in any of the plurality of effect modes. (The number of rotations) or the same value (the number of rotations) in all the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes.
If it is determined in step S738 that the effect remaining rotation speed does not match the switching preparation remaining rotation speed (step S738; N), the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step S741) is performed, and the special figure display is performed. The middle processing ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S738 that the effect remaining rotation speed matches the switching preparation remaining rotation speed (step S738; Y), an effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step S739), and the effect command setting is performed. After performing the processing (step S740), the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step S741) is performed, and the processing during displaying the special figure ends. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing a prefetch effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is effected across modes. Can be avoided.

[High probability fluctuation frequency update processing]
Next, the details of the high-probability-variation-number updating process executed in steps S726 and S735 in the above-described special figure displaying process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the high probability change frequency update process, it is determined whether the special figure high probability is being executed (the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is high probability) (step S751). The update processing ends.
On the other hand, if the special figure high probability is in progress (step S751; Y), the number of times of high probability fluctuation is updated by -1 (step S752), and it is determined whether the number of times of high probability fluctuation is “0” (step S753). The number of times of high probability change means the number of times the special figure change display game is performed during the special figure high probability (that is, during the probability change mode) (the number of special figure rotations during the special figure certainty change). An initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of times of high probability fluctuation in the jackpot end setting processes 1 and 2 described below.
If the number of times of high probability fluctuation is not “0” (step S753; N), the process of updating times of high probability fluctuation is ended.

If the high-probability change count is “0” (step S753; Y), the high-probability notification flag area is cleared (step S754), and a signal relating to the high-probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step S755). I do. In step S755, specifically, two big hit signals are turned off.
Next, a signal relating to the end of the high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step S756). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal is turned off, and the ordinary symbol 1 high probability The state signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is turned off, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned off. In the high probability mode, there are states of “high probability & time saving” (special figure high probability with general power support) and “high probability & time saving no” (special figure high probability with no general power support).

Subsequently, the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step S757), the low probability and no time reduction flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (step S758), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. The special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved (step S759), and a signal related to the left-handing instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step S760).
Thereafter, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the left-handed state number is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step S761), and the high-probability variation count updating process ends.

  By the above-described high probability change frequency updating process, the high probability change frequency update (update in which the high probability change frequency is reduced by 1 every time the special figure fluctuation display game is performed) is performed, and when the high probability change frequency becomes “0”, Various settings for terminating the probable change mode are performed. For this reason, the special figure probability change ends when the special figure turns around, for example, 100 times even if a big hit does not occur, and the public telephone support (short time for the general figure) performed at the same time as the special figure probability change ends with the special figure probability change. However, the probability change mode is ended at the time when a big hit occurs. As can be seen from the above-described high probability change frequency update process, switching of the game state of the special figure (at least switching of the state of the big hit probability of the special figure) and switching of the game state of the normal figure (state in which the normal power support is performed) And switching to a state in which the public telephone support is not performed) are performed in conjunction with each other in the present embodiment.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, details of the effect mode information check processing executed in steps S727 and S736 in the above-described special figure displaying processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the effect mode information check processing, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a code without update (step S771). If the next mode transition information is the no-update code (step S771; YES), the effect mode information check processing ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed in accordance with the number of executed special figure change display games. is there.

  If the next mode transition information is not the no-update code (step S771; NO), the effect remaining rotation speed, which is the number of times the special figure variable display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step S772). Then, it is determined whether or not the effect remaining rotation speed has become 0 (step S773). If the effect remaining rotation speed has become “0” (step S773; YES), that is, if the effect mode is to be changed from the next special figure variation display game, an effect mode information address table is set (step S774). The address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information is obtained (step S775).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be shifted is obtained and saved in the effect mode number area of the RWM (step S776). Then, the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step S778).
Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step S779), and it is determined whether the prepared command is the same as the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step S780). If the prepared command is the same as the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step S780; Y), the effect mode information check processing ends. This is to prevent the command from being sent to the effect control device 300 if the state of the probability does not change, thereby simplifying the operation.

On the other hand, if the prepared command is not the same as the value in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step S780; N), the command prepared in step S779 is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step S781), and the effect command The setting process (step S782) is performed, and an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed of the new effect mode to be shifted (the effect remaining rotation speed newly set in step S777) is prepared (step S783). A command setting process (step S784) is performed.
Next, following step S784, a high probability change number command corresponding to the high probability change number (updated as necessary in the high probability change number update process executed in steps S726 and S735) is prepared (step S784). (S785), effect command setting processing (step S786) is performed, and it is determined whether the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step S787). If the new effect mode is not the left-handed mode (step S787; N), the effect mode information check process ends.

If the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step S787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step S788), and effect command setting processing (step S789) is performed. The check processing ends.
As described above, by controlling the effect mode by the game control device 100, for example, control such as generating a specific reach only in the specific effect mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step S704) in the above-described special figure display processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “3” (corresponding to the processing number related to the fanfare / interval processing) is set in step S801 as the processing number, and the processing number (here, “3”) is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S802. Save. Next, in step S803, a signal relating to the start of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area, and in step S804, a signal relating to the end of the high probability and time saving is saved in the test signal output data area.
Here, in step S803, one big hit signal (a signal that turns on with a big hit + a small hit) is turned on, and four big hit signals (a signal that turns on with a big hit) are turned on. In step S804, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol is turned off. The 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is turned off, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned off. During the big hit (during the special game state), the special figure is set to the normal state (a state other than the high probability mode), and the normal power support is not performed (the general figure is also the normal state).

Next, in step S805, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared, and in the subsequent step S806, the number with a low probability (number without time saving) is saved in the game state display number area. Then, in a step S807, a flag of low probability and no time saving (no general power support) flag is saved in the flag area of the flag of the general game mode.
Next, in step S808, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared, and in step S809, the high probability notification flag area is cleared to turn off the game state display LED related to the display of the high probability state, and in step S810, the special figure game mode flag is set. The special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the area, and in step S811, the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery is saved. The probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area. Next, in step S812, a high-probability variation count area for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the high probability mode is cleared. As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state are completed, and the state becomes the normal probability state and the normal operation state. In other words, since the fanfare / inter-interval process shift setting process 1 is a process executed by the occurrence of a big hit, if the high probability mode in which the big hit probability of the special figure is made high before the big hit occurs, the big hit occurs. This terminates the high probability mode, and the game state of the special map returns to the normal state (low probability state). Also, in conjunction with this, if it is in a state where general power support such as shortening of the time of the public figure is performed (general power support state), this big power support will be terminated due to the occurrence of a big hit, and the game state of the general figure will be It returns to the normal state (the state in which the public telephone support is not performed).

Then, the effect mode number is saved in the effect mode number area (step S813), and the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step S814). This is cleared once because the effect control mode is managed by the game control device 100 (main board).
Next, the non-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step S815), a signal relating to the right-hand instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step S816), and the game state is displayed. The number in the right-handed state is saved in the number 2 area (step S817), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 ends. As a result, the information of the effect mode is temporarily cleared (that is, becomes the initial value of the default state) with the occurrence of the special game state.
Step S817 is processing for turning on the right-handed display LED.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1 (step S734) in the above-described special figure display processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “7” (corresponding to the processing number relating to the small hit fanfare processing) is set in step S831, and the processing number (here, “7”) is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S832. Save. Next, in step S833, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. In step S834, a signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area, and in step S835. The signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area.
Here, in step S834, one big hit signal (high hit + small hit output) is specifically turned on. In step S835, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned on.

Subsequently, in step S836, the special winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared, in step S837, the illegal monitoring outside flag is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area, and in step S838, a signal relating to the right-hand instruction (launch position designation) is saved. The signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area in step S839, and the small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1 is ended.
Through the above processing, various settings when a small hit occurs are performed. Step S839 is a process for turning on the right-handed display LED.

[Fanfare / interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step S332) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, "step A" is used for the step number.
In the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state (big hit state) is updated by +1 (step A31), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state is prepared (step A32). A setting process (step A33) is performed.

Thereafter, a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A34), an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special opening opening information is obtained (step A35), and the number of rounds of the special game state to be started is obtained. It is determined whether the value is larger than the determined open switching determination value (step A36).
Here, the special winning opening operation determination table has, for example, the configuration shown in the middle of FIG. 48, and is an opening switching determination value (the number of rounds corresponding to the special winning opening opening information; in the example of FIG. 48, “0”, “ 16 "," 4 ", etc.). The opening switching judgment value is a value indicating the number of rounds for switching from a long opening (opening for a long time) to a short opening (opening for a shorter time than the long opening) for opening a special winning opening. An opening operation is performed in which a long opening is performed before and a short opening is performed thereafter.

When the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A36; Y), the large winning opening time for short opening (0.2 seconds in the present embodiment) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. Save (step A37), and the process proceeds to step A39.
If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A36; N), the special winning game opening time for the long opening (29 seconds in the present embodiment) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then (step A38), the process proceeds to step A39.
In step A39, a special winning opening opening process shift setting process (step A39) is performed, and the fanfare / interval process ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 48, as the big hit pattern, (1) 4R, large winning opening information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, large winning opening information 2 (All open long), (3) 16R, large winning opening opening information 3 (1-4R long opening, 5-16R short opening), (4) 4R, big winning opening opening information 4 (all long opening), (5) 16R, large winning opening information 5 (all open long), (6) 16R, large winning opening information 6 (1-8R long open, 9-16R short open), (7) 16R, large The winning opening information 7 (long opening for 1 to 4R, short opening for 5 to 16R) is set.

Therefore, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 48, the special winning opening operation information table includes the special winning opening opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value “0”, and the special winning opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value. “16” is the special winning opening information 3 data and the open switching determination value “4”, the special winning opening information 4 data and the open switching determination value “4” are the special winning opening information 5 data. The opening switching determination value “16”, the special winning opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8” are stored in association with the special winning opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4”. ing. When the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, the opening operation is performed such that the opening operation is long, and when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value, the opening operation is short opening.
Then, the special winning opening information is information indicating which of the various types of big hit patterns is set, and is set in step S698 of the above-described special figure displaying process.

(Grand prize opening opening process transition setting process)
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process shift setting process (step A39) in the above-described fanfare / interval process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special winning opening opening process shift setting process, first, the process number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening process (step A41), and this process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A41). Step A42). Thereafter, a signal relating to the start of opening of the special winning opening (for example, turning on the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A43), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is stored. The information of the mouth count number area (that is, the special winning mouth count number) is cleared (step A44). Then, the ON data of the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 27) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A45), and the processing shift setting process during opening of the special winning opening is ended.

(Processing while opening the big winning opening)
Next, the details of the special winning opening processing (step S333) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special winning opening processing, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the last round. (Step A61). If it is not the final round (step A61; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A62), and an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is obtained (step A63). It is determined whether or not the number of rounds is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A64).

If the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A64; Y), the remaining ball processing time (for short closing) (1.4 seconds in the present embodiment) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. It saves (step A65), prepares an interval command related to the interval between rounds (step A66), and shifts to the process of step A67.
If the number of rounds is not greater than the open switching determination value (step A64; N), the remaining ball processing time (for long closing) (1.9 seconds in the present embodiment) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A71), prepare an interval command related to the interval between rounds (Step A66), and shift to the processing of Step A67.

On the other hand, if it is the last round (step A61; Y), the remaining ball processing time (for the last time) (1.9 seconds in this embodiment) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A69), An ending command for ending the big hit state is prepared (step A70), and the process proceeds to step A67.
Then, when the process proceeds to step A67, an effect command setting process (step A67) is performed to transmit the prepared command, and a special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A68) is performed, and the special winning opening process is performed. To end.

(Grand prize mouth remaining ball processing transition setting processing)
Next, details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A68) in the above-described special winning opening processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special winning port remaining ball processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number is set to “5” related to the special winning port remaining ball processing (step A81), and this processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A81). Step A82). Thereafter, in order to close the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27, off data for turning off the special winning opening solenoid 133 is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A83), and the special winning opening remaining ball is saved. The processing transition setting processing ends.

(Grand prize mouth remaining ball processing)
Next, the details of the special winning port remaining ball processing (step S334) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special winning port remaining ball processing, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit area, and the current round reaches the upper limit value (final). Round) (step A101).
If the current round in the special gaming state is not the last round (step A101; NO), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A102), and an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is obtained. Then (step A22), an interval time (normal) (for example, 0.1 second) is set (step A104), and it is determined whether the current round number is larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A105).

If the number of rounds is not larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A105; N), it is determined whether the special winning opening information is a value of a rank down effect system (step A106), and the number of rounds is determined. If it is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A105; Y), the process proceeds to step A109.
Here, the value of the rank-down staging system means the special winning opening information (the special opening opening information 3, 6, 7 in the lower part of FIG. 48) corresponding to the jackpot pattern that switches from the middle round to the short opening. .

If the special winning opening information is a value of a rank down effect system (step A106; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is a value of a special effect round (for example, 2R, 4R, 8R) (step A107). If the special winning opening information is not the value of the rank down effect system (step A106; N), the process proceeds to step A109.
When the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A107; Y), an interval time (rank down effect) (for example, 3.6 seconds) is set (step A108), and the process proceeds to step A109. On the other hand, when the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A107; N), the process proceeds to step A109.

Next, when the flow proceeds to step A109, the set interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A108), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A110) is performed, and the special winning opening remains. The ball processing ends.
Here, when the step A108 is executed, the setting of the previous step A104 is canceled, and therefore, before the opening round (switching from the long opening to the short opening) before the last round, If the special winning opening information is the value of the rank down effect system (step A106; Y), and if the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A107; Y), the interval time saved in step A109 is the interval time (Rank down production). As a result, a time is set in which a rank-down effect can be realized immediately before switching to open (switching from long open to short open).
In addition, even when it is not the last round, whether it is after opening switching (switching from long opening to short opening), whether the special winning opening opening information is not the value of the rank down staging system (step A106; N), or the number of rounds If the value is not the value of the special effect round (step A107; Y), the interval time saved in step A109 is the interval time (normal) set in step A104. In the case of the last round, there is no longer an interval period (a period between rounds), so there is no need to save the interval time.

On the other hand, if the current round is the last round (step A101; Y), the game mode flag (saved in step S701) is saved from the special figure game mode flag save area that stores the probability state when the special result is derived. ) (Step A111). Then, the loaded flag, the winning opening information, and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern are set (step A112), and the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A112). (Step A113), the big hit end processing shift setting processing (step A114) is performed, and the big winning port remaining ball processing is ended.
As described above, the ending time is set based on the stop symbol information, the special winning opening opening information, and the game mode flag at the time of the big hit.

The ending time is not limited to the above. For example, the ending time may be set based on the special winning opening information and the game mode flag at the time of a big hit, instead of the symbol information.
Also, a period from the end of the last round to the end of the special game state (big hit state) (this may be referred to as an ending period) is a processing time of the special winning opening remaining ball from the end of the last round (for example, 1.9 seconds). ) Has elapsed, and a period (for example, a total of 3.8 seconds) from the lapse of the special winning port remaining ball processing time to the ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds). Then, during a period in which the ending time and the special winning opening remaining ball processing time are combined (sometimes referred to as an ending period), an ending effect can be performed on the display device 41 or the like.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A110) in the above-mentioned winning winning port remaining ball processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2, first, the processing number relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set to “3” (step A211), and this processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A211). A212).
Next, a signal relating to the end of opening of the special winning opening (the variable winning device 27) (the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A213), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting is performed. Processing 2 ends.

[Big hit end process shift setting process]
Next, details of the big hit end processing shift setting processing (step A114) in the above-described big winning opening residual ball processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the big hit end processing shift setting processing, first, "6" is set as the processing number relating to the big hit end processing (step A221), and this processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A222). After that, a signal relating to the end of the opening of the special winning opening (the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A223).

  Next, information in the special winning opening count number area storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A224), and information in the round number area storing the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A225). ), Clear the information in the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state (step A226). Then, the information of the round number upper limit information area storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the round number is cleared (step A227), and the flag of the special winning opening opening information area storing the flag for determining the opening information of the special winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step A228), and the big hit end processing shift setting processing ends.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the big hit end processing (step S335) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the big hit end processing, first, it is determined whether the time reduction determination data is time saving operation data (that is, whether or not there is a time reduction in which general-purpose support is performed) (step A241). In addition, in this embodiment, after the big hit is completed, 100% certainty change is entered (the special figure always becomes the certainty change mode after the big hit end), so it is not necessary to determine whether the special figure is in the high probability state.
If it is not the time saving operation data (step A241; N), the big hit end setting process 1 is performed (step A242), and if it is the time saving operation data (step A241; Y), the big hit end setting process 2 is performed (step A241). A243). After step A243 or step A242, the effect mode information address table is set (step A244), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of the change (when the stop symbol is set) is obtained (step A244). Step A245).

  Next, as processing for saving information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired, and saved in the effect mode number area. (Step A246). Further, the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is obtained and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A247), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. The transfer information is acquired and saved in the next mode transfer information area (step A248).

  After that, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A249), the command is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A250), and effect command setting processing (step A251) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are information of any of "high probability / time saving" and "high probability / no time saving", and a plurality of commands further including information on the effect mode. In the case of the present embodiment, when the big hit ends, the state always changes to a probable state (a so-called ST state). , “High-probability, no time-saving, effect mode C” and “high-probability, no time-saving, effect mode A”, which are not used in this processing. There is a low probability / no time saving / effect mode B "and a" low probability / no time saving / effect mode C ".

Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A252), and effect command setting processing (step A253) is performed.
Next, a high-probability-change-number command corresponding to the high-probability-change number is prepared (step A254), and effect command setting processing (step A255) is performed to determine whether a time-saving state occurs after the end of the big hit (step A256). .
If the time-saving state occurs after the end of the big hit (step A256; Y), the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 2 is performed (step A259), and the big hit end processing ends.
If the time saving state does not occur after the end of the big hit (step A256; N), a left-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step A257), and after effect command setting processing (step A258) is performed, the transition to special figure ordinary processing is performed. The setting process 2 is performed (step A259), and the big hit end process ends.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, details of the big hit end setting processing 1 (step A242) in the above big hit end processing will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal relating to the absence of a time saving state (for example, turning off the two jackpot signals) is saved in the external information output data area (step A271), and a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the absence of the time reduction state is provided. (For example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 high probability The state signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, and the normal electric accessory 1 opening extension state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A272).

  Next, the number with no time reduction state is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A273), and the low figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the general figure game mode flag area (step A274), and the special figure game mode is set. The special figure high probability & no time saving flag is saved in the flag area (step A275). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high-probability variation count area (step A276), and the signal related to the left-handing instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A276). A277) In order to extinguish the display LED during the right strike, the number in the left strike state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A278), and the big hit end setting process 1 ends.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, details of the big hit end setting process 2 (step A243) in the above big hit end process will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
In the big hit end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the start of the time saving state (for example, the big hit 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A281). Note that the signal relating to the start of the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous form since it is output from during the big hit. Next, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time reduction state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 fluctuations) Save the time shortening state signal ON, the ordinary symbol 1 high probability state signal ON, the ordinary symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, and the ordinary electric accessory 1 opening extension state signal ON) in the test signal output data area ( Step A282).

Next, the number with the time reduction state is saved in the game state display number area (step A283), the general figure high probability & time reduction flag is saved in the general figure game mode flag area (step A284), and the special figure game mode is set. The special figure high probability & time saving flag is saved in the flag area (step A285). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high-probability variation count area (step A286), and the big hit end setting process 2 ends. In the case of the present embodiment, the right-hand mode is set during the time-saving state, but since the right-hand mode is set from the middle of the big hit, the setting related to the right-hand is not performed in the big hit end setting processing 2.
By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure change display game becomes the high probability state and the time saving state.

[Tokuzu ordinary processing shift setting processing 2]
Next, details of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2 (step A259) in the above-described big hit end process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 2, first, “0” is set as a processing number relating to the special figure ordinary processing (step A291), and this processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A292). ).

  After that, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot (for example, turning off one of the jackpots, turning off the three signals and turning off the four signals) is saved in the external information output data area (step A293), and the signal relating to the end of the jackpot (eg, Then, the condition device operating signal is turned off, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 hit signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned off (step A294). Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A295), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A296), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A297). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag retreat area is cleared (step A298), and the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A299). To end.

[Treatment during small hit fanfare]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (step S336) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG.
In the small hit fanfare middle process, the small hit middle process shift setting process (step A311) is executed, and the small hit fanfare middle process ends.

[Small hit middle processing shift setting processing]
Next, details of the small-hit-medium processing transition setting processing (step A311) in the above-described small-hit-medium processing will be described with reference to the lower part of FIG.
In the small hit process change setting process, first, the process number is set to “8” for the small hit process (step A321), and this process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A322). Thereafter, the small hit opening time (eg, 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A323), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned ON). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A324), the ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A325), and information on the special winning opening count number area storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is stored. (That is, the special winning opening count number) is cleared (step A326). Then, the small hit operation initial value "0" is saved in the small hit small control pointer area (step A327), and the small hit middle processing transition setting processing ends.

[Small hit processing]
Next, details of the small hitting middle processing (step S337) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the small hitting processing, first, a small hitting control pointer (a pointer whose initial value is set in step A327) is loaded (step A341), and the loaded value is equal to or larger than the small hitting operation end value (for example, “6”). (Step A342).
If the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A342; N), the small hit control pointer is updated by +1 (step A343) because the small winning opening due to the small hit is not yet finished (step A343). A transition setting process (step A344) is performed, and the small hitting process ends.
If the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A342; Y), the opening of the special winning opening due to the small hit ends, so that the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A345), It is determined whether this flag is during the special figure high probability (step A346). Here, it is determined whether it is a small hit during the high probability, and the time saving state does not matter.

If the flag is not in the special figure high probability (step A346; N), the process proceeds to step A349. When the flag is in the special figure high probability (step A346; Y), a command for the small hit end screen is prepared (step A347), effect command setting processing (step A348) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A349.
When the process proceeds to step A349, the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing (step A) is performed, and the small hit middle processing is ended.

[Small hit operation shift setting process]
Next, details of the small hit operation transition setting process (step A344) in the small hit middle process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the small hit operation transition setting processing, first, the value of the small hit control pointer is checked, and branching is performed based on the value of the pointer (step A361). That is, if the value of this pointer is any of "0", "2", and "4", the process proceeds to step A362, and if it is "1", "3", and "5", the process proceeds to step A364.
In step A362, the wait time (for example, 1500 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A362), and off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A363). The small hit operation shift setting process ends.
In step A364, the special winning opening time (for example, 200 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A364), and the ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A364). A365), the small hit operation shift setting process ends.

  By the control processing of the present embodiment including the above-described small hit operation shift setting processing and the like, for example, a small hit operation (a large winning opening opening operation at the time of a small hit) as shown in the small hit timing chart in the lower part of FIG. 60 is realized. . Here, the small hit fanfare time is the above-mentioned step S833, the special winning opening time 200ms is the above step A364, the wait time 1500ms is the above step A362, and the small hit remaining ball time is the later-described step A373, the small hit ending time. Are set in step A403 described later.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining sphere process shift setting process (step A349) in the small hit middle process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing, first, the processing number is set to “9” for the small hit remaining ball processing (step A371), and this processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A372). ), The small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A373). Thereafter, in order to close the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27, off data for turning off the special winning opening solenoid 133 is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A374), and the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. The transfer setting process ends.

[Small hit ball processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step S338) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG.
In the small hit remaining ball processing, a small hit end processing shift setting processing (step A391) is executed, and the small hit remaining ball processing is ended.

[Small hit end processing shift setting processing]
Next, details of the small hit end processing shift setting processing (step A391) in the small hit remaining ball processing described above will be described with reference to the lower part of FIG.
In the small hit end process transition setting process, first, the process number is set to "10" for the small hit end process (step A401), and this process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A402). Thereafter, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A403), and a signal relating to the end of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned off). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A404), the special winning opening count number area is cleared (step A405), the small hit control pointer area is cleared (cleared to 0) (step A406), and the small hit end The processing transition setting processing ends.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end processing (step S339) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the small hit end processing, first, a game mode flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A421), and it is determined whether or not the value of this flag is in the special figure high probability (step A422).
If the special figure high probability is in progress (step A422; Y), the process proceeds to step A439.
On the other hand, when the special figure high probability is not present (Step A422; N), the effect mode information address table is set (Step A423), and the effect mode transition information set at the start of the change (when the stop symbol is set) is set. The address of the table to be executed is obtained (step A424).

  Next, as processing for saving information necessary for management of the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, an effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the small hit operation is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area. (Step A425). Furthermore, the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the small hit operation is acquired, saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A426), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the small hit operation. The transfer information is acquired and saved in the next mode transfer information area (step A427).

After that, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A428),
It is determined whether the prepared command is the same as the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A429). When the prepared command is the same as the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A429; Y), the process proceeds to step A439.
On the other hand, when the prepared command is not the same as the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A429; N), the prepared command is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A430), and the production command setting processing (step A430). Step A431) is performed.

Next, an effect rotational speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotational speed is prepared (step A432), and effect command setting processing (step A433) is performed.
Next, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A434), and an effect command setting process (step A435) is performed to determine whether the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A435). Step A436). If the new effect mode is not the left-handed mode (step A436; N), the process proceeds to step A439.

If the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A436; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A437), effect command setting processing (step A438) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A439. move on.
In step A439, the game mode flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag evacuation area (step A439), and the value of this flag is during the special figure time reduction (state in which the fluctuation time of the special figure is reduced). Is determined (step A440).
If the special figure is in working hours (step A440; Y), the process proceeds to step A443.
On the other hand, if it is not during special figure time reduction (step A440; N), a signal related to the left-handing instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A441), and the right-handing is performed. In order to turn off the display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A442), and the process proceeds to step A443.
When the process proceeds to step A443, the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 3 is performed (step A443), and the small hit end process ends.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 3]
Next, details of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 3 (step A443) in the above-described small hit end process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 3, first, “0” is set as the processing number relating to the special figure ordinary processing (step A461), and this processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A462). ).

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the small hit (for example, turning off one big hit signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A463), and a signal relating to the end of the small hit (for example, turning off the special symbol 1 small hit signal). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A464). Subsequently, the information in the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A465), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A466). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag retreat area is cleared (step A467), and the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A468). To end.

[Direction command setting processing]
Next, an effect command setting process executed in a number of steps such as step S262 in the above-described fraud & winning monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.
In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A481), and it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step A482). If the transmission buffer is full (step A482; Y), the process returns to step A481 and repeats the processing.
On the other hand, if the transmission buffer is not full (step A482; N), the prepared command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written into the effect serial transmission buffer (step A483), and the flow proceeds to step A484.
In step A484, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A484), and it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step A485). If the transmission buffer is full (step A485; Y), the process returns to step A484 and repeats the processing.
On the other hand, if the transmission buffer is not full (step A485; N), the prepared command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written into the effect serial transmission buffer (step A486), and the effect command setting process ends.

  As described above, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the command analysis can be made difficult. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced, and the number of data lines can be reduced. Further, in the effect control device 300, it is not necessary to take in the command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced. In this embodiment, a command is also transmitted to the payout control device 200 by serial communication, so that the same effect is obtained.

[Symbol variation control processing]
Next, details of the symbol change control process (steps S341 and S343) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol of the first special figure (special figure 1) and the second special figure (special figure 2) and setting the display data of the special symbol. In the symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the special figure variation control flag of the special figure (for example, the first special figure) of the control target among the first special figure and the second special figure is changing ( Step A501).
If the special figure changing flag is changing (step A502; YES), a symbol display table (for changing) corresponding to the special figure (for example, the first special figure) to be controlled is acquired (step A502). A503).

Here, the fluctuation control table prepared in step S340 of the special figure game process has, for example, a configuration as shown in the lower part of FIG. 66, and the information defined on this table is as follows.
66, the lower address of the fluctuation control area, the address of the display table 2 (for stop), the address of the display table 1 (for fluctuation). In the case shown in the lower part of FIG. Based on the address “D_TZ1_LED1” of the display table 1 above, “Special figure 1 display table 1 (for fluctuation) (D_TZ1_LED1)” shown below “Special figure 1 fluctuation control table” in FIG. 66 is acquired.
Next, of the first special map and the second special map, the blink control timer for the special map to be controlled (for example, the first special map) is updated by -1 (step A504), and the value of the timer is set to 0, That is, it is determined whether the time is up (step A505).

If the value of the blink control timer is not 0 (step A505; NO), display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step A508). When the value of the blink control timer is 0 (step A505; YES), the initial value of the blink control timer (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the blink control timer area to be controlled (step A506). Of the second special map, the variable symbol number of the control target special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is updated by +1 (step A507), and the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is obtained. (Step A508). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A509), and the symbol variation control processing ends.
Here, in step A508, for example, in the case shown in the lower part of FIG. 66, when the value of the variable symbol number area (that is, the symbol number of the special symbol 1) is “0”, the acquired “special symbol 1” The display data “C_SEG1_OFF” corresponding to the special figure 1 symbol number “0” on the “display table 1 (for fluctuation) (D_TZ1_LED1)” is obtained.

On the other hand, when the special figure changing flag is not changing (step A502; NO), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the special figure (for example, the first special figure) to be controlled is acquired (step A510). . Then, display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step A511), and the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A509), and the symbol variation control process ends. Here, the processing of step A510 and step A511 is also performed based on, for example, a fluctuation control table configured as shown in the lower part of FIG. In this case, “Special figure 1 display table 2 (for stopping) (D_TZ1_LED2)” is acquired in step A510 and used in step A511.
By the above process, the special figure display (for example, the special figure 1 display) to be controlled among the special figure 1 display and the special figure 2 display, which are the LED segments in the collective display device 35, is used. Will be displayed.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte allocation process (step S595) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
The two-byte distribution process is a process for selecting a second-half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second-half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In the two-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the first data of the second half fluctuation group table (selection table) prepared in the fluctuation pattern setting process is a code without distribution (that is, “0”) (step A521). ). Here, the second half variation group table stores predetermined distribution values in association with at least one second half variation pattern group, but defines only the second half variation pattern group in which the second half variation pattern is “no reach”. In the case of a fluctuation group table (for example, a part of the fluctuation group table in a case where the result is out of order), there is no need to allocate, so the distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top. ing.

  If the first data of the second half fluctuation group table is a code without distribution (step A522; YES), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution (step A527), and the 2-byte distribution processing ends. I do. On the other hand, if the data at the head of the second half variable group table is not a code without distribution (step A522; NO), one distribution value specified first in the second half variable group table is acquired (step A523).

  Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value obtained in step A523 from the random number value (the value of the variation pattern random number 1) loaded in step S593 (step A524). It is determined whether the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A525). If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (step A525; NO), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A526), the processing shifts to step A523, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do. That is, in step A523, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the fluctuation group selection table, the distribution value is subtracted as a new random value using the determined random number in step A525, and a new random value is obtained. A numerical value is calculated (step A524). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A525).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A525 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A525; YES). As a result, any one of the second half variation selection tables is selected from at least one second half variation selection table specified in the second half variation group table. If it is determined in step A525 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A525; YES), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the allocation result (step A527), and the 2-byte allocation process is performed. To end.

[Distribution processing]
Next, the details of the distribution process (steps S596, S599, and S605) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
The distribution process selects the second half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 or the first half variation selection table ( This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the leading data of the prepared second-half variation selection table (selection table) or the first-half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, “0”). (Step A541). Here, the second-half change selection table and the first-half change selection table store predetermined distribution values in association with at least one second-half fluctuation pattern and the first-half fluctuation pattern, similarly to the second-half fluctuation group table. In the case of a selection table having no assignment, the assignment value “0”, that is, a code without assignment is specified at the top.

  If the first data in the second-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table is a code without distribution (step A542; YES), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A547) and distributed. The process ends. On the other hand, if the data at the head of the second-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table is not a code without distribution (step A542; NO), one distribution value first specified in the second-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table Is acquired (step A543).

  Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A543 from the random number value (the value of the variation pattern random number 2 or the variation pattern random number 3) loaded in steps S598 and S604 ( (Step A544), it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (Step A545). If the new random number is not smaller than “0” (step A545; NO), the address is updated to the address of the next distribution value (step A546), and the process proceeds to step A543. Perform processing.

That is, in step A543, after obtaining the distribution value specified next in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table, the distribution value is subtracted as the new random value determined in step A545. Then, a new random value is calculated (step A544). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A545). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A545 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A545; YES). As a result, any one of the second half variation number and the first half variation number is selected from at least one second half variation pattern and the first half variation pattern defined in the second half variation selection table and the first half variation selection table. If it is determined in step A545 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A545; YES), the address is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A547), and the distribution process ends. I do.
Note that the above-described allocation processing and the above-described 2-byte allocation processing have basically the same configuration. The difference is that the size of the random numbers used for distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes, so that the program instructions for calculation are different.

Next, a description will be given of a flowchart relating to the general-purpose game process. Here, “Step B” will be described as a step number.
[Public figure game processing]
First, details of the general-purpose game process (step S79) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the general-figure game processing, the input of the gate switch 122 is monitored, the entire processing related to the general-figure change display game is controlled, and the setting of the general-figure display is performed.
First, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 122 is performed. The details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) will be described later.
Next, a normal power winning switch monitoring process (step B2) for monitoring an input from the second starting port switch 121 is performed. The details of the normal winning switch monitoring process (step B2) will be described later.

Next, if the general-purpose game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step B3). Note that the minimum value of the ordinary game processing timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the general-purpose game processing timer has become 0 (step B4).
If the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is 0 (step B4; YES), that is, if it is determined that the time is up or has already expired, the general-purpose game process is referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the general-purpose game process number. A process (step B5) of setting a game sequence branch table (a specific example is shown in the upper right of FIG. 68) in a register, and obtaining a branch destination address of a process corresponding to a general game process number using the table. (Step B6) is performed. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the game processing number (step B8).

In step B8, if the game processing number is "0", the start of the change of the normal figure change display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of the change of the general figure change display game, the setting of the effect, and the processing during the change of the normal figure change game are performed. The general processing (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the processing is performed.
The details of the ordinary processing (step B9) will be described later.
If the game process number is "1" in step B8, a general figure changing process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the general figure displaying process is performed.
Note that the details of the ordinary figure fluctuation process (step B10) will be described later.
In step B8, if the game processing number is "2", and if the result of the normal-float display game is a hit, whether or not the normal-variation winning device 27 is in the normal power support (during the time-saving state). During the general-figure display (step B11), the general-purpose opening time is set in accordance with the setting, and information necessary for performing the general-following-period processing is set.
It should be noted that the details of the normal-drawing display process (step B11) will be described later.

If the game processing number is "3" in step B8, the normal game hitting process is performed to continue the normal time hitting process or to set information necessary for performing the normal power remaining sphere process ( Step B12) is performed.
In addition, the details of the normal drawing hit processing (step B12) will be described later.
If the game processing number is "4" in step B8, a general electric remaining sphere processing (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing a general drawing end processing is performed.
In addition, the details of the normal electric remaining sphere processing (step B13) will be described later.
If the game processing number is "5" in step B8, a general figure end processing (step B14) for setting information necessary for performing the general figure ordinary processing (step B9) is performed.
The details of the per-drawing end processing (step B14) will be described later.
Then, after preparing various tables for controlling the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary figure display (the collective display device 35) (step B15), the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary figure display (the collective display device 35) is performed. Is performed (step B16), and the ordinary figure game processing ends.

  On the other hand, in step B4, if it is determined that the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is not 0 (step B4; NO), that is, if it is determined that the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B15, and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is checked whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 122 (step B21). When it is determined that there is an input to the gate switch 122 (step B21; YES), it is determined whether the game state is a right-handed game (step B22). If the game state is right-handed (step B22; Y), the process proceeds to step B25. If the game state is not right-handed (step B22; N), a right-handed instruction command is prepared (step B23), effect command setting processing is performed (step B24), and the process proceeds to step B25.
Here, the right-handed game state includes the following.
・ Big hits, small hits, special maps

  In step B25, the number of general drawing reservations is acquired, and it is determined whether the general drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (for example, 4) (step B25). When it is determined that the number of ordinary drawing reservations is less than the upper limit value (step B25; YES), a process of updating (+1) the number of ordinary drawing reservations (step B26) is performed.

Then, after performing a process of calculating the address of the hit random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of ordinary drawing reservations (step B27), the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of the RWM (step B28). Then, the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the winning symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step B29), and the gate switch monitoring process ends.
Also, if it is determined in step B21 that there is no input to the gate switch 122 (step B21; NO), or if it is determined in step B25 that the number of reserved drawings is not less than the upper limit value ( (Step B25; NO), the gate switch monitoring process ends.

[Public winning switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the ordinary winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the ordinary game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the normal-prize winning switch monitoring process, first, the normal-variation display game is in a hit state, and the normal-variation winning device 26 is performing the opening operation a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) ) It is checked whether or not (step B31). Then, when it is determined that the vehicle is in the normal driving state (step B31; YES), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the second starting port switch 121 (step B32), and there is an input to the second starting port switch 121 (step B32). If it is determined as step B32 (YES), a process (step B33) of updating (+1) the count number of the ordinary power counter is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated ordinary power counter has reached an upper limit value (for example, 6) (step B34), and it is determined that the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B34; YES). Then, the value of the operation end (for example, “4”) is saved in the control pointer area during normal hitting (step B35), the normal time game processing timer is cleared to 0 (step B36), and the normal power winning switch monitoring processing is performed. To end.
In other words, if there is a general winning a prize that is equal to or greater than the upper limit value in the hit state of the normal figure, the value of the hit end is saved in the normal figure hitting processing control pointer area at that time, and the hit state of the general figure is in the middle. To end.

  Also, in step B31, it is determined that the vehicle is not in the ordinary drawing mode (step B31; NO), or it is determined in step B32 that there is no input to the second starting port switch 121 (step B32; NO). Alternatively, if it is determined in step B34 that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (step B34; NO), the ordinary power winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

(Normal map everyday processing)
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing (step B9) in the aforementioned ordinary figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. It is to be noted that a simple term “hit random number” means a random number per symbol, and a simple term “hit symbol random number” means a symbol random number per symbol.
In the ordinary figure ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the number of ordinary figure reservations is “0” (step B41), and if it is determined that the number of ordinary figure reservations is “0” (step B41; YES), The process proceeds to B62, in which the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 is performed, and then the ordinary figure ordinary processing ends. The normal figure normal processing shift setting processing 1 performs processing for repeating the normal figure normal processing next time, and will be described later in detail.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B41 that the number of reserved ordinary figures is not 0 (step B41; NO), the random number storage area per ordinary figure of RWM (for reserved number 1) and the symbol random number storage area per ordinary figure (for reserved number 1) ) Are loaded (step B42), and thereafter, the random number storage area per ordinary figure (for 1 reserved number) and the symbol random number storage area per ordinary figure (for 1 reserved number) are cleared to 0 (step B43). Proceed to B44.
In step B44, it is determined whether the probability of a winning result in the general-floor variation display game is higher than normal, ie, whether the game is in a time-saving state (generic power support state) (step B44). ). Note that, in the present embodiment, during the high probability of the normal figure, the normal power is supported, and the special figure is also in the high probability state (high probability mode). In the present embodiment, when the game state of the general figure is a normal state (a state in which special control such as increasing the probability of hitting the general figure is not performed, that is, a normal state in which the general figure support state is not performed). Is zero (for example, 0/251), and the hit probability of the normal figure in the normal power support state is, for example, 250/251, which is a probability setting with a large difference between the normal state and the high probability state. . As a result, it is possible to increase the attraction of the player to be in the high probability state (that is, the probability change) for the player and suppress the occurrence of balls in the normal state, thereby increasing the interest.

If it is not at the time of ordinary high probability (step B44; NO), a low probability lower limit determination value (for example, “251”) is set (step B45), and it is determined whether the loaded random number is equal to or more than a prescribed upper limit determination value. (Step B47). On the other hand, if the time is the normal high probability time (step B44; Y), a high probability lower limit judgment value (for example, “1”) is set (step B46), and the loaded random number is equal to or more than a specified upper limit judgment value. Is determined (step B47). Note that the upper limit determination value is a common value both at the time of the high probability of the normal figure (the normal state of the normal power support) and at the normal time (the normal state of the normal figure), and is, for example, “251”.
When the loaded random number is not equal to or more than the upper limit determination value (step B47; N), it is determined whether the loaded random number is less than the set lower limit determination value (step B48).
The case where the loaded random number is equal to or more than the upper limit determination value (step B47; Y) and the case where the loaded random number is less than the set lower limit determination value (step B48; Y) are out of the ordinary drawing. Then, the loss information is saved in the hit flag area (step B49), the loss stop symbol number is set (step B50), and the loss symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the ordinary symbol stop symbol information area (step B49). B51), and proceed to step B55.

  If the loaded hit random number is not less than the set lower limit determination value (step B48; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B52) because it is an ordinary hit and the loaded hit symbol random number is saved. A corresponding stop symbol number is set (step B53), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in a normal symbol stop symbol information storage area (step B54), and the process proceeds to step B55. In the present embodiment, there are three types of hit symbols in a common figure.

Next, when the operation proceeds to step B55, the set stop symbol number is saved in the ordinary symbol stop symbol area (step B55), and the set stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B56). The figure change time corresponding to the figure game mode state (for example, normal time; 700 ms, during normal power support; 500 ms (short due to time saving)) is saved in the figure game processing timer area (step B57).
Next, the random number storage area per ordinary figure is shifted (step B58), the empty area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B59), and the reserved number of ordinary figures is updated by -1 (step B60). In other words, the process of moving up the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved general figure held after the number 1 of the reserved general figure by one by one in accordance with the execution of the regular figure display game related to the number 1 of the reserved general figure. I do. By this processing, the value for the number of ordinary figure reservations 2 to the number of ordinary figure reservations 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is moved from the number 1 for ordinary figure retention to the number 3 for ordinary figure retention in the random number storage area per ordinary figure. Will be done. Then, the value for the number 4 of ordinary figure reservation in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the number of ordinary figure reservation is decremented by one.

Next, after step B60, a normal-figure-variation-in-process change setting processing (step B61) is performed, and the normal-figure ordinary processing ends.
When the game state of the ordinary figure is the normal state (in this embodiment, the game state of the special figure is also the normal state (low probability state)), the above-described upper limit determination value and lower limit determination value are, for example, “251”. Since the values are the same, in the determination processing of steps B47 and B48, the process always proceeds to step B49, and the probability of hitting the ordinary figure in the normal state in this embodiment is zero.

[Normal figure normal processing shift setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step B62) in the above ordinary figure ordinary processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “0” (corresponding to the processing number related to the ordinary drawing ordinary processing) is set as the processing number for shifting to the ordinary drawing ordinary processing in step B71, and the processing is performed in the ordinary drawing game processing number area in step B72. Save the number (here, “0”). Next, in step B73, the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area, and the routine returns. As a result, the routine shifts to the normal processing next time.

[Process shift setting process during normal fluctuation]
Next, the details of the process for setting transition to the normal figure changing process (step B61) in the above-described normal figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "1" (corresponding to the processing number relating to the processing during ordinary figure change) is set in step B81, and the processing number (here, "1") is set in the ordinary figure game processing number area in step B82. Save. Next, in step B83, a signal relating to the start of the general figure change (for example, the normal symbol 1 changing signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area, and in step B84, the changing flag is saved in the general figure change control flag area. Next, in step B85, the flash control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms) which is the initial value of the flash cycle timer of the general-purpose indicator (the general-purpose display LED of the collective display device 35) is saved in the general-purpose flash control timer area. Then, the normal-fluctuating process shift setting process ends. As a result, the process shifts to the next normal figure fluctuation process.

[Processing during normal map fluctuation]
Next, the details of the general figure changing process (step B10) in the general figure game processing will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG.
When the routine starts, in step B91, a normal-image-display-time process shift setting process is performed. This is for making settings for shifting to the ordinary figure display processing, and will be described later in detail. After this processing, the process returns.

[Process setting during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general-figure display process transition setting processing (step B91) in the above-described general-figure change processing will be described with reference to the lower part of FIG.
When the routine starts, "2" (corresponding to the process number related to the process of displaying the general figure) is set in step B101, and the process number (here, "2") is set in the general figure game process number area in step B102. Save. Next, in a step B103, the normal figure display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in a general figure game processing timer area, and in a step B105, a signal regarding the end of the general figure change (for example, the normal symbol 1 changing signal is turned off) is output as a test signal. Save to data area. Next, at step B106, the stop flag is saved in the ordinary figure fluctuation control flag area, and the routine returns. Thereby, the process shifts to the next process of displaying the ordinary figure next time.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process of displaying a general figure (step B11) in the above-described general figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the process of displaying the normal figure, first, the hit flag (hit information or out-of-position information) set in the normal process of normal drawing is loaded (step B111), and the process of clearing the hit flag area of the RWM (step B112) is performed. Do.
Next, it is determined whether or not the loaded hit flag is a hit (step B113), and if it is determined that the hit flag is not a hit (step B113; NO), the process branches to a step B122 to set a general-purpose ordinary process shift setting process 1 (Described with reference to FIG. 72), and the process for displaying a general drawing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B113 that the hit flag is a hit (step B113; YES), a process (step B114) is performed to determine whether or not general power support is in progress (time saving state).
If the normal power is being supported (step B114; YES), a hitting process setting table is set (step B115), and a hit start pointer value (initial value of control pointer, detail (To be described later), and saves it in the control pointer area during the ordinary figure (step B116), and acquires the ordinary power release time (for example, 500 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the ordinary figure stop symbol information. Is saved in the general-figure game processing timer area (step B117), the general-figure-under-processing transition setting processing (step B121) is performed, and the general-figure-display processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the normal power is not supported (step B114; NO), a hit start pointer value (initial value of the control pointer) for normal time is set and saved in the normal time hit control pointer area (step B114). B119), a normal power open time (for example, 100 ms) for normal time is set, saved in a general game processing timer area (step B120), and a normal graphic normal process shift setting process 1 of FIG. 72 is performed. (Step B122), and the process of displaying the ordinary map ends.

78 shows a specific example of the general power operation timing chart (specific example of the general power release pattern) in the present embodiment in the lower part of FIG. In the case of this specific example, there are three types of hit symbols in the ordinary symbol: "hit symbol 1", "hit symbol 2", and "hit symbol 3".
Then, in the case where the hit symbol 1 is hit, as shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78, after the display time of the ordinary figure of 600 ms (the time set in the step B104), 500 ms (set in the step B117) The normal power release time is performed, and then the normal power release pattern is opened once with the normal power remaining sphere processing time of 600 ms (the time set in step B158 described later). .

Next, in the case where the hit symbol 2 is hit, as shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78, after the display time of the ordinary figure of 600 ms has elapsed, the ordinary time of 1700 ms (the ordinary power release time set in the step B117) is set. The power is released, and after a 200 ms wait time (time set in step B152 described later), the second 1700 ms normal power release is performed, and then a 600 ms normal electric remaining sphere processing time is provided. This is the opening pattern of the two-time opening.
Next, in the case of hitting with the hit symbol 3, as shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78, after the display time of the ordinary figure of 600 ms, the opening of the ordinary power of 1700 ms is performed, and the wait time of 200 ms is thereafter performed. After that, the first 1700ms opening of the normal electricity is performed, followed by the 200ms waiting time, the third opening of the 1700ms ordinary power, and then the 600ms normal electricity remaining sphere processing time is provided three times. It becomes an opening puddle release pattern.

  Also, in this embodiment, although not shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78, although a perpetual figure hit occurs during perpetual power support (during high probability), a perceived When the time when the power is released becomes other than the normal power support (normal state) (that is, when the process proceeds to the step B119 via the step B114), the general power release pattern is determined regardless of the hit symbol. It is configured to be opened once for 100 ms (the normal power opening time set in step B120) (that is, the opening time of the opening operation of the hit symbol 1 is shortened). This is related to the configuration of the present embodiment in which the probability of hitting the normal figure is set to zero when the game state of the normal figure is the normal state. That is, in the present embodiment, when the game state of the general figure is the normal state, by setting the probability per normal figure to zero, the superiority of the general-purpose support state is significantly increased, and the general-purpose support state is improved. The expectation for the support state (which is also the special figure high probability state in this example) is raised to enhance interest. Then, as the opening pattern of the starting area opening / closing means (that is, the opening pattern of the ordinary power), the opening pattern when the playing state of the ordinary figure is the support state (for example, the opening pattern shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78). ), A special opening pattern (100 ms × 1) is provided when the normal game state is the normal state. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent an unexpected winning number from being generated in a normal state in which it is not desired to win (a game design is disordered). This is because, in the normal state, the normal pattern does not hit (the probability per normal figure is zero), and the open pattern in the normal state is not prepared. Since the time has been extended or the number of times of opening has been increased, a considerable number of unexpected start winnings occur in a normal state in which it is not desired to win, and the game design is disrupted. However, if it has a dedicated power release pattern in the normal state, by setting specifications that are difficult to win as this dedicated power release pattern, the unexpected start winning is suppressed or avoided. I can do it.

In the present embodiment, in order to realize the above-described four types of normal power release operations, a control pointer for normal power release control (a middle processing control pointer per normal figure) also shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78. As shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78, the value of the control pointer corresponds to the time when the open / close state changes after the end of the first opening operation in each opening pattern. It is changing.
The hit start pointer value in steps B116 and B119 means the initial value (initial value) of such a control pointer value. Therefore, in the case of the specific example shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78, in step B116, "4" is set for the hit symbol 1, "2" is set for the hit symbol 2, and "0" is set for the hit symbol 3. Is saved as the start pointer value. In step B119, "4" is saved as the hit start pointer value as in the case of the hit symbol 1.

[Middle-time process shift setting process]
Next, the details of the per-figure-per-interim processing transition setting processing (step B121) in the above-described per-figure-period display processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, "3" (corresponding to the processing number related to the normal processing per ordinary figure) is set in step B131, and the processing number (here, "3") is set in the general figure game processing number area in step B132. Save. Next, in step B133, a signal relating to the start per ordinary figure (for example, the normal signal per normal symbol is ON) and a signal relating to the start of the ordinary electric operation (eg, the ordinary electric accessory 1 active signal is ON) are output as test signal output data. Save to area. Next, in step B134, ON data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area, and in step B135, the normal power count number area for storing the number of winnings to the ordinary variable prize device 26 is cleared. In the monitoring period, the general illegal prize winning number area storing the number of winnings to the normal variable prize winning device 26 is cleared, and in step B137, the general illegal prize monitoring period flag area includes an illegal monitoring outside period flag (an illegal monitoring of the normal variable prize winning device 26). Save the flag that defines the outside of the period) and return. As a result, the process shifts to the next-period normal processing next time.

[Medium processing per drawing]
Next, the details of the during-normal-drawing process (step B12) in the above-described general-purpose game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the middle-per-figure-per-process control pointer, first, after loading and preparing the middle-per-figure-per-process control pointer, the value of the loaded middle-per-figure-per-control pointer is set to the upper limit value area of the per-figure-per-middle control pointer value area. It is determined whether the value (a value of the hit end: for example, “4”) has been reached (step B142).
If the value of the control pointer during the ordinary figure does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit area during the ordinary figure (step B142; NO), the control pointer during the ordinary figure is updated by +1 (step B143), The normal power operation shift setting process (step B144) is performed, and the normal time hitting process ends.
On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer during the normal operation has reached the value of the control pointer upper limit area during the normal operation (the value of the end of the operation) (step B142; YES), the process control pointer during the general operation in step B143 will be described. Without performing the process of updating (+1) the area, the normal power operation shift setting process (step B144) is performed, and the process during normal driving is completed.

(Privilege operation transition setting process)
Next, the details of the ordinary power operation shift setting process (step B144) in the above-described ordinary diagram hitting process will be described with reference to FIG.
Note that a hitting processing time value table, a specific example of which is shown in the middle part of FIG. The hit-medium processing time value table is included in the hit-medium processing setting table set in step B115 in the normal figure display-medium processing. As shown in the middle part of FIG. 78, the hitting processing time value table includes a control pointer value and a normal power operation (normal power open or normal power closed) after each time point during the normal power operation corresponding to the value of the control pointer. The duration values are recorded in association with each other. The hitting processing time value table in the middle part of FIG. 78 controls the normal power release pattern corresponding to the hit symbol 3 described above in the lower chart (normal power operation timing chart) of FIG. 78. In step B152 and step B154, which will be described later, the time corresponding to the value of the control pointer is saved with reference to such a hitting processing time value table.

The normal power operation shift setting process is a process for controlling the driving of the normal power solenoid 132 for opening and closing the normal fluctuation winning device 26, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer.
When the routine starts, branching is performed by a control pointer in step B151. Here, the process branches according to the value of the control pointer prepared by loading in step B141. Specifically, if the value of the control pointer is either 0 or 2 in step B151, the process proceeds to step B152 to control the closing of the normal fluctuation winning device 26. The wait time (for example, 200 ms) after the closing of the prize device 26 is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B152), and the off-data is stored in the general-purpose solenoid output data area to turn off the general-purpose solenoid 132 in step B153. Is set, and the normal power operation shift setting process ends. As a result, the closing time after the opening of the ordinary variable prize apparatus 26 becomes the above-mentioned wait time, and during that period, the ordinary variable prize apparatus 26 is closed.

  On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is one of 1 and 3 in step B151, the process proceeds to step B154 to control the opening of the normal variable prize device 26. The general power release time (for example, 1700 ms), which is the open time of the general power, is saved in the general time game processing timer area (step B154), and the ON data is stored in the general power solenoid output data area to turn on the general power solenoid 132 in step B155. Is set, and the normal power operation shift setting process ends. As a result, the opening time of the ordinary variable prize device 26 is the above-mentioned ordinary electric power opening time, and during that period, the ordinary variable prize device 26 is opened.

  If the value of the control pointer is 4 in step B151, the process proceeds to step B156 to end the opening control of the ordinary variable prize device 26 and perform the ordinary electric remaining ball processing (step B13). "4" is set as the number (step B156). Next, in step B157, the processing number (here, “4”) is saved in the general-purpose game processing number area. Next, in step B158, the general electric remaining sphere processing time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the general game processing timer area, and then, in step B159, the OFF data is stored in the general electric solenoid output data area in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 132. Save and end the normal power operation transition setting process.

(Puden residual sphere treatment)
Next, details of the ordinary power remaining sphere process (step B13) in the above ordinary game process will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG.
When the routine is started, a per-figure end processing transition setting processing is performed in step B161. This is a setting for shifting to the per-drawing end processing, which will be described later in detail. After this processing, the process returns.

[Private figure end processing shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the per-figure-period end processing transition setting processing (step B161) in the above-mentioned general-purpose remaining sphere processing will be described with reference to the lower side of FIG.
When the routine starts, "5" (corresponding to the processing number relating to the end processing per ordinary figure) is set as the processing number in step B171, and the processing number (here, "5") is set in the ordinary figure game processing number area in step B172. Save. Next, in step B173, the general-purpose ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area. OFF) in the test signal output data area. Next, in a step B175, the normal power count area for counting the number of winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 26 is cleared. Then, in step B176, the control pointer area in the normal time per hit figure is cleared, and the normal time per hit end processing shift setting processing ends. As a result, the next time is shifted to the per-drawing end processing.

[End processing per map]
Next, details of the per-genuine-per-game end process (step B14) in the above-described general-period game process will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG.
When the routine starts, a normal-drawing-normal-process transition setting process 2 is performed in step B181. This is a setting for shifting to the normal processing in the ordinary drawing, and will be described later in detail. After this processing, the process returns.

[Normal figure normal processing shift setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 2 (step B181) in the aforementioned ordinary figure end processing will be described with reference to the lower side of FIG.
When the routine starts, “0” (corresponding to the processing number related to the ordinary drawing ordinary processing) is set as the processing number in step B191, and the processing number (here, “0”) is set in the ordinary drawing game processing number area in step B192. Save. Next, in step B193, a signal relating to the end of the normal symbol (for example, the normal signal per symbol is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. Next, in step B194, a flag during a fraud monitoring period (a flag defining a fraud monitoring period of the ordinary variable prize device 26) is saved in a normal fraud monitoring period flag area, and the routine returns. As a result, the next time, the routine shifts to the normal processing.

Now that the flowchart relating to the ordinary game processing has been described, the subroutine of step S80 and subsequent steps in the timer interrupt processing will be described.
Here, description will be made using “Step C” as the step number.
[Segment LED editing process]
First, details of the segment LED editing process (step S80) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The segment LED editing process performs a process related to the segment LED provided in the collective display device 35. As described above, the collective display device 35 displays a general map or a special map, and furthermore, displays a special map or a special map. Of the start memory (special figure hold display, ordinary figure hold display) and the game state are displayed.
These displays are performed by a plurality of displays (for example, one lamp or a 7-segment display) using an LED as a light emitting source. More specifically, for example, a special figure 1 hold display, a special figure 2 hold display, a general figure hold display, a first game state display, a second game state display, an error display, a round display, etc. The segment LED editing process is configured by segment LEDs having functions, and performs settings related to their driving.

In the segment LED editing process, first, the blink control timer is updated by +1 (step C1), and it is determined whether it is the output ON timing (step C2). This determination is made based on whether the specific bit of the timer is 1 or not. In this example, the blinking period of 128 ms is created by looking at bit 5.
If it is the output ON timing (step C2; Y), the general-purpose reserved number display table 1 is set (step C3), and the process proceeds to step C5. If it is not the output ON timing (step C2; N), the general-purpose reserved number display table 2 is set (step C4), and the process proceeds to step C5.
If the number of reservations is 0 to 2, the display data will be the same in both tables in the table for displaying the number of reservations for ordinary drawing.

In step C5, display data corresponding to the number of general-use reservations is acquired based on the set general-use reservation number display table 1 or 2, and saved in the segment area (step C5), and it is determined whether it is the output ON timing. (Step C6). If it is the output ON timing (step C6; Y), the special figure 1 reserved number display table 1 is set (step C7), and the process proceeds to step C9. If it is not the output ON timing (step C6; N), the special figure 1 reserved number display table 2 is set (step C8), and the process proceeds to step C9.
By saving display data in a predetermined segment area, a corresponding LED of the collective display device 35 is turned on or off.

  In step C9, display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired based on the set special figure 1 hold number display table 1 or 2, and saved in the segment area (step C9), and the output is turned on. Is determined (step C10). If it is the output ON timing (step C10; Y), the special figure 2 reserved number display table 1 is set (step C11), and the process proceeds to step C13. If it is not the output ON timing (step C10; N), the special figure 2 reserved number display table 2 is set (step C12), and the process proceeds to step C13.

In step C13, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is acquired based on the set special figure 2 reservation number display table 1 or 2, saved in the segment area (step C13), and the round display table is set. Then, display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is obtained from this table and saved in the segment area (step C15).
Next, the game status display table 1 is set (step C16), display data corresponding to the game status display number is acquired from this table, and saved in the segment area (step C17). In the game state display, it is notified whether or not the special map is during working hours (under normal power support). For example, the operation is performed by one LED, and when the light is turned off, the normal state is indicated.
Next, the game status display table 2 is set (step C18), the display data corresponding to the game status display number 2 is obtained, saved in the segment area (step C19), and the segment LED editing process ends. In the game state display 2, it is notified whether or not the game state is a right-handed game state. For example, the operation is performed with one LED, and when the light is turned off, a normal strike (left strike) is indicated, and when turned on, a right strike is indicated. In the case of this example, as described above, during the right-handed period, during the big hit, during the small hit, and during the regular power support.

[Magnet fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet illegality monitoring process (step S81) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The magnet fraud monitoring process checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 126 to determine whether there is any abnormality, and sets the start and end of fraud notification.
In the magnet illegal monitoring process, first, the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 126 and taken into the second input port 161 (input port 2) indicates that the magnetic sensor 126 is on, that is, a state where abnormal magnetism is detected. Is determined (step C21).
If the magnetic sensor 126 is ON (step C21; YES), that is, if abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that measures the period of detecting abnormal magnetism is updated by +1 (step C22), and the timer is updated. It is determined whether the time has expired (step C23).

  If the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step C23; YES), that is, if abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C24), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( For example, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet improper notification timer area (step C25). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step C26), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C27), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (Step C33). That is, when the magnetic sensor 126 is continuously turned on for a predetermined period (for example, a period for eight interrupts, that is, an interrupt cycle of 4 ms × 8 = 32 ms), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. I have.

  On the other hand, if the magnetic sensor 126 is not on (step C21; NO), that is, if no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet illegal monitoring timer is cleared (step C28), and the magnet illegal If the notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C29). Note that the minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero. Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is 0 (step C30). When the timer for monitoring unauthorized access to the magnet has not expired (step C23; NO), the process also proceeds to step C29.

Then, if the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step C30; NO), that is, if the time has not elapsed, the magnet fraud monitoring process ends.
Further, when the value of the magnet fraudulent notification timer is 0 (step C30; YES), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, and when the period of fraudulent notification has ended or fraudulent notification has been started from the beginning, If not, a command to end magnet fraud notification is prepared (step C31). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C32), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step C33).

When the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step C33; YES), the command for the state has been transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step C33; NO), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step C34), and a production command setting is performed to transmit a command for the state to the production control device 300. The process is performed (step C35), and the magnet illegal monitoring process ends.
Here, in FIG. 82, the arrow indicates a processing route (normal route) in the case where there is no magnet error and the magnet is normal. That is, in the case of normal, a processing route of step C21, step C28, step C29, step C30, step C31, step C32, step C33, and RET is performed. Normally, this normal route is repeated.

(Panel radio fraud monitoring processing)
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S82) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The panel radio wave fraud monitoring processing is for determining the presence or absence of an abnormality based on a detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 127 and setting the start and end of fraudulent notification.
In the radio wave fraud monitoring processing, first, the panel radio wave sensor 127 is turned on based on the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 127 and taken into the second input port 161 (input port 2) via the proximity I / F 163. That is, it is determined whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (step C41). If the radio wave sensor is on (Step C41; YES), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (Step C42).

  Then, a command for radio wave fraud notification is prepared (step C43), a radio wave fraud flag is prepared as a radio fraud flag (step C44), and it is determined whether the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area. (Step C49). That is, unlike the case of illegal magnets, it is determined that abnormalities have occurred when abnormal radio waves are detected.

On the other hand, if the radio wave sensor is not on (step C41; NO), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is updated by -1 unless the timer is 0 (step C41). C45). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step C46).
If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step C46; NO), that is, if the time has not elapsed, the radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. Further, when the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step C46; YES), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, and when the period of the fraudulent notification is over or the fraudulent notification is started from the beginning, If not, a command to end radio wave fraud notification is prepared (step C47), a radio wave fraud release flag is prepared as a radio wave fraud flag (step C48), and the prepared radio fraud flag is set to the value of the radio wave fraud flag area. Is determined (step C49).

If the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the radio wave fraud flag area (step C49; YES), the command for this state has been transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. . If the values do not match (step C49; NO), the prepared radio wave fraud flag is saved in the panel radio wave fraud flag area (step C50), and a production command A setting process is performed (step C51), and the board radio wave unauthorized monitoring process ends.
Here, in FIG. 83, the arrow indicates the processing route (normal route) in the case where there is no radio wave irregularity and the radio wave is normal. That is, in the case of normal, a processing route of step C41, step C45, step C46, step C47, step C48, step C49, and RET is passed. Normally, this normal route is repeated.

[External information editing processing]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S83) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (Step S74), the winning port switch / status monitoring process (Step S77), the magnet fraud monitoring process (Step S81), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (Step S82) On the basis of the information, a process of creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test shooting test device and setting the information in an output buffer is performed.

As shown in FIG. 84, in the external information editing processing, first, it is determined in a step C61 whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring. In this process, instead of directly monitoring the opening of the glass frame 5 (door) based on the signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 211, a determination is made based on the monitoring result in the "game machine state checking process" in FIG. I do. That is, it is determined whether or not the glass frame opening error is occurring based on whether or not the error flag (error occurrence flag) is set in the “gaming machine state check process” of FIG.
If a glass frame opening error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step C62 to determine whether or not a front frame (body frame) opening error has occurred. Also in this processing, the determination based on the monitoring result in the “gaming machine state check processing” in FIG. 20 is performed.

If the front frame (body frame) opening error is occurring, the process proceeds to step C65. Also, when the glass frame opening error is occurring in step C61, the process proceeds to step C65.
That is, if the glass frame opening error is occurring or the front frame opening error is occurring, the process proceeds to step C65, where the ON data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area in step C65, and then the game is played in step C66. The ON data of the machine error state signal is saved in the external information output data area, and the flow advances to step C67.
On the other hand, when the front frame (body frame) opening error is not occurring (step C62; N), the process proceeds to step C63, in which the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area in step C63, and step C64 is performed. To save the OFF data of the security signal in the external information output data area, and then go to step C67.

  In step C67, if the security signal control timer is not 0, "-1" is updated (step C67), and then it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer has become 0 (step C68). Note that the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0. The security signal control timer is a timer in which a timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is set in step S29 of the main process. When the power is turned on by clearing the RAM, the security signal is turned on for at least a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms). It is for output.

If the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 in step C68, that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area in step C69, and then the process proceeds to step C70 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C68 that the security signal control timer has timed out or has expired after updating “−1”, the process proceeds to step C70 and subsequent steps.

  When the process proceeds to step C70, in steps C70, 71, 72, 73, and 74, an unauthorized magnet is being generated, a board radio is being generated, a frame radio is being generated, a general power is being generated, or a special winning opening has been generated. It is determined whether each is medium. In these processes, a determination is made based on the monitoring result and the like in the “gaming machine state check process” of FIG. That is, it is determined whether or not each of the above illegalities is occurring based on whether or not an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set in the “gaming machine state check process” of FIG. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the fraud has occurred, based on flags in a fraud flag area (magnet fraud flag area, panel radio wave fraud flag area) saved in the fraud monitoring processing of FIGS. 82 and 83.

If any one or more fraud has occurred, the process proceeds to step C78 where the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area. The data is saved in the output data area, and the process proceeds to Step C80. As a result, a fraud or an error state of the gaming machine is output to the outside.
In this case, the security signal is turned on in step C78 in addition to step C69. Therefore, the security signal is not turned off unless the security signal control timer times out and no error occurs. In other words, when the security signal control timer has timed out and no error has occurred, the process of step C64 is effective and the security signal is turned off.

  On the other hand, when NO in step C70, NO in step C71, NO in step C72, NO in step C73, and NO in step C74, that is, when all are NO in steps C70 to C74, the process branches from step C74 to step C75. After the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area, the process proceeds to step C80.

In step C80, a main prize ball signal editing process (step C80) for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and then a starting port signal editing process (step C81) for editing a winning signal of the starting port is performed. . Then, if the symbol determination count control timer is not 0, the value is updated to "-1" (step C82), and it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination count control timer has become 0 (whether the time is up) (step C83). ). The symbol determination frequency control timer is a timer for controlling the ON time of the symbol determination frequency signal.
If the symbol determination count control timer has not expired (step C83; NO), the process proceeds to step C85, where the ON data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area and the process returns. Then, the routine is repeated, and when it is determined in step C83 that the symbol determination number control timer has timed out (step C83; YES), the process proceeds to step C84, in which the off data of the symbol determination number signal is saved in the external information output data area. The external information editing process ends.
In this manner, each time the symbol of the special figure finishes changing, the symbol determination frequency signal is output as external information.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step C80) in the above-described external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
The main prize ball signal editing process outputs a main prize ball signal, which is generated each time the number of prize balls (planned number of payouts) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10), to an external device. Processing.
In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C101). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main award ball signal output control timer is 0 (step C102). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step C102; YES), it is determined whether the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal updated in step S160 is 0 (step C103).

If the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is not 0 (step C103; NO), the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is updated by -1 (step C104), and the main prize ball signal is output to the main prize ball signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step C105). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (for example, 128 ms) of the ON state (for example, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time (for example, 64 ms) of the OFF state (for example, low level). Time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, the ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C107), and the main prize ball signal editing process ends.
If the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is 0 (step C103; YES), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C103). C108), the main prize ball signal editing process ends.

On the other hand, when the value of the main award ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step C102; NO), it is determined whether or not the main award ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step C106). Here, that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).
If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step C106; YES), the process proceeds to step C107. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (step C106; NO), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step C108), the main prize ball signal editing process ends.
In this manner, the game control device 100 outputs a one-pulse main prize ball signal to an external device (for example, a management device of a game store) for every ten prize balls to be paid out. It should be noted that the payout control device 200 outputs a prize ball signal of one pulse generated every ten payouts to an external device (for example, a management device).
That is, the game control device 100 (main board) updates the number of times of output of the main prize ball number signal by +1 every time ten payouts are scheduled (every time a payout command is transmitted) (subroutine in the payout command transmission process), and thereafter, updates ( The main prize ball number signal is output for the set number of output times. In response to the main prize ball signal output for each ten payout schedule as described above, the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 (payout board) when ten payouts are actually performed. By matching the schedule with the result, it is possible to cope with illegal payout.

In addition, it becomes possible to determine from the main prize ball signal when a prize has occurred with a management device or the like as an external device, which also helps a policy in the hall business.
Specifically, it can be determined whether a prize has occurred during a big hit or a prize generated during a normal game. For example, if there are a lot of prizes during a big hit, it is not a problem, but if there are a lot of prizes during a normal game, it is possible to judge that the nail adjustment is too sweet. become.
On the other hand, if the main prize ball signal is not output to the external device and only the prize ball signal from the payout control device 200 is output when the payout is completed, the ball is run out during the big hit and the payout is performed. Therefore, when the supply is delayed and paid out after the end of the big hit or the like, it becomes impossible to determine when the winning has occurred.
Therefore, if the supply is delayed and paid out after the end of the big hit, it means that a large amount of prizes (payout) has been made during the normal game, and the business data may be incomplete. There is.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, both the main prize ball signal and the prize ball signal from the payout control device 200 are used in combination, and the main prize ball signal is output immediately after winning, so that The defect disappears.

The ON / OFF pattern of the main prize ball signal generated by the main prize ball signal editing process is, for example, as shown in a timing chart shown in the lower part of FIG. In other words, the pattern has a pattern of an ON state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and an OFF state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms). Here, since the value of the output control timer is expressed as one unit of 4 ms, which is the timer interrupt cycle, "48" corresponds to 192 ms and "16" corresponds to 64 ms.
The starting port signal generated by the starting port signal editing process described later has the same pattern as the main prize ball signal.

(Start port signal editing process)
Next, details of the opening signal editing process (step C81) in the above-described external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
The starting port signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the first starting port switch 120 or the second starting port switch 121.
In the opening signal editing process, first, if the starting signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C111). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting port signal output control timer is 0 (step C112). If the value of the starting port signal output control timer is 0 (step C112; YES), it is determined whether the number of starting port signal outputs updated in step S382 is 0 (step C113).

If the start port signal output count is not 0 (step C113; NO), the start port signal output count is updated by -1 (step C114), and the start port signal output control timer initial value is set in the start port signal output control timer area. Is saved (step C115). The initial value of the starting port signal output control timer is a time obtained by adding the time (for example, 128 ms) of the ON state (for example, high level) of the starting port signal and the time (for example, 64 ms) of the OFF state (for example, low level) ( For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, the ON data for turning on the start-up port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C117), and the start-up port signal editing process is terminated.
If the start port signal output count is 0 (step C113; YES), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C118). Then, the start-up signal editing process ends.

  On the other hand, when the value of the starting port signal output control timer is not 0 (Step C112; NO), it is determined whether or not the starting port signal output control timer is in the output ON section (Step C116). The start port signal output control timer being in the output ON period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the start port signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step C116; YES), the process proceeds to step C117. If the start port signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (step C116; NO), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step C118), end the start-up signal editing process.

Next, control of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 129.
Here, description will be made using “step D” as the step number.
The special figure controlled by the effect control device 300 is a special effect figure displayed on the display device 41. (Decorative design that is not this special map).

In general, a “character” refers to a character or character, or a character or animal having the property or character, and may also refer to a character as a computer term. However, in the following description of the effect control device 300, particularly in the description of image display control using VDP, a series of movies, background images, images of symbols (decorative symbols and fourth symbols of special figures), characters of characters, A coherent still image or moving image such as an image may be referred to as a character, and such image data (still image or moving image data) may be referred to as character data (or character data).
Further, in the following description of the effect control device 300, in the case of display control, an object means a unit of display control with unity, and display elements (a background image, an image of a decorative pattern of a special figure, an image of a notice character) , An image with unity such as an image of a hold display). For example, in the case of this example, the decorative symbols of the special figure are distinguished by a difference in a variable display area (reel) of a left symbol, a right symbol, and a middle symbol, and each of these distinctions is a current symbol, a next symbol, There is a distinction that the display position in the scroll direction called the previous symbol is different. That is, for example, the left symbol includes the current symbol of the left symbol, the next symbol of the left symbol, and the previous symbol of the left symbol, and when viewed in detail, each of these is one object. However, in the control process, for example, the entire left symbol including the current symbol, the next symbol, and the previous symbol may be classified as one display element.

Further, in the present embodiment, a scenario table (also referred to as a scenario data table) is used when producing an effect on the display device 41 or the like. In this scenario table, data for controlling the flow of a specific effect (data specifying which motion table is to be executed at what timing) is set.
The above-mentioned motion table has motion data (that is, image data to be displayed and data for designating the display position and the like) of each effect (mainly effect display) which is made into blocks (parts). It means a staging operation. That is, the motion table is a control table for executing each of the effects produced in blocks, and is also called a motion control table. The data of the motion table can be easily created by a graphical input operation using a mouse or the like by commercially available application software that can be executed by a PC (personal computer). It is stored in the PROM 321 in advance.

In the present embodiment, the concept of a scenario layer is used in drawing control of a screen displayed on the display device 41 and the like. The scenario layer means each layer in a method of controlling the effect display and the like in a plurality of layers. In this example, a scenario table is set for each scenario layer as needed, and the effects of the respective scenario layers are combined to realize the entire effect.
The “scenario management area” is a storage area having a structure including an area for storing a value of a scenario timer (scenario timer area) and an area for storing an address of a scenario table (scenario data table area). is there. Then, a scenario management area having the same structure exists for each scenario layer for each scenario layer. In this example, since there are eight scenario layers, there are also eight scenario management areas (scenario management areas 0 to 7). .
The “address area of the scenario management area” means a storage area for storing the start address of the scenario management area.

[Main processing]
First, the main process of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
This main process starts when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started.
When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started, first, the interrupt is prohibited in step D1, then the initial setting of the CPU 311 is performed in step D2, then the initial setting of the VDP 312 is performed in step D3, and then the interrupt is performed in step D4. To give permission. Next, after sequentially executing steps D13, D15, and D19, the process proceeds to step D20.

In step D13, generation of display data is permitted. This is a process of permitting a display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to access the VRAM 329 and generate display data.
In Step D15, a random number seed is set. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, a srand function. Here, as an argument to be given to the srand function, a fixed value such as 0 (zero) may be used, or a value created based on an ID value of a CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine may be used. Is also good.
In step D19, power is supplied to an area to be initialized (for example, an effect flag area (a storage area used as various flags to be described later in the control processing of the effect control apparatus 300)) in the RWM (for example, the RAM 326) of the effect control apparatus 300. Save the initial value of the hour.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D20, steps D20 to D32 are sequentially executed.
In step D20, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared.
In step D21, effect button input processing is executed. This is a process of editing when the effect button 9 (for example, a configuration including a push button and a select button) or the touch panel 9a is operated when the touch panel 9a is enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at a high speed, the process of sensing the button input may be performed in this process (that is, in a main loop process described later) or in a short period timer interrupt (not shown). May go.

In step D22, a hole / player setting mode process for setting a changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41, and accepting a player's operation of changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 is performed. .
In Step D23, a random number update process is executed. This is a process of updating the pseudo-random number at least once every control cycle of the main process using a rand function, for example. Since the rand function generates a random number based on a specified generation sequence each time recalculation is performed, it is only necessary to execute the function. Note that a random number that is updated by +1 may be used as in the main board (game control device 100).
In step D24, a received command check process (described later) is executed.
In Step D28, a scenario setting process is executed. This is a process of analyzing a scenario based on a received command from the game control device 100 (details will be described later).
In Step D30, a motion control process is performed. This is a process for executing the scenario analyzed in step D28 (details will be described later).

In step D31, effect display editing processing is executed. This is a process for setting various commands for instructing the VDP 312 to draw on the display device 41 and parameters thereof, and details thereof will be described later. In this effect display editing process, commands are set in a table form, and the set commands are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D34 (instructing screen drawing) described later.
In step D32, the rendering command preparation end setting is executed, and the process proceeds to step D33. The process of step D32 is a process of setting that preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in step D31 has been completed.

  In step D33, it is determined whether it is a frame switching timing, and if it is a frame switching timing, steps D34 to D38 are sequentially executed, and if it is not a frame switching timing, this step D33 is repeated. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 second ≒ 33.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 second) of the V blank interrupt (also referred to as V sync interrupt). This is the timing of arrival at the target interval. The V blank interrupt is generated each time one scan of the entire screen for drawing by the VDP 312 is completed. The generation cycle of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second as described above. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and a V blank interrupt occurs twice, frame switching is performed, and the cycle of the frame switching timing is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 seconds ≒ 33.33 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. Frame switching may be performed periodically.

  By the process of step D33, the subsequent processes (steps D34 to D38 and subsequent steps D20 to D32) are executed at the frame switching timing in each of the processing cycles. The time management that needs to be synchronized with the effect contents is performed in units of frames (that is, in the unit of the processing cycle). When the processing cycle is 1/30 second, for example, it becomes 100 ms for three frames. This is similar to the case where the main board (game control device) manages the time value in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

Next, in step D34, the VDP 312 is instructed to draw a screen.
In step D35, a sound control process for performing a process related to the volume of the sound from the speakers (upper speaker 12a and lower speaker 12b) is executed.
In step D36, a decoration control process for controlling various LEDs of the board decoration device 42 and the frame decoration device 43 is executed.
In step D37, a movable body control process for controlling a movable body including various motors and SOL (solenoid) is executed.
In step D38, a launch information control process is executed. In the launch information control process, launch-related information (to be described later) is set based on the launch status flag, and the special figure rotation state (the number of special figure changes per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, for a predetermined number of rented balls)) Performs mode correction of the effect according to. Here, the firing state flag is information indicating whether or not the player is firing a game ball, and the firing touch information received from the game control device 100 in a firing touch information setting process (step D233) described later. Is information saved in the firing state flag area based on the command for notifying the user.
After executing step D38, the process returns to step D20 and repeats the same processing as when proceeding to step D20. That is, steps D20 to D38 constitute a loop process (in some cases, referred to as a main loop process) that is repeatedly executed in the above processing cycle after the activation of the effect control device 300.

  Note that the control processing of steps D35 to D37 is performed in these steps in which operation switching is performed in processing cycle units in order to match the presentation of the screen. The process of actually outputting data (especially signals for controlling driving of various LEDs and motors) to a port is performed in a short-period timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where only instructions are given by serial communication or the like, and signals and the like are not output by a timer interrupt.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check processing (step D24) in the above-described main processing will be described with reference to FIG. The command from the main board is configured to include MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), and these are sequentially transmitted. Hereinafter, such data constituting a command is referred to as command data or command data.

  The process of receiving a command from the main board is performed by a "command reception interrupt process" (not shown). That is, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed in a hardware manner (by the function of the CPU itself), and when a command is completely received, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated and notified. Although it is only necessary to take out the command from the buffer, in the “command reception interrupt processing”, every time there is a command reception interrupt, a command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, the loaded command data is checked for any abnormalities, The data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is incremented by 1 for the amount stored. In the description of the control process, the term “store” simply means that the information is stored in a predetermined storage area in a readable manner so as to be used for the subsequent control process (the same applies hereinafter). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is configured by a storage area in the RAM 311a of the CPU 311 (or the RAM 326, and so on). The capacity of the command buffer only needs to be equal to or more than the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in the system control cycle (the processing cycle described above; for example, 1/30 second).

When the reception command check processing routine is started, first, the value of the command reception counter is loaded as the number of command receptions in step D151, and it is determined in step D152 whether the number of command receptions is not zero. After sequentially executing D153 to D155, the process proceeds to step D156, and if zero, returns. In the present application, "loading" data in the control processing as in step D151 means extracting data from a RAM (the RAM 326 or the RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 of the present example).
Further, the command reception counter is decremented in step D153 next to this routine executed at each frame switching timing and is basically cleared to 0, and as a result, for one frame (1/30 second) (described above). The number of commands received during one processing cycle of (1) is counted by the command reception counter area of the RWM (RAM 326 or RAM 311a).

In step D153, the content of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) is reduced by the number of received commands.
Assuming that A: the value of the command reception counter and B: the number of received commands, “A = B” immediately after the execution of step D151. Then, immediately after the execution of step D153, “A = AB = 0” is a normal movement, but in the embodiment of the present example, the effect control device interrupts a command reception interrupt from the game control device (main board). Since the highest priority is given instead of the prohibition, the value of A may increase between the processing of step D151 and the processing of step D153. Therefore, if the process of step D153 is set to “A ← 0” (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the count of the command is shifted, so the subtraction process of “AB” is performed in step D153. Is going. However, when serial communication is used to transmit and receive commands from the main board as in the present embodiment, interrupts are disabled so that the value of A does not increase between the processing of step D151 and the processing of step D153. By doing so, the processing content of step D153 may be set to “A ← 0”.

In step D154, the contents of the reception command buffer (corresponding to a command buffer, hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a command buffer) (that is, the command data stored at the address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer) are stored in the command area (case). To the command storage area). The command area is a storage area in, for example, the RAM 326 or the RAM 311a that forms a buffer of a so-called FIFO format (first-in first-out format).
In step D155, since the data in the command buffer has been read, an update is performed to increase the value of the command read index, which is the read pointer of the command buffer, by, for example, 1 in the range of 0 to 31. Here, the range of 0 to 31 corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, 32).

  In step D156, it is determined whether or not copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D154 and D155 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). Then, the process is repeated from step D154, and if completed, the process proceeds to step D157.

In step D157, the contents of the command area (the data stored first among the data that has not yet been read in the command area, that is, the data to be read next) are loaded (ie, read) For the data of the loaded command (hereinafter, referred to as the current command), a received command analysis process (described later) is executed in the next step D158, and the process proceeds to step D159.
When the process proceeds to step D159, the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next) is updated, and the process proceeds to step D160.
In step D160, it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether steps D157 to D159 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands), and if not completed, the process returns to step D157. The process is repeated from step D157, and if completed, the process returns.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis processing (step D158) in the above-described received command check processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D171, the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D157 is separately stored in MODE and the lower byte is stored in ACT, and then the process proceeds to step D172. . Note that, in the case of a command of a variation system instructing a variation pattern of a special figure, upper byte data stored as MODE commands a first half variation pattern, and lower byte data stored as ACT commands a second half variation pattern. Things.

In steps D172 and D173, it is determined whether the value of MODE and the value of ACT separated in step D171 are within the normal range. If at least one of these values is not within the normal range, the process returns. If so, the process proceeds to Step D174. There is a value of MODE that is not defined and is not used. If such a value is not used, it is determined in step D172 that the value is not in the normal range.
The determination in step D173 as to whether the value of ACT separated in step D171 is within the normal range is performed, for example, as follows. That is, the effective ACT value differs for each MODE, and the upper and lower limits of the effective value of the ACT are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown), and are separated into the upper and lower limits in step D173. It is checked whether or not the value of the ACT falls within the range. If the value falls within the range, it is determined that the value is within the normal range (at this point, the omission check has not been performed).

In Step D174, it is determined whether the value of the separated ACT with respect to the value of the separated MODE is a correct combination. This determination is made using, for example, a match check table. The match check table is a table in which all ACT values (ACTION values) valid for the MODE value are registered in order from the top address, and are provided for each MODE value. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in the match check table corresponding to the MODE value, it is determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the match check table, the combination is correct. Judge as not a combination.
In the process of step D174, a check is performed to determine whether a combination of ACT and MODE is normal (including a missing tooth check). For one MODE, there are a plurality of valid ACTs, but their values are not always continuous (that is, some values do not exist discontinuously and some values are missing). Is checked to see if it is a valid value. Then, since only valid values are defined in the match check table, it is checked one by one whether they match.
If the result of the determination in step D174 is NO, the value of ACT is abnormal, and it is determined that the command is abnormal and the process returns without executing steps D175 and subsequent steps. If the decision result in the step D174 is YES, the process proceeds to a step D175.

In step D175, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the range of the variable command. If the data is within this range, variable command processing (described later) is executed in step D176, and if it is outside the range, the process returns to step D177. move on. Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D171 (the same applies to step D177 described later). Further, a fluctuation command (also referred to as a fluctuation command or a fluctuation pattern command) is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure, and the range of data of the fluctuation command is a fluctuation command range.
In step D177, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the jackpot command range. If it is within this range, the jackpot command processing (details omitted) is executed in step D178. Proceed to step D179. The jackpot-related command is a command for instructing an operation (such as display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) related to the effect during the big hit, and the range of data of the jackpot-related command is the jackpot-related command range.

In step D179, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the symbol command range. If the MODE data is within this range, the symbol command processing (described later) is executed in step D180 and the process returns. Proceed to D181. A symbol command (also referred to as a symbol command or a decoration special command) is a command for instructing information on a symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Is a symbol command range.
In step D181, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the single command range. If the data is within the range, the single command processing (described later) is executed in step D182, and if it is outside the range, the process returns to step D183. move on. It should be noted that unlike a command that is meaningful in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command, a command that is established independently is called a single-shot command. One-shot commands (sometimes called one-shot commands) include a customer waiting demonstration command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, and a model designation command. The range that the data of the single command can take is a single command range.

In step D183, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the pre-reading symbol system command range for pre-reading effect. If not, the process proceeds to step D185.
In step D185, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the range of a prefetch variable command for a prefetch effect. If it is out of this range, the received command analyzing process is terminated and the process returns.

  Here, the look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) refers to a variable display game corresponding to a start winning prize memory in which the variable display game of a special figure has not been executed (a hold of the start prize memory or simply a hold). In order to inform the player in advance of whether or not a big hit will occur (or what kind of fluctuation pattern will occur) when the game is subsequently executed, the display of the holding of the start winning prize memory or the like is performed in a mode different from the normal mode. It is a production such as. The pre-reading commands (pre-reading fluctuation-related commands and pre-reading design-related commands) are commands for informing in advance of a fluctuation pattern and a stop symbol corresponding to suspension of a start winning prize memory to be subjected to a pre-reading effect. It is transmitted from control device 100 to effect control device 300. It should be noted that ordinary variable commands and symbol commands that are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Single command processing]
Next, details of the one-shot command processing executed in step D176 in the above-described received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIGS.
When this routine is started, first, in step D201, it is determined whether or not the MODE data (the upper byte data separated in the above-described step D171, the same applies hereinafter) is data for designating a model (model designation command data). If the type is to be specified, the process returns to the end (this one-shot command processing is terminated) after executing the type setting process (description is omitted) in step D202. If not, the process proceeds to step D203.

  In step D203, it is determined whether the MODE data indicates that the RAM is to be initialized (the power is turned on while the initialization switch (RAM clear switch) is on) (RAM initialization command data). If the initialization is to be notified, the process returns after executing the RAM initialization setting process in step D204, and if not, the process proceeds to step D205. Note that the RAM initialization command is a command (also referred to as a power-on command) that notifies the effect control device 300 that the game control device 100 has cleared the RWM, and is transmitted in the above-described step S30. The RAM initialization command is sent to cause the effect control device 300 to clear the effect state and to perform RWM clear notification (operation for displaying that the RWM has been cleared on the display device 41, for example). The process is the RAM initialization setting process in step D204.

In step D205, it is determined whether the MODE data indicates power recovery (command data at the time of power recovery). If the MODE data indicates power recovery, the power recovery setting process is executed in step D206. The process returns, and if it is not a command to restore the power failure, the process proceeds to step D207. The power outage recovery setting process in step D206 is for displaying a message such as "the game has been resumed" on the display device 41 or blinking lamps in a predetermined manner to notify the player of the power outage recovery. This is a process and includes a scenario data setting process therefor.
Although the scenario data setting process will be described later in detail, it will be executed in a scenario management storage area (“scenario management area address area” and “scenario management area”) corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number. This is processing for setting scenario control data for an effect to be performed. The scenario control data is data set in the scenario management area or the address area of the scenario management area (for example, a scenario data table (scenario data table to be written in the scenario management area) in order to control the flow of a specific effect. Table) address).

In step D207, it is determined whether the MODE data is a command for a customer waiting demonstration (data of a customer waiting demonstration command). If the MODE data is for a customer waiting demonstration, steps D208 and D210 are sequentially executed. If it is not a command to return to the customer waiting demonstration, the process proceeds to step D211. The customer waiting demonstration refers to a customer waiting demonstration effect (also referred to as a customer waiting demonstration), and is an effect including a customer waiting demonstration display performed on the display device 41. The customer waiting demonstration effect is not limited to the display on the display device 41, and may be an effect on a display on another display device, lighting (including blinking) of lamps, or outputting sound.
In step D208, a customer waiting demonstration setting process (described later in detail) for setting scenario control data for performing a customer waiting effect is executed.
Next, in step D210, the accessory position confirmation process (description is omitted) is executed, and then the process returns.

In step D211, it is determined whether the MODE data indicates the value of the special figure 1 hold number (data of the special number 1 hold number command), and if the MODE data indicates the special figure 1 hold number value. For example, the process proceeds to step D212. If the value of the special figure 1 reservation number is not notified, the process proceeds to step D215.
In step D212, it is determined based on the MODE data whether the number of suspensions in the special figure 1 (the number of start memories in the special figure 1) has increased by one. After updating the number by 1, the process proceeds to step D214. If the number has not been increased, the process proceeds to step D214 without executing step D213. In step D214, the process returns after executing the special figure 1 hold information setting process (the description is omitted). Note that the number of start port winning command receptions is also updated by +1 in step D217 and step D220, which will be described later. This is equivalent to the number of game balls that have entered (that is, the number of start winnings), and is used to determine the special figure rotation state in the firing information control processing in step D38.

In step D215, it is determined whether the MODE data indicates the value of the special figure 2 reservation number (data of the special number 2 reservation number command) and if the MODE data indicates the special figure 2 reservation number value. For example, the process proceeds to step D216, and if the value of the special figure 2 reservation number is not notified, the process proceeds to step D219.
In step D216, it is determined whether or not the number of reservations in the special figure 2 (the number of start memories in the special figure 2) has increased by one based on the MODE data. After updating the number by 1, the process proceeds to step D218. If the number has not been increased, the process proceeds to step D218 without executing step D217. In step D218, the process returns after executing the special figure 2 suspension information setting process (description is omitted).
For the sake of simplicity, in steps D213 and D217, the prize balls at the first starting port (special figure 1 starting port 607) and the second starting port (special figure 2 starting port 608, starting winning port 26a). Although the common starting port winning command reception number area is incremented by one with the same number, the area may be divided as a different number of winning balls. In that case, the firing information control processing in step D38 also changes accordingly.

  In step D219, it is determined whether or not the MODE data indicates that the start opening is over (win start command prepared at step S399). For example, in step D220, the number of start port winning command receptions is updated by +1 and the process proceeds to step D221. In Step D221, the process returns after executing the start-port over-winning winning setting process (description is omitted). Note that the winning over start opening means a winning start exceeding the upper limit of the number of special figure reservations (the number of start memories).

In step D222, it is determined whether the MODE data indicates probability information (data of a probability change information command). If the MODE data indicates probability information, the process returns after performing probability information setting processing in step D223. If not, the process proceeds to step D224.
Here, the probability information setting process is a setting process for screen switching at the end of the probability change (at the time of transition from the high probability state to the normal state having a low probability) when the probability changes after the big hit, and a scenario for that. In some cases, it includes data setting processing.
In step D224, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is an error / incorrect information (for example, data of an error notification command). If the MODE data is an error / incorrect information, the error / incorrect setting process is described in step D225. (Omitted), and returns to step D226 if an error / incorrectness is not instructed.

  In step D226, it is determined whether the MODE data is a command for effecting mode switching (data of a mode switching command). After executing (details are omitted), the process returns. If the command does not instruct the effect mode switching, the process proceeds to step D228. The effect mode switching setting process is a control process for performing an operation according to the effect mode switching command, and includes a scenario data setting process therefor.

In step D228, it is determined whether the MODE data is a command to stop the design of the special figure (that is, a pattern stop command). If the instruction to stop the special figure is not issued, the process proceeds to step D232.
In step D229, it is determined whether the command corresponding to the MODE data is a normal command. If the command is not normal, the process returns. If it is normal, the process returns after executing steps D230 and D231.
In step D230, the stop setting of the corresponding special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2 indicated by the data of the symbol stop command) is executed.
In step D231, the normal state is set as the content of the gaming state flag (information indicating the state of the gaming machine (P machine state)). Here, the normal state indicates that the state is not any of a special figure big hit, a special figure small hit, a special figure change, and a customer waiting (customer waiting state). Further, after the setting is made to be normal here, for example, the special figure changes or the customer waits in response to the next command from the main board.

In step D232, the MODE data indicates the launch touch information (the state-off command or the state-on command (hereinafter, the firing command) relating to the touch switch signal prepared in step S304 or S307 and transmitted in step S317. ), And returns if it is to notify the launch touch information, if the launch touch information is set in step D233, and returns to step D234 if it does not notify the launch touch information. .
In the firing touch information setting process, setting of a firing state flag indicating a firing state (a state in which the player is in contact with the firing operation handle 11 to play a game) in accordance with the data of the received firing command. And so on. That is, in the launch touch information setting process, it is determined whether or not the received MODE data is a normal touch-on command (a state-on command prepared for the touch switch signal in step S307 and transmitted to the effect control device 300). If the command is a normal touch-on command, a firing flag is prepared. If the command is normal but not a touch-on command, a touch-off command (a touch switch signal is prepared in step S304 and transmitted to the effect control device 300). State off command), prepare the firing stop flag, and if the data of the flag thus prepared is different from the data saved in the firing state flag area, the data of the prepared flag is stored in the firing state flag area. Perform processing such as saving.

In step D234, it is determined whether or not the MODE data indicates that the ball lending button has been pressed (the data of the ball lending button pressing command prepared in step S298 and transmitted in step S299). If not, the process returns after executing the ball lending information setting process (described later) in step D235, and returns if the ball lending button is not pressed.
It should be noted that there is a step whose illustration and description are omitted in the single command processing. For example, a response process when another non-variable command is received is omitted. Also, scenario control data is not set for all commands. For example, when an error-related command indicating that the frame has been opened is received, the screen of the display device 41 is not changed, so that the setting of the scenario control data is not performed.

[Customer waiting demo setting process]
Next, the customer waiting demonstration setting process executed in step D208 of the single command processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the customer waiting demonstration setting process, the process first proceeds to step D241, and it is determined whether the data of the current command loaded in step D157 is normal. If the data is normal, the process proceeds to step D242.

In step D242, it is determined whether the state of the P machine (the state of the pachinko machine) is during the customer waiting demonstration. If the customer waiting demonstration is in progress, the process returns. I do.
In step D243, a customer waiting scenario data setting process (described later) is executed to perform a customer waiting effect. In the description of the control process of the effect control device 300, the scenario control data means data set in a scenario management area or an address area of the scenario management area in order to control a flow of a specific effect. In step D243, setting of scenario control data for performing a customer waiting effect is performed.
In step D244, customer waiting A (customer waiting state A) is set as the P machine state. The customer waiting effects include a customer waiting state A, a customer waiting state B, a customer waiting movie (no sound), and a customer waiting movie (with sound).

[Customer waiting scenario data setting processing]
Next, the customer waiting scenario data setting process executed in step D243 of the customer waiting demo setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the customer waiting scenario data setting process, the process returns after sequentially executing steps D251 to D274.
In step D251, scenario layer number 0 is prepared. Here, “preparing” means temporarily storing data in a predetermined storage area and holding it for later processing (the same applies to other steps described later). The scenario layer is a conceptual scenario layer for hierarchically controlling the flow of the effect. The scenario layer number is a number assigned to each scenario layer, and is 0 to 7 in this example. In this example, a scenario layer of scenario layer number 0 (hereinafter referred to as scenario layer 0) is mainly used for display control of a background image, and scenario layer 1 is used for display control of a left symbol. The control target is basically assigned. However, the customer waiting effect uses only the scenario layer 0, and also manages motion information such as symbols for the customer waiting effect in the scenario layer 0.

In step D252, the address of the customer waiting scenario data table is prepared. A scenario data table (also simply referred to as a scenario table) is a table in which data for controlling the flow of a specific effect (data specifying which motion table is to be executed and at what timing) is set. The effect is stored in advance in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300 for each effect. The customer waiting scenario data table is a scenario table for a customer waiting effect, and has a configuration shown in FIG. 136, for example. As shown in FIG. 136, the scenario table of this example is configured such that operation code and operand data (scenario data) are set in each row (each record).
In step D253, a scenario data setting process, which will be described later, is executed based on the data (address and scenario layer number data) prepared in the previous steps D251 and D252.

In step D254, scenario layer number 1 is prepared. In step D255, an address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D256, a scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D254 and D255.
In Step D257, scenario layer number 2 is prepared. In step D258, an address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D259, a scenario data setting process, which will be described later, is executed based on the data prepared in the previous steps D257 and D258.

In step D260, scenario layer number 3 is prepared. In step D261, an address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D262, a scenario data setting process, which will be described later, is executed based on the data prepared in the previous steps D260 and D261.
In step D263, scenario layer number 4 is prepared. In step D264, an address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D265, a scenario data setting process, which will be described later, is executed based on the data prepared in the previous steps D263 and D264.

In step D266, scenario layer number 5 is prepared. In step D267, an address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D268, a scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the previous steps D266 and D267.
In step D269, scenario layer number 6 is prepared. In step D270, an address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D271, a scenario data setting process, which will be described later, is executed based on the data prepared in the previous steps D269 and D270.

In step D272, scenario layer number 7 is prepared. In step D273, an address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D274, a scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in steps D272 and D273 immediately before.
Scenario layers 1 to 7 for preparing addresses (NULL) in steps D255, D258, D261, D264, D267, D270, and D273 are scenario layers in which a scenario data table is not set, that is, uncontrolled scenario layers.

[Scenario data setting processing]
Next, details of the scenario data setting processing executed in steps D253, D256, D259, D262, D265, D268, D271, and D274 in the above-described customer waiting scenario data setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this scenario data setting process is common to various effects, and the steps in which the scenario data setting process is executed are different from other routines (for example, step D453 of the reach start effect setting process described later). There are many. All the steps described as “scenario data setting processing” are shown in FIG. 95.
When this routine is started, first, in step D281, it is determined whether the address of the prepared scenario data table (for example, the one prepared in steps D252, D255, etc.) is NULL, and if it is NULL, step D287 is executed. If it is not NULL, it returns after executing steps D282 to D286 sequentially.

  In the above-described customer waiting scenario data setting process, when this routine is executed in step D253, the address of the customer waiting scenario data table which is not NULL is prepared in the immediately preceding step D252. Is NO, and steps D282 to D286 are executed. If this routine is executed in other steps D256 and the like, NULL is prepared in the immediately preceding step D255 and the like. The decision result in D281 becomes YES and step D287 is executed.

  In step D282, the start address of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number (for example, the one prepared in step D251, and so on) is set. In the case of the present example, the RAM 311a or the RAM 326 of the effect control device 300 has a configuration in which a storage area for scenario management called “address area of scenario management area” and “scenario management area” is provided. Among these, the scenario management area is an area for storing the value of the scenario timer (scenario timer area), an area for storing the value of the PB timer (push button timer) (PB timer area), and a PB detection area. The structure includes an area (PB detection flag area) for storing the value of the flag (push button detection flag) and an area (scenario data table area) for storing the address of the scenario data table. Further, the scenario management areas having the same structure exist for the scenario layers corresponding to the respective scenario layers. In this example, since there are eight scenario layers, there are also eight scenario management areas (scenario management areas 0 to 7). . In the above-mentioned step D282, in order to specify one of the plurality of scenario management areas, a start address of a scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number (hereinafter referred to as a corresponding scenario management area) is set. are doing.

The address area of the scenario management area is an area for storing the start address of the scenario management area for each scenario layer. In this example, since there are eight scenario layers, the corresponding eight start addresses (scenario layers) It consists of eight areas for storing layer 0 addresses to scenario layer 7 addresses, respectively.
Next, in step D283, the start address of the scenario management area set in the immediately preceding step D282 is stored (that is, written) in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number.

Next, in step D284, 0 is written as the value of the scenario timer in the corresponding scenario management area (that is, the value is cleared).
Next, in step D285, 0 is written as the value of the PB timer in the corresponding scenario management area (that is, the value is cleared). The value of the PB detection flag in the corresponding scenario management area may be cleared. However, the value may be cleared when necessary (when PB detection is started), so that the value of the PB detection flag is set here. Absent.
Next, in step D286, the address of the prepared scenario data table (for example, the one prepared in step D252) is written in the scenario data table area of the corresponding scenario management area.
On the other hand, in step D287, NULL is written in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number.

According to the above-described scenario data setting process, the effect to be executed from now on is stored in the scenario management storage area (“scenario management area address area” and “scenario management area”) corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number. Scenario control data is set.
For example, in the above-described customer waiting scenario data setting process, the scenario data setting process is executed in steps D253, D256, D259, D262, D265, D268, D271, and D274, and thereby the scenario in the address area of the scenario management area is executed. The start address of the scenario management area 0 is set as the layer 0 address, and NULL is set from the remaining scenario layer 1 address to the scenario layer 7 address. In the scenario data area of the scenario management area 0, the address of the customer waiting scenario data table prepared in step D252 is set. Thereby, the control of the customer waiting effect is executed only in the scenario layer 0.

[Ball lending information setting process]
Next, the ball lending information setting processing executed in step D235 of the single command processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the ball lending information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball lending button pressing command determined in step D234 is a normal command (step D361). If the command is not a normal command (step D361; N), the ball lending information setting process ends. On the other hand, if the command is a normal command (step D361; Y), unit price information is set based on the ball lending unit number information set in the ball lending unit number setting process (step D362), and the set unit price information is set. Is added to the value in the ball lending usage amount information area (step D363), and the ball lending information setting process ends. Here, the ball lending unit number setting process is a process executed in the hall / player setting mode process (step D22) in the case of the hall setting mode. This is a process for realizing the setting change. The ball lending unit number corresponds to an increase in the ball lending amount due to a single ball lending payout operation (payout operation by a single pressing operation of the ball lending button 16). The hole setting mode is a mode that starts when a hole setting mode start condition is satisfied. The hall setting mode start condition includes that there is an operation input to enter the hall setting mode (for example, an operation of pressing the effect button 9 twice while the glass frame 5 is opened), and a customer waiting demonstration is being performed. Conditions are included. That is, for example, if the production button 9 is pressed twice with the glass frame 5 opened during the customer waiting demonstration, the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied, and the ball lending unit number setting, the volume setting by the hall clerk, and the like are performed. Becomes possible.

Through the above processing, each time the player performs a ball lending operation (pressing the ball lending button) during the game continuation, the ball lending usage amount information is increased by that amount (that is, the cumulative amount of ball lending is performed). ).
Here, the ball lending unit number information is information corresponding to information (unit price information) of the amount to be used by pressing the ball lending button once (information on which unit price information can be obtained from the information, unit price information itself). May be present). The ball lending unit number information corresponds to an increase in the ball lending amount due to a single ball lending payout operation. The registered value of the increase in the ball rental amount (that is, the ball lending unit number information) can be rewritten by the gaming shop (hall) in the above-described hall setting mode.

[Symbol command processing]
Next, details of the symbol command processing executed in step D180 in the above-described received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D371, the special figure type (the special figure 1 or the special figure 1) corresponding to the MODE data (the upper byte data separated in the above-mentioned step D171 and the same in step D372 to be described later). 2 information) is set. For example, if the MODE data is 85h, the special figure 1 is set as the special figure type, and if the MODE data is 86h, the special figure 2 is set as the special figure type. As described above, the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 can be determined from the MODE data. In this step D371, the special figure type is determined from the MODE data and set.

Next, in step D372, a symbol type corresponding to the combination of MODE and ACT is set and saved, and then the process returns (that is, the symbol-related command processing ends).
In step D372, first, a symbol type setting table corresponding to MODE data is set. The symbol type setting table is a table for determining the symbol type corresponding to the symbol command (for example, a category such as a missing symbol, a 16R probability variable hit symbol, a 2R probability variable hit symbol, an 11R normal hit symbol,...), This is a table in which the correspondence between the ACTION data of the symbol command (for example, 11 types of 11h to 1Bh) and the symbol type is defined. Since the ratio of symbols changes between Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 (the same change ratio is the same), this symbol-type setting table is provided separately for each MODE. Select and set the data corresponding to

Next, in step D372, based on the set symbol type setting table, a symbol type corresponding to ACT data (lower byte data separated in step D171 described above) is acquired and saved as symbol type information.
In addition, the information of the special figure type and the symbol type set in steps D371 and D372 in response to the symbol command in this way is described later with respect to a variable command which is a set received after the symbol command (or before the symbol command). It is used in the processing of steps D401 and D402. Then, even if the information of the special figure type is used for the determination in step D401, the data set in step D371 before step D371 is newly executed is stored and held. Further, after the symbol type information is used in step D402, the data previously set in step D372 is stored and held until step D372 is newly executed.
As described above, according to this routine, each time a symbol command is received, a special figure type and a symbol type are set.

[Variable command processing]
Next, the details of the variable command processing executed in step D176 in the above-described received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D401 whether or not the special figure type is undetermined, and if undetermined, the routine returns. To check the combination of the fluctuation command and the symbol command, and proceed to step D403. The special figure type is information indicating whether the type of the special figure is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and is information set in the above-described step D371 of the symbol command processing.

In step D403, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation command and the symbol type are inconsistent. If the inconsistency is found, the process returns. If not, the process returns to step D404 to D408.
Here, the symbol type means a symbol category, and as described above, the symbol type includes, for example, a lost symbol, a 16R probability variable big hit symbol, and the like. Further, the inconsistency in step D403 is inconsistent in performing the effect, for example, when a design command of a 16R probability variation big hit symbol is received although a variation command (variation pattern command) of a loss is received. It means a combination (combination of a fluctuation command and a symbol type). That is, in step D402, a consistency check is performed to determine whether or not the variation pattern command matches the stop symbol, and the process branches in step D403 based on the result.

Then, in step D404, a variation pattern type (a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, which is determined by the variation pattern type data) according to the received command is determined.
In step D405, a variable effect setting process (described later) is performed in order to perform an effect according to the variable command.
In step D406, the special machine state is set as the P machine state (the state of the pachinko machine). Here, the special figure is being changed means that the special figure is being displayed in a change display (during a demonstration waiting for a customer, during a big hit, or during a fanfare, etc.).
In step D407, if the number of prefetch effects (the number of prefetch executions) is not zero, a process of updating the number of prefetch effects by -1 (a process of reducing the number of prefetch effects by 1) is executed. Here, the reason why the number of prefetching effects is updated by -1 is that the step D407 is executed when a valid fluctuation command is received (the fluctuation of the special figure is started from now on, and the holding number of the starting prize memory is one. This is because it decreases). The number of prefetch effects is set based on the latest pending information when a prefetch notice is given in a prefetch lottery process (not shown) (a subroutine called and executed in the prefetch variation command processing in step D186). For example, if the number of reservations is four, the number is set to four, if the number of reservations is three, the number is set to three, and so on. The number of prefetching effects is updated in step D407 and used in step D729b described later.
Then, in step D408, the above-mentioned number of times the special figure is changed (the counter used in the firing information control process in step D38) is updated by +1. Since this step D408 is executed every time the special figure change display is started, the number of special figure change counts for counting the number of executions of the special figure change display is updated by +1 here. The special figure change frequency updated here is used in the firing information control processing to determine the special figure rotation state.

(Variable effect setting processing)
Next, details of the variable effect setting processing executed in step D405 in the above-described variable command processing will be described with reference to FIGS.
When this routine is started, first, in step D421, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern type data determined in step D404 of the fluctuation command processing is fluctuation without reach, and if it is fluctuation without reach, steps D422 and D423 are sequentially performed. After execution, the process proceeds to step D426, and if it is not a fluctuation without reach, steps D424 and D425 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D426.
In step D422, the first-half notice distribution group address table (not shown) corresponding to the launch-related information (to be described later), the model code, the special figure type, and the effect mode at that time is set. In the case of proceeding to step D422, since there is no reach fluctuation, and the symbol type is always a lost symbol, it is not necessary to particularly refer to the symbol type in step D422.
The effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300 (in this embodiment, a command for the game mode is also sent from the game control device), and naturally differs depending on the model. The effect mode (game mode) is related to the effect theme of the gaming machine, such as a military contest mode or a decisive battle mode, and is corrected in the launch information control process (step D38) according to the special figure rotation state. This is different from the production mode.

The first-half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting an address of a first-half notice distribution group table, which will be described later. The data of the addresses of the first-half notice distribution group table are arranged in a matrix. In the first-half announcement distribution group address table, data in each row of the table corresponds to the same MODE value (data specifying the first-half variation pattern). When the variation pattern type is the variation with no reach, the columns of the first-half notice distribution group address table include the same number of reservations (the number of the winning prize memories in which the variation display game of the special map is not executed). The corresponding data is located. That is, in the first-half announcement distribution group address table in the case of the fluctuation without reach, the parameter for determining the row is the value of MODE and the parameter for determining the column is the number of reservations. On the other hand, when the variation pattern type is other than the non-reach variation, data corresponding to the same variation pattern type is arranged in each column of the first-half notice distribution group address table. That is, in the first-half notice distribution group address table other than the non-reach variation, the parameter for determining the row is the value of MODE, and the parameter for determining the column is the variation pattern type.
Accordingly, in the case of the present example, the lottery content of the notice effect (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) that appears during each change only changes in the case of the change without the reach according to the number of holds. become. For example, when the fluctuation is not reach, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of suspensions increases.

In step D423, based on the first-half notice distribution group address table set in step D422, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to MODE and the number of reservations of the special figure type is acquired.
Specifically, the address of the row corresponding to the value of MODE (the value separated in step D171, the same applies hereinafter) is calculated as the address of the row of the set first-half notice distribution group address table. Next, the address of the column corresponding to the number of reservations of the special figure type at that time is calculated as the address of the column of the set first-half notice distribution group address table. Then, based on these calculation results, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table is obtained from the corresponding row and column position in the corresponding first-half notice distribution group address table.

On the other hand, in step D424, the first-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the launch-related information (to be described later) set at that time, the model code, the special figure type, the symbol type, and the effect mode at that time is set. .
Next, in step D425, based on the first half allocation group address table set in step D424, the address of the first half allocation group table corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is acquired.
Specifically, the address of the row corresponding to the MODE value is calculated as the row address of the set first-half notice distribution group address table. Next, as a column address of the set first-half notice distribution group address table, an address of a column corresponding to the variation pattern type at that time (data determined in step D404, the same applies hereinafter) is calculated. Then, based on these calculation results, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table is obtained from the corresponding row and column position in the corresponding first-half notice distribution group address table.

When the process proceeds to step D426, a preliminary lottery process (lottery of a preliminary effect using random numbers) is executed for the first half using the first preliminary announcement distribution group table of the address acquired in the immediately preceding step D423 or D425. According to the preview lottery process, the distribution results are selected in advance for all the preliminary distribution types set in the first-half preliminary distribution group table, and various kinds of information for designating the effect contents according to the distribution results are previously determined. It is stored in a predetermined storage area.
According to the processing up to the step D426, the address of the first-half preliminary distribution group table is selected, and the preliminary lottery processing (the first-half variation preliminary lottery processing) of the step D426 is selected based on the selected first-half preliminary distribution group table. Be executed. Here, the first-half notice distribution group table is a table in which an address of one notice distribution table and an address of a result area of one effect distribution result corresponding to the address are arranged in a plurality in correspondence with the same row. It is. The notice distribution (lottery for determining the presence or absence of the notice effect and the mode) performed for one fluctuation display game is executed by a very large number of different things depending on the fluctuation pattern. The number of lines also becomes huge.

  Here, the firing related information referred to in steps D422 and D424 includes at least the above-described firing state flag information (a firing flag indicating the touch state of the firing operation handle 11, or a firing stop state indicating the touch-off state). Flag information), continuous touch state flag information (information saved in the process of the launch information control process in step D38), and ball lending usage amount information (information updated in step D363). I have. The continuous touch state flag indicates whether or not the contact with the firing operation handle 11 is continuous for a continuous touch specified time (for example, 3 minutes) or more (may be a continuous state including a non-contact state shorter than the unfired specified time). This flag indicates the game continuation state of the player.

  In steps D422 and D424, the first-half notice distribution group address table to be selected is changed based on the launch-related information including these pieces of information. Thereby, the effect changes according to the establishment of the predetermined effect change condition (for example, the frequency of occurrence of a special notice effect increases). For example, in the present embodiment, after the player plays the game (touches the firing operation handle 11) for a predetermined time or more, an effect change condition including a condition (first condition) that the player releases his / her hand (touches off) from the firing operation handle 11 is satisfied. Then, the effect is changed, and the effect change condition includes a condition (second condition) that the ball lending usage amount exceeds the specified amount. Also, a condition (third condition) that there is one remaining special figure reservation (special figure start winning prize memory) corresponding to a special figure change for which an effect is to be changed (a special figure change to be started from now on) This effect change condition may be included. In the table selection in steps D422 and D424, the table to be selected changes depending on whether or not such a condition (for example, all of the second and third conditions in addition to the first condition) is satisfied. The content changes. As a result, an effect that the player has a sense of expectation and the player wants to continue the game enthusiastically and an effect that the player can have a range of effects can be obtained without lowering the game efficiency. . That is, when the player who has played the game for more than the specified time releases his / her hand from the steering wheel, the effect is changed by the effect control device 300, and the effect change by the effect control device 300 is a change in the reach occurrence rate controlled by the game control device 100. Is not included, the time efficiency does not decrease, and the player operates the steering wheel again to continue the game.

  The condition that the player releases the hand from the firing operation handle 11 (touches off) after playing the game (touching the firing operation handle 11) for a predetermined time or more can be determined by the firing state flag and the continuous touch state flag. In other words, when the firing state flag is a firing stop flag and the continuous touch state flag is a continuous touch condition satisfaction flag, the touch-off state in which the firing operation handle 11 has no contact with the player's finger or the like at the present time. Until a certain time before (within a time shorter than the above-mentioned non-firing specified time), it means that the firing operation handle 11 has been contacted. Therefore, in steps D422 and D424, if the firing state flag is a firing stop flag and the continuous touch state flag is a continuous touch condition satisfaction flag, it is determined that the first condition is satisfied, and the remaining second condition and If the third condition is satisfied, the table is selected so that the effect contents change. The effect change condition may be a mode in which the success or failure is determined only by the first condition (a mode without the second condition or the third condition), or a mode in which the success or failure is determined by the first condition and the second condition. Alternatively, the first condition and the third condition may determine success or failure, or another condition may be added.

Next, after step D426, steps D427 to D429 are executed.
Steps D427 to D429 are processes for randomly selecting a notice effect of the latter half change. Note that the latter half of the special figure change display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a special result mode (a special symbol combination) in which a display area other than a specific area in a plurality of rows of the special figure has a big hit). The display is stopped, and the display is variably displayed only in the specific area). On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the fluctuation display game of the special figure is a fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.
In step D427, the launch-related information, the model code, the special figure type, the symbol type, and the second-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the effect mode at that time are set, and the process proceeds to step D428. .
Here, the second-half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting an address of the second-half notice distribution group table, and the data of the address of the second-half notice distribution group table is arranged for each variation pattern type. That is, in the latter half notice distribution group address table, the data of each row of the table corresponds to each variation pattern type.

In Step D428, the address of the latter half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is obtained. Specifically, the address of the second-half notice distribution group table is acquired from the position of the row corresponding to the variation pattern type at that time in the second-half notice distribution group address table set in the immediately preceding step D427.
Next, in step D429, a lottery of a notice appearing during the latter half change (during reach) is performed. That is, using the second-half notice distribution group table of the address acquired in step D428, the second-stage notice lottery process (lottery of the notice effect using random numbers) is executed for the second-half change.
According to the preview lottery process, the distribution results are selected in advance for all the preliminary distribution types set in the second-half preliminary distribution group table prepared in step D428, and the effect contents according to the distribution results are selected. Various types of information to be designated are stored in predetermined storage areas in advance.

  According to the processing from step D427 to step D429, the address of the second-half notice distribution group table is selected, and based on the selected second-half notice distribution group table, the notice lottery processing of step D429 (the second-half change notice lottery) is performed. Process) is performed. Then, at the time of selecting the second-half announcement distribution group address table in step D427, the above-mentioned launch-related information is referred to in the same manner as in the case of the first half fluctuation, and the change of the production due to the satisfaction of the above-mentioned production change condition is also applied to the second half fluctuation. Is achieved.

Next, after step D429, the process proceeds to step D431.
In Step D431, a basic BGM number (tune number of the basic BGM) and a decoration number (a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp (LED)) corresponding to the effect mode are set, and then the process proceeds to Step D432. Note that the BGM and decoration that are normally fluctuating change for each effect mode. In this step D431, defaults in each mode are set first. If it changes to special BGM or decoration due to a notice or the like, it is configured to be changed in the scenario table.

In step D432, it is determined whether or not the first-half variation type determined in the processing up to this point (particularly step D426) is normal variation. If it is normal variation, the process proceeds to step D433. Then, the process proceeds to other processing steps not shown in the figure (processing of various fluctuations when the first fluctuation type is not the normal fluctuation).
Note that the first-half variation type is a variation notice type distributed on the effect control device side in the same MODE (for example, the first-half second normal variation). In order to avoid complication, the flowchart (FIG. 100) shows only the state of the notice distribution when the first-half variation type is the normal variation. Then, the processing of various fluctuations (including pseudo-runs) in the case where the first-half fluctuation type is not the normal fluctuation is performed in steps subsequent to the flow in which the determination result of step D432 is NO (omitted by dashed lines in FIG. 100). Although the process is executed, the process proceeds to step D437 after the process after this flow is executed.

In step D433, it is determined whether or not the notice type (data of the effect distribution result area; notice data) determined in the processing up to this point (especially steps D426 and D429, and so on) designates a reach start effect. If it is not the reach start effect, the process proceeds to a process in the case where another announcement effect is selected (omitted by a dashed line in FIG. 100), and then proceeds to step D437. After executing the effect setting process (described later), the process proceeds to Step D437.
The reach start effect is, for example, an effect including a display as shown in FIG. 145 and FIG. 146 (described later) as a specific display example (not only a display but also a sound output for the effect). (May be included). This effect may be performed as a special notice effect (for example, an effect with a low appearance rate or zero appearance rate in a normal state) performed when the above-described effect change condition is satisfied, or may be performed in the above-described effect change condition. A mode may be selected and executed independently.

In step D437, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is special figure 2. If the special figure is special figure 2, steps D438 and D439 are executed, and then the process proceeds to step D442. (Case), the process proceeds to step D442 after executing steps D440 and D441.
In step D438, the special figure 2 suspension scenario table information corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension number is set.
In step D439, the fourth symbol (special figure 2 change) scenario table information is set.
In step D440, the special figure 1 suspension scenario table information corresponding to the special figure 1 suspension number is set.
In step D441, the fourth symbol (special figure 1 change) scenario table information is set.
In these steps D438 and D439, or D440 and D441, scenario control data relating to an animation with a reduced number of suspensions (special figure start storage) is set.

Next, in step D442, it is determined whether or not the MODE data (first half variation pattern data) separated in step D171 instructs normal variation. If the mode data instructs normal variation, the process proceeds to step D443. If the command does not instruct a normal change, the process proceeds to another step which is omitted in FIG.
After the flow in which the result of the determination in step D442 is NO (the location not shown by the dashed line), the same processing as steps D443, D444, etc. is executed for the variable display effect when the MODE data is other than the above. If the MODE data does not correspond to any of them, the process returns because it is abnormal.

In step D443, the notice type (data of the effect distribution result area; notice data) determined by the processing up to this point designates SD1 which is one of the effects performed in the SD (super deformation) mode. If it is not SD1, the process proceeds to step D445. If it is SD1, the process returns to step D444 after executing the SD1 variation setting process in step D444.
Note that the SD1 is, for example, an effect including not only a display as shown in FIG. 155 (b) to FIG. 158 (b) (described later) as an example of a display of the screen (not only a display but also an output for the effect). May be included). This effect may be performed as a special notice effect (for example, an effect with a low appearance rate or zero appearance rate in a normal state) performed when the above-described effect change condition is satisfied, or may be performed in the above-described effect change condition. A mode may be selected and executed independently.
In step D445, it is determined whether the ACT data (second half variation pattern) separated in step D171 commands "outside", and if "outside", in step D446, after executing the outset setting process, return. If it is not “losing”, the process proceeds to another step which is omitted in FIG. Note that the outlier setting process is a process including a scenario data setting process for performing a second half fluctuation effect of “outlier”. Note that there are actually more than one type of “outside” but a plurality (“normal-1 out of place”, “normal + 1 out of place”, etc.), but detailed description is omitted here.
In addition, after the flow in which the determination result in step D445 is NO (the location not shown by the dashed line), steps D445 and D446 are performed for other reach effects in the case of normal fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation display effect in the case of a big hit). Is performed, and if the ACT data does not correspond to any of them, it is abnormal and returns.

[Reach start effect setting process]
Next, the reach start effect setting process executed in step D434 of the variable effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this processing, the process returns after sequentially executing steps S451 to S459.
First, in step D451, scenario layer number 1 is prepared. In step D452, a scenario table for the left symbol reach start effect (for example, the one shown in the upper part of FIG. 148) is prepared. In step D453, scenario data setting processing is performed on the prepared scenario table. And then proceed to Step D454.
Next, in step D454, scenario layer number 2 is prepared, in step D455, a scenario table for the right symbol reach start effect (for example, the one shown in the middle of FIG. 148) is prepared, and in step D456, scenario data setting processing is performed on the prepared scenario table. , And the process proceeds to step D457.
Next, in step D457, scenario layer number 4 is prepared. In step D458, a scenario table (for example, the one shown in the lower part of FIG. 148) of the creature reach start effect is prepared. In step D459, scenario data setting processing is performed on the prepared scenario table. And then return.

As described above, the scenario data setting process is to be executed in the scenario management storage areas (“scenario management area address area” and “scenario management area”) corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number. This is a process for setting scenario control data for production.
In steps D451 to D459, scenario control data for executing the reach start effect is set.
Further, just because the “scenario table of tiger taro reach start effect” is prepared and set in step D458, the characters appearing in this reach start effect are not limited to “tiger taro”. In the specification of the present application, the “scenario table of the tiger taro reach start effect” is merely a name given to the scenario table for convenience of explanation.
In this example, the scenario layers of scenario layer numbers 1, 2, and 4 are used for the reach start effect as described above, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the scenario table of the tiger taro reach start effect may be set to the scenario layer of scenario layer number 5.

[SD1 fluctuation setting processing]
Next, the SD1 variation setting process executed in step D444 of the variation effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this process, the process returns after sequentially executing steps D461 to D477.
In step D461, for example, a stop symbol setting process (details omitted) of setting a stop symbol of a decorative special figure based on the symbol type saved in step D372 and storing the symbol in the stop symbol area is executed.
The stop symbol area exists for each of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and is used in a symbol stop process described later. In addition, the fluctuation of SD1 in this embodiment may be a big hit, and in the above-mentioned step D461, a symbol that is out of place or a big hit is set based on the symbol type saved in the step D372.

In step D462, the ACT and the address (name of the scenario table) of the scenario table of SD1 corresponding to the first half variation type are saved in the symbol variation scenario table area. The symbol variation scenario table area is a storage area of the RAM 311a (or RAM 326) of the effect control device 300 for temporarily storing an address of a symbol variation scenario table to be used from now on, and includes a left symbol area and a right symbol area. The area is divided into an area for medium symbols and an area for medium symbols, and each area for symbols is divided into 1st (early), 2nd (first half), and 3rd (second half), and the area for storing the address of one scenario table is 9 in total. (= 3 × 3). On the other hand, the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300 has a table for selecting a scenario table for symbol change according to the command received from the game control device and the first-half change type (or further, the effect mode or the notice type) (hereinafter, referred to as a table). , A symbol variation list table) is registered for each command (each ACT data). In the above step D462, for example, first, a symbol variation list table corresponding to the ACT is selected, and then a setting pattern corresponding to the first half variation type or the like is selected from a plurality of setting patterns in the selected symbol variation list table. Then, the address of the scenario table of the selected setting pattern is saved in the symbol variation scenario table area. In the step D462, a combination of scenario tables for performing a variable effect called SD1 in the SD mode is selected and saved. For example, a combination of a big hit and a case of a miss is naturally different (at least 3rd (second half)). ) Is selected and saved.
Here, the symbol variation list table includes, for each setting pattern, a left symbol, a right symbol, and a middle symbol for each scenario table for 1st (early), 2nd (first half), and 3rd (second half). This is a table in which addresses are respectively registered.

  In the present application, the period of the movement of the symbol within the first half fluctuation time is “early stage” (1st), and the remaining period within the first half fluctuation time is “first half” (2nd). Even if the same first half fluctuation time, the pattern starts to move, but there are cases where it scrolls down as it is or hops up once (a kind of notice), so that "the early + first half = first half fluctuation" so that the movement does not become one way It has a configuration. Then, the second half fluctuation time is set to “second half” (3rd). Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the effects at the time of the special figure change are set for each period obtained by dividing the effect at the time of the special figure change into a plurality of times, and the entire effect at the time of the special figure change is set as a combination of the effect contents of each period. It is a combination type to configure. This has the advantage that the total amount of data that must be stored in the nonvolatile memory for storing control data (the PROM 321 in this example) is reduced. That is, for example, if all tables are prepared for each effect content with a slightly different movement, the data amount becomes enormous. However, such a combination method can solve such a problem.

In step D463, scenario layer number 0 is prepared.
In step D464, the address of the background scenario table for SD1 corresponding to the ACT or the like is prepared.
In step D465, the above-described scenario data setting processing is executed based on the data prepared in the previous steps D463 and D464.
In step D466, scenario layer number 1 is prepared.
In step D467, the left symbol scenario 1st table address (the address of the scenario table stored in the 1st (early opening) area in the left symbol area described above) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area to prepare.
In step D468, the above-described scenario data setting processing is executed based on the data prepared in the previous steps D466 and D467.

In Step D469, scenario layer number 2 is prepared.
In step D470, the right symbol scenario 1st table address (the address of the scenario table stored in the 1st (early opening) area in the right symbol area described above) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area to prepare.
In step D471, the above-described scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D469 and D470.
In step D472, scenario layer number 3 is prepared.
In step D473, the middle symbol scenario 1st table address (the address of the scenario table stored in the 1st (early opening) area in the above-described middle symbol area) is prepared from the above-described symbol variation scenario table area.
In step D474, the above-described scenario data setting processing is executed based on the data prepared in the previous steps D472 and D473.

In Step D475, scenario layer number 7 is prepared.
In step D476, an address of the fourth symbol scenario table (scenario table for the fourth symbol) is prepared.
In step D477, the above-described scenario data setting processing is executed based on the data prepared in steps D475 and D476 immediately before.
According to the above-described routine (SD1 fluctuation setting processing), the scenario layer (in this case, scenario layers 0, 1, 2, 3, and 7) for which scenario control data needs to be set when performing the fluctuation effect of SD1 is executed. As the scenario table, for example, a combination as shown in FIGS. 159 to 161 to be described later (a scenario table for controlling the fourth symbol is omitted) is selected.

[Scenario setting process]
Next, details of the scenario setting process executed in step D28 in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the process returns after executing steps D551 to D566 sequentially.
In step D551, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) is prepared, and in the next step D552, a scenario analysis process (described later) is executed based on the preparation of step D551. . Here, "prepare an address area" means to prepare an address of the address area itself in order to read data set in the address area in a later process.

Similarly, in step D553, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to scenario management area 1 (scenario layer number 1) is prepared, and a scenario analysis process is executed in the next step D554 based on the preparation.
In step D555, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to scenario management area 2 (scenario layer number 2) is prepared, and based on this preparation, a scenario analysis process is executed in the next step D556.
In step D557, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to scenario management area 3 (scenario layer number 3) is prepared, and based on this preparation, a scenario analysis process is executed in the next step D558.
In step D559, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to scenario management area 4 (scenario layer number 4) is prepared, and based on this preparation, a scenario analysis process is executed in next step D560.
In step D561, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to scenario management area 5 (scenario layer number 5) is prepared, and based on this preparation, a scenario analysis process is executed in the next step D562.
In step D563, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to scenario management area 6 (scenario layer number 6) is prepared, and based on this preparation, a scenario analysis process is executed in the next step D564.
In step D565, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 7 (scenario layer number 7) is prepared, and based on this preparation, a scenario analysis process is executed in the next step D566.

  In the case of this example, there are eight scenario layers as described above, and the scenario layer numbers are 0 to 7. Of these eight scenario layers, basically, scenario layer 0 is for the background, scenario layer 1 is for the left symbol, scenario layer 2 is for the right symbol, and scenario layer 3 is the middle symbol. Scenario layer 4 is for preview 1, scenario layer 5 is for preview 2, scenario layer 6 is for reservation, and scenario layer 7 is for fourth symbol.

  However, it is not limited to this mode. For example, in the present embodiment, the flowchart has eight scenario layers, but the number of scenario layers is not limited to this. In particular, the number of layers used for the background and the notice increases or decreases depending on the model specifications, and the present embodiment is described as limited to as few as possible. Also, the control target of each scenario layer is not limited to the above embodiment, and various allocations may be made. For example, scenario layer 0 is for background, scenario layer 1 is for cut-in notice, scenario layer 2 is for left symbol, scenario layer 3 is for right symbol, and scenario layer 4 is for medium symbol. Yes, the scenario layer 5 may be reserved, the scenario layer 6 may be used for another notice, and the scenario layer 7 may be used for the fourth symbol.

As described above, the address area of the scenario management area is provided for each scenario layer, and when there is an object to be controlled, the address area of the corresponding scenario management area X (X = 0 to 7). When the address of the scenario management area is stored in the address area and there is no control, the address area of the corresponding scenario management area X is set to NULL (see steps D283 and D287 described above). . For example, since the hold display is not performed during the movie waiting for the customer, the address (the address of the scenario management area 0) is set in the background area (the address area of the scenario management area 0). NULL is set in (the address area of the scenario management area 6).
The allocation of the control target of the scenario layer is only a basic one. For example, as shown in FIG. 136, the control of the design (decorative special figure) may be performed in the scenario layer 0 for the background.

[Scenario analysis processing]
Next, details of the scenario analysis processing executed in step D552 and the like in the above-described scenario setting processing will be described with reference to FIGS.
When this routine is started, first, in step D571, the value of brk (data used for repetition of processing to be described later) is set to 0, and then in step D572, the address of the prepared scenario management area X is set in the address area. After the set data (data at the address of the scenario management area X or NULL) is loaded, the process proceeds to step D573. Here, the “prepared address area of the scenario management area X” refers to, for example, when the present routine is executed in the above-described step D552, the address area (scenario prepared in the immediately preceding step D551) If this routine is executed in step D554, the address area is the address area prepared in the immediately preceding step D553 (address area of scenario management area 1). Is also prepared in the immediately preceding step.

In step D573, it is determined whether the data at the address loaded in step D572 is NULL. If NULL, control is not required and control is returned. If not, control is passed to step D574.
In step D574, the value of the scenario timer in the scenario management area at the address loaded in step D572 is read, and it is determined whether the value of the scenario timer is smaller than 0. If it is 0 or more, step D575 is executed, and the flow advances to step D576. Note that the value of the scenario timer is first set to 0 in the above-described step D284 each time the scenario control data is set. However, since 0 is the lower limit, if the value is smaller than 0, it is determined to be abnormal. In step D575, if the value of the scenario timer is not 0, an update for reducing the value of the scenario timer by 1 is executed.
In step D576, it is determined whether the value of the scenario timer is greater than 0. If the value is greater than 0, the process returns because the time has not elapsed yet, and if it is less than 0, the process proceeds to step D577.

  According to these steps D574 to D576, the timer management for the wait is performed. In other words, the target scenario table (in the target scenario management area in the target scenario management area) has a time corresponding to the value of the scenario timer set in the scenario timer area in the target scenario management area (the scenario management area of the address loaded in step D572). The operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table of the address set in the scenario data table area is realized. Here, “the operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table” means that the progress of the scenario table is weighted (waiting there before proceeding to the next row of the scenario table. The effect at that time is continued). . For example, in line 20 (// 19) of FIG. 136, since a constant wait code is set and the wait time value is (300), the line stays in this line for a time corresponding to 300 frames, and after the elapse of the time, the next time The operation proceeds to the line, and this operation corresponds to “operation for delaying control progress of the scenario table”. In the scenario table, a line between a wait time value and a line where a constant wait code (including a PB wait code) is set and a line next to a constant wait code and the like are set. Are executed at the same time. When the value of the scenario timer becomes 0 or less as a result of the update in step D575, it is determined that the scenario timer has timed out. Therefore, in order to advance the control processing of the target scenario table, the process proceeds to step D577 through step D576. It is configured to proceed to. However, the control processing of the target scenario table (step D584 and subsequent steps) is executed after the timer management processing for the PB valid time described later.

That is, in step D577, the value of the target PB timer (the value of the PB timer area in the scenario management area at the address loaded in step D572) is read, and it is determined whether the value of the PB timer is greater than zero. , 0, the time has not elapsed, and the flow advances to step D578. If the time is less than 0, the time has elapsed and the flow advances to step D583.
In Step D578, it is determined whether the PB operation flag is set. If the PB operation flag is set, the process proceeds to Step D579. If the PB operation flag is not set, the target PB timer is set in Step D582. After executing the update for reducing the value of by 1 by one, the process proceeds to Step D583. Here, the PB operation flag is a flag that is set when a press operation of the PB (push button 9) is detected in the effect button input process executed in step D21 of the main process described above.

In step D579, the value of the target PB timer at this time (that is, the remaining time of the PB effective time at the time when the PB is pressed) is stored as the PB effect addition time, and then in step D580, the target PB timer is added. The value of the timer is set to 0, and then in step D581, a flag is set in the PB detection flag area of the target scenario management area (that is, data indicating that the PB detection flag is set). In steps D579 to D581, since the PB is pressed, the remaining time of the PB timer is stored as a PB effect addition time (for step D696 described later), the PB timer is reset to 0, and the PB is operated. A PB detection flag indicating that the operation has been performed is set in the scenario management area for scenario control.
Then, in step D583, it is determined whether or not the value of the target PB timer is greater than 0. If the value is greater than 0, the process returns because no PB operation is detected and the time is not up. Since the PB operation has been performed or the time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step D584.

According to steps D577 to D583, timer management for the PB valid time is performed. That is, if the value of the PB timer greater than 0 is set in the PB timer area in the target scenario management area (scenario management area of the address loaded in step D572), the value of the PB timer corresponds to this value. The control operation of the target scenario table (the scenario table of the address set in the scenario data table area in the target scenario management area) is delayed by the time required to provide the PB valid time. Here, “the operation of delaying the control of the scenario table to provide the PB valid time” means that the value of the target PB timer becomes 0 (that is, the PB timer times out) or the PB is pressed. This means that the progress of the scenario table is weighted until it is done (it waits there before proceeding to the next line of the scenario table, and continues the production at that time). For example, in line 28 (// 27) of FIG. 136, since a constant wait code is set and the wait time value is (30), the wait time remains on this line for 30 frames, and after the elapse of this time, the next The operation proceeds to the 29th line. The operation on the 28th line is the “operation for delaying the control progress of the scenario table” by the above-described scenario timer. On the other hand, in the next line 29 (// 28), since the PB wait code is set and the effective time value is (2970), this effective time value (2970) is set in the PB timer in step D702 described later. If there is no PB press operation, the effective time corresponding to a maximum of 2970 frames remains on this line, and if there is a PB press operation within this effective time, the process immediately proceeds to the next line. The operation of waiting for the pressing operation of the PB for the valid time (PB valid time) is equivalent to the “operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table to provide the PB valid time”. Then, the value of the PB timer becomes 0 or less by the update of step D582 without the operation of the PB, and the PB timer expires, or the PB effective time until the PB timer expires is calculated. If the PB is operated during this time, the process proceeds to step D583 via step D582 or steps D579 to D581. In this case, the determination result of step D583 is NO (the PB timer is 0) and the process proceeds to step D584.
However, when the value of the PB timer set in the PB timer area is 0 from the beginning, the process proceeds from step D577 to step D583, further proceeds from step D583 to step D584, and the control immediately proceeds. In this case, the PB effective time is 0 (none). Note that the PB effective time is provided in the case of a notice effect or the like. In other cases, the value of the PB timer area is set to 0 and the PB effective time is not provided.

Next, in and after step D584, control processing of the target scenario table is executed. Hereinafter, this will be described.
In Step D584, the process from Step D584 to Step D623, which is a loop end, is repeatedly executed until a value other than 0 is set as the value of brk. In other words, in step D623, which is the end of the subsequent loop, the value of brk at that time is read, and if the value of brk is 0, the process returns to step D584 to repeat the processing from the next step D585.

That is, when the process proceeds to step D584, the process sequentially executes steps D585 to D588, and then proceeds to step D589.
In step D585, the address of the scenario table is loaded from the scenario data table area in the target scenario management area. For example, in the case of the scenario layer number 0 at the time of the customer waiting demonstration, the address of the scenario table shown in FIG. 136 is loaded in this step D585.
In step D586, the operation code of a specific row (specified row) of the scenario table specified by the address loaded in step D585 is obtained. As described above, in the scenario table, as shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, for example, operation codes and operand data (scenario data) are set in each row. For example, in the case of FIG. 137, if the target is the scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) and the designated line is the first line, the data of the operation code on the first line of the scenario layer 0 at the top is “motion continuation code”. Is obtained in step D586. In the case of FIG. 136, for example, if the designated line is the first line, the “motion 1 deletion code” (specific data, for example, “51h”), which is the data of the operation code on the first line, is stored in step D586. Is obtained. Alternatively, in the case of FIG. 136, for example, when the designated line is the 16th line, the “motion 10 registration code” (specific data, for example, “4Ah”), which is the operation code data of the 16th line, is obtained in step D586. Is done.

In step D587, the operation code obtained in the immediately preceding step D586 is prepared by separating it into upper bits and lower bits. For example, when the operation code data is “51h”, the upper bits “5” and the lower bits “1” are separately prepared. Note that the upper bits and lower bits of the operation code have meanings respectively (however, the lower bits may have no meaning). For example, of “51h” that is the “motion 1 deletion code”, the upper bit “5” means the motion deletion, and the lower bit “1” indicates the target motion (in this case, the motion deletion target). Means that the first layer is motion 1.
In step D588, an operand of a specific row (specified row) of the scenario table specified by the address loaded in step D585 is obtained and prepared. For example, in the case of FIG. 137, if the target is the scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) and the designated line is the first line, the motion index No. . (51) "is prepared in step D588. In the case of FIG. 136, if the designated line is the 16th line (the operation code is “motion 10 registration code”), “motion index No. (−1)” which is the operand data of the 16th line is determined in step D588. Get and prepare.

In step D589, the prepared opcode upper data (data separately prepared in step D587, the same applies hereinafter) is determined, and if the data is a command for motion registration (motion registration code), motion registration processing (step D601) is performed. After executing (described later), the process proceeds to step D621. If the data is not data for instructing motion registration, the process proceeds to step D590.
In step D590, the prepared operation code upper data is determined. If the data is a command to instruct motion deletion (motion deletion code), motion deletion processing (described later) is executed in step D602, and then the process proceeds to step D621, in which the motion deletion is performed. If not, the process proceeds to step D591.

In Step D591, the prepared operation code upper data is determined. If the data is a command to instruct motion continuation (motion continuation code), motion continuation processing (described later) is executed in Step D603, and then the process proceeds to Step D621, where motion continuation is performed. If not, the process proceeds to step D592.
In step D592, the prepared upper code data is determined. If the data is a command for instructing a constant weight (constant weight code), constant weight processing (described later) is executed in step D604, and then the process proceeds to step D621, in which the constant weight is determined. If it is not the data for instructing, the process proceeds to step D593.

In step D593, the prepared upper code data is determined, and if the data is a command for a variable weight (variable weight code), a variable weight process (described later) is executed in step D605, and then the process proceeds to step D621, in which the variable weight is set. If not, the process proceeds to step D594.
In step D594, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if the data is a command to instruct PB waiting (PB waiting code), a PB waiting process (described later) is executed in step D606, and then the process proceeds to step D621, in which the PB waiting is performed. If it is not the data for instructing, the process proceeds to step D595.

In step D595, the prepared upper code data is determined. If the data is a data for instructing PB determination branch (PB determination branch code), PB determination branch processing (described later) is executed in step D607, and then control proceeds to step D621. If the data is not data for instructing a PB determination branch, the flow advances to step D596.
When the process proceeds to step D596, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if the data is a command for commanding symbol stop (stop symbol set code), symbol stop processing is executed in step D608, and then the process proceeds to step D621 to instruct symbol stop. If it is not data, the process proceeds to step D597.

When the process proceeds to step D597, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if it is the data for instructing the symbol reverse calculation replacement (symbol reverse calculation replacement code), the symbol reverse calculation replacement process (described later) is executed in step D609, and then the step is performed. Proceeding to D621, if it is not data for instructing symbol reverse calculation replacement, proceed to step D598.
In Step D598, the prepared operation code upper data is determined. If the data is a command for changing scenario switching (variable scenario switching code), the variable scenario switching process is executed in Step D610, and then the process proceeds to Step D621. If it is not the data for instructing, the process proceeds to step D599.

In step D599, the prepared upper code data is determined. If the data is a data for instructing repetition (repetition code), the process is repeated in step D611, and then the process proceeds to step D621. Proceed to step D600.
When the operation proceeds to step D600, the prepared operation code upper data is determined. If the operation code is data for instructing termination (end code), the termination process is executed in step D612, and then the operation proceeds to step D621. The process proceeds to another step not shown. Other steps (steps indicated by dashed lines in FIG. 105) that are not illustrated determine the contents of the prepared operation code upper data in the same manner as steps D589 to D612 described above, and the determination result indicates that When the prepared operation code upper data does not correspond to any type of data (code), the process returns to step D621. Has become.

Next, in step D621, the data set at this point in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the target scenario layer number is read, and it is determined whether or not this data is NULL. Is set to 1 and the process proceeds to step D623. If it is not NULL, the process proceeds to step D623 without executing step D622.
When the process proceeds to step D623, the value of brk at that time is read out as described above. Ends this routine and returns.

For this reason, in any of the processes in steps D601 to D612 and the like, the value of brk is set to a value other than 0, or NULL is set in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the target scenario layer number. Then, the loop processing with steps D584 and D623 as loop ends is terminated and the routine returns. Until the loop processing is completed in this manner, the address of the scenario data table area in the scenario management area (the address designating the scenario table and its row) is appropriately changed, and the loop processing is repeated. Is performed.
Note that the above subroutine group (steps D601 to D612) is an example, and changes depending on the specifications of the model.

Here, the motion index will be described.
The motion index specifies the motion control table (motion table). For example, “motion index No. (51)” which is the data of the operand in the first row of the scenario table of the scenario layer 0 at the uppermost stage in FIG. , The motion index data is “51”. The motion index data specifies a specific row of a motion list table as shown in FIG. 135, for example, and thereby specifies a motion control table (motion table).

FIG. 135 is an example of a motion list table stored in the PROM 321 of the effect control device. The motion list table is a data list of a motion table in which data on a large number of motion tables is arranged in each row (each record). Each row of data in the motion list table is data relating to one motion table. Each row of the motion list table includes, as data items (data categories), the number of frames, the number of motion commands, the motion table name, the number of behaviors, and the behavior table name. However, this category setting is an example, and other parameters may be set. The contents of each data item are as follows.
The frame number (display frame number) indicates how many frames of motion data (data constituting the motion table) are defined in the motion table.
The number of motion commands indicates the number of commands defined in the motion table.
The motion table name indicates the name (= address) of the motion table.
The number of behaviors indicates the number (type) of behaviors used in the motion table.
The behavior table name indicates the name (= address) of the behavior table that defines the behavior (address of processing) at the time of the motion control.
If the number of behaviors is 0, a behavior table is not required.

Here, the behavior is a function for setting the operation of an object (display element). In this example, it is mainly used to change the basic image data (character data) defined on the motion table according to the situation.
Further, the right side of the motion list table in FIG. 135 shows the display contents corresponding to the motion index value. For example, the value of the motion index that specifies the fourth symbol (variation in special figure 2) motion control table is 62. Further, the value of the motion index for specifying the fourth symbol (variation of special figure 1) motion control table is 61.

[Motion registration processing]
Next, details of the motion registration process executed in step D601 in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, steps D631 and D632 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D633.
In step D631, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (address specifying the next row of the table). This is an update process to advance the designated line when the above-described step D585 is executed next time to the next line, and the designated line of the target scenario table is changed to the next line by performing this update process. And the above-described loop processing (steps D584 to D623) is repeated.

  In step D632, the address of the motion management area is loaded from the address area of the motion management area corresponding to the lower-order bit data of the operation code separated in step D587 to prepare. In the case of the present example, the RAM 311a of the effect control device 300 has a configuration in which storage areas for motion management called “address area of the motion management area” and “motion management area” are provided. Among them, the motion management area is the display number which is the number (maximum number) of objects to be display-controlled (not necessarily displayed on the screen) (for example, in the case of the left symbol, the next symbol, the current symbol, the previous symbol). ), An area for storing the number of frames (frame number) indicating how many frames have been processed, and the number of lines in the motion table to which the processing has progressed. Area for storing a command position (command area), and an area for storing address data (corresponding to a motion index) indicating which table to use from among a plurality of motion list tables (motion list) Table area) and display information areas for the number of displays.

Further, the motion management area having the same structure exists for the motion layers (in this example, there are motions 0 to 13), and in this example, there are 14 motion layers. There are also 14 management areas (motion management areas 0 to 13). Further, in this example, there are 14 address areas of the motion management area corresponding to the motion management area (address for motion 0 to address for motion 13). Here, since the address area of the motion management area is an area for storing the address of the motion management area, it is provided for each motion management area (that is, for each motion layer), and there are 14 address areas in this example.
In step D632, in order to identify one of the plurality of motion management areas, the motion management area corresponding to the layer number of the motion specified by the data of the lower-order opcode (hereinafter referred to as the corresponding motion management area). Of the corresponding motion management area is prepared. In the present application, a motion layer number (0 to 13 in this example) is simply expressed as a motion number, or is used as a motion management area X (X is a number corresponding to a motion number). There are cases.

  There are a plurality of display information areas in the motion management area corresponding to the number of displays (the number of objects). Each display information area has a display type, an effect type, an effect parameter, an X coordinate of an upper left display point, and an upper left display point. Y coordinate, X coordinate of upper right point of display, Y coordinate of upper right point of display, X coordinate of lower left point of display, Y coordinate of lower left point of display, image index, background color, foreground color, moving picture with only I (Picture) An area for storing each data of the frame count at the time and the behavior index is included.

  Here, the display type is a type of the object (including information indicating a still image or a moving image (movie) and information indicating a type of a movie (I-picture or not). The effect type is information indicating the type of effect (processing such as imparting transparency) to be added to an image. The effect parameter is a parameter of the effect (such as a degree of transparency when imparting transparency). The X coordinate and the Y coordinate are data for specifying the display position of the image. In this example, for the polygon display function (the function of displaying a solid as a polyhedron), the upper left display point, the upper right display point, and the lower left display point are used. There are point coordinates. The image index is a number that specifies a still image or a movie. The frame count at the time of a moving image including only IPicture is data indicating what frame data is IPicture (that is, I frame). The behavior index is an index for a behavior (design replacement). Note that the behavior (design replacement) replaces only a character (still image or moving image) at the same size and same display position, and is different from cut-in character replacement in which a character or the like appearing in the effect display is replaced. In the cut-in character replacement, the size and the display position of the character can also be changed by the replacement. Note that the cut-in character replacement process is performed, for example, in a subroutine (notification effect setting process 1) called and executed in the above-described variable effect setting process, but this subroutine is omitted from the drawings and the description is omitted. .

Next, when the process proceeds to step D633, it is determined whether the address of the motion management area loaded in step D632 is NULL, and if it is NULL, the process proceeds to step D635. After that, the process proceeds to Step D635.
In step D635, the head address of the motion management area corresponding to the lower-order bit data of the operation code separated in step D587 is set and prepared, and the flow proceeds to step D636.
In step D636, the start address prepared in step D635 is set in the address area of the motion management area corresponding to the lower-order bit data of the operation code, and the flow proceeds to step D637.

  In any of these steps D632 to D636, finally, in step D636, the head address of the motion management area corresponding to the lower bits of the operation code separated in step D587 is set in the address area of the corresponding motion management area. However, if data of an address other than NULL has already been set in the address area of the corresponding motion management area, motion data initialization processing 1 (opening setting of the development area used for moving image development) ( This is executed in step D634, since it will be described later.

Next, in step D637, it is determined whether or not the operand data prepared in step D588 is 0 or more. If it is 0 or more, steps D638 to D640 are sequentially executed, and the process returns. If it is less than 0 (that is, a negative value), For example, the process returns after sequentially executing steps D641 to D643.
In step D638, the data of the operand (the data of the operand prepared in step D588, and so on) is prepared as a motion index.
In step D639, the data prepared in step D638 is set in an area for storing a motion index in use corresponding to the lower order of the operation code (hereinafter, referred to as a motion index area in use). The in-use motion index area is an area for storing data of a motion index (in-use motion index) specifying a row to be controlled in the motion list table for each motion number, and is provided for each motion number. I have. In this step D639, the data prepared in step D638 is set (that is, saved) in the in-use motion index area corresponding to the motion number specified by the lower bit of the operation code separated in step D587.
In step D640, a motion data initialization process 2 (described later) for initializing data such as the number of displays is executed.

On the other hand, in step D641, data of the motion index corresponding to the lower order of the operation code is loaded from the corresponding motion index area and prepared. In the motion index area, for example, there are storage areas (SU1 cut-in area, SU2 cut-in area, SU3 cut-in area) in which the data of the motion index is saved in the above-described notice effect setting processing 1 (not shown). . In this step D641, the motion index specified by the lower bits of the operation code separated in step D587 and the current state of the gaming machine (such as whether or not the probability is being changed) in the plurality of motion index areas in the RAM. The motion index data is extracted from the area and prepared.
Next, in step D642, the data prepared in step D641 is set in the in-use motion index area corresponding to the lower part of the operation code.
In step D643, motion data initialization processing 2 (described later) for initializing data such as the number of displays is executed.

  Among the steps D637 to D643 described above, a route in which the determination result in step D637 is YES (operand is 0 or more) and steps D638 to D640 are executed, and a determination result in step D637 is NO (operand is less than 0) The route from which steps D6412 to D643 are executed is different as follows. That is, the former route is a route that uses the value (fixed value) of the motion index set in the scenario table stored in the ROM for control, and the latter route is stored in the motion index area in the RAM. This is a route that uses a value (not a fixed value) of the motion index for control. When it is desired to change the motion index to be used according to the state of the gaming machine (whether or not the probability is changing), a negative value (for example, “−1”) is set as the operand value and the latter route is executed. It is a configuration that is performed.

[Motion data initialization processing 1]
Next, the details of the motion data initialization process 1 executed in step D634 (or step D674 to be described later) in the above-described motion registration process will be described with reference to the left side of FIG. In the description of the control process of the effect control device 300, the motion control data is data such as the number of displays, frame numbers, and the like stored in the motion management area.
When this routine is started, first, steps D651 to D655 are repeatedly executed until the variable i is increased from the initial value 0 by the increment 1 until the variable i reaches the final value (closing value = display number-1). move on. That is, in step D651, the variable i is set to 0 immediately after the start of the routine, and the process proceeds to step D652. In Step D655, when the variable i is smaller than the closing price, the process returns to Step D651, and when the variable i is the closing price, the process proceeds to Step D656. Then, when the process returns to step D651, the value of variable i is increased by 1 and the process proceeds to step D652. The value of the closing price is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the display number data set in the motion management area (hereinafter, referred to as a target motion management area) corresponding to the lower bits of the operation code separated in step D587. . That is, in this routine, the loop processing of steps D651 to D655 is repeatedly executed for the number of displays, and thereafter, the process proceeds to step D656.

In Step D652, the address of the display information area corresponding to the variable i in the target motion management area is set, and then, the flow proceeds to Step D653. In this step D652, for example, if the variable i = 0, the address of the first display information area among the plurality of display information areas corresponding to the number of displays in the target motion management area is set.
In step D653, data of the display type in the display information area to which the address has been set in the immediately preceding step D652 is read, and it is determined whether or not the display type is a moving image. If the display type is a moving image, the process proceeds to step D655 after setting the release of the expanded area (the area used for expanding the compressed moving image data) in step D654. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step D655. When the process proceeds to step D655, as described above, the process returns to step D651 when the variable i is less than the closing value, and proceeds to step D656 when the variable i is the closing value.

  Next, when the process proceeds to step D656, a process of initializing parameters of the target motion management area is performed in steps D656 to D658, and thereafter, the process returns. That is, the display number is set to 0 in step D656, the frame number is set to −1 in step D657, and the command position is set to 0 in step D658.

[Motion data initialization processing 2]
Next, details of the motion data initialization process 2 executed in steps D640 and D643 (or step D689 or the like described later) in the above-described motion registration process will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in steps D661 to D663, processing for initializing the parameters of the target motion management area is performed, and thereafter, the flow proceeds to step D664. That is, in step D661, the display number is set to 0, in step D662, the frame number is set to -1, and in step D663, the command position is set to 0.
In step D664, the address (for example, the motion list table and its row are specified) corresponding to the motion index in use (for example, the data set in step D639 or D642) in the motion list table area in the target motion management area. Address), and then return.

[Motion deletion processing]
Next, details of the motion deletion processing executed in step D602 in the above-described scenario analysis processing will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, steps D671 and D672 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D673.
In step D671, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (address specifying the next row of the table), as in step D631.
In step D672, as in step D632, the address of the motion management area is loaded from the address area of the target motion management area to prepare it, and the flow advances to step D673.

Next, in step D673, it is determined whether the address of the motion management area loaded in step D672 is NULL, and if NULL, the process proceeds to step D675. Thereafter, the flow proceeds to Step D675.
When the process proceeds to step D675, NULL is set in the address area of the target motion management area, and the process proceeds to step D676.
In step D676, the CPU clears the data of the motion index in use corresponding to the lower-order bit data of the operation code (the operation code separated in step D587, the same applies hereinafter), and then returns.
The above-described motion deletion processing is executed when control of a character or the like ends, and thereby, motion information (data in the address area of the motion management area and data in the in-use motion index area) is deleted.

[Motion continuation processing]
Next, the details of the motion continuation processing executed in step D603 in the above-described scenario analysis processing will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, steps D681 and D682 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D683.
In step D681, similarly to step D631, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (address specifying the next row of the table).
In step D682, data of the motion index in use corresponding to the lower bits of the operation code is loaded.

In Step D683, it is determined whether or not the data of the in-use motion index loaded in Step D682 matches the operand acquired in Step D588. I do. Here, it is determined whether the currently controlled motion is the same as the motion specified in the scenario table. If they are not the same, step D684 and subsequent steps are executed to register a new motion.
After step D684, the same processing as the above-described motion registration processing (route using the value of the scenario table) is performed.
That is, in step D684, as in step D632, the address of the motion management area is loaded and prepared from the address area of the target motion management area, and the flow proceeds to step D685.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D685, it is determined whether the address of the motion management area loaded in step D684 is NULL. If NULL, the process proceeds to step D687. If not, the motion data initialization process 1 is executed in step D686. Thereafter, the process proceeds to Step D687.
In step D687, the start address of the target motion management area is set and prepared, and the flow proceeds to step D688.
In Step D688, the head address prepared in Step D687 is set in the address area of the target motion management area, and the flow proceeds to Step D689.
In Step D689, a motion data initialization process (the above-described motion data initialization process 2) is executed.
In step D690, the data of the operand is set in the used motion index area corresponding to the lower bits of the operation code, and the process returns.
In the motion continuation process described above, if the motion information specified in the scenario table is the same as the content currently being controlled, the process is continued, and if not, a process of newly registering the motion is executed. Thus, for example, if the background during the normal fluctuation does not change due to the reach or the like, the movie continues over a plurality of fluctuations. However, when the reach occurs, the movie is newly reproduced from the head.

[Constant wait processing]
Next, details of the constant weight processing executed in step D604 in the above-described scenario analysis processing will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D691, the same update processing as in step D631 is executed.
Next, in step D692, the data of the operand is set in the scenario timer area of the target scenario management area.
Next, in step D693, the value of brk is set to 1, and the routine returns.
According to this routine, a time value or the like when waiting for a specified fixed time is set. For example, in the case of line 20 (// 19) in the scenario table shown in FIG. 136, this routine is executed because the operation code is a constant wait code, and the wait time of the operand is (300). 300 (10 seconds = 300 × 1/30) is set as the value of the scenario timer area. Then, since the value of brk becomes 1 in step D693, the repetition of the loop processing (steps D584 to D623) in the above-described scenario analysis processing ends.

[Variable weight processing]
Next, details of the variable weight processing executed in step D605 in the above-described scenario analysis processing will be described with reference to the lower side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D695, the same update processing as in step D631 is executed.
Next, in step D696, a value obtained by adding the PB effect addition time (the value set in step D579) to the operand data is set in the scenario timer area of the target scenario management area.
Next, in step D697, the value of brk is set to 1 and the routine returns.

  In this routine, a time value and the like for setting a variable time weight when the effect time is changed by the player's button operation (PB operation) are set. As a result, the effect performed thereafter becomes longer as soon as the button is pressed after the button is instructed, and an operation in which the effect is performed only for a short time when the button is pressed at the end of the effective time is realized. For example, in the case of the eleventh line (// 10) in the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. 142, since the operation code is a variable wait code, this routine is executed. In D696, 55 + PB effect addition time is set as the value of the scenario timer area. Here, the PB effect addition time becomes larger as the player performs the PB operation earlier after the effect prompting the player to perform the PB operation (see step D579). Therefore, the sooner the player performs the PB operation, the longer the effect performed thereafter.

[PB wait processing]
Next, the details of the PB waiting process executed in step D606 in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D701, the same update processing as in step D631 is executed.
Next, in step D702, the operand data is set in the PB timer area of the target scenario management area.
Next, in step D703, the flag in the PB detection flag area in the target scenario management area is cleared.
Next, in step D704, the value of brk is set to 1 and the routine returns.

  In this routine, the setting for starting the push button effect is performed. For example, in the case of the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. 142, the motion deletion processing of the motion 9 is first executed in the first row (// 0), and then the motion registration processing of the motion 8 is executed in the second row (// 1) (FIG. After the motion index “70” corresponding to the motion table “MDat0070” of the push button ON / OFF effect shown in 135) is executed, the operation code in the next third line (// 2) is the PB wait code. Therefore, this routine is executed, and since the valid time value of the operand is (90), 90 is set as the value of the timer area in step D702, and a push button effect of 3 seconds (= 90 × 1/30) is started. Is done. In step D703, in order to start the push button effect, the value of the PB detection flag indicating that the PB (push button) has been operated is initially set to off (the state where the flag is not set).

[PB determination branch processing]
Next, details of the PB determination branching process executed in step D607 in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to the lower part of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D711, it is determined whether or not the flag of the PB detection flag area in the target scenario management area is set (that is, whether the PB detection flag is set). In step D713, the process proceeds to step D713. If the flag is not set (when the PB detection flag is OFF), the process proceeds to step D712.
When the process proceeds to step D712, the same update process as in step D631 is executed, and the process returns.
When the process proceeds to step D713, the same update processing as in step D631 is executed, and the process proceeds to step D714.
In step D714, it is determined whether the address update processing in step D713 has been completed for the operand data prepared in step D588. If the processing has been completed, the process returns. If not, the process returns to step D713 to return to step D713. repeat.

  This routine is executed when the PB timer that measures the valid time without pushing the push button has expired or the PB is pressed within the valid time and the timer is forcibly set to 0 in the above-described push button effect. This is the process to be performed. If the time is up without pressing the PB, the process proceeds to step D712 via step D711, where the designated row of the scenario table advances by one row and returns. If PB is pressed within the valid time, the process proceeds to step D713 via step D711, and the designated line of the scenario table jumps by the amount designated by the operand.

  For example, in the case of the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. 142, when the control up to the third line is completed as described above, this routine is executed because the operation code in the next fourth line (// 3) is the PB determination branch code. Since the number of table jumps of the operand is (3), if PB is pressed within the valid time and the process proceeds to step D713, the determination result of step D714 becomes NO until step D713 is executed three times. As a result, the next designated line jumps to the seventh line (// 6) in the scenario table. Then, when the player jumps to the seventh line, the effect after the seventh line (in the case of the upper part of FIG. 142, an effect in which a character of a warlord appears on the display screen as motion 8 and outputs speech sound) is started. On the other hand, even if this routine is executed as described above, if the PB is not pressed within the valid time, step D712 is executed only once and the routine returns (this routine ends). The designated line on the upper side is the next fifth line (// 4). The fifth line executes the motion deleting process of the motion 8, and then executes the end process described later by the sixth line to execute the above-described push. The button effect simply ends (the warlord character does not appear).

[Symbol stop processing]
Next, details of the symbol stop processing executed in step D608 in the above-described scenario analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D721, an updating process similar to that in step D631 is performed, and then the process proceeds to step D722.
In step D722, it is determined whether the data of the lower bits of the operation code designates a left symbol. If the symbol is a left symbol, the process returns to step D727 after executing step D727. If not, the process proceeds to step D723. In step D727, the value of the special figure stop symbol area (left) (for example, the value set in step D461 described above) is set as the current symbol (left).
In step D723, it is determined whether the data of the lower bits of the operation code designates a right symbol. If the symbol is a right symbol, the process returns to step D728 after executing step D728. If not, the process proceeds to step D724. In step D728, the value of the special figure stop symbol area (right) (for example, the value set in step D461 described above) is set as the current symbol (right).

In step D724, it is determined whether the data of the lower bits of the operation code designates a middle symbol. If the symbol is a middle symbol, step D729 is executed, and the process proceeds to step D729a. If not, the sequence proceeds to step D725. In step D729, the value of the special figure stop symbol area (middle) (for example, the value set in step D461 described above) is set as the current symbol (middle).
If the process proceeds to step D729a, it is determined whether or not the prefetch effect is being executed. If the process is being executed, the process proceeds to step D729b. Whether the pre-reading effect is being executed is determined by determining that the pre-reading effect is being executed if the pre-reading effect executing flag is set.
Proceeding to step D729b, it is determined whether the number of prefetching effects is zero, and if it is zero, the prefetching effect is completed, so the process returns after clearing the prefetching effect flag in step D729c, and if not zero, the prefetching effect is still continued. Return without executing D729c.

Note that the number of prefetching effects is the number of prefetching executions. In the case where a prefetching effect (prefetching notice) is performed in a prefetching lottery process (not shown) which is a subroutine executed in the above-described prefetching variation command processing in step D186. , And is updated by −1 at the start of the special figure change in step D407 described above.
The pre-reading effect execution flag is a flag that is set when a pre-reading effect (pre-reading notice) is performed in the pre-reading lottery process (not shown). In the case of this example, the variation of the special figure is stopped in the order of left → right → middle, so that the pre-reading effect execution flag is cleared at such a point (that is, at the timing of stopping the middle symbol in the flowchart). (Steps D729a to D729c). That is, in the state where the prefetch effect is being executed in which the prefetch effect flag is set, when the number of prefetch effects becomes zero, the prefetch effect flag is cleared at the timing when the middle symbol stops. In the case of a model in which the stop order of the special figure change is different, similarly, the processing may be cleared at the timing when the symbol to be stopped last stops.
Also, although omitted, processing such as checking for the end of the number of times of change in time saving or high probability is also in the same place on the flowchart (the place to be executed when the determination result of step D724 is YES).

  In step D725, it is determined whether the lower-order bit data of the operation code designates the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 (the fourth symbol of the special figure 1). Then, the process returns to step D726 unless the symbol is the fourth symbol in the special figure 1. In step D730, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (the special symbol 1 fourth symbol) is set as the current symbol (the special symbol 1 fourth symbol).

In step D726, it is determined whether the lower-order bit data of the operation code designates the special symbol 2 fourth symbol (special symbol 2 fourth symbol), and if it is the special symbol 2 fourth symbol symbol, step D731 is performed. It returns after executing, and returns if it is not the special symbol 2 fourth symbol symbol. In step D731, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (special symbol 2 fourth symbol) is set as the current symbol (special symbol 2 fourth symbol).
This routine is a process for stopping the variable display of a symbol such as a decorative special figure. Steps D727, D728, D729, D730, and D731 are processes for setting the stopped symbol. For example, if the sixth line in the scenario table MS_LZ100 shown in FIG. 137 is a designated line, the operation code is a stop symbol set code (left symbol), so that this routine is executed and the result of the determination in step D722 is YES. Then, the above step D727 is executed to set the stop symbol of the left symbol of the special figure.

[Symbol reverse calculation replacement process]
Next, details of the symbol reverse calculation replacement process executed in step D609 in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D741, the same update processing as in step D631 is executed.
Next, in step D742, it is determined whether or not the data of the lower bits of the operation code specifies the left symbol. If the symbol is the left symbol, steps D743 and D744 are executed, and the process proceeds to step D745. If not, the process proceeds to step D748. move on.
In step D743, the remainder (operand mod9) obtained by dividing the operand data by 9 is set as a frame difference.

In step D744, the result of subtracting the frame difference (the value set in step D743) from the value of the special figure stop symbol area (left) is set as a symbol number.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D745, it is determined whether the symbol number set in step D744 is less than 0 (negative value). Does not execute step D746 and returns after executing step D747.
In step D746, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number.
In step D747, the value of the symbol number (set in step D744, if negative, the value adjusted in step D746) is set as the current symbol (left).

Next, in step D748, it is determined whether or not the data of the lower bits of the operation code designates a right symbol. If the symbol is a right symbol, steps D749 and D750 are executed. Proceed to D754.
In step D749, a remainder (operand mod9) obtained by dividing the operand data by 9 is set as a frame difference.

In step D750, the result of subtracting the frame difference (the value set in step D749) from the value of the special figure stop symbol area (right) is set as a symbol number.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D751, it is determined whether or not the symbol number set in step D750 is less than 0. After execution of step D753 without execution, the process returns.
In step D752, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number.
In step D753, the value of the symbol number (the value set in step D750, and if negative, the value adjusted in step D752) is set as the current symbol (right).

Next, in step D754, it is determined whether the data of the lower bits of the operation code designates a middle symbol. If the symbol is a middle symbol, steps D755 and D756 are executed, and then the process proceeds to step D757. I do.
In step D755, a remainder (operand mod9) obtained by dividing the operand data by 9 is set as a frame difference.

In step D756, a result obtained by subtracting the frame difference (the value set in step D755) from the value of the special figure stop symbol area (middle) is set as a symbol number.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D757, it is determined whether or not the symbol number set in step D756 is less than 0. If the symbol number is less than 0, step D758 is executed, and then step D759 is executed and the process returns. After execution of step D759 without execution, the process returns.
In step D758, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number.
In step D759, the value of the symbol number (set in step D756, and if negative, the value corrected in step D758) is set as the current symbol (medium).

The symbol reverse calculation and replacement process described above is a process of replacing a symbol with a symbol several frames earlier to be stopped (a symbol earlier by the number of symbol feeds), such as at the moment of slowdown after the end of high-speed fluctuation.
For example, if the third line in the MS_LZ100 scenario table shown in FIG. 137 is a designated line, the operation code is the left symbol reverse calculation replacement code, so this routine is executed, and the determination result in step D742 is YES, and Steps D743 to D747 are executed to set the current symbol (left). In this case, the operand is data indicating the number of symbols to be sent, and in the third row of the above-mentioned MS_LZ100, the operand is the number of frames to be sent (2). Is set as the frame difference, and the symbol number is set in step D744 using the value of the frame difference. For example, if the value of the special figure stop symbol area (left) is 1, -1 (= 1-2) is set as the symbol number, and if the value of the special figure stop symbol area (left) is 7, 5 (= 7-2) is set as a symbol number. If the symbol number set in step D744 is a negative value (for example, -1), step D746 is executed and the symbol number is changed to a full-round value (for example, if -1, 8 = -1 + 9). ), And the symbol number is registered as the current symbol (left) in step D747.

  The above operation is the same for the right symbol (steps D748 to D753) and the middle symbol (steps D754 to D759). “9” in step D743 or the like indicates the number of symbols on each reel (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol). This may not be 9 depending on the model, or may be a different value for each reel.

[Change scenario switching process]
Next, the details of the variable scenario switching processing executed in step D610 in the above-described scenario analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D761, it is determined whether or not the data of the operand is the left symbol scenario 2nd (a command to switch the left symbol variation display to 2nd (first half)). If it is 2nd, steps D762 to 765 are sequentially executed and the process returns. If it is not the left symbol scenario 2nd, the process proceeds to step D767.
In step D762, a scenario layer number 1 is prepared because it is a left symbol.

In step D763, the address of the left symbol scenario 2nd table (2nd (first half) scenario table for the left symbol) is prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area by loading. In the symbol variation scenario table area, as described in step D462, various symbol variation scenario tables (1st (early), 2nd (first half), and 3rd (second half) scenario tables are stored. The addresses of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stored, and in this step D763, the address of the scenario table for the left symbol and for the second (first half) is prepared.
In step D764, the above-described scenario data setting processing is executed based on the data prepared in the previous steps D762 and D763.
In step D765, the address of the scenario management area 1 is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area (for example, the address area of the scenario management area prepared in step D553 or the like), and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 1 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, in step D767, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the right symbol scenario 2nd (command for switching the right symbol variation display to 2nd). If the right symbol scenario is 2nd, steps D768 to D768 are performed. After step 771 is sequentially executed, the process returns. If the right symbol scenario is not the second symbol, the process proceeds to step D772.
In step D768, a scenario layer number 2 is prepared because it is a right symbol.

In step D769, the address of the right symbol scenario 2nd table (2nd scenario table for the right symbol) is prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area by loading.
In step D770, the above-described scenario data setting processing is executed based on the data prepared in the previous steps D768 and D769.
In step D771, the address of the scenario management area 2 is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 2 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D772, it is determined whether the operand data is the middle symbol scenario 2nd (instructing the switching of the variation display of the middle symbol to 2nd). After sequentially executing 776, the process returns. If it is not the second symbol scenario 2nd, the process proceeds to step D777.
In step D773, scenario layer number 3 is prepared because the symbol is a medium symbol.

In step D774, the address of the medium symbol scenario 2nd table (2nd scenario table for medium symbols) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area to prepare it.
In step D775, the above-described scenario data setting processing is executed based on the data prepared in steps D773 and D774 immediately before.
In step D776, the address of the scenario management area 3 is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 3 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, in step D777, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the left symbol scenario 3rd (command for switching to the 3rd (second half) change display of the left symbol), and if it is the left symbol scenario 3rd. After the steps D778 to 781 are sequentially executed, the process returns. If it is not the left symbol scenario 3rd, the process proceeds to the step D782.
In step D778, a scenario layer number 1 is prepared because it is a left symbol.

In step D779, the address of the left symbol scenario 3rd table (3rd (second half) scenario table for the left symbol) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area to prepare it.
In step D780, the above-described scenario data setting processing is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D778 and D779.
In step D781, the address of the scenario management area 1 is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 1 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, in step D782, it is determined whether the operand data is the right symbol scenario 3rd (command for switching the right symbol variation display to 3rd). After step 786 is sequentially executed, the process returns. If it is not the right symbol scenario 3rd, the process proceeds to step D787.
In step D783, a scenario layer number 2 is prepared because it is a right symbol.

In step D784, the address of the right symbol scenario 3rd table (3rd scenario table for the right symbol) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area.
In step D785, the above-described scenario data setting processing is executed based on the data prepared in steps D783 and D784 immediately before.
In step D786, the address of the scenario management area 2 is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 2 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, in step D787, it is determined whether or not the operand data is the middle symbol scenario 3rd (instructing the switching of the variable display of the middle symbol to 3rd). Thereafter, the process returns to step 791, and if not, the process returns.
In step D788, a scenario layer number 3 is prepared because it is a medium symbol.

In step D789, the address of the middle symbol scenario 3rd table (middle symbol scenario table for 3rd) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area to prepare.
In step D790, the above-described scenario data setting processing is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D788 and D789.
In step D791, the address of the scenario management area 3 is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 3 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

According to the change scenario switching process described above, the scenario is switched in the symbol change section, that is, the scenario is switched from 1st (early stage) to 2nd (first half) or from 2nd (first half) to 3rd (second half). Is performed. In other words, in the variation display effect of the decorative special figure, one variation is usually divided into three sections, “early, first half, second half”, and the scenarios of each section are switched and connected by this routine. For example, when the ninth line (// 8) of the last line in the scenario table MS_LZ100 shown in FIG. 137 is a designated line, the operation code is a variable scenario switching code, and the operand is the left symbol scenario 2nd. Is executed, the result of the determination in step D761 becomes YES, and the above-mentioned steps D762 to D765 are executed, and a new scenario table (for example, MS_LZ300 shown in FIG. 137) for the second symbol (left half) for the left symbol is to be controlled. It is set as a scenario table, and settings for executing this scenario table are made.
In addition, the time value of the section of "early stage, first half, second half" differs depending on the type of fluctuation. In addition, there is a variation without 3rd (second half) (such as a variation without reach).

[Repeat processing]
Next, details of the repetition processing executed in step D611 in the above-described scenario analysis processing will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D795, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is returned to the previous record (the address specifying the previous row of the scenario table).
Next, in step D796, it is determined whether or not the table address has been returned to the previous record by executing step D795 for the operand obtained in step D588. If the operand has been returned, the process returns. Returns to step D795 to repeat the processing.

  The repetition processing described above is used when returning to a predetermined stage of the scenario table and repeating the operation in the same scenario. For example, if the 52nd line (// 51) of the last line in the scenario table shown in FIG. 136 is the designated line, the operation code is a repetition code, and the operand is the return number (22). When step D795 is executed 22 times, the result of the determination in step D796 is YES, and this routine ends, whereby the designated row in the scenario table is the 30th row 22 rows before (// 29) Return to The line 30 of the scenario table shown in FIG. 136 is a line for starting the movie of the customer waiting demonstration effect (the operation code is the motion 0 registration code and the operand is the motion index No. (13)). Following the movie, it has a table configuration in which symbols for the demonstration waiting for customers are displayed. Therefore, after that, the movie display and the symbol display as the customer waiting demonstration effect are repeated, and data for one loop (data from the 30th line to the last line of the scenario table shown in FIG. 136) is prepared. It will be done.

〔End processing〕
Next, the details of the termination processing executed in step D612 in the above-described scenario analysis processing will be described with reference to the lower part of FIG.
When this routine is started, in step D798, NULL is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area, and the routine returns. As a result, the setting of the target scenario management area is lost, and the scenario ends.
For example, if the 15th line (// 14) of the last line of the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. 142 is a designated line, the operation code is an end code, so this routine is executed, and the target scenario management area is set in step D798. Is set to NULL, and the scenario ends. As described above, this routine is executed when a series of scenarios are all completed.

[Motion control processing]
Next, details of the motion control processing executed in step D30 in the above-described main processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the loop processing of steps D801 to D818 is repeatedly executed while increasing the number X of the target motion management area from 0, and the loop processing end condition (control for all the motion management areas 0 to 13). Is completed), the routine returns. That is, at the start of this routine, first, in step D801, the number of the target motion management area is set to 0 (X = 0), and the process proceeds to step D802 to execute the processing after step D802. The number of the management area is incremented by 1 (that is, assuming that X = X + 1), and it is determined in step D818 whether the end condition (X = 14) has been satisfied. If so, the process returns. And the process proceeds to step D802.

Hereinafter, step D802 and subsequent steps will be described assuming that the number of the target motion management area is X (actually, any one of 0 to 13 in this example).
In step D802, the initialization flag used in this routine is cleared, and in the next step D803, the address of the motion management area X is loaded from the address area of the motion management area X, and then the procedure proceeds to step D804.
In step D804, it is determined whether or not the data at the address loaded in step D803 is NULL. If not, the process proceeds to Step D805.

In step D805, data of the motion list table area in the motion management area X (that is, data specifying the motion list table to be controlled this time and its row) is prepared based on the address loaded in step D803, Proceed to step D806.
In step D806, data of the number of display frames in the row of the motion list table designated by the data loaded in step D805 (hereinafter, designated row) is read, and the number of display frames (the number of frames for executing a certain motion) is read. If it is less than or equal to 0, the process proceeds to step D817, which is abnormal, and if not, the process proceeds to step D807 as normal. If the first line in the motion list table shown in FIG. 135 is a designated line, for example, the number of frames (the number of display frames) is “1”. Proceed to. If the fourth line in the list table is a designated line, the number of frames (the number of display frames) is "216", so that the determination result in step D806 is NO, and the process proceeds to step D807. As described above, since the execution period is different for each motion, the number of display frames corresponding to each motion is defined on the motion list table, and the number of display frames should be defined for at least one frame. It is abnormal if the defined value of the number of frames on the motion list table is 0 or less.

  In step D807, the value of the frame number in the motion management area X is read, and it is determined whether the value of the frame number is less than 0. If the value is less than 0, a motion has been newly registered (at the time of motion registration). After the execution of step D808 (setting of an initialization flag), the process proceeds to step D809. If the value is not less than 0, the process proceeds to step D809 without executing step D808 without determining that the motion is not registered. Since the frame number is set to “−1” in steps D657 and D662 in the motion data initialization processing 1 and 2 at the time of motion registration, the initialization flag is set in step D808 if the motion is registered. You. The initialization flag is a flag that is cleared in step D802 described above and is determined in step D812 described later.

In step D809, it is determined whether the value of the frame number in the motion management area X has reached or exceeded the final frame number (that is, a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the above-described display frame number). If the number is equal to or more than the final frame number, steps D810 and D811 are sequentially executed, and then the procedure proceeds to step D812.
In step D810, the above-described motion data initialization processing 1 is executed, and in step D811, the initialization flag is set as in step D808.
Here, the fact that the frame number (starting from 0) has reached the final frame number means that the control of the target motion table has been completed up to the final frame. Therefore, if the determination result of step D809 is YES (the frame number has reached the final frame number), the motion data initialization process 1 and the setting of the initialization flag are executed as in the motion registration, and the same The motion table is configured to be executed again from the beginning.

In Step D812, it is determined whether or not the initialization flag is set. If the initialization flag is set, Steps D813, D814, and D815 are executed to execute the target motion table from the beginning, and then the process proceeds to Step D816. If the initialization flag has not been set (that is, if the initialization flag has been cleared), the process proceeds to step D816 after executing step D819.
In steps D813, D814, and D815, the values of the frame number, the number of displays, and the command position in the motion management area X are set to 0, respectively.
In step D819, an update is performed to increase the value of the frame number in the motion management area X by one. The process proceeds to step D819 because the initialization flag is not set (that is, when the target motion table is being executed), and therefore, it is necessary to sequentially increase the frame number.

  Note that the value of the display number (the value indicating the number of objects under control) set to 0 in step D814 is determined by adding or deleting an object in a motion command execution process described later (for example, in step D881 described later). Is updated (+1 or -1) when it is performed. In addition, the value of the command position set to 0 in step D815 (the value indicating the number of the line in the motion table) is also updated in the motion command execution process described later (for example, in step D880 described later). Note that a value of 0 at the command position indicates that the designated line in the motion table is the first line. The value of the display number is the number of objects under control, not the number of objects (such as symbols and notice characters) that are actually simultaneously displayed on the screen.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D816, a motion command execution process (described later) for executing control of the target motion table is executed, and the process proceeds to step D817.
In step D817, the address of the address area of the motion management area itself is updated. That is, an update is performed to increase the value of the number X of the motion management area by one. As a result, the target motion management area and the target motion layer are switched next. For example, if the motion management area 1 (the motion layer is motion 1) is to be controlled before the execution of step D817, the motion management area 2 (the motion layer is motion 2) is to be controlled after the execution. .
When step D817 is executed, the process proceeds to step D818. If the above-described termination condition (in this example, number X = 14) is satisfied, the process returns. If not, the process returns to step D801. The process is repeated from step D802.

[Motion command execution processing]
Next, details of the motion command execution processing executed in step D816 in the above-described motion control processing will be described with reference to FIGS.
When this routine is started, first, in step D821, the data of the address of the motion list table (also referred to as a motion list table) from the motion list table area in the motion management area X (the target motion management area) (ie, The motion list table to be controlled this time and data designating the row) are loaded, and the flow advances to step D822.

  In step D822, the value of the command position in the motion management area X is read, and the value of this command position is the number of motion commands (the number of motion commands in the specified row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D821). Is determined to be greater than or equal to the number of motion commands. If the number is greater than or equal to the number of motion commands, all commands (all rows of the target motion table) have been executed, and the process returns. The process proceeds to Step D823 to execute the motion table of the next one frame. For example, if the fourth line in the motion list table shown in FIG. 135 is the designated line, the number of motion commands is “1830”. Therefore, in step D822, the value of the command position in the motion management area X is “1830”. If not, the process proceeds to step D823. The value of the command position in the motion management area X is initially initialized to 0 in steps D658, D663, etc. in the above-described motion data initialization processing 1 and 2, and each row (command) in the motion table is described in step D845 described later. Is updated every time is executed. If the value is equal to or more than “1830”, all rows of the target motion table have been executed, and the process returns.

In step D823, the address of the motion table (motion table name) is acquired from the specified row of the target motion list table (the specified row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D821). Proceed to step D824. For example, if the fourth line in the motion list table shown in FIG. 135 is the designated line, the motion table name is “Mdat003”, and thus “Mdat003” is obtained as the address of the motion table (from ROM (PROM 321)). Take out). In the motion list table area of the RAM (RAM 311a), the address (indicating the address of the table in the ROM) of the leftmost column (position of the number of frames) of the motion list table is stored. In step D821, this address is loaded from the motion list table area of the RAM. In step D823, the value of the "motion table name (address)" indicated by the address two records ahead of the address loaded in step D821 is read from the ROM.
In this example, since the address of the motion table corresponds to the motion table name, if the motion table name is obtained, the motion table address is obtained.

  As described above, the motion table is a control table for executing each of the display effects which are divided into blocks, which will be described in detail here. In the present application, an example of the motion table at the time of the push button notice is shown on the lower side of FIG. 142 described above, and an example of the motion table at the start of the normal change of the left symbol is shown in FIG. 138. Many such motion tables are registered in the ROM (PROM 321 in this example). As shown in these figures, in each row of the motion table, a command code is set at the head, and parameters corresponding to the command are set subsequently. However, there may be no parameters.

  For example, in the first line of FIG. 138, a command “additional 1 code” and a parameter “character No. (pattern“ 2 ”)” are set, and in the second line, a command “behavior code” The parameters “object index (0)” and “behavior index (0)” are set. In the seventh line, a command “movement 1 code”, “object index (0)”, and “X coordinate (0)” are set. , "Y coordinate (-493)", "image width data (296)", and "image height data (490)". In the tenth line, only the command "end code" is included. Is set. Here, the object index is a number assigned to each object in order to distinguish each object, and is automatically set in the order registered by the additional code. For example, the symbol “2” additionally registered on the first line in FIG. 138 becomes the object index (0), the symbol “1” additionally registered on the third line becomes the object index (1), and the symbol “2” becomes the object index (1) on the fifth line. The additionally registered symbol "9" becomes the object index (2), and the value of the object index increases based on the number of characters (the number of objects) to be displayed.

Then, the smaller the value of the object index, the more the display layer is displayed at the back of the screen as the context of the display layer. That is, when the display positions overlap, an object having a large object index value is preferentially displayed on the screen.
Although three characters appear in the example of FIG. 138, management is performed so that the total number of characters in all other categories (such as notices) used simultaneously is 128. That is, the VDP 312 of the present example can control the display of 128 characters at the same time. Since characters can be arranged outside the screen, the number of characters is not limited to 128 in the screen.
The example of FIG. 138 is data of the first four frames of the motion table of the normal fluctuation (first half) of the left symbol. The division up to the end code is one frame of data. For example, the first to tenth lines are the data of the first one frame. Numerical values such as coordinate data and size data only describe values that are meaningful in the present embodiment, and may be data including information after a decimal point. Actually, it is 16-bit signed fixed-point data (code bit, 13-bit integer part, 2's complement of 2 bits of decimal part).
To continue the same state as the previous frame, only the end code needs to be defined.

Also, the types and meanings of the commands in the motion table in this example are as follows.
"Addition code": a command for adding (registering) an object. There are one additional code, two additional codes, and three additional codes, depending on the type of object to be added (bitmap, moving image, single-color rectangle).
"Insert code"; a command to insert an object as a specific object index. There are insertion 1 code, insertion 2 code, and insertion 3 code depending on the type of the object to be inserted (same as above). By executing this insertion code, the value of the object index of the already registered object deviates.
"Move code": a command for specifying the display position and display size of an object. There are a move 1 code and a move 2 code according to the designation method (one point designation, three point designation).
-"Effect code" ... A command for instructing an effect to apply processing such as transparency to an image. There are an effect 1 code for specifying an effect type, an effect 2 code for specifying an effect parameter (for example, a transmittance value (%)), and an effect 3 code for specifying an effect color.
"Deletion code"; a command for instructing deletion of an object.
"Change code": a command for instructing a change that replaces an object character (such as a figure or a character) while continuing the movement during the movement.
"Decode": a command for instructing the decoding (decoding) of moving image data.
"Replacement code": a command for instructing replacement of an object (for example, control for replacing the characters of object index 0 and object index 1).
"Behavior code": a command for instructing replacement of an object character.
"Copy code": a command for cutting out and copying (copying) a part or the whole of an image (bitmap, moving image, single-color rectangle) of an existing object registered by the additional code or the insertion code. In this embodiment, there is a copy 2 code for cutting out a moving image into a rectangular shape. In addition, for example, there may be a copy 1 code that cuts out a bitmap that is a still image, or a copy code that cuts out not a rectangle but a triangle or a circle, for example.
"Inversion code": a command for displaying an image obtained by inverting an image (bitmap, moving image, single-color rectangle) of an existing object registered by the additional code or the insertion code. In the present embodiment, there is an inverted 2 code for inverting a moving image in the left-right direction (horizontal direction, X coordinate direction). In addition, for example, there may be an inversion 1 code for inverting a bitmap, which is a still image, in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction, X coordinate direction), or an inversion for inverting a bitmap in the vertical direction (vertical direction, Y coordinate direction). There may be code.
"End code": a command indicating the end of data for one frame.
The commands in the motion table are not limited to those described above, and may include a mode in which a command other than the above is further included or a mode in which any of the commands is deleted. For example, there may be a “rotation code” as a command for specifying the display angle of the object. Specifically, a rotation 1 code that specifies the angle of rotation along the display surface (rotation about an axis orthogonal to the display surface), and a mode in which the image is inclined with respect to the display surface (the image is three-dimensional in the front-rear direction) A rotation 2 code or the like for designating the angle of rotation (rotation about an axis parallel to the display surface) of the rotation may be set.

Next, processing after step D823 will be described.
After step D823, the process proceeds to step D824, and loop processing with steps D824 and D846 as loop ends is repeatedly executed until an end condition (command = end) is satisfied. That is, immediately after the motion registration or the like, the command position k of the target motion management area X is set to 0 (a value designating the first line of the motion table) in steps D658, D663, and D815 described above (k = 0), every time the loop processing of steps D824 to D846 is repeated, the value of the command position k of the motion management area X is increased by 1 (k = k + 1) in steps D845, D880, etc., which will be described later. It is determined whether or not (the command at the command position k is an end command) is established, and if it is established, the process returns through step D846; otherwise, the process returns to step D824 via step D846 and proceeds to step D825. It has become.

Hereinafter, step D825 and subsequent steps will be described assuming that the value of the command position of the target motion management area X is k.
In step D825, the line corresponding to the command position k in the target motion table (the motion table at the address acquired in step D823) (for example, the first line if k = 0, the second line if k = 1, .., If k = N, the command of the (N + 1) th line) is acquired, and then, in steps D826 to D843, a command determination is sequentially performed on this command to determine whether or not each command corresponds to each code. Then, the corresponding process (any of steps D851 to D868) is executed, and the flow advances to step D846.

That is, in step D826, it is determined whether it is the additional 1 code. If YES, the process proceeds to step D851 after performing bitmap addition processing (processing for adding a still image as an object, which will be described in detail later), and proceeds to step D827 if NO. Proceed to.
In step D827, it is determined whether it is the additional 2 code. If YES, the process proceeds to step D846 after performing a motion addition process (a process of adding a moving image as an object, which will be described later in detail), and proceeds to step D828 if NO.
In step D828, it is determined whether it is an additional three code. If YES, a single-color rectangle adding process (a process of adding a single-color rectangular image that does not use data in the character ROM (image ROM 322) as an object as an object, details are omitted) is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D829.
In step D829, it is determined whether it is the insertion 1 code. If YES, the process proceeds to step D846 after performing a bitmap insertion process (a process of inserting a still image as an object, details are omitted), and if NO, proceeds to step D830. move on.

In step D830, it is determined whether it is the insertion 2 code. If YES, the process proceeds to step D846 after performing a moving image insertion process (a process of inserting a moving image as an object, details are omitted), and if NO, proceeds to step D831.
In step D831, it is determined whether it is the insertion 3 code. If YES, the process proceeds to step D846 after performing a single-color rectangle insertion process (a process of inserting the single-color rectangular image as an object, details of which are omitted). Proceed to D832.
In step D832, it is determined whether or not it is a movement 1 code. If YES, a one-point designation object movement process (a process of setting the display position and display size of the object by a one-point designation method, which will be described in detail later) is performed in step D857. Proceed to step D846, and if NO, proceed to step D833.
In step D833, it is determined whether or not it is the movement 2 code. If YES, a three-point designation object movement process (a process of setting the display position and display size of the object by the three-point designation method, details are omitted) is performed in step D858. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D834.

In step D834, it is determined whether the code is an effect 1 code. If YES, the process proceeds to step D846 after effect type designation processing (described later) is performed in step D859. If NO, the process proceeds to step D835.
In step D835, it is determined whether the code is the effect 2 code. If YES, effect parameter designation processing (described later) is performed in step D860, and the flow advances to step D846. If NO, the flow advances to step D836.
In step D836, it is determined whether the code is the effect 3 code. If YES, the process proceeds to step D846 after performing an effect color designating process (process for setting an effect color, details are omitted). If NO, the process proceeds to step D837.
In step D837, whether the code is a deletion code or not is determined. If YES, object deletion processing (processing for deleting an object, which will be described later in detail) is performed in step D862, and the flow advances to step D846. If NO, the flow advances to step D838.

In step D838, it is determined whether the code is a change code. If YES, object change processing (processing for changing an object, which will be described in detail later) is performed in step D863, and the flow advances to step D846. If NO, the flow advances to step D839.
In step D839, it is determined whether it is a decode code. If YES, the process proceeds to step D846 after performing an object moving image decoding process (to be described in detail later), and if NO, proceeds to step D840.
In step D840, it is determined whether or not the code is a replacement code. If YES, object replacement processing (processing for replacing objects, details are omitted) is performed in step D865, and the flow advances to step D846. If NO, the flow advances to step D841.
In step D841, it is determined whether the code is a behavior code. If YES, a behavior index setting process (to be described in detail later) is performed in step D866, and the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D842.

  In step D842, it is determined whether the code is copy 2 code. If YES, rectangular copy processing (processing for cutting out and displaying a part of an object (moving image, details are omitted)) is performed in step D867, and the process proceeds to step D846. If so, the process proceeds to Step D843. When the rectangular copy processing is executed, a part of the image of one frame of the target object (moving image) specified by the parameter associated with the copy 2 code in the row at the command position k will be described later, for example. This is a designated image in the character drawing process in step E58, which is drawn in a virtual drawing space (frame buffer of the VDP 312) in step E76 described later. Note that such a copying process is also possible when the object is a still image.

In step D843, it is determined whether the code is inverted 2 code, and if YES, horizontal inversion processing (processing for inverting and displaying an object (moving image) in the horizontal direction (left / right direction), details are omitted) is performed in step D868. Proceed to step D846, and if NO, proceed to step D844. When the horizontal reversing process is executed, a setting process (for example, step E71 in FIG. 128 described later) for setting a horizontal flip is performed on one frame image of the target object (moving image). (For example, the values of the X coordinate of the upper left point of the display and the upper right point of the display are exchanged such that the width data calculated in step E65 of FIG. 128 described later becomes a negative value). An image obtained by inverting one frame image of the object (moving image) in the horizontal direction is drawn in the virtual drawing space in step E76 described later. Note that such inversion processing can be similarly performed even when the object is a still image.
In addition, the direction of the inversion processing can be a vertical direction (up-down direction). Set a code (motion command) for instructing vertical inversion, and if this code is used, perform vertical inversion processing (processing for inverting and displaying an object in the vertical direction (vertical direction, details are omitted)). May be executed. When the vertical inversion processing is executed, setting is performed so that the setting processing (for example, step E75 in FIG. 128 described later) for performing the vertical flip is performed on the image of the target object (for example, described later). The values of the Y coordinate of the upper left display point and the lower left display point are exchanged so that the height data calculated in step E66 of FIG. 128 becomes a negative value. Is drawn in the virtual drawing space in step E76 described later.

Next, in step D844, it is determined whether the code is an end code. If YES, the process proceeds to step D845. If NO, the process proceeds to step D845.
In Step D845, an update for increasing the value of the command position k by 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to Step D846.
In step D846, if the decision result in step D844 is YES, the process returns. If NO, the process returns to step D824 to execute step D825 and subsequent steps for the updated command position k.

A specific example of the operation for one frame by the loop processing of steps D824 to D846 will be described below with reference to the case of FIG. 138.
That is, first, since the command position k is 0 and the first line in which the additional 1 code is set is the designated line, the result is YES in step D826, and the bitmap adding process in step D851 is executed. The symbol “2” on the line is registered as the object index 0.
Next, k = 1, the second line in which the behavior code is set is the designated line, and the object index 0 and the behavior index 0 are set as parameters. Therefore, YES is obtained in step D841 and the behavior in step D866 is performed. The index setting process is executed, and the behavior index 0 is set for the object index 0 (that is, the symbol “2”).

Next, k = 2, and the third line in which the additional 1 code is set is the designated line. Therefore, YES is determined in the step D826, and the bitmap adding process in the step D851 is executed. The symbol "1" is registered as the object index 1.
Next, k = 3, and the fourth line in which the behavior code is set is the designated line, and the object index 1 and the behavior index 0 are set as parameters. Therefore, YES is obtained in step D841 and the behavior in step D866 is performed. The index setting process is executed, and the behavior index 0 is set for the object index 1 (that is, the symbol “1”).

Next, k = 4, and the fifth line in which the additional 1 code is set is the designated line. Therefore, YES is determined in the step D826, and the bitmap adding process in the step D851 is executed. The symbol "9" is registered as the object index 2.
Next, when k = 5, the sixth line in which the behavior code is set is the designated line, and since the object index 2 and the behavior index 0 are set as parameters, YES is obtained in step D841 and the behavior in step D866 is performed. The index setting process is executed, and the behavior index 0 is set for the object index 2 (that is, the symbol “9”).

Next, since k = 6, the seventh line in which the movement 1 code is set is the designated line, and the object index 0 and the like are set as parameters. Therefore, YES is determined in the step D832, and one point designation in the step D857 is performed. The object moving process is executed, and the display setting of the image of the object index 0 (that is, the design “2”) is performed according to the coordinate data and the display size data on the seventh line.
Next, when k = 7, the eighth line in which the movement 1 code is set is the designated line, and the object index 1 and the like are set as parameters. Therefore, YES is determined in the step D832, and one point designation in the step D857 is performed. The object moving process is executed, and the display setting of the image of the object index 1 (that is, the symbol “1”) is performed in accordance with the coordinate data and the display size data on the eighth line.

Next, k = 8, the ninth line in which the movement 1 code is set is the designated line, and the object index 2 and the like are set as parameters. Therefore, YES is determined in the step D832, and one point designation in the step D857 is performed. The object moving process is executed, and the display setting of the image of the object index 2 (that is, the design “9”) is performed according to the coordinate data and the display size data on the ninth line.
Next, k = 9, and the tenth line in which the end code is set is the designated line. Therefore, YES is determined in the step D844, and the loop process is terminated and the process returns in the step D846.
Thus, the first one frame shown in FIG. 138A is completed. Note that the same processing is performed for each frame cycle (the above-described processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second) for the third and subsequent frames shown in (b), (c), and (d) in FIG.

[Bitmap addition processing]
Next, details of the bitmap addition processing executed in step D851 in the above-described motion command execution processing will be described with reference to FIG. This routine is a process for adding a still image character as a display object, as described above.
When this routine is started, first, in step D871, the address of the motion list table (that is, data specifying the motion list table to be controlled this time and its row) is loaded from the motion list table area in the motion management area X. Then, the process proceeds to Step D872.
In Step D872, it is determined whether the value of the display number in the motion management area X is equal to or greater than the maximum display element number. If the value is equal to or greater than the maximum display element number, the object cannot be added. If there is, the process returns after sequentially executing steps D873 to D881. Here, the maximum number of display elements is a limit value of the number of displays (the number of objects to be controlled) that can be handled by one motion in consideration of the hardware limitation of the VDP 312 and the capacity of the VRAM 329 (area for developing a moving image, etc.). , For example, 18 (still image 16 + moving image 2). However, 18 is only an example and is not limited to this.

  In Step D873, the address of the display information area corresponding to the display number is set. For example, when an object is added for the first time, the number of displays is 1, so the address of the display information area corresponding to the number of displays 1 in the motion management area X is set. To give a specific example, for example, the display information areas of the motion management area 5 (the motion management area for the left symbol) include three for the first next symbol, for the second current symbol, and for the third previous symbol. There are pieces. Now, for example, assuming that the motion management area X = 5 (left symbol), the target motion table is as shown in FIG. 138, and the command position k = 0, the command on the first line as the designated line is This routine is executed because of the additional 1 code. In this case, among the three display information areas of the motion management area 5, the display information area for the first next symbol corresponding to the display number 1 is set. Since the data of the object (character No. (design “2”)) specified by the parameters in the first row is set, in step D873, the address of the display information area for the first next design is set. Is set. Similarly, if k = 2 (the designated line is the third line), the character No. of the third line is displayed in the display information area for the second current symbol corresponding to the display number 2. By setting the data of (symbol "1"), the address of the display information area for the second current symbol is set, and if k = 4 (the designated line is the fifth line), it corresponds to the number of display 3 The character No. on the fifth line is displayed in the display information area for the third previous symbol to be displayed. By setting the data of (symbol "9"), the address of the display information area for the third previous symbol is set.

  Note that the “display number” set (stored) in the motion management area basically indicates the MAX number of objects to be displayed (ie, the number of all objects set as control targets). Since the number of objects increases in the additional processing, the “display number” fluctuates by +1 (for example, updated in step D881 to be described later), but at the time when such additional processing is not performed. The display number indicates the MAX number of the displayed object.

Next, in step D874, each data of one display information area (hereinafter, referred to as a target display information area) specified by the address set in step D873 is cleared to zero. This is because, once the values of the target display information area are all set to 0, initial values are set in necessary areas. Here, only one display information area corresponding to the number of displays is cleared to zero.
Next, in step D875, an undefined value (for example, “−1”) is saved as the value of the behavior index in the target display information area. This is for setting the state without behavior as an initial value. In this example, even when the value of the behavior index is 0 (when the behavior index 0 is specified like the parameters on the second, fourth, and sixth lines in FIG. 138), the behavior (replacement of the design or the like) is present. is there.

Next, in step D876, the still image information is saved as the data of the display type in the target display information area. That is, here, information indicating that the object to be added is a still image is set.
Next, in step D877, the motion table address (motion table name) is obtained from the specified row of the target motion list table (the specified row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D871). This is a process similar to the above-mentioned step D823.

Next, in step D878, a still image index corresponding to the command position k is obtained. Here, the still image index is a registration number of a still image character registered in a character ROM (image ROM 322), and is a parameter for specifying a row of a still image ROM member list table as shown in FIG. 133, for example. . Now, for example, assuming that the motion management area X = 5 (left symbol), the target motion table is as shown in FIG. 138, and the command position k is 0, the motion table is specified in the first row which is the specified row. Object is a character No. (Symbol "2"), in step D878, "1" is acquired as the value of the still image index for specifying the row corresponding to symbol "2" in the table of FIG.
Next, in step D879, the value of the still image index acquired in step D878 is saved as an image index. The image index is information indicating a specific character (an image such as a still image or a moving image) to be displayed, and is information used in step E51 and the like in the effect display editing process described later.

Next, in step D880, the command position is updated to the next record. That is, update is performed to increase the value k of the command position by one. This is because when the motion command execution processing is executed in the next cycle, control is performed using the next row of the motion table as the designated row.
Next, in step D881, since an object has been added by this routine, an update is performed to increase the value of the display number in the motion management area X by 1, and the process returns.

The contents of each parameter of the still image ROM member list table shown in FIG. 133 are as follows.
Image address offset: Indicates an offset value to the address where the character is stored in the character ROM.
Palette address offset: Indicates an offset value to an address at which pallet data used by the character is stored in the character ROM. In this example, since the described characters use the same palette, they are all 0. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the palette may be changed as needed for the character. Locations using different pallets will have different offset values.
The width and height of the image; the size of the original image of the character; For example, the unit is pixel. In this example, since only the symbol at the time of the normal fluctuation and the character of the push button are used, the size is the same, but the actual value is various for each character. Also, in the normal design, for example, the size of the person drawn on the design may be slightly different and the appearance size may be different, but in order to make it easier to handle with internal control, the size of the character in the transparent part is Is adjusted so that characters of the same category have the same size.

-Width on VRAM: Indicates the width when the character is expanded to VRAM. In this example, the compression type is the same width as the original image because only the “losslessly compressed 32-bit image” is used. Lossless compression or reduction in the number of bits in the color palette reduces the size.
Image compression type: indicates the compression type of each character stored in the character ROM. The compression types include the following types 0 to 6, for example. There may be other types.
0: no 32-bit full-color image compression 1: no 8-bit full-color image compression 2: no 4-bit full-color image compression 3: lossless-compression 32-bit full-color image 4: lossless-compression 8-bit full-color image 5: lossless-compression 4-bit full-color image 6: lossless-compression image / image Size after compression; indicates the capacity of image data (character data) after compression. It is used as a parameter or the like when data is transferred from the character ROM 322 to the VRAM 329.
Note that the above-described category setting of the still image ROM member list table is an example,
Other parameters may be set.

[Video addition processing]
Next, details of the moving image addition processing executed in step D852 in the above-described motion command execution processing will be described with reference to FIG. This routine is processing for adding a moving image character as a display object, as described above.
When this routine is started, first, in step D891, the address of the motion list table is loaded in the same manner as in step D871, and the process proceeds to step D892.
In Step D892, similarly to Step D872, it is determined whether or not the value of the display number in the motion management area X is equal to or more than the maximum display element number. , The steps D893 to D897 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to the step D898.

In step D893, the address of the display information area corresponding to the display number is set in the same manner as in step D873.
In step D894, as in step D874, each data of one display information area (target display information area) specified by the address set in step D893 is cleared to zero.
In step D895, as in step D875, an undefined value (for example, “−1”) is saved as the value of the behavior index in the target display information area.
In step D896, as in step D877, the address of the motion table is obtained from the specified row of the target motion list table (the specified row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D891).

  In Step D897, a moving image index corresponding to the command position k is obtained. Here, the moving image index is a registration number of a moving image character registered in a character ROM (image ROM 322), and is a parameter for specifying a row of a moving image ROM member list table as shown in FIG. 134, for example. If the parameter of the object in the designated row of the target motion table (the data set in the next column of the additional 2 code) is, for example, an animation pattern “1”, the above-mentioned step D897 causes the table of FIG. In step (1), “0” is acquired as the value of the moving image index designating the line corresponding to the animation pattern “1”.

  Next, in step D898, data of the encoding type (described later) in the designated row of the moving image ROM member list table corresponding to the value of the moving image index acquired in step D897 is read, and the encoding of the moving image to be added based on this data is performed. It is determined whether the type is an I-picture moving image. If the type is an I-picture moving image, the process proceeds to step D899; if not, the process proceeds to step D904. In the case of FIG. 134, if the encoding type data is “0”, it is an I-picture moving image. If this data is “0”, the process proceeds to step D899. If the data is other than “0”, the process proceeds to step D904. Become. It should be noted that the I picture means frame data of an image that can be decoded independently without performing inter-frame prediction, and the I picture moving image means a moving image composed of only I pictures.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D899, the process proceeds to step D902 after sequentially executing steps D899 to D901.
In step D899, an initial value “−1” is set as the data of the frame count for I-picture (frame count at the time of a moving image including only I-picture) in the target display information area. If “−1” is set as the initial value, the I-picture frame count starts from “0”.
In step D900, I-picture moving image information is saved as display type data in the target display information area. That is, here, information indicating that the object to be added is an I-picture moving image is set.
In step D901, the value of the moving image index acquired in step D897 is saved as an image index.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step D904, the process proceeds to step D906 after sequentially executing steps D904 and D905.
In step D904, a loop playback flag is set in order to instruct the VDP 312 to loop a moving image. Note that a setting for not looping is also possible.
In step D905, a moving image decoding area securing process for securing a storage area of the RAM 311a for decoding moving image data is executed.
When the process proceeds to step D906, it is determined whether or not the region has been correctly allocated as a result of the moving image decoding region securing process. If YES, steps D907 and D908 are executed, and the process proceeds to step D902. If NO, the process returns. If the area cannot be properly secured due to overcapacity or the like, the result is NO.
In step D907, the normal moving image information is saved as the data of the display type in the target display information area. That is, here, information indicating that the object to be added is a normal moving image (that is, not an I-picture moving image) is set.
In step D908, the value of the index of the area allocated by the moving image decoding area securing process is saved as an image index.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D902, the process returns after performing steps D902 and D903 sequentially.
In step D902, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.
In step D903, an update is performed to increase the value of the number of displays in the motion management area X by 1, as in step D881.

The contents of each parameter of the moving image ROM member list table shown in FIG. 134 are as follows.
Moving image address offset: Indicates an offset value to an address where the movie is stored in the character ROM.
The width and height of the moving image; the size of the original image of the movie; For example, the unit is pixel. As in the case of the still image, the size of the movie of the same category is adjusted by the transparent portion so as to be the same.
The number of frames of a moving image; it indicates how many continuous pictures are included in the movie. In this embodiment, since control is performed for 1 second = 30 frames, a movie is created in consideration of the control. If the control is executed at 60 frames per second, double-speed reproduction will be performed. The reverse is also true.

Α value setting: information indicating whether or not the movie includes alpha channel information. 0 = no alpha, 1 = with alpha. With alpha, you can change the transparency of the movie. Otherwise, it is only opaque.
Encoding type; indicates how the movie is structured. There are the following types 0 to 2.
0 = Structure including only I pictures 1 = Structure including I picture and one-referenced P picture (referring to one past I or P picture to create the P picture)
2 = A configuration that includes two P-pictures in addition to the one described above (the P-picture is created with reference to one past I or P and two past I or P)
However, the present invention is not limited to the encoding type described above, and may have a configuration including, for example, a B picture.
The category setting of the moving image ROM member list table described above is an example,
Other parameters may be set.

[1 point designation object movement processing]
Next, details of the one-point designation object movement processing executed in step D857 in the above-described motion command execution processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D911 to D924 are sequentially executed, and the process returns.
In step D911, the address of the motion list table is loaded as in step D871.
In step D912, the address of the motion table is obtained from the specified row of the target motion list table (the specified row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D911).

In step D913, an object index corresponding to the command position k is obtained from the target motion table specified by the address obtained in step D912. For example, if FIG. 138 is the target motion table, and k = 6 (the designated line is the seventh line), this command is executed because the command is the movement 1 code. Since the object index is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D913.
In step D914, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D913 is set. For example, in FIG. 138, when k = 6 (the designated line is the seventh line), since the object index 0 is the symbol “2” (the next symbol) added in the first line, the first index corresponding to the next symbol The address of the display information area is set.

In Step D915, X coordinate data corresponding to the command position k is obtained.
In step D916, the X coordinate of the upper left display point and the X coordinate of the lower left display point in the target display information area (the display information area to which the address is set in step D914; hereinafter the same in this routine) are obtained in step D915. Save the coordinate data.
In Step D917, the Y coordinate data corresponding to the command position k is obtained.
In step D918, the Y coordinate data acquired in step D917 is saved as the Y coordinate of the upper left display point and the Y coordinate of the upper right display point in the target display information area.

In Step D919, image width data and image height data corresponding to the command position k are obtained.
In step D920, the image width data obtained in step D919 is added to the X coordinate data obtained in step D915. In the next step D921, the result of this addition is saved as the X coordinate of the upper right point of the display in the target display information area. .
In step D922, the image height data obtained in step D919 is added to the Y coordinate data obtained in step D917, and in the next step D923, the result of this addition is saved as the Y coordinate of the lower left display point in the target display information area. I do.
Then, in step D924, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.

  According to steps D915 to D923, the following operation is realized. For example, when k = 6 (the designated line is the seventh line) in FIG. 138, the X coordinate data is “0”, the Y coordinate data is “−493” (minus indicates a position outside the screen at the upper side of the screen), and the image The width data is “296” and the image height data is “490”. Therefore, “0” is obtained in step D915, “−493” is obtained in step D917, and “296” and “490” are obtained in step D919. Then, the addition result of step D920 is “296” (= 0 + 296), and the addition result of step D922 is “−3” (= −493 + 490). Therefore, in step D916, "0" is saved as the X coordinate of the upper left point and the lower left point of the display, and in step D918, "-493" is saved as the Y coordinate of the upper left point and the upper right point of the display. In step D923, "296" is saved as the X coordinate of the upper right point of the display, and "-3" is saved as the Y coordinate of the lower left point of the display in step D923. Thereby, the display position of the target object (in this case, the next symbol “2”) is set as the coordinates of the three points (upper left point, lower left point, upper right point). In this case, since the position of the upper left corner on the screen is the origin (X coordinate = 0, Y coordinate = 0), and the Y coordinates set as described above are all negative values, the object of the next symbol is The display position is set outside the screen on the upper side of the screen, and the image of the next symbol is not yet visible on the screen.

As described above, according to this routine, although one point is specified, three points are specified as a result. That is, since the object (character) has a quadrangular shape, if there is the upper left reference point coordinate and the height and width data of the object, the upper right point and the lower left point as in steps D920 and D922 described above. This is because coordinates are obtained. As described above, in the display information area in the motion management area, there is an area for entering each coordinate value of the three points determined in this way. In the above-described steps D916, D918, D921, and D923, registration in each area is performed. .
Note that the three-point designation object moving process executed in step D858 in the motion command execution process described above will not be described in detail with reference to a flowchart, but this process is substantially the same as the one-point designation object movement process described above. Done in However, in the case of specifying three points, the coordinate table has a structure in which each coordinate data is present on the motion table, so that the addition processing as in steps D920 and D922 described above is unnecessary, and all the coordinate data acquired from the motion table are all used as they are. The processing content is only saved in each area of the display information area.

[Effect type specification processing]
Next, details of the effect type designation processing executed in step D859 in the above-described motion command execution processing will be described with reference to the flowchart on the left side of FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D931 to D940 are sequentially executed, and the process returns.
In step D931, the address of the motion list table is loaded as in step D871.
In step D932, the address of the motion table is acquired from the specified row of the target motion list table (the specified row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D931).

In step D933, the object index corresponding to the command position k is obtained from the target motion table specified by the address obtained in step D932. For example, Mdat0041 (motion index No. 41) on the lower side of FIG. 149 is the target motion table, and if k = 4 (the designated line is the fifth line), the command is the effect 1 code, so this routine is executed. However, in this case, since the object index of k = 4 is (0), 0 is obtained as the object index in step D933.
In step D934, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D933 is set. For example, in the case of the lower part of FIG. 149, the object index 0 is the moving image “Titaro movie 1” added at k = 0 (first line), and the address of the display information area corresponding to this moving image is set.

In Step D935, data of the effect type corresponding to the command position k is obtained.
In step D936, the data acquired in step D935 is saved as the effect type in the target display information area (the display information area whose address is set in step D934, the same in this routine).
For example, when k = 4 on the lower side of FIG. 149, the effect type is (1), so this is acquired in step D935, and is set in the target display information area in step D936.
Next, in steps D937, D938, and D939, the effect parameter, foreground color, and background color data in the target display information area are cleared.
Then, in step D940, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.

  In the present routine described above, for example, the type of the blending method for displaying a plurality of objects in a superimposed manner is set. That is, for example, the above-mentioned effect type (1) is a type of effect for providing transparency (transparency). In this routine, the type of the blend is set.

[Effect parameter specification processing]
Next, details of the effect parameter designation processing executed in step D860 in the above-described motion command execution processing will be described with reference to the flowchart on the right side of FIG. 121.
When this routine is started, steps D941 to D947 are sequentially executed, and the process returns.
In step D941, the address of the motion list table is loaded as in step D871.
In step D942, the motion table address is obtained from the specified row of the target motion list table (the specified row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D941).

In step D943, the object index corresponding to the command position k is obtained from the target motion table specified by the address obtained in step D942. For example, the lower side of FIG. 149 is the target motion table, and if k = 5 (the designated line is the sixth line), this command is executed because the command is the effect 2 code. In this case, k = 5 Since the object index is (0), 0 is obtained as the object index in step D943.
In step D944, the address of the display information area (display information area in motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D943 is set. For example, in the case of the lower part of FIG. 149, since the object index 0 is the moving image “Titanaro movie 1” added at k = 0 (first line), the address of the display information area corresponding to this moving image is set. .

In Step D945, data of the effect parameter corresponding to the command position k is obtained.
In step D946, the data acquired in step D945 is saved as an effect parameter in the target display information area (the display information area to which the address is set in step D944, which is the same in this routine).
For example, when k = 5 on the lower side of FIG. 151, the effect parameter is (64), so that the effect parameter is obtained in step D945 and set in the target display information area in step D946.

Here, the effect parameter indicates the ratio of the transparency (darkness) of the object at the time of blending. Assuming that the value of the effect parameter is P, in the case of this example, data obtained by converting the percent of transparency into a numerator of “P / 255” is defined on the table. Specifically, for example, when 100% is normal display (no transparency), the parameter P when displaying at a density of about 10% is 25 (≒ 255 × 10/100). Conversely, when the value of the parameter P is 64 as in the specific example described above, the transparency is about 25% (= 100 × 64/255), which means that the transparency is considerably thin. However, when performing 100% display, the above-described effect type designation processing and the effect parameter designation processing of this routine are not executed.
Next, in step D947, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.

[Object deletion processing]
Next, details of the object deletion processing executed in step D862 in the above-described motion command execution processing will be described with reference to the flowchart on the left side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D951, the address of the motion list table is loaded as in step D871.
Next, in step D952, it is determined whether or not the value of the display number in the motion management area X is 0 or less. If not, the process proceeds to step D953.
When the process proceeds to step D953, the process sequentially executes steps D953 to D955, and then proceeds to step D956.
In step D953, the address of the motion table is acquired from the specified row of the target motion list table (the specified row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D951).

In step D954, the object index corresponding to the command position k is obtained from the motion table specified by the address obtained in step D953. For example, when the target motion table is on the lower side of FIG. 142 and k = 12 (the designated line is the thirteenth line), this routine is executed because the command is a delete code. In this case, k = 12 Since the object index is (0), 0 is obtained as the object index in step D954.
In step D955, the address of the display information area (the display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D954 is set. For example, when k = 12 on the lower side of FIG. 142, since the object index is 0, the address of the display information area corresponding to the object index 0 is set at this time.

In step D957, it is determined whether the data of the display type in the motion management area X is the normal moving image information. If the data is the normal moving image information, the moving image decoding area release processing (details are omitted) is performed in step D957. Proceed to D958, and if it is not normal moving picture information (that is, if it is an I picture moving picture), proceed to Step D958 without executing Step D957.
When the process proceeds to step D958, the process returns after sequentially executing steps D958 to D960.
In step D958, the information in the display information area after the acquired object index is shifted (moved) forward. That is, in the motion management area X, the data in the display information area after the address set in step D955 is shifted to the previous display information area by one. As a result, the data in the display information area at the address set in step D955 has been deleted, and the object corresponding to the deleted data has been deleted.
In step D959, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.
Then, in step D960, since the object has been deleted by this routine, an update is performed to reduce the value of the display number in the motion management area X by one.

[Object change processing]
Next, details of the object change processing executed in step D863 in the above-described motion command execution processing will be described with reference to the flowchart on the right side of FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D961 to D967 are sequentially executed, and the process returns.
In step D961, the address of the motion list table is loaded as in step D871.
In step D962, the address of the motion table is acquired from the specified row of the target motion list table (the specified row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D961).
In Step D963, the object index corresponding to the command position k is obtained from the target motion table specified by the address obtained in Step D962.

In Step D964, the address of the display information area (the display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in Step D963 is set.
In step D965, an index (still image index or moving image index described above) of a changed character (a changed character) corresponding to the command position k in the target motion table is obtained.
In step D966, the value of the index acquired in step D965 is saved as an image index. Thereby, an object change in which only an image (a character such as a design or a character) changes is realized.
Then, in step D967, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.

[Object video decoding process]
Next, details of the object moving image decoding process executed in step D864 in the above-described motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, steps D971 to D974 are sequentially executed, and thereafter, the flow proceeds to step D975.
In step D971, the address of the motion list table is loaded as in step D871.
In step D972, the address of the motion table is acquired from the specified row of the target motion list table (the specified row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D971).

In Step D973, the object index corresponding to the command position k is obtained from the target motion table specified by the address obtained in Step D972. For example, if the table shown in the upper part of FIG. 149 is the target motion table, and k = 3 (the specified line is the fourth line), the command is a decode code, and this routine is executed. In this case, Since the object index for k = 3 is (0), 0 is obtained as the object index in step D973.
In Step D974, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in Step D973 is set. For example, when k = 3 in the upper table of FIG. 149, the object index 0 is a moving image (tiger movie 1) added at k = 0 (first line), and therefore, the display information area corresponding to this moving image is displayed. Is set.

In Step D975, it is determined whether or not the data of the display type in the motion management area X is I-picture moving image information. If the data is I-picture moving image information, Steps D977 and D978 are executed, and the flow proceeds to Step D979. If not, the process proceeds to Step D976.
In step D977, the address of the I-picture frame count number (frame count at the time of a moving image including only I-pictures) in the target display information area (the display information area to which the address is set in step D974; Set.
In step D978, based on the address set in step D977, updating is performed to increase the data of the I-picture frame count number in the target display information area by one.

In step D979, it is determined whether the I-picture frame count updated in step D978 is equal to or greater than the number of moving image frames (the number of moving image frames corresponding to the image index data at this time). If it is, the process proceeds to step D983 after executing step D980, and if not, the process proceeds to step D983 without executing step D980.
In step D980, since the moving image specified by the image index (in this case, the moving image index) is displayed up to the last frame, in order to restart the moving image from the beginning, the frame count for I picture in the target display information area is calculated. Set the data to 0 (start value).

In step D976, it is determined whether or not the data of the display type in the motion management area X is the normal moving image information. Returns as abnormal.
In step D981, data registered as an image index at this point (in this case, data of a moving image index) is loaded.
In step D982, a moving image decoding process (details omitted) of decoding one frame of the moving image corresponding to the index loaded in step D981 is performed.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D983, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.
In the case of an I-picture moving image, the picture of each frame exists independently, so the number of frames may be managed. When an instruction is given to the internal register of the VDP 312 later, the count (I-picture frame count number) becomes important.

[Behavior index setting processing]
Next, details of the behavior index setting processing executed in step D866 in the above-described motion command execution processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, steps D991 to D997 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D991, the address of the motion list table is loaded as in step D871.
In step D992, the address of the motion table is obtained from the specified row of the target motion list table (the specified row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D991). As shown in the example of FIG. 135 described above, a behavior table name corresponding to the address of the behavior table is also set in the designated row of the motion list table (however, it may be NULL).

In step D993, the object index corresponding to the command position k is obtained from the target motion table specified by the address obtained in step D992. For example, the upper side of FIG. 149 is the target motion table, and if k = 1 (the specified line is the second line), this command is executed because the command is a behavior code. In this case, k = 1 Since the object index is (0), 0 is obtained as the object index in step D993.
In step D994, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D993 is set. For example, in the case of the upper part of FIG. 149, since the object index 0 is a moving image (Tiger movie 1) added at k = 0 (first line), the address of the display information area corresponding to this moving image is set.

In Step D995, data of the behavior index corresponding to the command position k is obtained.
In step D996, the data acquired in step D995 is saved as a behavior index in the target display information area (the display information area to which the address is set in step D994; hereinafter, the same in this routine).
For example, when k = 1 on the upper side of FIG. 149, the behavior index is (0), so that the behavior index is obtained in step D995 and set in the target display information area in step D996.
Then, in step D997, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.

  The behavior table is a table (a data table registered in the PROM 321) including rows in which processing addresses of behaviors (character replacement) are set, and specifies a specific row (designated row) among the rows. This is the behavior index. Therefore, when the values of the behavior table and the behavior index are determined, the processing address of the behavior is determined, and the content of the behavior is specified. This routine performs a control process for specifying the contents of such behavior. For example, the second line of k = 1 on the upper side of FIG. 149 instructs the object (object replacement movie 1) of the object index 0 to execute the behavior (character replacement) specified by the behavior index 0. Therefore, the target information display area is set accordingly. The behavior designated by the behavior index 0 is, for example, changing the color of the notice character "Taro Tarou" appearing in the movie for the purpose of the jackpot reliability notification, or changing the type of the notice character from "Tora Tarou" to " This is a control of replacing the tiger with the tiger (see FIGS. 146 (b) and 146 (c) described later).

[Direction display edit processing]
Next, details of the effect display editing processing executed in step D31 in the above-described main processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 125, 126, and 127. In the following, step E is used as the step number. As described in the main processing, the effect display editing processing is processing for setting various commands for instructing the VDP 312 to draw on the display device 41 and parameters thereof. In this effect display editing process, commands are set in a table form, and the set commands are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D34 (instructing screen drawing) of the main process.
When this routine is started, the loop processing A of steps E1 to E50 is repeatedly executed for the number of motion management areas, and thereafter, the process returns. Note that the loop process A includes a loop process B of steps E6 to E48, and the loop process B further includes a loop process C of steps E39 to E43.

In the loop processing A, the process is executed from step E2 for the motion management area X (that is, initially the motion management area 0) with X = 0 at first, and when the process proceeds to step E49, the address area of the motion management area is updated (ie, , X = X + 1), and in the next step E50, it is determined whether or not the loop processing A has been completed (in this example, whether X = 14) for all the motion management areas, and the determination result in step E50 is YES. When the condition is satisfied (that is, when the termination condition of the loop process A is satisfied), the process returns. If NO, the loop process A is repeated from step E2.
Hereinafter, the processing after step E2 will be described.
In step E2, it is determined whether the data in the address area of the motion management area X is NULL. If NULL, control is not required for the motion management area X, and the process advances to step E49. If not, steps E3 to E5 are sequentially performed. After the execution, the process proceeds to step E6. If it is determined as NULL (YES) in step E2 and the process proceeds to step E49, the following processes including the loop process B and the loop process C are not executed for the motion management area X.

In step E3, a motion list table to be controlled this time is loaded and prepared.
In step E4, all the blend information areas are cleared. The blend information area is an area in the RAM 311a for storing information on the parameters of the internal register of the VDP 312 for comparison between new and old. That is, the VDP 312 has four types of parameters of the internal register that indicate the fixed value of the inter-pixel operation at the time of blending for the effect. An area for storing the current setting information and the previous setting information is provided in the RAM 311a for each of these four types of parameters, and this is a blend information area.
In step E5, parameters for inter-pixel calculation (that is, four types of parameters to be set in the internal register of the VDP 312) are set.

  Next, when the process proceeds to step E6, a loop process B is started. In the loop processing B, steps E6 to E48 are repeatedly executed until the variable i is increased from the initial value 0 by the increment 1 until the variable i reaches the final value (final value = display number-1), and then the process proceeds to step E49. That is, in step E6, the variable i is set to 0 immediately after the start of the loop, and the process proceeds to step E7. In Step E48, when the variable i is smaller than the closing price, the process returns to Step E6, and when the variable i is equal to or more than the closing price, the process proceeds to Step E49. Then, when the process returns to step E6, the value of the variable i is increased by 1 and the process proceeds to step E7. Note that the value of the closing price is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the data of the display number set in the motion management area X. That is, in this loop processing B, steps E6 to E48 are repeatedly executed for the number of displays, and thereafter, the process proceeds to step E49.

Hereinafter, the processing after step E7 will be described.
When the process proceeds to step E7, steps E7 to E9 are sequentially executed, and thereafter, the process proceeds to step E10.
In step E7, the color parameter of the internal register of the VDP 312 is set corresponding to the α value.
In step E8, the α flag used for the processing described later is set to α present.
In step E9, the address of the display information area (hereinafter, referred to as a target display information area) corresponding to the variable i in the motion management area X is loaded.
Next, in step E10, the value of the behavior index in the display information area of the address loaded in step E9 is read, it is determined whether any index data other than NULL is set, and some behavior index data is set. If yes (in the case of YES), the process corresponding to the behavior index is executed in step E11, and then the process proceeds to step E12. If NO, the process proceeds to step E12 without executing step E11.

The process corresponding to the behavior index executed in step E11 is to execute a behavior (replacement of image data) specified by the behavior index for an object (target object) corresponding to the target display information area. This is the process specified by the process address set in the row specified by the behavior index in the behavior table described above.
For example, when the target object is the current symbol of the left symbol, the process of the flowchart (display left symbol conversion process) shown on the left side of FIG. 129 described later is executed in step E11. In the present application, other specific examples of the processing executed in step E11 are also shown on the right side of FIG. 129, and details thereof will be described later.
When step E11 is executed, the data of the image index is changed immediately before the display, for example, the basic symbol is replaced with a predetermined symbol to be displayed, or the color of the image of the push button (PB) is changed from the basic color. The color may be replaced with a predetermined color (for example, a specific color indicating the jackpot reliability) according to the gaming state. Since the display pattern of characters defined on the motion table is fixed, basically it is not possible to respond to different stop symbols or different notice characters depending on the distribution unless the motion table is changed . Therefore, in this example, a process of replacing a character by embedding a behavior in a necessary portion is performed so that a flexible response can be performed.

  In step E12, the data of the effect type set in the target display information area is read, and it is determined in step E12, E13, or E14 whether this is a basic blend, an addition blend, or a subtraction blend. If it does not correspond to any of the blend types, the process proceeds to step E15. If it does not correspond to any of the blend types, the process skips steps E15 to E18 and proceeds to step E21.

In Step E15, the value of the effect parameter set in the target display information area is loaded and applied to the color parameter, and then the process proceeds to Step E16.
In step E16, it is determined from the data such as the display type set in the target display information area whether or not the drawing designation is a reproduction without transmission of a normal moving image. If YES, the flow proceeds to step E17; Proceed to E21.
In step E17, it is determined whether or not the target moving image (the moving image determined to be the normal moving image without transparency in step E16) is registered without α. If YES, the α flag is set to α without α in step E18. After setting, the process proceeds to step E21. If NO, the process proceeds to step E21 without executing step E18.

Next, in step E21, the data of the effect type set in the target display information area is read, and is read as an addition blend, a subtraction blend, a multiplication blend, a screen blend, a difference blend, or a comparison (dark). It is determined at step E21 to step E27 whether the blending is the blending or the inversion blending, and if it corresponds to any one of the blend types, the corresponding processing (corresponding processing of steps E31 to E37) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step E39. If it does not correspond to any of the blend types, the process proceeds to step E28.
Here, step E31 is processing executed in the case of addition blending (processing for setting an addition type drawing effect), and step E32 is processing executed in the case of subtraction blending (subtraction type drawing effect). Step E33 is processing executed in the case of multiplication blending (processing for setting a multiplication type drawing effect), and step E34 is processing executed in the case of screen blending (screen type drawing effect is executed). Step E35 is a process executed in the case of difference blending (process for setting a difference type drawing effect), and Step E36 is a process executed in the case of comparison (dark) blending (comparison). (A process of setting a (dark) type drawing effect). Is a process executed when a command (processing for setting the drawing effect of inverting type).

Next, in step E28, it is determined that the setting of the α flag is not α. If α is not set, a drawing effect without α is set in step E29, and the process proceeds to step E39. , Α), a drawing effect of the type with α is set in step E38, and the flow advances to step E39.
In step E29 and steps E31 to E38, various parameters (four in this example) for blending are set in the corresponding blend information area according to the setting of the effect type and the like of the target information display area. I have.

Next, when the process proceeds to step E39, a loop process C is started. In the loop process C, steps E39 to E43 are repeatedly executed until the variable j corresponding to the above-described four types of blend information areas is increased from the initial value 0 by an increment 1 to a final value (final value = 3). Proceed to E44.
That is, in step E39, the variable j is set to 0 immediately after the start of the loop, and the process proceeds to step E40.
In step E40, it is determined whether or not the blend information area corresponding to the variable j has been changed. If it has been changed, steps E41 and E42 are sequentially executed, and the flow advances to step E43. The process proceeds to step E43 without executing E42. Here, the determination in step E40 is made by determining that the data has been changed if the previous data and the current data of the corresponding blend information area do not match, and determining that the data has not been changed if they match.
In step E41, the inter-pixel operation fixed value of the resist parameter corresponding to the variable j is set in the internal register of the VDP 312. In step E42, the current blend information is set as the previous blend information.

When the process proceeds to step E43, the process returns to step E39 when the variable j is smaller than the closing value, and goes to the step E44 after exiting the loop processing C when the variable j is the closing value. Then, when the process returns to step E39, the value of the variable j is increased by 1 and the process proceeds to step E40.
The reason why the variable j has four ranges is that, as described above, the VDP 312 has four types of internal register parameters for instructing the fixed value of the inter-pixel operation at the time of blending. Also, areas corresponding to the respective registers (blend information areas) are provided for the previous time and for the current time. This is to set the value in the register of the VDP 312 only when the value to be changed changes (to increase the efficiency of the setting process for the VDP).

Next, in step E44, data of the display type (display type) set in the target display information area is read, and whether the data is a still image, a normal moving image, an I-picture moving image, or a monochrome square is determined. It is determined in E44 to E47, respectively, and if it corresponds to any of the display types except for the single-color square, the corresponding processing (corresponding processing of steps E51 and E52, steps E53 and E54, or steps E55 to E57) is executed. Thereafter, the flow advances to step E58. If the color is a single-color square, the flow advances to step E59. If none of the display types is applicable, the flow advances to step E48.
Here, steps E51 and E52 are executed in the case of a still image. In step E51, image index data is loaded. In step E52, attributes of the still image data are set based on the loaded image index data. Execute the process. After step E52, the process proceeds to step E58, and a character drawing process (described later) is executed based on the data loaded in step E51 and the setting in step E52.

Steps E53 and E54 are executed in the case of a normal moving image. In step E53, image index data is loaded. In step E54, attributes of normal moving image data are set based on the loaded image index data. Execute the process. After step E54, the process proceeds to step E58, and a character drawing process (described later) is executed based on the data loaded in step E53 and the setting in step E54.
Steps E55 to E57 are executed in the case of an I-picture moving image. In step E55, image index data is loaded. In step E56, the I-picture frame count (from a moving image including only I-pictures) is obtained from the target display information area. In step E57, processing such as setting an attribute of I-picture moving image data is performed based on the loaded data. After step E57, the process proceeds to step E58, and a character drawing process (described later) is executed based on the data loaded in steps E55 and E56 and the setting in step E57.
Step E59 is executed in the case of a single-color square, and a process of drawing a rectangular image (single-color square image) in the virtual drawing space (frame buffer) of the VDP 312 (that is, pasting a sprite of the rectangular image into the virtual drawing space). Processing).
After step E58 or step E59, the process proceeds to step E48.

Next, in step E48, it is determined whether or not the variable i of the loop processing B has reached the closing value (display number -1). If it has reached, the processing exits from the loop processing B and proceeds to step E49 to reach the end. If not, the process returns to step E6 to repeat the loop processing B.
When the process proceeds to step E49, an update for increasing the number X of the target motion management area by 1 is executed. Then, in step E50, it is determined whether or not X has reached the end value of the loop processing A (14 in this example). If so, the process returns from the loop process A, and if not, the process returns to the step E1 to repeat the loop process A from the step E2.

  In the step of setting the attributes of steps E52, E54, and E57, a process of transferring the character data (still image data or moving image data) from the character ROM (image ROM 322) to the VRAM 329 is performed at the same time. However, if the same thing already exists in the VRAM, this data transfer is not performed. Further, in the case of a single-color square, this data transfer is not necessary because the data of the character ROM is not used. Here, the attribute is basic information of the character, such as α mode, color mode (how many colors are displayed), character size, color pallet designation, and the like.

[Character drawing process]
Next, details of the character drawing process executed in step E58 in the above-described effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step E61, data of the X coordinate of the upper left point of the display and the X coordinate of the lower left point of the display are read from the target display information area (the display information area corresponding to the variable i) in the motion management area X. After reading, it is determined whether or not they match. If they match, the process proceeds to step E62, and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step E77.
In step E62, data of the Y coordinate of the upper left display point and the Y coordinate of the upper right display point are read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and it is determined whether or not they match. Proceed to step E77 if they do not match.
If the image is a quadrangle (rectangular), the determination results in steps E61 and E62 are YES and the process proceeds to step E63. To step E77.
In step E77, a triangular character drawing process (description is omitted) is performed, and the process returns.

Next, when the process proceeds to step E63, the process proceeds to step E68 after sequentially executing steps E63 to E67.
In step E63, the data of the X coordinate of the upper left display point is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and this is set as the X coordinate of the upper left base point of the character.
In step E64, the data of the Y coordinate of the upper left display point is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and this is set as the Y coordinate of the upper left base point of the character.
In step E65, the data of the X coordinate of the upper right point of the display and the X coordinate of the upper left point of the display are read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the difference between them (= X coordinate of the upper right point of the display−X of the upper left point of the display) (Coordinates) are set as character width data.

In step E66, the data of the Y coordinate of the lower left display point and the data of the Y coordinate of the upper left display point are read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and their difference (= Y coordinate of the lower left display point−Y coordinate of the upper left display point) is read. (Coordinates) are set as character height data.
In Step E67, no horizontal flip (horizontal inversion) and no vertical flip are set. Here, the horizontal flip means image inversion in the horizontal direction (X coordinate direction), and the vertical flip means image inversion in the vertical direction (Y coordinate direction).

In step E68, it is determined whether or not the width data set in step E65 is less than 0 (that is, a negative value). If less than 0, a horizontal flip has occurred, so steps E69 to E71 are sequentially executed, and then the flow proceeds to step E72. If it is not less than 0, there is no horizontal flip and the process proceeds to step E72 without executing steps E69 to E71.
In step E69, data of the X coordinate of the upper left point of the display is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the addition result obtained by adding the width data (minus value) set in step E65 to the upper left base point X of the character Update and set as coordinates.
In step E70, the width data (minus value) set in step E65 is converted into a positive number, and this is updated and set as new width data.
In step E71, horizontal flip is set (the setting in step E67 is changed).

In step E72, it is determined whether the height data set in step E66 is less than 0 (that is, a negative value). If less than 0, there is a vertical flip, so steps E73 to E75 are sequentially executed, and then, the flow proceeds to step E76. , If it is not less than 0, since there is no vertical flip, the process proceeds to step E76 without executing steps E73 to E75.
In step E73, the data of the Y coordinate of the upper left display point is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the addition result obtained by adding the height data (minus value) set in step E66 to the upper left base point of the character Update and set as Y coordinate.
In step E74, the height data (minus value) set in step E66 is converted into a positive number, and this is updated and set as new height data.
In step E75, the presence of vertical flip is set (the setting in step E67 is changed).
When the process proceeds to step E76, the image of the predetermined character corresponding to the data of the image index loaded in any of steps E51, E53, and E55 based on the settings made up to this point (steps E63 to E75). Is performed in the virtual drawing space (frame buffer) of the VDP 312 as a designated image (that is, a process of pasting a sprite of a predetermined character into the virtual drawing space), and then the process returns.

[Display left symbol conversion process]
Next, the details of the display left symbol conversion process executed in step E11 in the above-described effect display editing process will be described with reference to the flowchart on the left side of FIG.
When this routine is started, the process proceeds to step E84 after sequentially executing steps E81 to E83.
In step E81, image index data (data before replacement by behavior) is loaded.
In step E82, data of the index (symbol number) of the current symbol (left) to be displayed (for example, the data set in the above-described step D727 or D747) is loaded. In the case of this example, since there are nine types of symbols, the index (symbol number) data of the symbol (decorative symbol of the special figure) is any numerical value from 0 to 8.

  In step E83, the index data of the current symbol (left) loaded in step E82 is added to the index data of the current symbol (left) set in the image index loaded in step E81, and the result of the addition is updated. Set as an index. For example, if the value of the image index before replacement (conversion) loaded in step E81 is, for example, 0, and the index data of the current pattern (left) to be replaced loaded in step E82 is 6, In step E83, 6 (= 0 + 6) is set as the value of the update index.

Next, in step E84, it is determined whether or not the data of the update index set in step E83 exceeds the symbol upper limit (8 in this example). If not, the process proceeds to step E86 without executing step E85.

In step E85, a value obtained by adding 1 to the symbol upper limit (9 in this example) is subtracted from the value of the update index, and the result of the subtraction is set as a new update index value. According to these steps E84 and E85, when the value of the update index exceeds the upper limit of the symbol, the value of the update index is updated to a value that has completed one cycle.

In step E86, a left symbol index conversion table is set, and the flow proceeds to step E87. The left symbol index conversion table is a table in which a row is designated by the update index and the value of the left symbol image index to be displayed on the designated row is set.
In step E87, a new image index value is obtained from the row designated by the update index in the left symbol index conversion table set in step E86, and the flow proceeds to step E88.
Then, in step E88, the value acquired in step E87 is saved as a new image index value in the image index area (the area where the image index is saved), and the process returns.
Although the display left symbol conversion process has been described above, the same process is also performed for the right symbol and the middle symbol (details are omitted).

[PB color conversion processing]
Next, details of the PB color conversion processing executed in step E11 in the above-described effect display editing processing will be described with reference to the flowchart on the upper right side of FIG.
When this routine is started, the process returns after sequentially executing steps E91 to E94.
In step E91, the distribution result is loaded from the PB color area in the effect distribution result area (the area in which the distribution result (notification type) determined in steps D426 and D429 described above) is stored.
In step E92, a PB index conversion table is set, and the flow advances to step E93. The PB index conversion table is a table in which a row is designated by the sorting result saved in the PB color area, and an image index value of a PB (push button) image to be displayed in the designated row is set. .

In step E93, a new image index value (PB index value) is obtained from the row designated by the above-described distribution result in the PB index conversion table set in step E92, and the process proceeds to step E94.
Then, in step E94, the value obtained in step E93 is saved in the image index area as a new image index value, and the process returns.
In addition, since only the button character that is the default color is registered as the motion control data (particularly the image index data) of the push button notice, when the color is changed from the default color to notify the jackpot reliability, This routine (PB color conversion processing) is executed.
In addition to the push button notice, a basic character (for example, “Taro Tarou”) that appears may be replaced with another character (for example, “Torasuke” or “Tora Rock”) corresponding to the distribution result in the effect distribution result area. Processing such as conversion (replacement) by behavior also exists.

[Reach character conversion processing]
Next, details of the reach character conversion processing executed in step E11 in the above-described effect display editing processing will be described with reference to the flowchart on the lower right side of FIG. 129.
When this routine starts, the process proceeds to step E104 after sequentially executing steps E101 to E103.
In step E101, the distribution result is loaded from the reach character area of the effect distribution result area.
In step E102, a reach character index conversion table is set, and the flow advances to step E103. The reach character index conversion table is a table in which a line is designated by the sorting result saved in the reach character area, and an image index value of an image of the reach character to be displayed in the designated line is set.
In step E103, a new image index value (reach character index value) is obtained from the line specified by the above-described distribution result in the reach character index conversion table set in step E102. Although not shown, the value obtained in step E103 is also saved in a predetermined image index area as a new image index value.

Then, when the process proceeds to step E104, it is determined whether the reach character index acquired in step E103 is a value indicating "no character", and if YES, the size of the character (image) of the reach character is set to 0 in step E105. The process returns later, and if NO, the process returns without executing step E105.
In this example, the motion control data (particularly, reach characters such as “reach!” Displayed at the moment when the reach occurs and “battle”, “victory”, “reach”, and “daze!” In the image index data), default characters are displayed. If necessary, behaviors are set (that is, if necessary, the reach character conversion process is performed in the step E11). The character is changed or the color of each character is replaced.
In the reach character conversion process described above, for example, if the reliability of the big hit notice fluctuates with low reliability, the character size is set to 0 in step E105, so that the reach character exists on the control, but the reach character actually exists. Is invisible. However, the method of not displaying is not limited to this configuration. For example, a configuration in which reach character display is not performed may be adopted.

[Example of effect control data table and effect display]
Next, a specific example of a data table used in the control of the effect control device 300 described above, and a specific example of an effect display performed on the display unit 41a (screen, display area) of the display device 41 by the control will be described with reference to FIGS. This will be described with reference to FIGS.
First, FIG. 133 shows a specific example of the still image ROM member list table, which has already been described in step D878 and the like of the bitmap addition process.
FIG. 134 shows a specific example of the moving image ROM member list table, which has already been described in step D897 and the like of the moving image addition process.
Next, FIG. 135 is a specific example of a motion list table. The motion list table has already been described in the explanation of the scenario analysis processing (specifically, the explanation of the motion index).

Next, FIG. 136 shows a specific example of the scenario table (during the customer waiting demonstration), which has already been described in the step D585 of the scenario analysis processing, the constant weight processing, the repetition processing, and the like.
Next, FIG. 137 is a specific example of the scenario table (when the special figure 1 is normally changed), which has already been described in the step D586 and the like of the scenario analysis processing.

Next, FIG. 138 shows a specific example of the motion table (at the start of the normal change of the left symbol), which has already been described in the step D823 and the like of the motion command execution processing.
In the control of the motion table, unless a motion deletion process or a new motion registration process is performed on the target motion layer, the table returns to the head when the row of the table reaches the bottom. That is, in the motion control processing (step D30), when the control of the target motion table has been completed up to the last frame (the frame number has reached the last frame number), the same motion table as in the motion registration is used. Is executed again from the beginning.
Next, FIG. 139 is an example of a display result by the motion table shown in FIG. 138.
As shown in this figure, the upper left corner of the display screen 41a is the origin (X coordinate = 0, Y coordinate = 0), and the vertical direction is the Y axis direction, so the lower left corner of the display screen 41a is the X coordinate. = 0 and the Y coordinate = 767. Further, since the horizontal direction is the X-axis direction on the display screen 41a, the upper right corner of the display screen 41a has the X coordinate = 1023 and the Y coordinate = 0, and the lower right corner of the display screen 41a has the X coordinate = 1023 and the Y coordinate. Coordinate = 767. Note that specific numerical values of such coordinates are merely examples.

  (A) of FIG. 139 corresponds to the first frame (a) of the motion table. The symbol “2” including the image of the tiger character is the next symbol (object index 0), the symbol “1” is the current symbol (object index 1), and the symbol “9” is the previous symbol (object index 2). ), And these objects are additionally registered by lines 1 to 6 of the motion table, and behaviors are set. Further, the display positions and sizes of these objects are set in the seventh to ninth lines of the motion table, whereby the display shown in FIG. 139 (a) is performed. However, the next symbol is not entirely visible at a position outside the screen, and only a part of the previous symbol is visible.

  FIG. 139 (b) corresponds to the second frame (b) of the motion table. The setting of the design and behavior of each object remains at the first frame (a), and the display positions and sizes of these objects are set in the eleventh to thirteenth lines of the motion table. The display shown in (b) is performed. In this case, the values of the Y coordinate are all changed by −8 from the first frame (a) (for example, the value of the Y coordinate of the current design of the object index 1 is changed from 7 to −1). The symbol has moved slightly upward on the display screen 41a. This is a part of the once hopping movement in the operation in which each symbol once hops (slightly rises) at the start of the change and then scrolls (fluctuates) downward. The Y and Y coordinates of the third and fourth frames (c) and (d) of the motion table (FIG. 138) are sequentially changed by -8.

Next, the upper side of FIG. 140 shows the state of the initial position of each symbol (the state at the top except for the above-mentioned hopping operation), and the display is the same as that of FIG. 139 (a) described above.
The lower side of FIG. 140 shows a state where each symbol has been scrolled to the bottom of the movement range.
The movement (scroll) of the display position as the variable display of each symbol is performed in the range of the two states described above.
For example, when the current symbol reaches the bottom of the moving range, the symbol number is updated (+1), and then returns to the initial value of the moving range. In this example, three symbols (in consideration of the current symbol, the previous symbol, and the next symbol, not the symbol number) repeatedly move within the narrow effective range. Since the symbol number is incremented by one when returning to the upper side (that is, for example, the symbol is switched from the symbol "1" to the symbol "2"), it appears that the same symbol is scrolling from the upper outside of the screen to the lower outside of the screen.

When the y-coordinate fluctuates at a speed of adding 100, the current symbol is fluctuated by a value of 7 → 107 → 207 → 307 → 407 → 7 → 107 →. The symbol number displayed when it becomes 7 is incremented by 1. The same applies to the previous symbol and the next symbol of the left symbol, and also to the current symbol, the previous symbol, and the next symbol of the middle symbol and the right symbol.
An advantage of this method is that it is easy to determine how many symbol numbers are currently the center of control. In the example of FIG. 140 described above, the symbol number “1” is the center, the previous symbol is “9” immediately before it, and the next symbol is “2” one after it. When the coordinates return to the top, the central symbol can be controlled to one, such as "2", so that a simple structure can be achieved.
If this is a method of moving the same symbol from top to bottom instead of dividing it as "current symbol, previous symbol, next symbol", each symbol will be present as three independent symbols, so the reference symbol will be There is a problem that it does not exist, it is difficult to control when replacing a symbol, and it is necessary to manage all of them. In this example, such a problem is solved.
Note that the above range division is a case of normal fluctuation. This is not always the case during reach (during reach action) because the position of the symbol changes in various ways. However, even during reach, the concept of the classification of the current symbol, the previous symbol, the next symbol, etc. remains.

  Next, FIG. 141 is an example of connection of motion tables when the left symbol is normally changed. The connection of the motion tables is performed by the above-described scenario table. First, in the motion table (Mdat0000) shown in the upper part of FIG. 141, for example, a motion index 0 is set by the 20th line (// 19) of the scenario table shown in FIG. Is set by designating the first line (left symbol stop). Then, the motion table (Mdat0000) registers the symbol “1” as the object index 0 (first line), and then replaces the symbol with a predetermined symbol by the behavior designated by the behavior index 0 (second line). ) A stop symbol is displayed at the display position designated by the third line. In the motion table such as the motion table (Mdat0000), even if the character to be drawn has a different effect depending on the situation, only one pattern is registered for the same motion, and the registration as the basic character on the table is performed internally. The character with the lowest number for control (for example, the character with the lowest address for registration in the character ROM (image ROM 322), in this case, the stop symbol "1"). According to this configuration, since the lowest number is used as a reference for internal control, it is easy to calculate a difference value such as character replacement by behavior (change processing), and control is easy and control is performed efficiently. This has the effect of improving development efficiency. In addition, since only one motion table is registered for the same motion, there is an effect of preventing an increase in data capacity.

  Next, in the motion table (Mdat0003) shown in the middle part of FIG. 141, for example, the motion index 3 is set by the first row of the scenario table (MS_LZ100) shown in FIG. 137, and thereby the four rows of the motion list table of FIG. It is set by specifying the eye (left normal fluctuation (first half)). Then, similarly to the case described with reference to FIG. 138 described above, the next symbol, the current symbol, and the previous symbol are registered by the motion table (Mdat0003), and the normal variation (first half) of the left symbol is displayed. The middle part of FIG. 141 and FIG. 138 show the same motion table (Mdat0003).

Next, in the motion table (Mdat0004) shown in the lower part of FIG. 141, for example, the motion index 4 is set by the fourth row of the scenario table (MS_LZ100) shown in FIG. 137, and thereby the five rows of the motion list table of FIG. It is set by specifying the eye (// 4 left normal fluctuation (second half)). Then, the next symbol, the current symbol, and the previous symbol are registered by the motion table (Mdat0004), and the normal variation (second half) of the left symbol is displayed.
Although only the left symbol has been described above, the same applies to the right symbol, the middle symbol, and other objects.
In this way, the scenario table can easily constitute a series of large effects by freely combining a plurality of motion tables designating blocked display effects.

Next, the upper part of FIG. 142 is a specific example of the scenario table (at the time of the advance notice of the push button), which has already been described in the variable wait processing, the PB waiting processing, the PB determination branch processing, and the like.
Next, the lower part of FIG. 142 is a specific example of a motion table (at the time of a push button notice), which has already been described in step D823 of the motion command execution processing and step D954 of the object deletion processing.

Next, FIG. 143 is an example of a scenario table used at the time of the ending of the fluctuation display effect of the special figure.
Here, a symbol display period of a predetermined time is provided during the ending period so that the next symbol change does not suddenly start simultaneously with the end of the ending movie. In this example, a constant wait code is set on the 27th line (// 26), and the wait time value is 30 (that is, 1 second). As a result, the left, right, and middle stop symbol displays registered in motion on the 20th line (// 19), the 22nd line (// 21), and the 24th line (// 23) are displayed for a predetermined time (in this example, For one second), the next symbol change does not start immediately when the ending movie ends.

  In the background setting of the 18th line (// 17) in FIG. 143, since the value of the motion index is set to (−1), NO is obtained in step D637 of the above-described motion registration processing, and The value of the area is used as the motion index. This has to match the background displayed after the ending, but at this point, since the probability information command has not been received, it is predicted from the information such as the already received pattern command, fanfare command, ending command etc. This is because it is necessary to select a background. Also, even if the game control device has sent a symbol command of a probable variable symbol, the effect control device may perform an effect of imitating a hit with a normal symbol (non-probable symbol). This is because it is necessary to use the internal information of the effect control device. At the end of the ending scenario, a probability information command is sent. If there is no problem with the display contents, the command may be continued as it is. If there is a problem, the background is switched to the background corresponding to the command ( Since the command from the game control device has the highest priority).

  Next, FIG. 144 is a view for explaining the display layer. Here, the display layer means a virtual layer (layer) that determines the context (display priority) as to whether to display as a near side or as a far side on the screen. In this embodiment, the above-described motion layer corresponds to a basic display layer. As described above, there are a total of 14 motion layers from the motion 0 for the background to the motion 13 for the fourth symbol, and the images overlap at the same position (the position of the X coordinate and the Y coordinate). In this case, the higher the motion number, the higher the priority. That is, if the images overlap at the same position, the one with the small motion number (the one with the small motion number) becomes the one with the large motion number at the overlapped portion, unless the one with the large motion number is transparent or translucent. It appears hidden and disappears. FIG. 144 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the display layers corresponding to the motion layers.

In the case of the present embodiment, the display priority of the motion layer is actually determined by the above-described effect display editing process (FIGS. 125 to 127). In the above-described effect display editing processing, as described above, the processing is performed in order from the one with the smallest motion layer number (that is, the motion number) (the youngest one). (Frame buffer).
FIG. 144 shows only the basic display layer classification corresponding to the motion layer. However, even in the same motion layer, the display layer is considered to be finer due to the different object index described above. be able to. As described above, as the value of the object index is smaller, the object is displayed at the back of the screen in the context of the display layer (that is, when the display positions overlap, the object with the larger value of the object index is given priority. Displayed on the screen).

Next, FIG. 145 and FIG. 146 show that an image of effect information (information for effect different from the identification information) is different from the image of the decorative pattern (that is, the pattern of the decorative special figure; identification information). As a specific example of a series of effect displays overlapping the front side, an example of a reach start effect is shown. It is to be noted that the fourth symbol is always displayed somewhere on the screen 41a, and a hold display of the starting memory of the special figure (including a special effect display by advance notice) is sometimes performed. The illustration is omitted to avoid complication.
In this effect example, first, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), “7” as the left symbol KTL and “7” as the right symbol KTR of the decorative special figure are largely displayed on both sides of the center of the screen 41a. Thereafter, the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR gradually decrease in size on the screen, and go through the state shown in FIG. 145 (b), then the state shown in FIG. 145 (c), and then to the state shown in FIG. 146 (a). The display which moves to the state is performed. The dotted line with an arrow shown in FIG. 145 (a) illustrates the subsequent movement trajectory (the trajectory that moves to the upper corner after turning) of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR, and is actually the screen 41a. (However, this may also be displayed as an effect).

  Then, when the images of the left symbol KTL (identification information) and the right symbol KTR (identification information) start to move, an image of the face of the “tiger taro” (effect information image) as the character C7 appears on the screen 41a. The display moves from the upper right side to the lower left side. At this time, the character C7 partially overlaps with the right symbol KTR in the state of FIG. 145 (b) and is displayed so as to be closer to the right symbol KTR, and in the state of FIG. 145 (c), the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTL. It is displayed so as to partially overlap with the symbol KTR and on the side (rear side) opposite to the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR, and a dynamic effect display is realized. The dotted lines shown in FIG. 145 (b), FIG. 145 (c), and FIG. 146 (a) indicate the movement trajectory immediately before the character C7, and are not actually displayed on the screen 41a (however, this is not the case). May be displayed as an effect).

  Further, in the state of FIG. 145 (c) in which the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR and the character C7 are gathered and overlapped at the center (a state in which the player gazes at the center), a preliminary lottery process (for example, the aforementioned steps D426, D429) ), The color of the character C7 temporarily (or continuously thereafter) changes as shown in FIG. 146 (b), or the character C7 differs as shown in FIG. 146 (c). By temporarily (or continuously) changing to the character C6, for example, an announcement effect indicating the reliability of a big hit is performed. As described above, when the reliability suggestion is performed based on the display content or the display mode of the character or the like in a state where the image of the special figure pattern (identification information) and the image of the character (production information) overlap with each other, the player suggests the reliability. The possibility of overlooking the effect of (notice) is extremely low, and an effective effect display of notice can be realized.

The announcement effect indicating the reliability may be obtained by, for example, changing the contents of the data table of the notice distribution (lottery of the effect contents of the notice) used in steps D426 and D429 described above to the character C7 by a behavior or the like when a big hit occurs. May be set so as to increase the probability that the color changes (or changes to a specific color). In this way, the player will experience that the color of the character C7 changes empirically (or changes to a specific color), and the player will easily experience a big hit. Can be suggested. The same goes for other announcements.
145 (a), 145 (b), 145 (c), and 146 (a), even if there is no change in the color of the character C7, the reach start effect itself shown in FIG. It may be performed as a notice of the degree or the like. Also in this case, for example, if the contents of the data table for selecting the effect contents are set so that the reach start effect is easily executed in the case of a big hit, when the reach start effect is executed, the player receives the big hit. Can be presumed to be likely to occur (that is, the big hit reliability can be suggested to the player).

Next, FIG. 147 is a view for explaining one aspect of the state of each image and the display layer in the effect display shown in FIGS. 145 and 146.
In the effect display, the effect control device 300, as shown in FIG. 147 (a), displays the character C7 on the near side of the right symbol KTR or the like (in the case of FIG. 145 (b) in the specific example). The image (production image) of the movie M1 which is a moving image in which C7 moves as described above is arranged on the display layer (motion 4; notice 4) on the back side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR (identification information). At the same time, an image GM1 obtained by copying a part of the image of the movie M1 including the image of the character C7 (production information) is displayed on a display layer (motion 8; notice 5) closer to the left than the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR. The control is performed so that the display position (the position of the X coordinate and the Y coordinate) of the character C7 in the images on the back side and the near side coincides. That is, the character C7 is drawn at the same position on the display layer before and after the pattern of the decorative special figure (the display layers are motions 5 to 7), and the character C7 is drawn twice as a whole. A copy of a part of the image is used. Since a part of the image is copied, the original data (image data registered in the image ROM 322) can be used, and the image on the back side (for example, the image of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR) can be displayed without being made translucent. There is an effect that visibility of a decorative special figure or the like can be secured without being unnecessarily covered.

  In the effect display, the effect control device 300, as shown in FIG. 147 (b), displays the character C7 on the back side of the right symbol KTR or the like (in the specific example, FIG. 145 (c)). The image (movement image) of the movie M1 is left on the display layer (motion 4; notice 4) behind the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR (identification information), and the left symbol KTL and the right symbol are kept. The character C7 is not displayed on the display layer (motion 8; notice 5) on the front side of the KTR. That is, the character C7 is drawn only on the display layer on the back side of the design of the decorative special figure (the display layers are motions 5 to 7).

148 and 149 are examples of a scenario table and a motion table for realizing the effect display (reach start effect) shown in FIGS. 145 to 146 with the configuration of FIG. 147.
The upper part of FIG. 148 is a scenario table (left symbol reach start effect) used for the left symbol KTL in the scenario layer 1, and the middle table of FIG. 148 is a scenario table used for the right symbol KTR in the scenario layer 2. (Right symbol reach start effect), and the lower part of FIG. 148 is a scenario table (Titararo reach start effect) used for the character C7 in the scenario layer 4.
The upper part of FIG. 149 is a motion table “Mdat0040” for controlling the image of the movie M1 (the image arranged on the back side), and the lower part of FIG. 149 is an image GM1 (foreground) obtained by copying the movie M1. A motion table “Mdat0041” for controlling the image arranged on the side.

Hereinafter, each row of the scenario table (left symbol reach start effect) in the upper part of FIG. 148 will be described.
In the first line (// 0), data of “motion 5 registration code” is set as an operation code, and data of “motion index No. (30)” is set as an operand. Thus, in the above-described motion registration processing in the scenario analysis processing of the scenario layer 1, a display (display in which the left symbol KTL moves as described above) by a motion table (not shown) specified by the operand data is performed. Is performed.
Next, in the second line (// 1), data of “constant wait code” is set as an operation code, and data of “wait time value (60)” is set as an operand. As a result, the above-described constant weight processing is executed, and an operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table by a time (2 seconds) corresponding to 60 frames is realized. This is to wait until the display in which the left symbol KTL moves to the upper corner of the screen ends.

Next, in the third line (// 2), the data of the “variable scenario switching code” is set as the operation code, and the data of the “left symbol scenario 3rd” is set as the operand. As a result, the change scenario switching process is executed, and the scenario is switched from the first half change to the second half change (reach action) not shown.
The numerical values such as the wait time value and the motion index in the table shown in FIG. 148 are only specific examples for explanation, and are not necessarily the same as actual numerical values. The same applies to tables and the like in other figures.
Next, the scenario table (right symbol reach start effect) in the middle part of FIG. 148 is the same as the scenario table (left symbol reach start effect) in the upper part of FIG. However, here, the scenario layer number is 2 because of the right symbol, and the motion number of the registration code on the first line is 6.

Next, each row of the scenario table (toratarou reach start effect) in the lower part of FIG. 148 will be described.
In the first line (// 0), data of “motion 4 registration code” is set as an operation code, and data of “motion index No. (40)” is set as an operand. Thus, in the above-described motion registration process in the scenario analysis process of scenario layer 4, the display (character C7 moves as described above) using the motion table (“Mdat0040” shown in the upper part of FIG. 149) specified by the operand data. (Rear side display) is performed.
Next, in the second line (// 1), data of “motion 8 registration code” is set as an operation code, and data of “motion index No. (41)” is set as an operand. Thus, in the above-described motion registration process in the scenario analysis process of scenario layer 4, the display (character C7 moves as described above) using the motion table (“Md0041” shown in the lower part of FIG. 149) specified by the operand data. (A display on the near side) is performed.

Next, in the third line (// 2), data of “constant wait code” is set as an operation code, and data of “wait time value (30)” is set as an operand. As a result, the above-described constant weight processing is executed, and an operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table by a time (1 second) corresponding to 30 frames is realized. This is to wait for the character C7 to overlap the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR at the center of the screen (the state of FIG. 145 (c)).
Next, in the fourth line (// 3), data of "Motion 8 deletion code" is set as an operation code, and "NULL" is set as an operand. As a result, the display in the motion 8 is not performed, the display of the character C7 on the near side disappears, and only the display control of the character C7 on the back side is continued. Therefore, as shown in FIG. Is displayed on the back side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR.

Next, in the fifth line (// 4), data of “constant wait code” is set as an operation code, and data of “wait time value (30)” is set as an operand. As a result, the above-described constant weight processing is executed, and an operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table by a time (1 second) corresponding to 30 frames is realized. This is to wait for the character C7 to move to the lower left side (the state of FIG. 146 (a)).
Next, in the sixth line (// 5), data of “motion 4 deletion code” is set as an operation code, and “NULL” is set as an operand. As a result, the display in the motion 4 is not performed, and the display of the character C7 on the back side also disappears.
Next, on the seventh line (// 6), “end code” is set as an operation code, and “NULL” is set as an operand. As a result, the effect control based on the scenario table ends.

Next, the motion table “Mdat0040” in the upper part of FIG. 149 will be described.
According to the motion table “Mdat0040”, first, “Tiger Taro Movie 1” as the movie M1 is registered as the object index 0 in the first line (// 0), and then in the second line (// 1). The image of the “Taro Tarou Movie 1” is appropriately replaced by the behavior designated by the behavior index 0 (that is, replaced according to the result of the above-mentioned preliminary lottery), and in the third line (// 2), The movie is displayed at the display position designated as the movie M1.
In this way, for example, if the character with the lowest jackpot reliability is registered in the motion table as a basic character, and the character is to be changed (however, within the same character range) as the production proceeds, By using the behavior of changing the basic character to another with the control program (the function of changing the image data (character data) of the object (display element)), one motion table can cope with various display modes. For example, data (motion table) that can be used in common during a miss or a big hit can be reduced, so that the data capacity can be reduced and the development efficiency can be improved.

  In the fourth line (// 3), a command called "decode code" and a parameter called "object index (0)" are set. This is for executing the above-described object moving image decoding process of decoding the “Tiger Taro Movie 1” or another movie replaced by the behavior as needed. It is also possible to display the effect information of the character C7 or the like not by moving images but by still image data. In this case (ie, when the object 0 registered in the first line is a still image), the fourth line Is unnecessary.

Next, the motion table “Mdat0041” in the lower part of FIG. 149 will be described.
According to the motion table “Mdat0041”, “Tiger Taro movie 1” as the movie M1 is registered as the object index 0 in the first line (// 0), and then in the second line (// 1). The image of this “Titanaro movie 1” is appropriately replaced by the behavior specified by the behavior index 0, and in the third line (// 2), the movie M1 (the basic “Titanaro movie 1” or the behavior A part of the image of the replaced other movie) is copied and displayed at the display position designated as the image GM1. However, in the case of this example, the command “effect 1 code” and the parameters “object index (0)” and “effect type (1)” are set in the fifth line (// 4), and the sixth line is set. Since the command “effect 2 code” and the parameters “object index (0)” and “effect parameter (128)” are set in (// 5), the above-described effect type designation processing and effect parameter designation processing are performed. The image that is executed and displayed as the image GM1 is controlled to be in a semi-transparent state with a transparency (density) of about 50% (= 100 × 128/255). However, the translucent state is not necessarily required, and a mode in which commands and the like on the fifth to sixth lines are not set may be used.
In the fourth row (// 3), a "decode code" and an "object index (0)" are set as in the motion table "Mdat0040".

  The motion table “Mdat0041” has the above-mentioned motion lines in that the fifth and sixth lines for making the image translucent are present and that the command on the third line is “copy 2 code” instead of a movement code. Unlike the table “Mdat0040”, the numerical values of the parameters of the display position (X coordinate, Y coordinate) of the third row and the size (width, height) of the display image are also different from those of the motion table “Mdat0040”. . This means that the display by the motion table “Mdat0040” (the display of the image of the movie M1 in the motion 4 on the back side) is, in this case, the “Movie Tiger Movie 1” (or another movie replaced by the behavior). While the entire image is displayed on the entire display screen 41a, the display by the motion table “Mdat0041” (the display of the image GM1 in the near-side motion 8) is “Movie 1”. Alternatively, only a part of the image (a part including the effect information of the character C7 or the replaced character C6 or the like) of the image of the other movie replaced by the behavior is displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 41a (the character C7 or the like in the back motion 4). (The same display position as that of the image). Therefore, the parameters on the third line of the motion table “Mdat0041” are, for example, “X coordinate (823)”, “Y coordinate (200)”, “width (200)”, and “height (200)”. I have. Since “width (200)” and “height (200)”, the image GM1 is a small rectangular image of 200 × 200. On the other hand, in the case of the present example, the image of the movie M1 has a whole screen size of 1023 × 767. Note that the numerical values of these display positions and the like are merely numerical examples for explanation, and are not necessarily actual numerical values.

The configuration of the scenario table and the like for realizing the effect display shown in FIGS. 145 to 147 is not limited to the above-described embodiment. For example, in the examples of FIGS. 148 and 149, the character C7 (or another replaced character) is controlled using the scenario layer 4, but the scenario of the scenario layer 1 or 2 in the upper part of FIG. 148 or the middle part of FIG. In the table, a line in which a code for registering the motion table “Mdat0040” or “Mdat0041” is added, and the design (identification information) and the character (production information) are made only in the scenario layer 1 and the scenario layer 2. ) Can also be controlled. Conversely, in the scenario table of the scenario layer 4 in the lower part of FIG. (30) and No. It is also possible to add a line for executing the motion registration and the like of (31) and control both the symbol and the character only by the scenario layer 4.
When different layers of motion are used, the motion layer in which the character C7 and the like are arranged is not limited to the motion 4 and the motion 8, and any motion may be used as long as it is before and after the motions 5 to 7 which are the display layers of the design. Layer. That is, in principle, an image of the character C7 or the like arranged on the back side of the design (identification information) may be arranged on any of the motions 0 to 4, and the character C7 arranged on the front side of the design (identification information). And the like may be arranged in any of the motions 8 to 13.

  Further, in this effect example, the motion layer of the character C7 and the like is different from the left symbol KTL and the like in order to arrange the character C7 and the like (effect information) on the back side or the near side of the decorative special figure design (identification information). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the display priority is set by making the object indexes different depending on the arrangement order before and after. That is, the movie M1 on the far side is arranged in the same motion 5 as the left symbol KTL, and has a motion table configuration in which the object index is set to a value smaller than the left symbol KTL, thereby achieving the same as FIG. 147 (a). The context (display priority) can be realized. The image GM1 obtained by copying the movie M1 on the near side is arranged in the same motion 6 as the right symbol KTR, and has a motion table configuration in which the object index is set to a value larger than that of the right symbol KTR. The same context as (a) can be realized. However, in this case, the configuration of the table may be, for example, the motion index No. registered in the first row in the upper part of FIG. In the motion table specified in (30), in addition to the left symbol, an object such as the character C7 (located on the back side) is registered and controlled, and the motion index registered in the first row in the middle row of FIG. No. In the motion table specified in (31), in addition to the right symbol, an object such as the character C7 (which is arranged on the near side) is registered and controlled, and the scenario table in the lower part of FIG. 148 becomes unnecessary.

  In this effect example, as effect information arranged and displayed on the front side or the back side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR as the identification information, it is added to the identification information as shown in FIG. Although the character C7 “Taro Tarou” as additional information is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. The production information may not be the additional information described above, or may be displayed as production information such as a "rose", "flame", or a specific figure instead of a person or a creature such as "Taro". Good.

Next, FIG. 150 is a view for explaining the state (different aspect) of each image and the display layer for realizing the effect display shown in FIGS. 145 and 146. As shown in FIG. 150, the effect display shown in FIGS. 145 and 146 can also be realized by the following configuration.
That is, in the effect display, when the effect control device 300 shows the character C7 to the near side of the right symbol KTR or the like (in the specific example in the case of FIG. 145 (b)), as illustrated in FIG. 150 (a). The image (production image) of the movie M1 which is a moving image in which the character C7 moves as described above is displayed on the display layer (motion 4; notice 4) on the back side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR (identification information). At the same time, the same image of the movie M1 is placed in a translucent state on the display layer (motion 8; notice 5) on the near side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR, and the images on the far side and the near side are arranged. The configuration may be such that the display position (the position of the X coordinate and the Y coordinate) of the character C7 matches. In other words, in this alternative mode, the character C7 is drawn at the same position on the display layer before and after the design of the decorative special figure (display layers are motions 5 to 7), and the character C7 is drawn twice as a whole. The side uses the same image as the back side in a translucent shape. Since the images are the same, the original data (image data registered in the image ROM 322) can be used, and the translucent shape has the effect of ensuring the visibility of the decorative special figure on the back side.

  When the character C7 is shown on the back side of the right design KTR or the like (in the above example, in the case of FIG. 145 (c)), as shown in FIG. 150 (b), the image of the movie M1 (the effect image) ) Is arranged on the display layer (motion 4; notice 4) on the back side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR (identification information), and the display layer (motion) on the front side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR is kept. 8; the display of the character C7 in the notice 5) is not performed. That is, the character C7 is drawn only on the display layer on the back side of the design of the decorative special figure (the display layers are motions 5 to 7). This is the same as FIG. 147 (b).

Next, FIG. 151 is an example of a motion table for realizing the effect display (reach start effect) shown in FIGS. 145 to 146 with the configuration of FIG. 150. Note that the same scenario table as in FIG. 148 can be used.
First, the motion table “Mdat0040” in the upper part of FIG. 151 is exactly the same as that in the upper part of FIG.
Next, the motion table “Mdat0041” in the lower part of FIG. 151 will be described.
According to the motion table “Mdat0041”, “Tiger Taro movie 1” as the movie M1 is registered as the object index 0 in the first line (// 0), and then in the second line (// 1). The image of this “Titanaro movie 1” is appropriately replaced by the behavior specified by the behavior index 0, and in the third line (// 2), the movie M1 (the basic “Titanaro movie 1” or the behavior The entire image of the replaced other movie) is displayed on the entire specified screen. However, the command “effect 1 code” and the parameters “object index (0)” and “effect type (1)” are set in the fifth line (// 4), and the “effect 1 code” is set in the sixth line (// 5). Since the command “effect 2 code” and the parameters “object index (0)” and “effect parameter (64)” are set, the above-described effect type designation processing and effect parameter designation processing are executed, and the movie M1 The image displayed as the image is controlled to have a translucency (darkness) of about 25% (= 100 × 64/255).

  151 is different from the motion table “Md0041” in the lower row of FIG. 149 in that the command in the third row is a movement code, and furthermore, the display position (X coordinate, Y coordinate) in the third row is lower. Numerical values of parameters of the size (width, height) of the display image and the display image are the same as those of the motion table “Mdat0040”. In this case, the display by the motion table “Mdat0041” in this case is similar to the display by the motion table “Mdat0040”, and the entire image of “Tiger Taro movie 1” (or another movie replaced by the behavior) is displayed on the display screen. This is because it is displayed on the whole of 41a. Note that, even when the entire image of the movie M1 is displayed, the display is not limited to the entire display screen 41a, but may be displayed in a limited area of the display screen 41a depending on the effect contents.

Next, FIG. 152 is a modified example of the effect display (reach start effect) shown in FIGS. 145 to 146.
First, FIG. 152A shows that the display position (X coordinate, Y coordinate) of the image of the character C7 or the like displayed on the back side is different from the display position (X coordinate, Y coordinate) of the image of the character C7 or the like displayed on the near side. In this mode, two pieces appear with a shift, and for example, move with the display position shifted. The effect display may be such that the display position only temporarily shifts at a specific timing, and looks like one without shifting except at the specific timing.
Next, in FIG. 152 (b), the inverted state of the image of the character C7 or the like displayed on the back side is different from the inverted state of the image of the character C7 or the like displayed on the near side (only one of them is inverted). In this embodiment, two characters C7 and the like appear symmetrically and move, for example, with the inverted state being different. It should be noted that the effect display may be such that the inverted state only temporarily changes at a specific timing, and does not differ except at a specific timing and looks like one.

  According to the effect display shown in FIGS. 152 (a) and 152 (b), a shift in the display position and a different inversion state cause a sense of incongruity to the player looking at the display screen 41a, thereby providing a novel and refreshing display. Interesting effect display is realized. It should be noted that the other effect displays are the same, but the effect displays shown in FIGS. 152 (a) and 152 (b) indicate reliability such as whether or not a big hit or a probability change will occur. It can be performed as a notice effect. For example, in the case of a big hit, the contents of the table used for the lottery are set so that the effect display modes shown in FIGS. 152 (a) and (b) are easily selected by lottery. When it appears, it can be grasped empirically that it is easy to hit, and the reliability can be suggested.

Next, FIG. 153 is an example of a motion table for realizing the effect display (reach start effect) shown in FIG. 152 (a). Note that the same scenario table as in FIG. 148 can be used.
First, in the motion table “Mdat0040” in the upper row of FIG. 153, only the “end code” is set as a command on the first, second, and third rows. It is exactly the same as after the eyes.
Next, the motion table “Mdat0041” in the lower part of FIG. 153 is exactly the same as the motion table in the lower part of FIG.
As described above, the display control for one frame is ended by the “end code”. Thus, if the “end code” is set in the first three lines only in the layer of the back side motion, the first No display by the motion table of the display layer on the back side is performed for three frames, and the display of the movie M1 on the back side is delayed with a time difference of three frames (0.1 second) from the near side and starts. Will be. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152A, the display positions of the effect information images on the near side and the far side are shifted.

Next, FIG. 154 is an example of a motion table for realizing the effect display (reach start effect) shown in FIG. 152 (b). Note that the same scenario table as in FIG. 148 can be used.
First, the motion table “Mdat0040” in the upper part of FIG. 154 is exactly the same as that in the upper part of FIG.
Next, the motion table “Mdat0041” in the lower part of FIG. 154 will be described.
According to the motion table “Mdat0041”, “Tiger Taro movie 1” as the movie M1 is registered as the object index 0 in the first line (// 0), and then in the second line (// 1). The image of this “Titanaro movie 1” is appropriately replaced by the behavior specified by the behavior index 0, and in the third line (// 2), the movie M1 (the basic “Titanaro movie 1” or the behavior The image of the replaced another movie) is inverted in the horizontal direction (left / right direction), and in this case, is displayed on the entire display screen 41a. In the case of this example as well, the command “effect 1 code” and the parameters “object index (0)” and “effect type (1)” are set in the fifth line (// 4), and the sixth line ( // 5), the command “effect 2 code” and the parameters “object index (0)” and “effect parameter (64)” are set, so that the image of the movie M1 displayed on the near side is transparent ( (Darkness) is controlled to a translucent state of about 25% (= 100 × 64/255).

This motion table “Mdat0041” has the above-mentioned motion lines in that the fifth and sixth lines for making the image translucent are present and that the command on the third line is “inversion 2 code” instead of a movement code. This is different from the table “Mdat0040”. As a result, as shown in FIG. 152 (b), the display positions of the effect information images on the near side and the far side are left-right symmetric.
Note that the direction of reversal may be the vertical direction instead of the horizontal direction (left / right direction), or may be a relationship in which the positions have been changed so as to be point symmetric.

  155 to 158 show images of a plurality of effect information different from the design (identification information) of the decorative special figure in an area different from the variable display area of the decorative special figure on the screen 41a of the display means (display device 41). In the SD mode including a notification effect for notifying the mode or result (in this embodiment, the presence or absence of the reach action) of the variation display game of the special figure by a combination of the effect information displayed among the plurality of effect information. FIG. However, FIG. 155 (a) shows a display example of normal fluctuation for comparison. It is to be noted that the fourth symbol is always displayed somewhere on the screen 41a, and a hold display of the starting memory of the special figure (including a special effect display by a pre-reading advance notice) is performed in some cases, but this display is complicated. It is not shown in the drawings to avoid the problem.

First, FIG. 155 (a) will be described. FIG. 155 (a) is a display example of the normal fluctuation. In this case, the entire display screen 41a is a variable display area for displaying the decorative special figure (left symbol KTL, right symbol KTR, middle symbol KTC) in a variable manner. In this case, there are nine types of symbols (identification information) constituting the decorative special figure, and as shown in FIG. 155 (a), the effect information is added as additional information (corresponding to Attached). For example, "6" is a picture of the face of Tiger Coke C6 and a character indicating its name, "7" is a picture of the face of Tiger Crow C7 and a character indicating its name, and "8" is a tiger lock C8. Of the face and characters representing its name are added, and some other effect information (not shown) is similarly added to the other “1” to “5” and “9”. Needless to say, the effect information to be added is not limited to a character having a tiger as a motif, and may be a person, an animal, a plant, an imaginary creature, or the like, or may be an inanimate object.
In the drawings of the following display examples, description of characters (including lead lines) of characters such as C6 to C8 may be omitted as appropriate.

  Next, FIG. 155 (b) and subsequent drawings which are the first example of the SD mode effect will be described. Here, “SD” means super deformed. Deformation generally means expressing an object by deforming and distorting it. The SD mode is a mode in which a character used for additional information of a decorative special figure is actually highly deformed and appears. However, in the drawings of the present application, the diagram is simplified and the visibility is simplified. For the purpose of securing, etc., the characters are shown in the same manner regardless of the presence or absence of deformation. Note that the SD mode effect of this example is performed in a normal state that is not the probability change mode (the jackpot probability of the special figure is a low probability state), but is performed in, for example, the probability change mode (the jackpot probability of the special figure is a high probability state). Is also good.

  When the SD mode effect (first example) is started, first, as shown in FIG. 155 (b), a decorative special figure change display area H1 is displayed as a small rectangular area at the upper right corner of the screen 41a. In the variation display area H1, a variation display of the decorative special figure (left symbol KTL, right symbol KTR, middle symbol KTC) is performed, and an area excluding the variation display area H1 on the screen 41a (hereinafter, referred to as a main screen area). Thus, an effect display using a plurality of effect information different from the identification information (in this case, the numbers “1” to “9”) is performed. In FIG. 155 (b), display of images of the sky C10, the ground C11 including roads, the surrounding scenery C12, and the celestial body C13 (sun or moon) is started in the main screen area. Here, the sky C10, the ground C11, the surrounding scenery C12, and the celestial body C13 all correspond to a kind of effect information different from the identification information, and form the background of the character such as “Tiger Tarou” appearing thereafter. It is also background information.

Of these objects, the sky C10 is displayed on, for example, the entire screen on the innermost side of the displayed objects, and is a light blue image representing, for example, a blue sky at the time of FIG. 155 (b). The ground C11 is an image of the ground including a road displayed at the bottom of the screen and extending from the front to the back of the screen, and is displayed so as to appear to move (scroll) to the back. In this example, the surrounding scenery C12 is, for example, an image of a coniferous forest displayed on the left and right sides substantially at the center of the screen, and is also displayed so as to appear to move (scroll) to the back. The celestial body C13 is the sun that appears in the sky at the time of FIG. 155 (b). At this time, the celestial object C13 is displayed so as to gradually move upward from the left side of the screen corresponding to the east side of the sky.
Here, the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 are images in which a viewer feels perspective as the road on the ground C11 extends from the near side to the far side. Specifically, it is an image in which a vanishing point (point at infinity) in perspective is located near the upper end of the center of the road displayed in the lower center of the screen.

Then, as shown by a dotted line with an arrow in FIG. 155 (b), the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 are displayed as if they are moving toward this vanishing point, so that the place is moving to the near side. Appearance display starts. The ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 displayed so as to move in this manner are background information for realizing the first parameter indicating the lapse of time (the first parameter that makes the player who sees the display feel the lapse of time). .
In addition, the brightness and color of the sky C10 are displayed so as to change thereafter in accordance with the movement of the celestial body C13 described above, whereby the time changes of morning, daytime, evening, and night are expressed. That is, the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 are background information for realizing the second parameter indicating the passage of time (the second parameter that makes the player who sees the display feel the passage of time). At the time of FIG. 155 (b), the sky C10 and the celestial body C13 represent morning.

In the drawings of the following display examples, the description of the symbols (including the lead lines) of the sky C10, the ground C11, the surrounding scenery C12, the celestial body C13, and the like may be omitted as appropriate.
Needless to say, the specific aspects of the effect information and background information of the sky C10, the ground C11, the surrounding scenery C12, the celestial body C13, and the like are not limited. For example, the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 are not limited to the coniferous forest, and may be, for example, an image of a rose garden, a building, or the like.
The dotted line with an arrow shown in the figure of the display example indicates the movement of the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12, and when it is moving, it is also described in the following figures. It is not displayed on the screen 41a (however, this may also be displayed as an effect).

In the SD mode effect (first example), first, the display shown in FIG. 155 (b) described above is performed for a short time, and then, as shown in FIG. Appears at positions adjacent to each other. In the example of FIG. 155 (c), a tiger lock C8 and a tiger wax C7 (a state in which there is a body in addition to a face) appear. Here, at the time of FIG. 155 (c), these characters are displayed so as to appear to be on the far side (far) on the road on the ground C11 by being displayed small near the vanishing point, Is displayed in such a manner as to appear to advance (walking or running, etc.) from the front (for example, the state of limbs). That is, a display (that is, a variable display) in which an image of a character such as the tiger crow C7 displayed near the vanishing point moves (scrolls) toward the near side is started. The movement of the character to the near side can be felt relatively more realistic by the display moving to the far side of the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 described above.
Note that the right and left characters may not appear at the same time, but may appear with a time difference, or may be displayed so that there is a difference between the front and rear positions. At the time of FIG. 155 (c), the state of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 (display position, display color, brightness, etc.) is a state representing day. In particular, the image of the sun as the celestial body C13 is displayed in a state of rising to a high position in the sky.

Next, after passing through the state of FIG. 155 (c), the tiger lock C8 and the tiger crow C7 are gradually displayed larger at the bottom of the screen, so that the display is further advanced toward the near side, and FIG. 156 (a) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 156B, the tiger lock C8 and the tiger crow C7 advance to the nearest side and stop for a moment, and then disappear as shown in FIG. 156 (b). In the case of the present example, the tiger lock C8 and the tiger taro C7 are not in a state where a plurality of characters (in this case, two characters (production information)) are in a predetermined combination (a state in which they are aligned). It is not an occurrence notification.
In addition, at the time of FIG. 156 (a), the state of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 is a state that still represents noon. However, the sun as the celestial body C13 is displayed at a position slightly lower than the position shown in FIG. 155 (c), and changes similarly thereafter.
Next, after the state shown in FIG. 156 (b), as shown in FIG. 156 (c), the next two characters (in this case, tiger salmon C6 and tiger salmon C7) are further on the far side (far away). It appears to look like

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 157 (a), the tiger salmon C6 and the tiger cane C7 appear to advance (walk or run, etc.) from the back side to the front side ( (For example, in the state of limbs), while gradually increasing in size at the bottom of the screen, the display is advanced toward the near side.
Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (b), the presence or absence of the reach is notified by the tiger lock C8 and the tiger wax C7 proceeding to the nearest side and stopping for a moment. In the case of the present example, the tiger salmon C6 and the tiger taro C7 are in a state where a plurality of characters (in this case, two characters (production information)) are in a predetermined combination (a state in which they are aligned). Become. In this case, "Reach!" Which is a line C15 of the tiger stalk C6 and "Daze ~!" Which is a line C16 of the tiger taro C7 are displayed, and the player is notified of the occurrence of the reach without fail. In addition, although illustration is omitted, in the case where no reach has occurred, an image of a line such as “reach” or “failure” may be displayed. In any case, the image of the dialogue may or may not be present, and a mode in which the presence or absence of the reach is notified only by the combination of the character types may be used.

  According to the effects shown in FIGS. 155 (b) to 157 (b) described above, a plurality of effect information that are not identification information are displayed in a region different from the variable display of the identification information, and the displayed effect information is displayed. In order to perform the notification effect of notifying by the combination, effect information having a low appearance rate as a stop symbol (for example, a character used for additional information of a pattern having a low appearance rate such as “Torata C7”) also appears in the notification effect. It is also possible to display effect information that is not the additional information of the decorative special map, thereby increasing the interest of the game, and also enabling easy-to-understand dynamic notification effects. In particular, as in the present embodiment (FIG. 156, etc.), a variable display area H1 for performing a variable display of identification information (a design of a decorative special figure) is arranged at a corner of the screen 41a, and the remaining area in the screen is In a mode in which the presentation information for the presentation effect is displayed in a region (main screen region) having a larger area than the variable display region H1, a more easily understandable and dynamic presentation effect is possible.

The number of types of characters (effect information) to be displayed in the main screen area as the notification effect is the number of symbols in the decorative special figure (the number of types of identification information; in this embodiment, 9 from 1 to 9). Type), may be more, or may be less. In other words, even in a mode in which all the additional information of the decorative special map (characters such as the above-mentioned “Torasuke C6”, “Tora Tarou C7”, “Tora Rock C8”... A mode in which a part of the additional information appears (for example, a mode in which the additional information is divided into groups, only a specific group among a plurality of groups is appropriately selected, and only characters of the selected group appear) ), Effect information that is not the additional information in addition to the additional information may appear, or only effect information that is not the additional information may appear.
In the effects shown in FIGS. 155 (b) to 157 (b), the effect information to be displayed in the main screen area is displayed in the variable display direction (vertical direction) of the decorative special figure in the variable display area H1 of the decorative special figure. ) Is displayed in a different direction (forward / backward direction) from the direction shown in FIG.

Here, as described above, the variable display in the front-rear direction from the back side to the front side of the character, in which a plurality of characters (production information) appear from the back side, move to the front side, and disappear, is not limited to two times. It may be performed three or more times. In addition, the switching of the type of the character (production information) may be performed while the character moves from the back side to the front side. For example, at or before and after the time of FIG. 157 (a), the left tiger salmon C6 is instantaneously changed to the tiger wax C7, and at the time of FIG. The configuration may be a predetermined combination.
Further, in this display example, as described later, until the state of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 is switched to a state representing night, the display of the character in the front-back direction is repeated, but the present invention is not limited to this pattern. For example, before the night (or before the day), the display of the character in the front-rear direction ends, and thereafter, the game proceeds to the reach, or the change display game of the special figure ends without the reach (off). There may be patterns.

  156 (b) and 156 (c), the state of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 (display position, display color, brightness, etc.) is a state representing evening. In particular, in FIG. 156 (b), the sun as the celestial body C13 is displayed in a state in which it has moved to a position lower than the point in time of FIG. 156 (a). It is displayed just before moving and sinking to the horizon. Then, at the time of FIG. 157 (a), the state of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 (display form, display position, display color, brightness, etc.) becomes a state representing night. In particular, an image of the moon is displayed in place of the sun as the celestial body C13, and thereafter, in FIGS. 157 (b) and 157 (c), the movement of the moon is sequentially displayed. In this manner, the second parameter indicating the lapse of time is realized by the image change of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10. In this example, in particular, in the present example, the second parameter (the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 (background information) is used to represent the second parameter). Is changed from evening to night, for example, after that, a new appearance from the back side of the character (switching of the type of the character (effect information) that is fluctuated and displayed) is not performed. If the characters being moved are not in a predetermined combination, no reach occurs. In other words, when the image of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 represents the night as the background information, it is possible to notify the player that it is the last chance of the reach occurrence, that is, the end of the reach occurrence effect period. It has become.

In this manner, the image change of the background information can suggest or notify the start of a certain production period or the start, progress, end, etc. of the game state.
It should be noted that such an image change of the background information can realize an announcement effect indicating the reliability (reliability of the occurrence of the reach, or the reliability of the big hit, the high reliability after the big hit, etc.). For example, when the big hit occurs, the probability that the second parameter proceeds to night is high, and when the character deviates, the probability that the display of the character in the front-back direction ends before the second parameter becomes night increases. If the contents of the table used for the production lottery (preliminary lottery) are set, the player can recognize that the background information image is a hot production at night and a big hit easily when viewed from the player.
Also, the announcement effect indicating the reliability can be realized by the presence or absence of other effect information appearing in the reach occurrence notification effect described above, an image change, and the like (other than the image change of the background information). For example, it is also possible to similarly suggest the reliability based on the type of combination of the characters that have notified the occurrence of the reach (for example, a combination of the tiger taro C7 is likely to be a big hit).

Next, the display example shown in FIG. 157 (c) is an example of the reach action started through the state of FIG. 157 (b), and the movable role 700 at the bottom of the screen (with respect to the display screen 41a of the display means). This is an example of a character-linked production that is linked to a movable character that can move. In this case, the movable role 700 swings to a position at an angle of 40 degrees, and a rope C17 (an interlocking image that changes in conjunction with the movement of the movable role) that pulls the movable role 700 is newly displayed on the screen 41a. The image is displayed, for example, the tiger salmon C6 disappears, and the tiger turtle C7 holds the end of the rope C17 and pulls the movable character object 700 upright (an interlocking movement that changes in conjunction with the movement of the movable character object). Image) is also displayed. At the same time, in the decorative special figure change display area H1, the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol, and only the middle symbol fluctuates (in this case, vertical scrolling), and the symbol (identification information) reach action is performed. Is This makes it possible to produce a reach action related to the accessory and the display, thereby increasing the interest of the game.
Note that the above-described role-linked production is an announcement production that suggests (advances) some degree of reliability (it may be a reliability that becomes a reach, a reliability that makes a big hit, or a reliability that becomes a high probability state (probability)). Can be done as
Further, in the present application, “linked with an accessory” means that the action is linked with the action of the accessory. “Notification linked with the accessory” or “effect linked with the accessory” refers to the action of the accessory and the displayed content (display) Not only may include a sound or the like output for the effect)), respectively, means a notice effect or an effect in general. Further, in the present application, “interlocking” means changing with some relationship, and does not necessarily mean synchronization. The “interlocking” includes a mode in which the related motion is not synchronized and, for example, is shifted by a predetermined amount in time, and a mode in which the motion moves in the opposite direction. Further, the mode of movement of the movable role is not limited to rotation or swinging, and may be, for example, linear or curved movement (parallel movement; so-called sliding operation), or movement combining rotation and parallel movement. May be.

  If the game is out of reach as a result of the reach, for example, an image (not shown) in which the tiger turtle C7 fails to raise the movable accessory 700 to the upright state is displayed, and the variable display game of the special figure ends. . On the other hand, when a big hit occurs as a result of the reach, an image (not shown) is displayed in which, for example, the tiger wax C7 successfully raises the movable accessory 700 to the upright state. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. For example, even in the case of a big hit, an image in which the tiger turtle C7 successfully raises the movable auditorium 700 to the upright state is not displayed, and the state shown in FIG. 158 (a) may be entered.

  Next, the display example shown in FIG. 158 (a) is an example of a blackout effect started through the state of FIG. 157 (c). This means that, as shown in FIG. 158 (a), a blackout image C20 is displayed in which at least the entire main screen area is painted black, for example. The sound effect starts to flow at a small volume and gradually increases. At this time, a display may be performed in which the entire screen 41a including the decorative special figure variable display area H1 is blacked out with the blackout image C20 except for the fourth symbol. Further, the color of the blackout image C20 is not limited to black, and may be, for example, dark blue or gray. According to this blackout production, it is possible to make it ambiguous whether a big hit or not, or even to say that it may be a failure of the gaming machine, it is unclear what happened In addition, it is possible to enhance the expectations and anxiety of the player for the big hit with a novel effect, and realize an unprecedented interest.

In addition, this blackout effect is performed only when a big hit occurs (or is performed with a high probability when a big hit occurs), and the player is informed that the big hit (or its reliability) is caused by this effect. Suggesting, it may be to increase the excitement and joy of the player who wins, but as a configuration that is performed with a predetermined probability even if it comes off, let the player have a slight anxiety that it may come off, As a result, the joy of a big hit may be increased.
In addition, in FIG. 158 (a), the movable role 700 is in an upright state. However, at the time of this blackout effect, the movable role 700 may be, for example, at an oblique angle of 40 degrees, or fall substantially horizontally. May return to the initial state.

  Next, the display example shown in FIG. 158 (b) is an example of the jackpot notification effect (the effect at the time of the stop display of the decorative special figure) started through the state of FIG. 157 (a). In this case, the movable accessory 700 is in a standing state, for example, and an image of the rose C21 (linked image for the accessory, a related image), which is the rendering information related to the decorative portion 701 of the movable accessory 700, is displayed on the screen 41a in a small size. Various displays are performed, and a performance is performed to congratulate and increase the joy of the jackpot. At this time, the rose (the real thing that is not an image) of the decoration part 701 of the movable auditorium 700 and the screen 41a on which the rose C21 that is the image is displayed are displayed so as to look like one painting as a whole. The effect has been enhanced. As the sound, for example, music that has been started to be reproduced in the state of FIG. 157 (a) is continuously output. However, at the time of FIG. When the state is reached, for example, an effect of changing to a bright and cheerful tone and celebrating the big hit is made. Also, at this time, in the decorative special figure change display area H1, for example, the decorative special figure is stopped and displayed with a big hit symbol in which "7, 7, 7" (additional information is all tiger taro C7). At this time, the variable display area H1 may be enlarged and displayed to easily display the stop symbol of the decorative special figure.

Next, FIGS. 159 to 161 are examples of a scenario table for realizing the effect display (including the reach start effect) shown in FIGS. 155 (b) to 158 (b). The detailed description of the motion table used in this display example is omitted.
The upper part of FIG. 159 is a scenario table used for the background of the scenario layer 0 (in this case, for the display control of the sky C10 described above).
Next, the middle part of FIG. 159 is a scenario table used for controlling the first stage (1st) of the left symbol KTL and the like (including the aforementioned ground C11, the peripheral scenery C12, the celestial body C13, etc.) in the scenario layer 1, and the lower part of FIG. 160 is a scenario table used for controlling the first half (2nd) of the left symbol KTL and the like in scenario layer 1, and FIG. 160 is a scenario table used for controlling the second half (3rd) of the left symbol KTL and the like in scenario layer 1. It is.

Next, the first (uppermost row) from the top in FIG. 161 is a scenario table used for controlling the first stage (1st) of the right symbol KTR in the scenario layer 2, and the second from the top in FIG. 161 is a scenario table used for controlling the first half (2nd) of the right symbol KTR, and the third from the top in FIG. 161 is a scenario table used for controlling the second half (3rd) of the right symbol KTR in the scenario layer 2. It is.
The fourth from the top in FIG. 161 is a scenario table used for controlling the first stage (1st) of the middle symbol KTC in the scenario layer 3, and the fifth from the top in FIG. 161 is the middle symbol KTC in the scenario layer 3. 161 is the scenario table used for the control of the first half (2nd) of the middle symbol KTC in FIG. 161 and the second half (3rd) of the middle symbol KTC in the scenario layer 3.
The numerical values such as the wait time value and the motion index in the tables shown in FIGS. 159 to 161 are only specific examples for explanation, and are not necessarily the same as actual numerical values. The same applies to tables and the like in other figures.

Hereinafter, each row of the scenario table (scenario layer 0; background) in the upper part of FIG. 159 will be described.
In the first line (// 0), data of “motion 0 registration code” and “motion index No. (81)” are set. Thereby, the motion index No. The display (81) of the motion table (not shown) (display of the sky C10 at the beginning and the first half of the moving image or the still image) is started.
Next, in the second line (// 1), data of “constant wait code” and “wait time value (270)” are set. Thus, the control progress of the scenario table is stopped for a time (9 seconds) corresponding to 270 frames. This is for displaying the early and first half of the sky C10 (display of the sky C10 from morning in FIG. 155 (b) to night in FIG. 157 (a)).

Next, in the third line (// 2), data of “motion 0 registration code” and “motion index No. (82)” are set. Thereby, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (82) (display of the second half of the sky C10 by a moving image or a still image) is started.
Next, in the fourth line (// 3), a “constant wait code” and a “wait time value (375)” are set. As a result, the control of the scenario table stops for a time (12.5 seconds) corresponding to 375 frames. This is for displaying the latter half of the sky C10 (display of the sky C10 from the night of FIG. 157 (b) to the state of FIG. 158 (b)). Although the sky C10 is hidden behind the blackout image C20 at the time of FIG. 158 (a), it may be displayed as the background of the rose C21 at the time of FIG. 158 (b). Good.
Next, in the fifth line (// 4), data of “end code” and “NULL” are set. Thus, the control in the scenario layer 0 is not performed, and the display of the sky C10 disappears.

Next, each row of the scenario table (scenario layer 1; left symbol early stage) in the middle section of FIG. 159 will be described.
In the first line (// 0), data of “motion 4 registration code” and “motion index No. (83)” are set. Thereby, the motion index No. The display (display of the image (moving image or still image) representing the variable display area H1) by the motion table (not shown) of (83) is started.
Next, in the second line (// 1), data of “motion 3 registration code” and “motion index No. (84)” are set. Thereby, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (84) (the display of the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 at the beginning and the first half of the moving image or the still image) is started. In this motion table, the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 are controlled as different objects, for example.

Next, in the third line (// 2), data of “motion 2 registration code” and “motion index No. (85)” are set. Thereby, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (85) (display of a moving image or a still image of the first half and the first half of the celestial object C13) is started.
Next, in the fourth line (// 3), data of “motion 5 registration code” and “motion index No. (30)” are set. Thereby, the motion index No. The display (30) of a motion table (not shown) (variable display of an early moving image or a still image of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) is started.

Next, in the fifth line (// 4), a “constant wait code” and a “wait time value (30)” are set. As a result, the control progress of the scenario table stops for a time (1 second) corresponding to 30 frames. This is because an early stage effect such as each display started under the control of the scenario table up to this point is performed only for the time.
Next, in the sixth line (// 5), data of the “variation scenario switching code” and the “left symbol scenario 2nd” are set. As a result, the scenario is switched from the early variation to, for example, the first half variation based on the scenario table in the lower part of FIG. 159.
Each image whose display has been started under the control of the scenario table up to this point is arranged on the motion layer (display layer) corresponding to the motion number, and the context (display priority) is determined (the image with the higher motion number). This is described earlier with reference to FIG. 144 (the same applies to the scenario table described below). For example, since the variable display area H1 is displayed in motion 4 by the first row of the scenario table in the middle row of FIG. 159, the sky C10 displayed in motion 0 by the first and third rows of the scenario table in the upper row of FIG. 159, the ground line C11, the peripheral scenery C12, and the celestial object C13 displayed by the motion 3 and the motion 2 are displayed preferentially on the second and third lines of the scenario table in the middle section of FIG. Not hidden by.

Next, each row of the scenario table (scenario layer 1; first half of the left symbol) in the lower part of FIG. 159 will be described.
In the first line (// 0), data of “motion 5 registration code” and “motion index No. (31)” are set. As a result, the motion index No. Instead of the display using the motion table (not shown) of (30), the motion index No. The display (31) of a motion table (not shown) (variable display of the first half moving image or still image of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) is started.
Next, in the second line (// 1), data of “motion 8 registration code” and “motion index No. (86)” are set. Thereby, the motion index No. The display (86) of a motion table (not shown) (variable display of a character on the left side in the main screen area by a moving image or a still image) is started.
Next, in the third line (// 2), data of “motion 9 registration code” and “motion index No. (87)” are set. Thereby, the motion index No. The display of (87) by the motion table (not shown) (variable display of the right character in the main screen area by a moving image or a still image) is started.
That is, according to the second and third rows, the display in the front-back direction in two columns on the left and right sides of the main screen area of the character such as Tiger C7 described with reference to FIGS. 155 (c) and 156 is started. You.

Next, in the fourth line (// 3), a “constant wait code” and a “wait time value (240)” are set. As a result, the control progress of the scenario table stops for a time (8 seconds) corresponding to 240 frames. This is because the first half of the effect including the variable display of the left symbol in the variable display area H1 and the variable display of the character in the front-rear direction in the main screen area is performed for the time.
Next, in the fifth line (// 4), data of “variable scenario switching code” and “left symbol scenario 3rd” are set. As a result, when there is reach, the scenario is switched from the first half change to the second half change (reach action) based on, for example, the scenario table in FIG. 160.

Next, each row of the scenario table (scenario layer 1; second half of the left symbol) in FIG. 160 will be described.
In the first line (// 0), data of “motion 8 registration code” and “motion index No. (88)” are set. As a result, the motion index No. (86), the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (88) (stop display by the moving image or the still image of the left character in the main screen area) is started.
Next, in the second line (// 1), data of “motion 9 registration code” and “motion index No. (89)” are set. As a result, the motion index No. (87), the motion index No. is replaced with the motion table. The display of (89) by the motion table (not shown) (stop display of the right character in the main screen area by a moving image or a still image) is started.

Next, in the third line (// 2), data of “motion 3 registration code” and “motion index No. (90)” are set. As a result, the motion index No. In place of the display using the motion table of (84), the motion index No. The display (90) of the motion table (not shown) (display of the latter half of the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 as a moving image or a still image) is started.
Next, in the fourth line (// 3), data of “motion 2 registration code” and “motion index No. (91)” are set. As a result, the motion index No. (85), the motion index No. is used instead of the motion table. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (91) (display of the latter half moving image or still image of the celestial body C13) is started.
Next, in the fifth line (// 4), a “constant wait code” and a “wait time value (30)” are set. As a result, the control progress of the scenario table stops for a time (1 second) corresponding to 30 frames.
Here, according to the first to fifth lines, the display for notifying the occurrence of reach described with reference to FIG. 157 (b) is performed for a specified time (1 second). At this time, the images of the dialogue C15 and the dialogue C16 are, for example, the motion index No. (88) and motion index No. In the motion table of (89), for example, the character is controlled and displayed as a separate object from the character such as Tiger C7.

Next, in the sixth line (// 5), “stop symbol set code (left symbol)” and “NULL” are set. As a result, the above-described symbol stop processing is executed for the left symbol, and the stop symbol of the left symbol of the decorative special figure is set.
Next, on the seventh line (// 6), data of “motion 5 registration code” and “motion index No. (32)” are set. As a result, the motion index No. In place of the display using the motion table (not shown) of (31), the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (32) (stop display by the moving image or the still image of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) is started.
Next, “Motion 8 delete code” and “NULL” are set in the eighth line (// 7). As a result, the above-described motion deletion processing is performed, and the display of the motion 8 is not performed, and the display of the left character (for example, “Tiger C6”) in the main screen area disappears.
Next, “Motion 9 deletion code” and “NULL” are set in the ninth line (// 8). As a result, the above-described motion deletion processing is performed, and the display of the motion 9 is not performed, and the display of the right character (for example, “Tiger C7”) in the main screen area disappears.

Next, in the tenth line (// 9), a “local object position code” and a “local object position number (4)” are set. The “positional item position code” is an operation code for instructing a setting change of the state of the movable part 700 (ie, the initial state or the standing state, etc.) (ie, the movement (state change) of the decorative part 701 of the movable part 700). For example, the “position position No. (9)” commands the standing state of the movable part 700, and the “position position No. (4)” orders the state where the movable part 700 is at an oblique angle of 40 degrees. Data. As a result, in the process corresponding to the “positional item position code” in the above-described scenario analysis process (the process omitted in dashed lines in FIG. 105), the decorative portion 701 and the like of the movable portion 700 are inclined as shown in FIG. 157 (c). A control process for setting the angle to 40 degrees is executed.
Note that other data of the operand corresponding to the “position of character” code includes “position of character No. (0)” for instructing the initial state of the movable character 700, and the decoration unit 701 is in the initial state. Commanding a state in which the decorative part 701 is displaced toward the upright state by an angle of 20 degrees from the initial state. "Position position No. (2)" to command the state in which the decorative portion 701 is displaced toward the standing state by an angle of 30 degrees from the initial state, and so on. Various types may be set to command the state of each angle between the initial state and the standing state.

Next, the “constant wait code” and the “wait time value (15)” are set in the eleventh line (// 10). As a result, the control of the scenario table stops for a time (0.5 seconds) corresponding to 15 frames. This is to wait for movable movable object 700 to be inclined 45 degrees from the initial state.
Next, in the twelfth line (// 11), data of “motion 8 registration code” and “motion index No. (92)” are set. Thereby, the motion index No. The display (92) of the motion table (not shown) (display of the linked image in the main screen area as a moving image or a still image) is started. The linked image is, for example, an image of the rope C17 described above or a tiger rod C7 pulling the rope C17.
Next, on line 13 (// 12), a “constant wait code” and a “wait time value (45)” are set. As a result, the control of the scenario table stops for a time (1.5 seconds) corresponding to 45 frames.
In the scenario table, a code between the wait time value and the wait time value (an operation code in a line between a line in which a constant wait code or the like is set and a line in which a constant wait code or the like is set next) Are all executed at the same time. For example, in the case of FIG. 160, the first line (// 0) to the fourth line (// 3) and the sixth line (// 5) to the tenth line (// 9) include constant weight codes and the like. Are not set, the first row (// 0) to the fourth row (// 3) and the sixth row (// 5) to the tenth row (// 9) are all the same period. Is executed.

According to the sixth to thirteenth lines described above, the effect of the reach action shown in FIG. 157 (c) described above (the effect in which the effect display of the movable character 700 and the main screen area are linked, and the left in the variable display area H1) The effect of the reach action in which the symbol and the right symbol stop and the middle symbol fluctuates) is performed for a total of 2 seconds.
Then, in the case where the player character comes off due to the reach, for example, a control for returning the movable accessory 700 to the initial state is performed after that, for example, by displaying a stop symbol or the like (not shown). Is an example of a table selected when a big hit occurs, and thereafter, control for the big hit is performed.

In other words, in the next 14th line (// 13), the "accessory position code" and the "accessory position number (9)" are set. As a result, in the process corresponding to the “positional item position code” in the scenario analysis process described above (the process omitted in dashed lines in FIG. 105), the decorative portion 701 and the like of the movable portion 700 are raised as shown in FIG. 158 (a). The control process for setting the state is performed.
Next, on line 15 (// 14), a “constant wait code” and a “wait time value (45)” are set. As a result, the control of the scenario table stops for a time (1.5 seconds) corresponding to 45 frames.
According to the fourteenth to fifteenth lines described above, the operation in which the movable role 700 is brought into the standing state through the effect of the reach action shown in FIG. Alternatively, an image (not shown) is displayed in which the movable character 700 is pulled by the rope C17 by the character (other character replaced by the behavior). The image in which the character pulls up the movable accessory 700 with the rope C17 is the motion index No. registered in the twelfth line. It is controlled by the motion table of (92).

Next, “Motion 8 delete code” and “NULL” are set in the 16th line (// 15). As a result, the above-described motion deletion processing is performed, and the display of the motion 8 is not performed, and the display of the character such as the rope C17 and the tiger crawler C7 pulling the rope C17 in the main screen area disappears.
Next, “Motion 3 delete code” and “NULL” are set in the 17th line (// 16). As a result, the above-described motion deletion processing is performed, and the display of the motion 3 is not performed, and the display of the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 disappears.
Next, in the 18th line (// 17), data of “motion 2 registration code” and “motion index No. (93)” are set. Thus, the motion index No. In place of the display using the motion table of (91), the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (93) (display of the blackout image C20 by a moving image or a still image) is started. By the new registration of the motion 2 on the 18th line, the display of the celestial object C13 (month) in the same motion 2 (that is, the display by the motion table of the motion index No. (91)) disappears.

Next, in the 19th line (// 18), data of “speech setting code” and “sound No. (15)” are set. As a result, in the process corresponding to the “voice setting code” in the above-described scenario analysis process (the process omitted in dashed lines in FIG. 105), the process for outputting the voice specified by the operand data is performed. Sound No. The operand data (15) is data for designating music or sound effects in the above-described blackout effect.
Next, in line 20 (// 19), a “constant wait code” and a “wait time value (150)” are set. As a result, the control progress of the scenario table stops for a time (5 seconds) corresponding to 150 frames.
According to lines 16 to 20 described above, the above-described blackout effect shown in FIG. 158 (a) is performed.

Next, in the 21st line (// 20), data of “motion 3 registration code” and “motion index No. (94)” are set. Thereby, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (94) (display of the rose C21 in the main screen area as a moving image or a still image) is started.
Next, on line 22 (// 21), a “constant wait code” and a “wait time value (90)” are set. As a result, the control progress of the scenario table stops for a time (3 seconds) corresponding to 90 frames.

According to lines 21 to 22 described above, the big hit notification effect shown in FIG. 158 (b) is performed for three seconds.
Note that a line in which “Motion 2 deletion code” is set is inserted immediately before the 21st line, and the motion index No. performed in Motion 2 is inserted. The display by the motion table (93) (display of the blackout image C20) may be erased. However, the display of the rose C21 in the motion 3 started on the 21st line (display by the motion table of the motion index No. (94)) is performed for all the images (in the main screen area shown in FIG. If a plurality of roses and their backgrounds are displayed, the blackout image C20 is hidden by the display in the motion 3 and cannot be seen, so that there is no need to delete the blackout image C20. In addition, in the case of this table example, the sound output set in the 19th line is also continued during the big hit notification effect, and this sound output enhances the effect of congratulating the big hit.

Next, since the “end code” is set in the last 24th line (// 23), the control in the scenario layer 1 is not performed.
The effect control based on the scenario table for the target scenario layer is terminated by the “end code” on the 24th line (// 23), and thereafter, when a new scenario table is set, the effect on the scenario layer is changed. It goes without saying that the production control is performed again.

Next, the first scenario table (scenario layer 2; right symbol early stage) from the top in FIG. 161 will be briefly described.
In the first row, registration for the early variation display of the right symbol KTR in the variation display area H1 is performed. In the second row, a wait time value for that is set, and in the third row, scenario switching is performed. .
This is the same control as the control of the left symbol (control for the early variation display of the left symbol KTL in the variation display area H1) based on the scenario table shown in the middle part of FIG. 159 is performed for the right symbol.

Next, the second scenario table from the top in FIG. 161 (scenario layer 2; first half of the right symbol) will be briefly described.
In the first line, the registration for the first half of the right symbol KTR in the variable display area H1 is registered for the variable display, the wait time value for the second line is set, and the scenario switching is performed in the third line. .
This is the same control as the control of the left symbol (control for the variable display of the first half of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) by the scenario table shown in the lower part of FIG. 159 is performed for the right symbol.

Next, the third scenario table (scenario layer 2; second half of the right symbol) from the top in FIG. 161 will be briefly described.
The first line sets the wait time value for the character stop display (shown in FIG. 157 (b)) in the main screen area, the second line sets the stop symbol of the right symbol KTR, and the third line Then, the stop display of the right symbol KTR in the variable display area H1 is started, the wait time value for the stop display is set in the fourth line, and the control of the scenario layer 2 is ended in the fifth line.
This is the same control as the control of the left symbol (the control for displaying the second half of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) by the scenario table shown in FIG. 160 is performed for the right symbol.
According to the first to third scenario tables from the top in FIG. 161 described above, the right of the decorative special figure in the variable display area H1 in the series of effects from FIG. 155 (b) to FIG. 158 (b) described above. The display of the symbol is realized.

Next, the fourth scenario table (scenario layer 3; middle symbol early stage) from the top in FIG. 161 will be briefly described.
In the first line, registration for the early variation display of the middle symbol KTC in the variation display area H1 is registered, the second line sets a wait time value for that, and the third line performs scenario switching. .
This is the same control as the control of the left symbol by the scenario table shown in the middle section of FIG. 159 (control for the early variation display of the left symbol KTL in the variation display area H1) is performed for the middle symbol.

Next, the fifth scenario table (scenario layer 3; middle symbol first half) from the top in FIG. 161 will be briefly described.
In the first line, the registration for the first half of the variation of the middle symbol KTC in the variation display area H1 is registered, the wait time value is set in the second line, and the scenario switching is performed in the third line. .
This is the same control as the control of the left symbol (the control for the variable display of the first half of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) by the scenario table shown in the lower part of FIG.

Next, the sixth scenario table from the top in FIG. 161 (scenario layer 3; middle symbol second half) will be briefly described.
On the first line, a wait time value for character stop display (shown in FIG. 157 (b)) in the main screen area is set, and on the second line, the fluctuation in the latter half of the middle symbol KTC in the fluctuation display area H1 Registration for display (variation display of the middle symbol KTC in the variation display area H1 at the time of the reach action shown in FIG. 157 (c) to FIG. 158 (a)) is performed, and in FIG. The wait time value for the reach action shown in FIG. 158 (a) is set, the stop symbol of the middle symbol KTC is set on the fourth line, and the stop symbol of the middle symbol KTC is displayed on the fifth line in the variable display area H1. , The wait time value for the stop display is set on the sixth line, and the control of the scenario layer 3 is ended on the seventh line.
This is a control corresponding to the control of the left symbol (control for displaying the second half of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) by the scenario table shown in FIG. 160 for the middle symbol. However, since the middle symbol is displayed in a variable manner (scrolling at a low speed) even during the reach action, the second symbol and the third symbol are provided, which is different from the left symbol and the right symbol.
According to the fourth to sixth scenario tables from the top in FIG. 161 described above, in the decorative special figure in the variable display area H1 in the above-described series of effects from FIG. 155 (b) to FIG. 158 (b). The display of the symbol is realized.

  Next, FIGS. 162 and 163 are modifications of the above-described series of effects (examples of effects in the SD mode) from FIG. 155 (b) to FIG. 158 (b). In this modified example, a character such as the tiger taro C7 appearing in the main screen area appears in the main screen area and is not displayed as additional information of the decorative special figure in the variable display area H1. When the character such as the tiger crow C7 disappears from the main screen area, the display as the additional information in the variable display area H1 is restarted at the same time. For example, as shown in FIG. 162 (a) and FIG. 162 (b), when the tiger trowel C7 and the tiger lock C8 are displayed in the main screen area, the display of the tiger trowel C7 and the tiger lock C8 in the variable display area H1 is performed. Is controlled to disappear, and thereafter, when the tiger lock C8 disappears from the main screen area as shown in FIG. 162 (c), the display of the tiger lock C8 in the variable display area H1 is controlled to resume. Further, as shown in FIGS. 162 (c), 163 (a), and 163 (b), when the tiger taro C7 and the tiger salmon C6 are displayed in the main screen area, the tiger in the variable display area H1 is displayed. The display of the tiger fin C6 and the tiger fin C6 is controlled so as not to be performed. Thereafter, when the tiger fin C6 disappears from the main screen area as shown in FIG. 163 (c), the display of the tiger fin C6 in the variable display area H1 is restarted. Is controlled.

162 (a), FIG. 162 (b), and FIG. 162 (c) show the progress of the series of effects, respectively, as shown in FIG. 155 (c), FIG. 156 (a), and FIG. 156 (c). It is a display example at the same timing. Similarly, FIGS. 163 (a), 163 (b), and 163 (c) are display examples at the same timings as in FIGS. 157 (a), 157 (b) and 157 (c), respectively. is there.
According to this modification, as shown by a dotted line with an arrow in FIGS. 162 (a) and 162 (c), when a character such as a tiger C7 appears in the main screen area (display starts), the player receives When viewed, the character appears to jump out of the variable display area H1. Also, when the character such as the tiger tiger C7 disappears from the main screen area (the display ends or is hidden by another image), from the viewpoint of the player, the character appears to return to the variable display area H1. Thereby, a dynamic and novel effect is realized.

It should be noted that the dotted line with an arrow indicating that the tiger wax C7 or the like jumps out of the variable display area H1 in FIGS. 162 (a) and 162 (c) is for explanation, and may not actually be displayed. However, a configuration may be adopted in which an image that expresses such a character entering and exiting from the variable display area H1 to the main screen area in an easily understandable manner is displayed.
In addition, the above-described modification can be controlled by a scenario table or a motion table as in the above-described specific examples, but specific examples of these tables will not be described.

  Next, FIG. 164 is another modified example of the above-described series of effects (examples of effects in the SD mode) from FIG. 155 (b) to FIG. 158 (b). This modified example is characterized by a mode of displaying a character in the main screen area in the front-rear direction and a mode of combining a character that reports occurrence of reach. That is, in the above display example, as shown in FIGS. 155 (c) and 156 (a), the characters arranged in a plurality of rows (in this case, two rows on the left and right) simultaneously move toward the near side. It is not limited to. In this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 164 (a), only the character on the left is stopped and displayed on the near side, and only the character on the right is switched one after another, appears on the back side, and moves forward. This is a mode in which the character is displayed in a variable manner by, for example, running. Note that the character variation display in the main screen area may change to such a mode in the middle so that the variation display of the decorative special figure shifts to the reach action (second half variation) from the middle.

In this modification, as shown in, for example, FIGS. 164 (b) and 164 (c), when there is a reach, a target character to be a predetermined combination someday (in this case, for example, for the tiger lock C8, As in the case of the tiger lock C8, the same character) appears on the right side, moves toward the front side, and stops, thereby informing a reach occurrence. As described above, the combination of the characters with the reach (that is, the notification of the occurrence of the reach) is in the mode (the double eyes) in which the characters of the same kind are arranged in the same manner as the combination of the symbols of the decorative special figure which becomes the big hit. There may be.
In any case, according to the effect example and the present modified example, at the same time as the variable display of the decorative special figure performed in the vertical direction (vertical direction) in the variable display area H1, the variable display direction of the decorative special figure is simultaneously performed. Since a variable display (a variable display game that determines the presence or absence of a reach from the viewpoint of a player) of a character in a direction that does not exist in the past (front-back direction) is performed in the main screen area, a dynamic and novel effect is realized.

Next, FIG. 165 is another modified example of the series of effects described above from FIG. 155 (b) to FIG. 158 (b) (effect examples in the SD mode).
First, FIG. 165 (a) and FIG. 165 (b) show another example of the reach occurrence notification effect shown in FIG. 157 (b), in which the poses of the two left and right characters stopped and displayed on the near side are shown. (Postures of limbs, etc.) are not the same but different. In this way, the configuration that suggests (preliminarily) a reliability such as a big hit after a reach action (or a reliability that becomes a high probability state (probable change)) based on the presence or absence of the difference in the pose of the aligned characters and the content of the difference, for example. It may be. Note that FIG. 165 (a) shows a case where the predetermined combination serving as the reach notification is a different character, and FIG. 165 (b) shows a case where the predetermined combination serving as the reach notification is the same character.

Next, FIG. 165 (c) is an example of a special effect (effect-linked effect with an upper movable character) performed in the front-back direction fluctuation display of the character performed in the main screen area described above. In this special effect, as shown in FIG. 165 (c), for example, a character on the left side (for example, tiger rock C8) that has proceeded to the near side has a predetermined item (for example, rose; light emitting effect information). (Light-emission-linked image) is displayed, and at the same time as the light-emission-linked image is displayed, the left half of the upper movable auditory component 801 emits light (for example, flashes rapidly). Although illustration is omitted, for example, when an image (light-linked image) as a display mode having a predetermined item (light-emitting effect information) is displayed on the right character that has moved forward, the character is displayed simultaneously with this display. The effect may be such that the right half of the movable role 801 emits light. Alternatively, although not shown, for example, when an image (light-linked image) is displayed as a display mode in which both the left and right characters proceeding to the front have predetermined items (light-emitting effect information). At the same time, the effect may be such that the entire upper movable role 801 emits light. Such special effects may be appropriately performed. Also, this special effect may be performed as a notice effect that indicates (preliminary notice) that indicates some degree of reliability (it may be a degree of reliability, a degree of big hit, or a degree of high probability (probability)). it can.
Note that the specific example of FIG. 165 (c) is a display mode in which effect information (for example, a character such as tiger lock C8) different from identification information (a design of a decorative special figure) has a predetermined item. This is an example in which the mode (light emission state) of the accessory changes in conjunction with the display of this display mode, but is not limited to such a specific example. For example, when a display mode such as a display color, a display size, a display position, and a pose (a posture of a limb or the like) of the character itself such as the tiger lock C8 becomes a specific display mode, the display is linked to the display of the specific display mode. A configuration in which the aspect of the accessory (light emission state or the like) changes may be used. In addition, the change of the mode of the accessory that changes in conjunction with the display mode of the effect information is not limited to the change of the light emitting state of the accessory, but may be as in the specific example illustrated in FIG. 163 (c) described above. Alternatively, the operating state and operating position of the accessory may be changed.

Next, FIG. 166 shows an effect of reducing the image of a predetermined area displaying an image including a decorative special figure (identification information) on the display unit 41a (display area) of the display device 41 (including a mode in which the image is distorted). This is an example. 167 and subsequent figures show various display examples on the display unit 41a of the display device 41, but the same descriptions and reference numerals in the drawings once shown may be omitted in subsequent drawings.
First, FIG. 166 (a) is a display example of a state before an effect for reducing (referred to as a reduced effect or a reduced display effect) is performed. In this case, a large symbol (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a decorative large symbol) of a decorative special figure (KTL, KTC, KTR) of a large symbol (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a large decorative pattern) is largely fluctuated and displayed. The decorative large design means a normal decorative special figure, and is a name for distinguishing from a decorative small design described later.

In FIG. 166 (a) and the like, a half line indicates an example of the outer edge of a region (viewable region) of the display unit 41a that is not hidden by the accessory (the center case 24, the movable accessory 801, 802, 803, etc.). And such a half line is not displayed. As described above, the viewable area of the display section 41a which can be visually recognized by the player is often limited, and the shape and size of the viewable area vary depending on the model. Changes during the game.
In the example shown in FIG. 166 (a) and the like, a large decorative symbol (KTL, KTC, KTR) is displayed large near the vertical center of the viewable area, and the decorative small symbol is positioned at the vertical center of the left end of the visible area. Is displayed, the number of reservations is displayed at the upper left position of the viewable area, and the number of changes is displayed at the center of the upper edge of the viewable area in the left-right direction (for example, a countdown during working hours (normal power support state)). Is held, a hold display is performed near the center of the lower edge of the viewable area in the left-right direction, a right-handed instruction display is performed at the upper right position of the viewable area, and a “tiger” is displayed at a position overlapping a part of the decorative large design. Search for Taro! "Is displayed. Note that the display positions of such objects are merely examples, and various arrangements are possible. In the display example of FIG. 166 (a) and the like, a downward arrow “↓” indicates a state in which a large decorative design or a small decorative design is scrolled downward in a variable display. The aspect such as the direction of the scroll is not limited to this. For example, the decorative large design may be scrolled downward while the decorative small design may be changed and displayed by switching on the spot, or the decorative large design may be scrolled left and right.

  Here, the hold display means the above-mentioned special figure hold display (start figure display of the special figure). In this case, a circular image without filling (white paint) is a hold display of the special figure 1 and is filled. (Black-filled) circular image is the reserved display of the special figure 2, and the filled circular image surrounded by the square line is the reserved display (variable Medium pending display). In the example of FIG. 166 (a), the reserved number of the special figure 1 is two, and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is one, so the reserved display not surrounded by the square line (that is, the variable display) As a display of the start memory in which the game is not executed), two circular images without filling are displayed, and one circular image with filling is displayed. In this case, the display of the suspension during the change (a circular image surrounded by a square line) is displayed on the leftmost side, and the images of the suspension displays are arranged from the left side in the execution order of the fluctuation display game. Then, the processing of the hold shift of the special map described above is performed by the game control device 100, and the effect control device 300 receives a command (for example, a command of the number of hold) from the game control device 100 indicating this, thereby causing the effect control device By the control of 300, the above-mentioned reserved display on the display unit 41a is also shifted (that is, in this case, the display is switched so that the image of each reserved display moves to the left by one image). Due to this shift, for example, as shown in FIG. 168 (a) described later, the image suspended during the change (in this case, the image surrounded by the square line) is the image displayed immediately before (the variable display) When the game has not been executed, the execution order of the variable display game is switched to the next hold display image), and the player is notified that the special display variable display game corresponding to the next start memory has been started. Become.

The display mode and arrangement of the hold display are not limited to this example, and it goes without saying that various arrangements are possible. In the display examples shown in FIG. 166 (a) and subsequent figures, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the special winning combinations of the special figure 1 and the special special figure 2 occur alternately, for example, and the special figure change display game for each starting memory is executed in the order of the starting winning, for example. The display example is based on the premise that the display is performed, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration or state.
For example, in the case of the above-described board configuration of the present embodiment, during a time reduction (a normal power support state), the player normally hits the game ball right to aim at the normal fluctuation prize winning device 26. Normally, only the start memory of FIG. 2 is generated by the start winning in the winning device 26. However, even in the case of the above-described board configuration according to the present embodiment, if, for example, a novice player makes a left-handed hit during the time reduction, the above-described function of the starter port distributing apparatus 600 causes the special functions shown in FIGS. Starting winnings occur alternately. Also, in the case of the specific example of the special figure ordinary processing described with reference to FIG. 28, the start memory of the special figure 2 is executed with higher priority than the start memory of the special figure 1 (the start winning order is earlier than that of the special figure 1). Even if there is a start memory of the special figure 2, if the start memory of the special figure 2 is present, the change display game of the start memory of the special figure 2 (the start winning order is the earliest in the start memory of the special figure 2) is executed first. ), And such an embodiment may be employed.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 172 (c) to be described later, the reserved display area (the area for performing the reserved display) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be divided. Further, when the prefetch effect described in step D185 or the like is performed, the hold display of the start memory of the target of the prefetch effect may be performed in a special mode (a special color or shape, an animation, or the like).

Next, the reserved number display shows the number of the reserved number of the special figure 1 (for example, “2” in the case of FIG. 166 (a)) on the left part, and the number of the reserved number of the special figure 2 (for example, In the case of FIG. 166 (a), "1") is displayed.
Next, the decorative small design is a design that is always visible even if the decorative large design becomes difficult to see or disappear in the image for the effect, and that the special figure is changing to the player. This is for sure notification. In this case, the decoration small design is a small display of the design corresponding to the left design, the middle design, and the right design of the decoration large design in three columns. For example, at the top, the symbol corresponding to the left symbol of the large decoration is displayed small, then at the bottom, the symbol corresponding to the middle symbol of the large symbol is displayed small, and at the bottom, the symbol corresponding to the right symbol of the large decoration is displayed. The symbol to be displayed is displayed small. In addition, the decorative small symbol is controlled to start the variable display simultaneously with the decorative large symbol, and the variable display ends when the stop of the large decorative symbol is determined (when the combination of the symbols is determined and the variable display game ends). (That is, the decorative small symbols are displayed in a stopped state). Then, only when the large ornamental design is not temporarily stopped but fixed and stopped, the variable display of the small ornamental design is stopped, and the same design as the large ornamental design is also displayed as the small ornamental design (for example, FIG. 167 described later). As shown in (a), if the large decorative symbol is "9, 3, 4", the small decorative symbol also stops at "9, 3, 4". In addition, this decoration small design is different from the fourth design. The fourth design is not shown in FIG. 166 and the like.

Next, the number-of-variations display displays a number (in FIG. 166 (a), as an example, “87”) indicating the number of times the special figure changes until the time-saving state (generic power support state) ends. Each time the variable display game is executed (for example, when the special figure variable display game ends), the number is switched to a value smaller by one.
Next, the right-handed instruction display is for displaying a character or the like that prompts the player to right-handed, such as “right-handed! →” as shown in the figure. As described in step S355 and the like, in the case of the present embodiment, for example, in the time-saving state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than a left-handed game. If there is a prize in the mouth 607) (that is, if the player is left-turned during the time saving state), a right-turn instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 to notify (warning) of instructing a right-turn. Is performed by the effect control device 300, and the display for that is the right-handed instruction display. Note that the right-handed instruction display may always be displayed in a state where right-handed operation is required (for example, during working hours).

Next, FIG. 166 (b) is a display example of a state (during reduction) after the effect of reducing is started. In this case, all the images (including the background image) displayed in the predetermined reduction target area indicated by the one-dot chain line in FIG. FIG. 166 (b) shows an example of a state in which a display effect is performed in which the display effect is reduced (so that one display panel is reduced).
It should be noted that the dashed line is shown for explanation, and does not need to be actually displayed. The area to be reduced is not limited to the area shown by the one-dot chain line in FIG. It is preferable that the region is wider than the region indicated by the half line). This is because if the wide area including the viewable area is the reduction target area, the effect to be reduced becomes a more dynamic effect.
Here, “reduction” refers to reducing the size of the image displayed on the display unit 41a of the display device 41 on the display unit 41a. However, the target image in the reduction target region is similar without being distorted. The size may be reduced in size, or the size may be reduced while the target image in the reduction target area is distorted. In other words, “reduction” may involve image distortion (change in shape or aspect ratio).

  What is characteristic here is that the reduction ratio differs depending on the object. In the example shown in FIG. 166 (b) and FIG. 166 (c) to be described later, the character information such as the display of the number of times of change and the dialogue display among the objects to be reduced are represented by other objects (for example, a large decorative pattern or a background image). , Etc.), the reduction ratio (reduction ratio) is smaller and displayed so as not to be excessively small. That is, the character information such as the display of the number of times of change and the notice of words are reduced at a smaller rate than objects such as large decorative designs. For this reason, it is possible to achieve an interesting display effect of reducing the number of fluctuations display and dialogue display together with the large decorative design, and maintain the information such as the number of fluctuations display and dialogue display in a state in which the player can read the information. . In other words, there is an effect that a desired size can be held for each object while reducing the size of the plurality of objects to realize an interesting display effect.

In addition, such a display effect includes, for example, immediately before the effect start, another new background image is arranged and displayed on the back side of the background image at the time of the start of the effect, and then includes a fancy display area of a decorative large design. For all images (excluding images not targeted for reduction) displayed in a predetermined area (for example, an area indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 166 (a)), the display size is changed for each frame period at the same time. This can be realized by performing control to sequentially switch in a direction of decreasing the size (however, the reduction ratio varies depending on the object). A specific example of the flowchart of the control process will be described later.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 166 (b) and FIG. 166 (c) described later, a frame-shaped image (a quadrangular frame-shaped image in the illustrated example) indicating the outer edge of the entire image to be reduced is displayed. You may. Note that there is sufficient difference in brightness, pattern, and color between the image to be reduced and a new background image that appears around the image. Even if such a frame-shaped image is not displayed, the outer edge of the entire image to be reduced is not displayed. In such a case, such a frame image is not meaningful to be displayed to the player (the frame image need not always be displayed).
In the case of the example shown in FIG. 166 (a), the area to be reduced (the area surrounded by the dashed line; the area to be reduced) is a large area including a portion outside the visible area indicated by the half line. Although it is a region, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this mode, and a region smaller than the visible region may be reduced. However, a more dynamic display effect can be realized by reducing a large region including a portion outside the visible region (in an extreme case, the entire display unit 41a may be reduced).

Next, FIG. 166 (c) is a display example of a state in which the effect to be reduced further proceeds (a state in which the effect is further reduced). In this case, the variable display of the special figure is continuously executed in the reduced area. In addition, the display angle of the reduced image is changed from that before the reduction, and the entire image is displayed so as to be more inclined than before the reduction. In FIG. 166 (c), the reduced image is tilted only in the direction of rotation along the display surface of the display unit 41a, but is displayed so as to be tilted in the front-back direction (for example, toward the back side). You can also. That is, the image may be reduced and displayed so that the image appears to be tilted three-dimensionally (three-dimensionally).
In the example shown in FIG. 166 (c), the decorative portion 701 of the movable accessory 700 operates in the direction of rising toward the standing state, and is linked around the reduced image (in front of the new background image). As a result, a plurality of images of the rose C21 (an image linked to an accessory and a related image) are displayed on the screen (display unit 41a) in various sizes, and a new development effect has been started. In this case, as shown in the figure, for example, an effect in which an image of the face of “Tiger Taro” as the character C7 is displayed so as to be hidden by an image of any rose C21 is, for example, a notice effect (for example, a jackpot possible). Performance that suggests high performance). With such an effect, the player already has expectations for a special effect in which the area including the large ornamental pattern is reduced, and further enhances the sense of expectation by an advanced effect performed around the reduced image. For example, if the image of “Taro Tarou” as the character C7 is displayed at any part in the above-described reduced display effect, for example, the possibility of a big hit or the like increases as a result. By performing such control, a hot announcement effect indicating that the possibility of a jackpot is high is possible, and the sense of expectation of the player can be increased.

Here, the images that are not targeted for reduction include information that may affect the game, specifically, the above-described hold display, the number of holds, the decorative small design, the right-handed instruction display, and the like (even if the fourth design is included). Good) is included. By excluding these images (objects) from the reduction target, the function of informing these images (the function of informing the player of the number of holds and the like) can be sufficiently maintained even during the reduction effect.
According to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform an entertaining effect that enhances the player's expectation more dynamically as described above, and also sets an object that is not to be reduced as described above, The following effects can also be obtained by making the reduction ratio different for.

  In other words, when performing an effect of reducing the image, if all are deformed at the same magnification, the important information will not be visible to the player, which will adversely affect the game or make the player tired and uncomfortable There is a risk of rolling. However, in this example, information that is likely to affect the game is not reduced as a reduction target, and the reduction ratio is reduced for character information that is difficult to see even if the reduction target object is excessively reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing or overlooking information, thereby preventing the game from being adversely affected, and suppressing the player from feeling tired or uncomfortable.

  It should be noted that there may be various modes as to how the reduced production performed as in the examples shown in FIGS. 166 (b) and 166 (c) thereafter proceeds and ends. For example, a display effect may be performed in which the reduced image is further reduced and finally becomes smaller and disappears so as to be invisible, or the reduced image moves out of the viewable area and disappears and ends. Alternatively, after the reduced image is reduced to some extent, a display in which the variable display of the special figure is stopped by a big hit or a miss is performed in a state where the enlargement is started and the size is returned to a certain size, and the process ends. There may be embodiments.

Next, FIG. 167 is a modified example of the effect of reducing the size described in FIG. 166 (particularly, a modified example corresponding to FIG. 166 (c)).
First, FIG. 167 (a) is an example in which the display angle is different between reduced images. In this case, the reduced background image, the serif display, and the frame-shaped image are inclined (the display angle is changed) with respect to the state before the reduction, whereas the decorative large design and the change number display are not inclined. , Display angles are different. In this way, the display angle during or after reduction may be different for each object, thereby increasing the interest. The image to be reduced may be displayed in a state in which the image is moved so as to be three-dimensionally inclined in the front-back direction, and the display angle may be different for each object including the change in the display angle in the front-back direction.
In addition, FIG. 167 (a) shows a state in which the special-figure variable display game ends with a loss and the determined special-figure symbol combination “9, 3, 4” is displayed for convenience of explanation. Immediately after this state, the number of times of change display is switched to a value smaller by one, a hold shift is performed, the number of holds is reduced, and the next change display game of Tokuzu 1 is started.

  Next, FIG. 167 (b) shows the contrast between the image of the area to be reduced and an image such as a new background positioned around the image of the area to be reduced in the reduced display effect described in FIG. An example in which a difference (for example, a difference in brightness and a difference in color) is provided is shown. By providing the contrast in this manner, the reduced image becomes easy to see, the display effect becomes more impressive, and the interest is increased.

  Next, FIG. 167 (c) shows an image to be reduced in a translucent manner at the time of the reduced display effect described with reference to FIG. 166, and a new background image or another effect image on the back side of the image to be reduced. An example is shown in which a display can be seen through. In this case, for example, the image of the rose C21 for a notice effect and the image of the face of the character C7 “Tiger Tarou” displayed so as to be hidden behind the image of the ornamental large pattern or the like to be reduced are transparent. The display is made to be visible. Such an effect can enhance interest.

Next, FIG. 168 is a display example of an effect in which an image is enlarged (referred to as an enlarged effect or an enlarged display effect), contrary to the effect of reducing the size described in FIG. 166. First, FIG. 168 (a) shows a state before enlargement (for example, a state in which an effect in which a large decorative pattern temporarily comes off and temporarily stops in one special figure changing display game is performed). This is a state where the same display as that in FIG. 166 (a) is performed except that the symbol is temporarily stopped and the number of holdings and the number of changes are reduced by one. Here, the temporary stop is an operation in which the symbol swings without scrolling, for example.
Next, in FIG. 168 (b), all the images (including the background image) displayed in, for example, the viewable area of the display unit 41a except for the image not to be enlarged are determined from the state of FIG. 168 (a). An example of an enlarged display effect in which the display is enlarged over time (as one display panel becomes larger) is shown.

  What is characteristic here is that the magnification ratio differs depending on the object. In the example shown in FIG. 168 (b), among the objects to be enlarged, the character information such as the number-of-variations display and the dialogue display has a smaller enlargement ratio than other objects (such as a large decorative design) and is smaller than other objects. Are displayed without being greatly enlarged. That is, the character information such as the display of the number of times of change and the notice of dialogue are expanded at a smaller rate than objects such as large decorative designs. For this reason, it is possible to realize an interesting display effect in which the display of the number of times of change and the display of words and the like are enlarged together with the large decorative pattern, and maintain a state in which the player can read the information while displaying the number of times of change and the words of the line while expanding the information. There is an effect that can be done.

Further, the images that are not to be enlarged include information that may affect the game, specifically, the above-described hold display, the number of holds, the decorative small design, the right-handed instruction display, and the like (a fourth design may be included. ) Is included. By excluding these images (objects) from the enlargement targets, the function of informing these images (the function of informing the player of the number of holds, etc.) can be sufficiently maintained even during the enlarging effect, and these images can be maintained. It is possible to prevent the display from being complicated and difficult to see.
According to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform an entertaining effect that further enhances the player's expectation as described above in a dynamic manner, and also sets an object not to be enlarged as described above, The following effects can also be obtained by making the enlargement ratio different for.

  In other words, when performing an effect of enlarging an image, if all are deformed at the same magnification, the important information will not be visible to the player, which will adversely affect the game or make the player tired and uncomfortable There is a risk of rolling. However, in this example, information that is likely to affect the game is not expanded and is not expanded, and the enlargement ratio is changed for character information that is difficult to see even if the object to be expanded is excessively expanded. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from erroneously recognizing or overlooking information, thereby preventing the game from being adversely affected, and suppressing a player from feeling tired or uncomfortable.

Moreover, in the enlarged effect of this example, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), the number “1”, which is the decorative large design KTC (middle design of the special figure) to be enlarged, is changed in the enlarged image. Subsequent variable display (variable display after temporary stop) of decorative large symbols KTL, KTC, KTR (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol of special figure) in the display game is performed. For this reason, even if the large ornamental design is extremely enlarged (to the extent that it protrudes from the viewable area of the display unit 41a), the subsequent fluctuation display of the large ornamental design can be easily seen by the player, and in the enlarged design. Since this is performed, there is an effect that the possibility that the player misses the subsequent fluctuation display is small.
In addition, the above-mentioned effect of performing the variable display of the symbol in the image of the symbol to be enlarged (inside) is performed in the same variable display game as described above (that is, in the pattern to be enlarged as described above). The present invention is not limited to a mode in which a subsequent symbol is fluctuated. For example, when the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed simultaneously, the decorative large pattern of the special figure 1 is enlarged, and the decorative large pattern of the special figure 2 is displayed inside the enlarged image of the special figure 1 of the special figure 1. Or a mode in which the decorative large design of the special figure 2 is enlarged and the variable display of the decorative large pattern of the special figure 1 is displayed inside the enlarged image of the decorative large pattern of the special figure 2. Good. In addition, when displaying a general symbol on the display unit 41a (display area) of the display device 41, a mode in which the symbol of the general symbol is fluctuated and displayed in the image of the symbol of the special figure to be enlarged, and A mode may be used in which a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the symbol image.

Next, in FIG. 168 (c), for example, the image of the rose C21 for the effect and the image of the face of the character C7 “Tiger Tarou” displayed so as to be hidden are enlarged in the same period. A display example is shown in which a display effect is performed, and a decorative large symbol is fluctuated in these effect images that are further enlarged. With such an effect, it is possible to enhance interest.
Although not shown, in the above-described enlarged display effect, similarly to the above-described reduced display effect, the display angle during or after the enlargement of the image to be enlarged may be different for each object. Can be increased. Also, in the above-described enlarged display effect, it is possible to display an image to be enlarged in a translucent manner, and to display a new background image or another effect image on the far side of the enlarged image. . Thereby, a novel and dynamic effect can be achieved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, FIG. 169 is an example of a flowchart for the reduction effect described above, for example.
The above-described reduction effect and enlargement effect can also be performed by setting a dedicated scenario table or motion table for that purpose (the display angle of each object can be changed using, for example, the above-described rotation code). However, for example, data of a display information area set by a scenario table or a motion table that does not directly perform a reduction effect or the like (particularly, an X coordinate of an upper left point of a display that determines a display position of an image, a size of an image display, and the like) The direction in which the Y coordinate of the upper left point of the display, the X coordinate of the upper right point of the display, the Y coordinate of the upper right point of the display, the X coordinate of the lower left point of the display, and the Y coordinate of the lower left point of the display are reduced, for example, every frame period (or the display angle is smaller). 169. FIG. 169 shows a reduced production control process which is an example of the control process of the production control device 300 in that case.
This reduction effect control process is added between step D30 and step D31 in the main process of the effect control device 300 shown in FIG. 88, for example, and the effect of step D31 is performed every frame period (for example, 1/30 seconds). This processing is executed immediately before the display editing processing.

When the reduced effect control process is started, as shown in FIG. 169, it is first determined whether or not a reduced effect is being executed (step E201). If it is not being executed, the process proceeds to step E202. Here, it is determined that the program is being executed if a reduced effect execution flag described later is set, and it is determined that the process is not being executed if the reduced effect execution flag is cleared.
In step E202, it is determined whether or not the start of the reduced effect is set in, for example, the variable effect setting process (FIGS. 99 and 100). If the start of the reduced effect is not set, the process returns. If this process is ended and the start of the reduction effect is set, the process returns after executing steps E203 to E206 (that is, ends this process).

Then, in step E203, a reduction effect execution flag is set, in step E204, for example, the value of the scheduled time of the reduction effect set in the variable effect setting process is set, and in step E205, a setting process for displaying a new background image (For example, a process of preparing a scenario table for displaying a new background image and executing the above-described scenario data setting process) is performed. In step E206, the current background image (the background image targeted for the reduced effect) is stored in a predetermined area. A setting process for changing to the size of the (reduction target area described above) is performed.
Note that, for example, after step E206 (before returning), a step of performing a setting process for displaying the frame-shaped image that displays the outer edge of the entire image to be reduced may be provided.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step E201 that the reduced effect is being executed and the process proceeds to step E208, the value of the reduced effect time is increased by one frame period (step E208), and then the value of the reduced effect time is set in step E204. It is determined whether or not the scheduled time has been reached (step E209), and if not, the process proceeds to step E210 in order to advance the reduced effect.
In step E210, the loop processing of steps E210 to E213 is repeatedly executed for all display information areas of all motion management areas (that is, for all objects), and the process returns.
In the above loop processing, it is determined whether or not the object is a reduction target (step E211). If the object is not to be reduced, nothing is performed and the loop processing is performed for the next object (next display information area). If there is, step E212 is executed.

In step E212, a setting process is performed to change the data in the display information area that determines the display size, display position, and display angle for each object by the reduced production time at that point in time for the reduced production. “Change by the reduced production time” means that the data of the image (data in the display information area) is changed so that the image is reduced, for example, by the amount corresponding to the elapse of the reduced production time. For example, when the image is simply reduced at a constant speed with the lapse of the reduction effect time and is reduced to half the size before the reduction at the scheduled time (for example, 4 seconds), for example, the reduction effect When the time is half the scheduled time (for example, 2 seconds), it is necessary to change the middle of the reduction so that the size becomes, for example, 1/4 of the size before the reduction. It means to change by the amount you did.
When the loop processing is completed for all display information areas (at least for all displayed objects), the process returns via step E213.

In step E212, the data of each display information area is changed so that the reduction ratio differs for each object as described above.
In step E211, the object such as the hold display is determined not to be reduced as described above. However, the new background image set to be displayed in step E205 is also determined not to be reduced.
If it is determined in step E209 that the reduced production time has reached the scheduled time and the time is up, the reduced production execution flag is cleared to end the reduced production (step E214), and then the process returns (step E214). This processing ends).

  According to the above-described reduced effect control processing, the data of the display information area of each object set in the processing up to step D30 in the main processing (FIG. 88) is changed by a necessary ratio for each frame period as needed. By doing so, a reduced effect as in the display example described above is realized. A display effect of enlarging an image is also possible by the same process as the above-described reduced effect control process. For example, the data in the display information area may be changed so that the image is enlarged in step E212.

Next, FIG. 170 is a display example of a hold display (start storage display) by animation.
First, FIG. 170 (a) shows that the number of reservations is, for example, two (one for special figure 1 and one for special figure 2). Hold display is performed by an animation display (character display) in which the character moves in the same position (moving display, so-called movie). This is a display example. The animation of the walking motion in this case is, for example, an image of a person walking on a running machine, and repeatedly executes a motion of walking without moving (without changing the display position of the center of the person). Things. This animation display may be realized by expanding and playing back what has been registered as moving image data, or registering a walking motion of a person (or character) as a plurality of still image data, A still image to be displayed may be switched and displayed as needed for each frame (for each frame) from the registered still image data, and may be controlled so as to be viewed as a moving image by a player.

  In the display examples shown in FIG. 170 and subsequent figures, a person (or character) whose head is not filled (white) indicates a hold (startup memory) of the special figure 1 and a person (or character). ) Indicates that the head part is filled (black), which indicates the reservation (starting memory) of Toku-zu 2 and that the image of the person (or character) surrounded by the square line is currently fluctuating. It is a hold display (display of fluctuating hold) for displaying the start-up memory in progress. However, the configuration for distinguishing and displaying the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the configuration for displaying the suspension during the change are not limited to such an embodiment. For example, as shown in FIG. 172 (c) to be described later, the reserved display area (the area for performing the reserved display) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be divided. In the display examples shown in FIG. 170 and subsequent figures, as an example of the animation, a walking motion or a running motion of a person (or a character) is illustrated, but there may be various other modes. For example, there can be various actions such as a motion in which the character dances and a motion in which the hands of the clock spin. In addition, the suspension during the change may be different from the normal suspension display (display of the start memory in which the fluctuation display game is not executed).

  What is characteristic in this display example is that, in order to synchronize the animations of all the hold displays (in this case, also including the holding while changing), the image data of the preceding hold display (still images for each frame (frame)) are synchronized. The point is that the latest suspended display is performed by copying the image data or the image data of each frame (frame) obtained by expanding the moving image data. More specifically, for example, the image data of the earliest hold display among the holds being displayed for the animation to be synchronized is copied for each frame (frame by frame), and each hold number is set as a subsequent hold display including the latest hold. The point is that the setting process for displaying the data at the position corresponding to is executed, for example, during a hold shift. Here, “copy” means that the same image data is used for each frame (for each frame) as that of the preceding reserved display, and the image data itself used for the preceding reserved display is necessarily copied and used. The present invention is not limited to this embodiment. The preceding hold display, which is the copy source, disappears when the corresponding variable display game is executed. For example, the original image data is required every time the above setting process is performed (for example, during a hold shift). By newly setting according to the above, the copy source image data (the image data that is the source of the suspended display of the synchronized animation) can always be secured.

Due to this feature, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 170A (state in which all animations of the hold display are synchronized), for example, there is a new start winning (special drawing 2), and a new hold display corresponding to the new start win (Latest hold display) is started, and even if the animation of the latest hold display is newly started from the beginning as shown in FIG. When the above-described setting process is performed at the time of the hold shift, the hold display of all animations is synchronized as shown in FIG. 170 (c).
As a result, except for the period until a new start winning prize is generated and there is a next hold shift, all the hold displays of the animation are synchronized, and an effect of a hold display with an interesting and interesting animation for the player is realized. it can. In other words, when the animation is executed as the hold display, if the animation of one hold display and the animation of the other hold display are not synchronized, there is a problem that the player may feel uncomfortable, but this can be solved. In addition, since the setting process is performed at the time of the hold shift, the hold display of the latest hold is executed from the beginning as shown in FIG. 170 (b) at the start of the hold display of the latest hold corresponding to a new start winning. As a result, a state that is not synchronized with the hold display of the preceding hold may temporarily occur, but this also has the effect of improving the interest as a kind of effect.

  Note that the display example shown in FIG. 170 is a specific example in the case where the above-described setting processing is performed at the time of the hold shift, as shown in the timing chart of FIG. 173 (a). In FIG. 173 (a), what is described as the first hold (preceding hold) is one or a plurality of holds that have already been displayed as animations (the hold may be a changing hold or a hold that is not a changing hold). The second hold (latest hold) means that a newly generated start winning is held. In this case, although it may be temporarily asynchronous immediately after a new start winning is generated, at the time of the hold shift, the setting process of copying the image data of the animation display of the preceding hold and displaying the latest hold animation is executed. Therefore, after the hold shift, the latest hold is also synchronized.

However, the timing for performing the setting process is not limited to the hold shift. For example, as shown in the timing chart of FIG. 173 (b), a mode in which the above-described setting process is performed when a start winning is generated (ie, at a timing when a new hold display is started) may be adopted. In this mode, as in the display examples shown in FIGS. 171 (a) and 171 (b), for example, the latest hold display corresponding to a new start winning prize is also synchronized from the beginning, which is more interesting. An effect can be realized by displaying an animation on hold.
Here, FIG. 171 (a) shows the same state as FIG. 170 (a) described above, and FIG. 171 (b) shows the hold display for the newly-launched start prize (special figure 2) from that state. This shows a state where the animation is started and executed with an animation synchronized with the preceding hold display.

Further, the data to be copied in the setting processing may be only an image having a motion related to the animation to be synchronized. For example, in the case of the hold display shown in FIG. 170, the image data of the head part of the person (or the character) and the other part (body and limbs) are controlled separately, and the moving body and limbs are controlled. Only the image data of the part may be copied and synchronized, and the image of the head part having no motion may be controlled so that the image data is selected and displayed at a predetermined position without copying, without copying. .
In addition, in order to make the display mode such as the display color and size or the type of the character different even between the synchronous display and the hold display, the image data copied in the above setting process is not displayed as it is, but the data is processed. Alternatively, a part of the data may be replaced (for example, replacement by the behavior described above) or may be partially overlapped with other image data and displayed.

  For example, FIG. 171 (c) is a modified example of the display example of FIG. 171 (b). In the display example of FIG. 171 (c), replacement or superimposition of image data is executed so that the head of the walking character can be visually recognized as the image of “Taro Taro” for the latest hold display. (For example, a special hold display as a pre-reading notice effect), an animation display in which “Taro Taro” walks is performed. Also in this case, the same image data is used for at least the torso and limb images of “Taro Tarou” for the preceding suspended display and each animation frame (each animation frame) (that is, the “copy” described above). ), It is possible to synchronize the motion of the animation (in this case, the walking motion) with the other pending display that is not “Taro”. Although the case where the characters are different is illustrated, even when the display mode of the display color, size, and the like (or the presence or absence of a fill, the difference of the pattern, the presence or absence of the pattern, etc.) is different, the display is also synchronized with the preceding hold display. Can be done.

  171 (c), unlike FIG. 171 (b), shows a state in which the special figure symbol is stopped (at the time when one special figure change display game is completed). This is only done for convenience to illustrate and explain the state somewhere. Similarly to FIG. 171 (b), even in the state where the special figure is variably displayed, the same hold display as in FIG. 171 (c) (a mode in which a part of the hold display is a special character different from the others) can be performed. Needless to say. By the way, FIG. 171 (c) shows the moment when the variable display game of the special figure 1 which has been executed ends, and immediately after this, the hold shift is performed and the number of reservations of the special figure 2 is reduced by one. The variable display game of the next special figure 2 is started.

Next, FIG. 172 (a) and FIG. 172 (b) are display examples in a case where a suspended display by synchronized animation and a suspended display not synchronized are mixed.
First, FIG. 172 (a) illustrates the same state as in FIG. 170 (a) (the state in which there are two suspensions and the suspension display of the animation synchronized with the walking motion is performed).
FIG. 172 (b) shows a case where a start winning is newly generated in the state of FIG. 172 (a) and the hold display corresponding to the new start win is a non-animation hold display (non-animation hold display). In this example, the above-described copy is not performed, and only the latest hold display corresponding to a new winning start is displayed in a different manner using image data different from the preceding hold display. As described above, it is also possible to mix the suspended display with the synchronized animation and the suspended display which is not synchronized.
In the figure, the non-animated hold display is shown, but even if the latest hold display is an animation display, if the hold display is of a type that does not synchronize with the preceding hold display, the above-mentioned copy will not be performed. No display is performed, and display is performed using image data different from the preceding hold display.

Next, FIG. 172 (c) is a display example in which the display area of the hold display is distinguished between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.
In the case of FIG. 172 (c), the special figure 1 has two reserves and the special figure 2 has two reserves, and the variable display game of the special figure 1 is being executed. At the center of the lower edge portion of the viewable area of the display unit 41a, the display of the suspension during the change (in this case, the display of the suspension during the change of the special figure 1) is executed. The suspension display is performed, and the suspension display of the special figure 2 is performed in an area on the right side of the fluctuation suspension. As the hold display of Toku-zu 1 in the left area, an animation display in which a white-headed person walks in a posture to the right is displayed in two lines in synchronization with the number of holds. Have been In addition, as the reserved display of the special figure 2 in the right area, an animation display in which a person with a black head walks in a posture heading to the left, in this case, two images are synchronized side by side according to the reserved number. Has been done. In this example, the animation is not synchronized between the reserved display of the special figure 1 in the left area and the reserved display of the special figure 2 in the right area.

In this manner, the display areas of the toku-zu 1 and the toku-zu 2 are distinguished from each other, and the same animation operation can be displayed in synchronism with each of the toku-zu 1 and toku 2. 172 (c) is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 172 (c). For example, the hold display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 having different display areas are different from the hold display of the special figure 2 It is also possible to display such that the animation operation is synchronized with the suspended display.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 172 (c), when the display areas of the reserved display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are divided, when the variable display game is completed and the reserved shift occurs in the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, The reserved display of the special figure 1 displayed on the left side is controlled so that the display position is sequentially changed to the right toward the center, and the reserved display of the special figure 2 displayed on the right side is directed toward the center. Control is performed so that the display position is sequentially changed to the left side. Specifically, in the case of the example of FIG. 172 (c), if the running variable display game of the special figure 1 is ended, and then the variable display game of the special figure 2 is performed, the hold shift of the special figure 2 is performed. Is generated, a display is displayed in which the hold display of the special figure 2 displayed at the second position from the center in the right area moves to the first position (position near the center), The position of the hold display of the special figure 2 displayed at the first position is changed so that the hold display appears to move to the central change hold, and the position changes during the execution of the next change display game of the special figure 2. Will be displayed as pending.

Next, FIG. 174 is a holding effect setting process which is an example of a flowchart for realizing the holding display effect shown in FIG. 170 and the like and FIG. 173 (a) described above.
This hold effect setting process is performed, for example, in both the step D214 (special figure 1 hold information setting process) and the step D218 (special figure 2 hold information setting process) in the single command processing of the effect control device 300 shown in FIG. This is a process that is executed each time a hold number command is received from the game control device 100.

When the hold effect setting process is started, as shown in FIG. 174, first, it is determined whether the special figure is changing (that is, whether the variable display game of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is being executed). If it is not being executed (step E221), it is determined whether the number of holdings indicated by the received latest holding number command has increased from the previous time (step E222).
If the number of suspensions has not increased (step E222; NO), the process returns because there are no suspensions and there is no fluctuating suspension (this processing ends). On the other hand, when the number of holds increases (step E222; YES), a new hold display due to a new start winning prize has to be executed. It is determined whether or not it has been set in the setting process (step D405) or the pre-reading symbol command process (step D184) (step E223). Here, the pending animation effect means an effect of a suspended display by animation shown in FIG. 170 and the like.

If the holding animation effect is not set as a new holding display (step E223; NO), a setting process is performed to display the non-animated changing holding image at the changing holding position. (Step E224), and then return. "Non-anime" means not an animation.
On the other hand, if it is set to perform the hold animation effect as a new hold display (step E223; YES), the changing hold image of the set animation (animation) is displayed at the change hold position. A setting process is performed (step E225), and the process returns.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in step E221 is that the special figure is changing (step E221; YES), it is determined whether the number of holdings indicated by the received latest holding number command has increased from the previous time (step E227).
When the number of holds increases (step E227; YES), a new hold display due to a new start winning prize has to be executed. It is determined whether it has been set in the setting process (step D405) or the pre-reading symbol command process (step D184) (step E228).

If it is not set to perform the hold animation effect as a new hold display (step E228; NO), a setting process is performed to display the non-anime hold images at positions corresponding to the number of holds (step E228). Step E229), and then return. By the processing in step E229, the non-animation holding display as shown in FIG. 172 (b) is performed.
On the other hand, if it is set to perform a hold animation effect as a new hold display (step E228; YES), a setting is made to display the hold image of the set animation (animation) at a position corresponding to the number of holds. The process is performed (step E230), and the process returns. Note that the processing in step E230 is not limited to displaying the same animation image as that of the preceding hold display. For example, as shown in FIG. The display setting may be performed.

If the result of determination in step E227 is that the number of holds has not increased (step E227; NO), it is determined whether the number of holds indicated by the received latest hold number command has decreased from the previous time (step E232).
If the number of reservations has not decreased (step E232; NO), there is no change in the number of reservations, and the process returns without doing anything.
On the other hand, if the number of holds is reduced (step E232; YES), since a hold shift has occurred, the image of the current holding hold is deleted, and the display positions of the remaining hold display images are changed. A setting process is performed to shift to the next position toward the middle hold position (step E233), and it is determined whether the number of holds indicated by the received latest hold number command is 0 (step E234).

If the number of reservations is 0 (step E234; YES), it means that only the suspension has been made during the change, and the process returns without doing anything.
On the other hand, if the number of holds is not 0 (step E234; NO), it is necessary to perform hold display in addition to the changing hold, so the process returns after executing step E235.
In step E235, for example, the image of the earliest hold display is copied from the hold display in which the display of the animation to be synchronized is being executed (in this example, the display of the change hold is also included), and the subsequent hold display including the latest hold display is performed. A setting process is performed to cause the display to be displayed at a position corresponding to each number of holds as a hold display. That is, for example, when the special figure change is completed from the state shown in FIG. 170 (b) and the total number of holds is reduced from three to two (at the time of the hold shift), for example, the first hold The process of step E235 is a process in which the remaining two suspended displays are set using the same image data for each frame (in each frame) as the display (in this case, the display during suspension). . By the processing in step E235, all the hold displays are synchronized as shown in FIG. 170 (c), for example.

As described as Note 1) in FIG. 174, in the above steps E224, E225, E229, E230, and E235, whether the hold display to be set for display corresponds to Tokusatsu 1 or Tokusatsu 2 To be performed. That is, if the hold display to be set corresponds to, for example, Toku-zu 1, the image is distinguished and set so that an image having the features of Toku-zu 1 (for example, the above-described white image) is displayed.
Further, as described in Note 2) in FIG. 174, the frame image surrounding the suspension during the change is not erased in the step E233.
Also, as described as Note 3) in FIG. 174, although not shown, when the number of reservations is 0 and the special figure change is completed (for example, when the determination result of step E222 is negative) ), A setting is made to delete the image that is suspended during the change (the image in the frame-shaped image).

Next, FIG. 175 is a holding effect setting process which is an example of a flowchart for realizing the holding display effect shown in FIG. 171 and FIG. 173 (b) described above.
The flowchart of the hold effect setting process shown in FIG. 175 is different from the flowchart shown in FIG. 174 in that step E230A is provided instead of step E230 in FIG. 174 described above. That is, in the flowchart of FIG. 175, if the number of reservations is increased during the change of the special figure and it is determined in step E228 that the reserved animation effect is set, step E230A is executed and the process returns.

In step E230A, as the latest hold display determined that the hold animation effect has been set, of the preceding hold displays during execution of the display of the animation to be synchronized (including the change hold display in this example) For example, a setting process is performed in which the image of the earliest hold display is copied and displayed at a position corresponding to the number of holds of the latest hold display. That is, for example, when there is a new start winning from the state shown in FIG. 171 (a) described above and the total number of holdings increases from two to three (ie, when there is a starting winning and a new hold display is started). In addition, the latest hold display to be newly executed is also performed using the same image data of each frame (frame) as the first hold display (in this case, the change-in-hold display) performing the animation display. The process set as described above is the process of step E230A. By the processing in step E230A, the latest hold display is also synchronized from the beginning as shown in FIG. 171 (b), for example.
In the example after FIG. 170 described above, the mode of synchronizing the animation of the pending change is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the copy (frame by frame (frame) The same image data may be used each time), the animation may be synchronized, and the display of suspension during fluctuation may be controlled separately.

Next, FIG. 176 is a display example of a hold display (start storage display) by animation synchronized using a timer.
First, FIG. 176 (a) shows that the number of reservations is, for example, two (one for special figure 1 and one for special figure 2). Hold display is performed by animation display (display with movement) walking along the inner circumference in the circle, and in the display example where the animation of all the hold displays (in this case, including the pending during change) is synchronized is there. This animation display may be realized by expanding and playing back what has been registered as moving image data, or by registering the motion of a person (or character) walking in a circle as a plurality of still image data. Alternatively, a still image to be displayed may be switched and displayed as needed for each frame (for each frame) from the registered still image data, and control may be implemented so that the moving image is viewed by the player.

  In the display examples shown in FIG. 176 and subsequent figures, a person (or a character) having no head portion (white paint) indicates a hold (startup memory) of the special figure 1 and a person (or character). The character (character) whose head is painted (black) indicates the hold (startup memory) of Toku-zu 2 and the image of the person (or character) surrounded by the square line is the current It is a hold | maintenance display which displays the start memory | storage during a change (display of the hold | maintenance during change). However, the configuration for distinguishing and displaying the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the configuration for displaying the suspension during the change are not limited to such an embodiment.

What is characteristic in this display example is that in order to synchronize the animations of all the pending displays (in this case, also including the pending during a change), the animation of all the pending displays is performed by one and the same timer, the pending animation timer. Is controlling the progress of the game.
More specifically, for example, when the animation of the suspended display is a cycle of 12 frames (that is, the animation is broken down from frame 1 to frame 12 and, for example, frame 12 is the first frame), for example, FIG. ), The frames of the animations of the suspended display to be sequentially displayed are determined in a manner periodically associated with the value of the sequentially increasing one pending animation timer. Of the pending display animation is controlled.

  For example, in the case of the hold display A (low speed) shown in FIG. 179 (b), when the value of the hold animation timer is 0, the frame 12 is displayed, and when the timer value is 4, the frame 1 is displayed. When the value is 8, the frame 2 is displayed,... (Omitted)... When the timer value is 48, the frame 12 is returned to the beginning and the frame 12 is displayed. The frame is determined so as to advance by one, and according to this relationship, the frame to be displayed is switched based on the increase of the timer value, and the animation of the hold display progresses. By the way, in the case of the hold display A (low speed) shown in FIG. 179 (b), assuming that the timer value of the hold animation timer increases uniformly as long as the timer operation continues, the timer value is divided by 48. When the remainder is calculated and the remainder is divided by four, the integer value (the value obtained by rounding down the decimal point) obtained as a result of this calculation represents the frame number (however, the result of the calculation If the given integer value is 0, the frame number is frame 12.)

  In the case of the hold display B (high speed) shown in FIG. 179 (b), when the value of the hold animation timer is 0, frame 12 is displayed, and when the timer value is 2, frame 1 is displayed. When the value is 4, the frame 2 is displayed,... (Omitted)... When the timer value is 24, the frame 12 is returned to the beginning and the frame 12 is displayed. The frame is determined so as to advance by one, and according to this relationship, the frame to be displayed is switched based on the increase of the timer value, and the animation of the hold display progresses. Incidentally, in the case of the hold display B (high speed) shown in FIG. 179 (b), assuming that the timer value of the hold animation timer increases uniformly as long as the timer operation continues, the timer value is divided by 24. When the remainder is calculated and the remainder is further divided by 2, the integer value (the value obtained by rounding down the decimal point) obtained as a result of this calculation represents the frame number (however, the result of the calculation If the given integer value is 0, the frame number is frame 12.) For example, a program or a data table is described using such a mathematical relationship, and the progress of the animation of all the pending displays is controlled by one and the same pending animation timer according to the above relationship.

  In the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), the increase of the frame number is slower than the increase of the timer value of the pending animation timer (basically, the frame number is obtained by dividing the timer value by a predetermined number). However, in order to increase the speed of the animation, the frame number increases faster than the timer value of the pending animation timer (basically, by multiplying the timer value by a predetermined number). (A relationship in which a frame number is obtained). For example, the control may be performed in such a manner that a frame number can be obtained by obtaining a remainder obtained by dividing a calculation result obtained by multiplying the timer value of the pending animation timer by two or three times by 12 of the number of frames. Alternatively, an increase in the timer value of the pending animation timer and an increase in the frame number may be the same (for example, a relationship in which the remainder obtained by dividing the timer value by 12 is the frame number as it is).

In any case, due to the above-described characteristics, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 176 (a) (the animations of the hold display are all synchronized), there is a new start winning prize (special figure 2), which corresponds to the new starting prize. 176, a new hold display (latest hold display) is started, and the animation of the latest hold display is also synchronized with other hold displays from the beginning as shown in FIG. 176 (b). This is because the new hold display is also controlled based on the above-described hold animation timer from the time when a new hold display is started. If the display (for example, the hold display A) is the moment when the frame 10 is displayed, the new hold display (for example, the hold display A) is also started from the frame 10 based on the timer value 40. is there. Incidentally, if a new hold display is controlled by, for example, another timer without performing such control, the new hold display starts displaying from the first frame 12, the next frame is frame 1, and then the next frame. 2, the display progresses, but in this case, there is a time lag with other pending displays and synchronization is not achieved.
However, according to the configuration of the present example, with a simple configuration using one timer, all the suspended displays of the animation are synchronized from the beginning, and an effect of a suspended display with an interesting and interesting animation for the player can be realized. . In other words, when the animation is executed as the hold display, if the animation of one hold display and the animation of the other hold display are not synchronized, there is a problem that the player may feel uncomfortable, but this can be solved. In addition, since all the animations of the hold display are managed by one hold animation timer, the control becomes easy.

  Here, the operation of the hold animation timer will be described. FIG. 179 (a) is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of the pending animation timer. As shown in FIG. 179 (a), the hold animation timer stops the timing operation during, for example, a customer waiting effect, and performs the time counting operation when a special winning change is started due to a start winning prize during the customer waiting effect, for example. Start anew. To newly start the timer operation means to start the timer value from 0 and increase the timer value as time elapses. If the timekeeping operation is newly started when there is a start winning prize during the customer waiting effect, a new hold display (including the display of change during hold) starts from the initial position (for example, the frame 12 described above) from this time. Will be done. In this way, when the timer operation of the hold animation timer is started, the hold display may be set to be executed from a predetermined initial position (first frame) of the animation.

  Note that FIG. 179 (a) illustrates an example in which the timer operation of the hold animation timer is stopped at the start of the customer waiting effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At this point, the suspended animation timer may stop the timekeeping operation, and the timekeeping operation may be constantly stopped while the special figure fluctuation is stopped. A flowchart of FIG. 180 described below has such an aspect. In addition, there may be a mode in which the hold animation timer does not stop, and for example, keeps measuring time while the effect control device 300 is running. Further, the value of the pending animation timer is not limited to a mode of continuously increasing, but may be a mode of returning to 0 when reaching a predetermined upper limit value and increasing again from 0.

Next, FIGS. 177 and 178 show other display examples of the hold display (start storage display) by animation using a timer.
First, FIG. 177 (a) shows the same display mode (kind) even when there are a plurality of modes in which the cycle time of the animation operation is different (in other words, the apparent speed of the animation operation is different). A display example is shown in which a hold animation timer is shared to control all hold displays. In this display example, the number of holds is, for example, three (one for special figure 1 and two for special figure 2). Animation display of walking along the circumference (holding display A; one cycle is, for example, 4 seconds), or animation display in which a person (or a predetermined character) runs along the inner circumference in a circle (holding display B; one cycle is, for example, 2 seconds) This is a display example in which the animation of the hold display (in this case, also includes the holding while fluctuating) with the same cycle time is synchronized with the animation of the hold. In this case, only the latest hold display is performed by the high-speed hold display B, and all other hold displays (including the fluctuating hold) are performed by the low-speed hold display A and are synchronized.

  Then, even when there are a plurality of types of suspended displays having different cycle times, the animation of all suspended displays is advanced based on the same suspended animation timer in accordance with the relationship shown in FIG. 179 (b) described above. With the configuration in which the control is performed, an effect that the control becomes easy can be obtained. As already described in the description of FIG. 179 (b), even if the same pending animation timer is used, the result of multiplying the timer value by a predetermined number or dividing the timer value by the predetermined number (ie, If the progress of the frames of the animation display is controlled based on the result of multiplication or division calculation), various types of reservations in which the cycle time is variously different (that is, the speed of the animation movement is variously different) are performed. Display control can be realized based on the same timer value.

Next, in FIG. 177 (b), an animation display is performed as a notice effect display of a fluctuating display of a large ornamental design (special figure) in addition to the suspended display of the animation similar to the display example of FIG. 177 (a). This is an example. In this case, both the left symbol and the right symbol of the large decorative symbol stop at "3", and the reach action in which only the middle symbol of the large decorative symbol is slowly changing is being executed. By the way, even in such a reach state, all the decorative small symbols are displayed in a changing state. Then, as a special announcement in the reach action, a large circle is displayed around the display position where the middle pattern of the large decoration is fluctuating and an animation display where “Taro Tarou” runs along the inner circumference of this large circle Has been done. Then, the animation display in which "Taro Taro" runs is also controlled based on a common suspension animation timer, for example, similarly to the suspension display B.
In this way, it is possible to use a common hold animation timer with the hold display to control the effect display other than the hold display (for example, the notice effect display of the variable display game), so that the effects other than the hold display can be easily performed. In addition, effects other than the hold display can be easily synchronized or linked with the hold display.

Next, FIG. 178 is a display example in which a new hold display mode is displayed based on the same hold animation timer even if the hold display mode changes due to the effect mode switching.
First, in the display example shown in FIG. 178 (a), the number of reservations is two (one for special figure 1 and one for special figure 2). In the viewable area of the display unit 41a, a background image of the mountain is displayed in a large size, for example, an effect image (or an animation) in which "Taro Taro" runs and climbs the mountain is displayed, and the "mountain mode" is displayed as a hold display. Correspondingly, for example, the above-mentioned hold display B is executed. The progress of the hold display is controlled based on the one hold animation timer described above. FIG. 178 (a) shows the moment when the special figure stops at “9, 3, 4”, and the decorative small design also stops at “9, 3, 4”.

Then, FIG. 178 (b) is a display example of a state where the effect mode switching is performed after the state illustrated in FIG. 178 (a), the effect mode is switched to the “sea mode”, and the next variable display game is started. is there. In this case, the number of reservations becomes one (one in special figure 1 and zero in special figure 2), and a large underwater background image is displayed in the viewable area of the display unit 41a. An image for swimming effect (animation may be displayed) is displayed. For example, the above-described hold display B (however, an animation in which a fish swims along the inner circumference of a circle instead of a person) corresponding to the “sea mode” is displayed as a hold display. It is running. The progress of the hold display is continuously controlled based on the one hold animation timer before switching to the effect mode. That is, even if the mode of the hold display is switched by the effect mode switching, the hold display of the new mode after the effect mode switching is not executed from the first frame of the animation (for example, the first frame of the movie). The display is started from the frame corresponding to the value of the pending animation timer at that time based on the correspondence described in FIG. 179 (b). For this reason, it is possible to realize the effect mode switching without a sense of incongruity from the player with easy control.
As another mode, when the effect mode is switched, the hold animation timer is cleared (reset), and the timekeeping operation of the hold animation timer is restarted from 0, so that the animation of the hold display after the effect mode switch is changed to the first frame ( For example, a mode in which the image is displayed from the first frame of the movie) may be used. In this case, the player can see the hold display in the new display mode corresponding to the new effect mode after the switching from the beginning, and at that point, the effect is enhanced.

Next, FIG. 180 is a holding effect setting process which is an example of a flowchart for realizing the holding display effect shown in FIGS. 176 to 178 described above.
This hold effect setting process is performed, for example, in both the step D214 (special figure 1 hold information setting process) and the step D218 (special figure 2 hold information setting process) in the single command processing of the effect control device 300 shown in FIG. This is a process that is executed each time a hold number command is received from the game control device 100.

When the suspension effect setting process is started, first, as shown in FIG. 180, it is determined whether or not the special figure is changing (that is, whether the variable display game of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is being executed). If it is not being executed (step E241; NO), it is determined whether the number of holds indicated by the received latest hold number command has increased from the previous time (step E242).
If the number of holds has not increased (step E242; NO), the process returns because there are no holds and there is no changing hold (the process ends). On the other hand, when the number of holdings increases (step E242; YES), a new holding display due to a new start winning prize has to be executed. It is determined whether the setting has been made in the setting process (step D405) or the pre-reading symbol system command process (step D184) (step E243). Here, the pending animation effect means an effect of a suspended display by animation shown in FIG. 176 and the like.

If it is not set to perform the hold animation effect as a new hold display (step E243; NO), a setting process for displaying the non-animated change-hold image at the change-hold position is performed. (Step E244), and then return. "Non-anime" means not an animation.
On the other hand, if it is set to perform a hold animation effect as a new hold display (step E243; YES), the timer operation of the hold animation timer is started from 0 (step E245), and then the set animation ( A setting process is performed to display the image of the pending change in the animation) at the position of the pending change based on the pending animation timer (step E246), and thereafter, the process returns. Here, “display based on the pending animation timer” means, for example, that the animation frame to be displayed is determined from the value of the pending animation timer based on the relationship shown in FIG. This means that the display is advanced.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in step E241 is that the special figure is changing (step E241; YES), it is determined whether the number of holds indicated by the received latest hold number command has increased from the previous time (step E247).
If the number of holds increases (step E247; YES), a new hold display due to a new start winning prize should be executed. It is determined whether the setting has been made in the setting process (step D405) or the pre-reading symbol system command process (step D184) (step E248).

If it is not set to perform the hold animation effect as a new hold display (step E248; NO), a setting process is performed to display the non-anime hold image at a position corresponding to the number of holds (step E248). Step E249), and then return.
On the other hand, if it is set to perform the hold animation effect as a new hold display (step E248; YES), the display of the animation to be synchronized with the hold image of the set animation (animation) is being executed. Based on the same holding animation timer as the holding, the setting processing for displaying at the position corresponding to the number of holdings is performed (step E250), and then the process returns. Note that the processing in step E250 is not limited to a mode in which the same animation image as the preceding hold display is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 177 (a), an animation image different in type from the preceding hold display is displayed. The display setting may be performed.

If the number of holds has not increased as a result of the determination in step E247 (step E247; NO), it is determined whether the number of holds indicated by the received latest hold number command has decreased from the previous time (step E252).
If the number of reservations has not decreased (step E252; NO), there is no change in the number of reservations, and the process returns without doing anything.
On the other hand, if the number of holds is reduced (step E252; YES), since a hold shift has occurred, the image of the current holding hold is deleted and the display positions of the remaining hold display images are changed. A setting process is performed to shift the image to the next position toward the middle suspension position (step E253), and then the process returns.
Here, in step E253, when the effect mode is switched, a process of changing the display mode of the hold display to one corresponding to the effect mode after the switching is performed. Thus, for example, switching of the hold display mode as shown in FIG. 178 is performed.

As described in Note 1) in FIG. 180, in the above steps E244, E246, E249, and E250, whether the hold display to be set for display corresponds to Tokusatsu 1 or Tokusatsu 2 Or to distinguish between That is, if the hold display to be set corresponds to, for example, Toku-zu 1, the image is distinguished and set so that an image having the features of Toku-zu 1 (for example, the above-described white image) is displayed.
In addition, as described as Note 2) in FIG. 180, the frame image surrounding the suspension during the change is not deleted in the step E253.
Also, as shown as Note 3) in FIG. 180, although not shown, when the number of reservations is 0 and the special figure change is completed (for example, when the determination result of step E242 is negative) ), A setting for erasing an image held during fluctuation (an image in a frame-shaped image) and a setting for terminating the timer operation of the held animation timer are made.

In the example after FIG. 176 described above, the mode of synchronizing the animation of the pending change is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be synchronized and the display of the suspension during the change is controlled separately.
Also, in the above description, the description has been given on the assumption that the control of the hold display is newly started when the corresponding start winning is made. For example, on the display layer, the number of animations corresponding to the maximum hold number is set. May be always executed. For example, on the display layer, the animation of the number of holds corresponding to the maximum number of holds is always synchronized and executed, and another image is displayed on the front side for the hold display that is larger than the actual number of holds (Or the transparency of the hold display is set to 100%) so as to be invisible to the player, and when the number of pieces to be held and displayed increases due to the start winning, the concealment is stopped as necessary (to hide). Control may be performed such that the image is erased or the transparency of the hold display is reduced (the transparency of the hold display is actually reduced). In this case, the type of animation to be executed at the time of concealment is, for example, a specific basic type (for example, for special figure 1, low-speed hold display A), and when actually shown, it is changed from white to black as necessary. , And control may be performed such as changing the low-speed hold display A to the high-speed hold display B, for example.

Next, FIGS. 181 to 183 are diagrams illustrating a comparison of a big hit expectation degree and the like depending on a difference in a mode of a special figure reserved display (decorative special figure reserved display) on the display unit 41a of the display device 41. It should be noted that the suspension display of the special figure on the display device 41 or the like, that is, the suspension display of the special figure for the effect for the player (display of the start memory of the special figure) on the display device or the like that performs the variation display of the decoration special figure. This is called decoration special figure suspension display. Note that the decoration special figure suspension display (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as suspension display) also includes the above-described display of suspension during fluctuation (also referred to as the suspension). In the present application, an image displayed as such a hold display may be referred to as a hold image. Further, the decoration special figure suspension display may be performed in a display area of another display means for a player different from the display device that performs the variable display of the decoration special figure.
In this example, as shown in FIGS. 184 to 185 to be described later, under the control of the effect control device 300, the mode of the decoration special figure suspension display (that is, the suspension image display mode) is changed to the normal display mode, the change suggestion mode, and the like. , And a special display mode. The normal display mode is a display mode that is neither a change suggestion mode nor a special display mode, and may be referred to as “normal hold”. The special display mode is, for example, a display mode (so-called blue hold or red hold, etc.) different from the normal display mode executed as the prefetch notice effect described above. Further, the change suggestion mode is a display mode for suggesting (or notifying) to the player that there is a possibility that the display mode may change from the normal display mode to the special display mode. Generally, the hold display flashes. This is a display mode that looks like a player as if it were, and may be referred to as “flashing hold”. In addition, the hold display in the above-described special display mode may be hereinafter referred to as “special hold”. This blinking hold (change suggestion mode) may be changed to the special display mode without fail, but may return to the normal hold (normal display mode) after that. In the case of the present example, the hold display of the blinking hold (change suggestion mode) is also a kind (or a part) of the look-ahead notice effect described above or the effect of the change notice (notice to the changing game result that is not the look-ahead notice). Contribute to the improvement of entertainment.

First, FIG. 181 is a specific example of the difference between the setting of the big hit expectation and the like between the blinking hold (change suggestion mode) and the normal hold (normal display mode). Here, the setting means setting of a program and data of a table used for the above-described control processing of the effect control device 300 (the same applies to the settings of FIGS. 182 and 183).
In this example, the big hit expectation degree (the probability of the result of the special figure change display game to be a big hit, also called big hit reliability) in the display mode of the change during hold is, as shown in the first line of FIG. Is set to be higher in the case of normal holding than in the case of blinking holding. For example, from the viewpoint of the player, when the fluctuating hold is a blinking hold (for example, when the blinking is held at the start of the change, or when the blinking is held after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change), the hold during the change is normally The probability that the change display game during the change will be a big hit is reduced as compared to the case where the change is displayed (for example, the case where the change is displayed at the start of the change or the case where the change is displayed after the predetermined time elapses from the start of the change). The appearance rate of each display mode of the hold display is set differently according to the jackpot determination result (the jackpot determination result understood by a command from the game control device 100). As a result, if the suspension during the change is the blinking suspension, it is less likely to be a big hit than the normal suspension, and it is possible to clarify the distinction between the normal suspension and the blinking suspension.
Next, the ratio (probability) of temporarily hiding the hold display (especially the display of a hold during a change) for a special notice effect display (for example, a movie display of spear reach) is shown in the second line of FIG. 181. As described above, the setting is set to be higher when the hold display is the normal hold than when the blinking display is the flash hold. For example, from the viewpoint of the player, the display of the fluctuating suspension is temporarily hidden (temporarily non-displayed) when the fluctuating suspension is blinking suspension compared to the case where the fluctuating suspension is normal suspension. In order to reduce the probability, the appearance rate of each display mode of the hold display is set differently according to the selection result of the effect contents. As a result, the rate at which the blinking suspension temporarily disappears is lower than that of the normal suspension, and effects such as clarifying the distinction between the normal suspension and the blinking suspension can be obtained.

Next, as shown in the third line of FIG. 181, the rate (probability) at which the hold display changes to the special display mode is lower in the case where the hold display is in the normal hold than in the case where the hold display is in the flash hold. Is set to For example, the setting is made such that the blinking hold has a higher probability of changing to the special display mode than the normal hold from the viewpoint of the player. This is for the purpose of the blinking hold, which means that the blinking hold indicates (preliminary notice) to the player about the change of the hold display.
Next, as shown in the fourth line in FIG. 181, the appearance rate (probability of appearance) of the character performing the hold display change is lower when the hold display is the normal hold than when the hold display is the flashing hold. It is set as follows. For example, from the viewpoint of the player, the appearance rate of each display mode of the hold display is changed so that the blinking hold has a higher appearance rate of a character that may change the hold display than the normal hold. The setting is different depending on the selection result. This is also for the purpose of the blinking suspension.

  Next, the effect rate of the character performing the hold display change on the hold display (for example, the probability that a character such as “Taro Tarou” will perform an effect acting on the hold display to change the hold display) is shown in FIG. 181. As shown in the fifth line, the setting is set to be lower when the hold display is normal hold than when blinking is hold. For example, from the viewpoint of the player, the appearance rate of each display mode of the hold display is set so that the blinking hold has a higher appearance rate of the effect in which the character acts to change the hold display than the normal hold. Are set differently according to the selection result. This is also for the purpose of the blinking suspension.

Next, as shown in the sixth line in FIG. 181, the expectation degree of the jackpot in the hold display at the time of winning (starting winning win) is lower in the case of the normal hold than in the case of the flashing hold of the hold display. It is set to be. For example, if the hold display at the time of winning is blinking hold (that is, if the display mode of the first hold display in the start memory generated by the start winning is blinking hold) from the viewpoint of the player, the winning is achieved. The appearance rate of each display mode of the first hold display is set differently according to the jackpot determination result so that the probability of the corresponding variable display game being a big hit is higher than the case where the hold display at the time is the normal hold. It has been. As a result, if the hold display at the time of winning is a blinking hold, it is easier to make a big hit than the normal hold, and an effect such as clarifying the distinction between the normal hold and the blinking hold can be obtained. With this setting, the player feels empirically that the blinking hold at the time of winning is easier to hit than the case of normal holding at the time of winning. However, if the blinking hold at the time of winning is continued, for example, as it is, and remains the blinking hold even after the shift to the floating hold, due to the setting of the first line in FIG. Since the probability of a big hit is smaller than that in the case of the normal hold, the player watches the effect of the hold display while longing for the blinking change at the time of winning to change thereafter (preferably to the special display mode). And the interest of the game is improved.
Note that the characteristics shown in the sixth line of FIG. 181 are not limited to the start winning prize time. For example, at the time of the start winning prize time, any one of the standby hold displayed in the normal hold (normal display mode) until the standby hold is shifted to the fluctuating hold. The configuration may be effective even when the state is changed to the blinking hold (change suggestion mode) at the time. With this configuration, when the standby hold changes from the normal hold to the blinking hold, for example, the jackpot expectation is higher than in the case where the normal hold remains, so that the player also changes the blinking hold thereafter ( It is necessary to watch the effect of the hold display while continuously requesting that the display be changed to the special display mode if possible, and the interest of the game is improved.

Next, the overlapping appearance rate of other pre-reading notices including so-called gasses (a notice effect that does not result in a state advantageous to a player such as a jackpot) (for example, when a sword sticks into an image of a hold display that is not a hold during a change) The probability that the look-ahead preview effect produced by a display effect different from the hold display itself appears in duplicate is, as shown in the seventh line of FIG. 181, the case where the hold display is more normal than the case where the blinking is flashing. Is set to be lower. For example, from the viewpoint of the player, the appearance rate of each display mode of the hold display is different depending on the selection result of the effect so that the blinking hold has a higher overlapping occurrence rate of other pre-reading notices than the normal hold. It is set.
Next, the overlapping appearance rate of the other change notices including so-called gasket (for example, the notice effect by a display effect different from the hold display itself such as a sword piercing the image of the hold display of the change during hold overlaps) As shown in the eighth line of FIG. 181, the appearance probability is set to be lower in the case where the suspension display is the normal suspension than in the case where the suspension display is the blinking suspension. For example, from the viewpoint of the player, the appearance rate of each display mode of the hold display is changed according to the selection result of the effect content so that the blinking hold has a higher overlapping occurrence rate of the other change notice than the normal hold. The settings are different.

Next, the hold display change rate (for example, the probability that the hold display changes when the number of changes (or the number of hold shifts) reaches the specified number) due to reaching the threshold after the predetermined event is shown in the ninth line in FIG. As shown in the figure, the setting is set to be lower when the corresponding hold display is the normal hold than when the corresponding hold display is the flash hold. For example, the setting is made such that the blinking hold has a higher probability of changing after the execution of the specified number of changes than the normal hold, for example, from the viewpoint of the player.
Next, in the variable display of the corresponding special figure, the probability that the stop time of the decorative pattern (decorative special figure) becomes long (for example, the stop display time of the decorative pattern such as the fluctuation pattern including the reach action is the normal fluctuation pattern (for example, The probability that a special pattern fluctuation pattern that is longer than (excluding) is selected) is higher when the corresponding hold display is normal hold than when the corresponding hold display is blinking hold, as shown in the tenth line of FIG. Is set to be higher. For example, from the point of view of the player, the stop time (stop display) of the decorative design (decorative special figure) in the running variable display is higher when the changing hold is blinking holding than when the changing holding is normal holding. The appearance rate of each display mode of the hold display is set differently in accordance with the variation pattern (the content of the variation pattern command received from the game control device 100) so that the probability that the time increases. Even with this setting, effects such as clarifying the distinction between the normal hold and the blink hold can be obtained.

Next, FIG. 182 shows a specific example of the difference between the setting of the big hit expectation and the like between the blinking hold (change suggestion mode) and the special hold (special display mode). Note that the same description of the same items as in the case of FIG. 181 described above is omitted.
First, as shown in the first row of FIG. 182, the big hit expectation in the display mode of the pending during change is set to be higher in the case of the special display mode than in the case of the flashing suspension. ing. This is in order to cope with the purpose of the special display mode in which the hold display in the special display mode indicates (notices) the possibility of an advantageous state such as a big hit occurring to the player.
Next, the rate at which the hold display (especially the display of a hold during a change) is temporarily hidden for a special announcement effect display, etc., is as shown in the second line of FIG. It is set to be higher in the special display mode than in the special display mode. As a result, the rate at which the flashing suspension temporarily disappears is lower than in the special display mode.

Next, as shown in the third line of FIG. 182, the jackpot expectation degree in the hold display at the time of winning is set so that it is higher in the special display mode than in the blink display of the hold display. Have been. This is for the purpose of the special display mode.
Next, as shown in the fourth line of FIG. 182, the overlapping appearance rate of other prefetch notices including so-called gaskets is higher in the special display mode than in the case where the suspension display is blinking suspension. It is set as follows. Thereby, the player can be empirically felt that the special display mode is more advantageous, and the sense of expectation for the special display mode is increased, thereby increasing interest.
Next, as shown in the fifth line in FIG. 182, the overlapping appearance rate of the other change notice including so-called gasket is higher in the special display mode than in the case where the hold display is blinking hold. It is set to be. Thereby, the player can be empirically felt that the special display mode is more advantageous, and the sense of expectation for the special display mode is increased, thereby increasing interest.

Next, as shown in the sixth row in FIG. 182, the hold display change rate due to reaching the threshold after the predetermined event is higher in the special display mode than in the case where the corresponding hold display is blinking hold. It is set as follows. Thereby, the player can be empirically felt that the special display mode is more advantageous, and the sense of expectation for the special display mode is increased, thereby increasing interest.
Next, in the variable display of the corresponding special figure, the probability that the stop time of the decorative design (decorative special figure) becomes longer is higher than the case where the corresponding hold display is flashing hold, as shown in the seventh line of FIG. It is set to be higher in the special display mode.

Next, in the fluctuation display of the corresponding special figure, the probability that the fluctuation time of the decoration pattern (decoration special figure) becomes long (for example, a fluctuation pattern of the decoration pattern such as a fluctuation pattern including a reach action, includes a normal fluctuation pattern (for example, including a reach action) 182, the variation pattern of the special figure longer than that of the special figure is selected when the corresponding hold display is in the special display mode rather than when the corresponding hold display is blinking hold, as shown in the eighth line of FIG. Is set to be higher. For example, from the player's point of view, the fluctuating time of the decorative symbol (decorative special figure) in the fluctuating display during execution is longer when the fluctuating hold is blinking hold than when the fluctuating hold is the special display mode. The appearance rate of each display mode of the hold display is set to be different depending on the variation pattern so that the probability of the display becomes low. Thereby, the player can be empirically felt that the special display mode is more advantageous, and the sense of expectation for the special display mode is increased, thereby increasing interest.
Next, as shown in the ninth line in FIG. 182, the rate (probability) of the display mode of the hold display returning to the display of the normal hold is the same in the case where the hold display is the flashing hold and in the case of the special display mode. Or are set to be substantially the same.

  Next, as shown in the tenth and eleventh lines of FIG. 182, the hold display blinks and is held, as shown in the tenth and eleventh lines of FIG. Is set to be the same or higher in the special display mode than in the case of. Thereby, the player can be empirically felt that the special display mode is more advantageous, and a sense of expectation for the special display mode is enhanced, thereby increasing interest.

Next, FIG. 183 illustrates a specific example of the difference between the settings of the normal hold (normal display mode) and the special hold (special display mode) such as the big hit expectation. Note that the same description of the same items as those in FIGS. 181 and 182 described above will be omitted.
First, as shown in the first line of FIG. 183, the jackpot expectation degree according to the display mode of the suspension during the change is set to be higher when the suspension display is the special display mode than when the suspension display is the normal suspension. ing. This is for the purpose of the special display mode.
Next, as shown in the second line of FIG. 183, the ratio of temporarily disabling the hold display (particularly, display of the hold during the change) for a special announcement effect display is when the hold display is the normal hold. It is set to be higher in the special display mode than in the special display mode. As a result, the rate at which the normal suspension temporarily disappears is lower than that in the special display mode.

Next, as shown in the third line of FIG. 183, the big hit expectation in the hold display at the time of winning is set so that the case where the hold display is the special display mode is higher than the case where the hold display is the normal hold. Have been. This is for the purpose of the special display mode.
Next, as shown in the fourth line of FIG. 183, the overlap appearance rate of other prefetch notices including so-called gaskets is higher in the special display mode than in the case where the hold display is the normal hold. It is set as follows. Thereby, the player can be empirically felt that the special display mode is more advantageous, and the sense of expectation for the special display mode is increased, thereby increasing interest.
Next, as shown in the fifth line of FIG. 183, the overlap appearance rate of the other change notices including so-called gaskets is higher in the special display mode than in the case where the hold display is the normal hold. It is set to be. Thereby, the player can be empirically felt that the special display mode is more advantageous, and the sense of expectation for the special display mode is increased, thereby increasing interest.

Next, the probability that the stop time of the decorative symbol becomes longer and the probability that the fluctuating time of the decorative symbol becomes longer in the corresponding variable display of the special figure are as shown in the sixth and seventh lines of FIG. The setting is set to be higher in the special display mode than in the normal hold mode. Thereby, the player can be empirically felt that the special display mode is more advantageous, and the sense of expectation for the special display mode is increased, thereby increasing interest.
Next, as shown in the eighth and ninth lines of FIG. 183, the appearance rate of the character performing the hold display change and the rate of the effect of the character performing the hold display change on the hold display are respectively as shown in the normal hold. Is set to be higher in the special display mode than in the case of. Thereby, the player can be empirically felt that the special display mode is more advantageous, and the sense of expectation for the special display mode is increased, thereby increasing interest.

Next, FIG. 184 and FIG. 185 are diagrams illustrating a specific example of the hold display performed on the display unit 41a (display area) of the display device 41. In addition, in FIG. 184 and thereafter, for convenience of explanation, only one of the special figures 1 and 2 can be started and a winning prize, and only one of the special figures 1 and 2 is displayed on hold. Is exemplified. In addition, in FIG. 184 and thereafter, images such as the fourth symbol, which are not particularly related to the features of the invention, are omitted. In the following, the original hold (the start memory in which the change display game has not been executed) which is not the change hold may be referred to as a standby hold to distinguish it from the change hold. In the description below, the suspended image of the fluctuating suspension may be referred to as a fluctuating pending image or a fluctuating pending image, and the pending image of the pending suspension may be referred to as a standby pending image or a standby pending image.
First, FIG. 184 (a) shows a state in which two start winnings have occurred during the special figure change and a second hold has occurred, and the hold display is being performed at the lower edge of the viewable area. In this case, an unfilled (white painted) circular image surrounded by a square line is an image for a hold display (display of fluctuating hold) that displays the starting memory of a special figure that is currently fluctuating. Medium-hold image). In this example, the display of the suspension during fluctuation (also referred to as the suspension) is displayed on the leftmost side, and the images of the suspension display (standby suspension suspension images) are arranged side by side from the left in the execution order of the fluctuation display game. ing. In this case, the first hold display (display of standby hold 1) arranged on the right side of the pending change is blinking hold, and the second hold display (standby hold 2) arranged on the right side thereof is further blinking. Is normally on hold. In this case, both the flashing hold and the normal hold are white circular images, but in the case of the flashing hold, for example, the overall brightness is lower than that of the normal hold image, and the normal hold image has, for example, a constant brightness. On the other hand, the blinking hold is, for example, an image in which the luminance fluctuates and looks like the player blinks. The blinking hold indicates (notices) or notifies the possibility that the hold display may change, for example, by displaying such an image. If such a blinking hold is displayed at the time of winning, the big hit expectation is higher than the case of the normal hold as described in the sixth line in FIG. 181, and the second hold in FIG. 184 (a) is performed. As shown, if the game is normally held at the time of winning, the jackpot expectation is lower than in the case of the flashing hold.

  Next, FIG. 184 (b) is an example in which the holding during the change from the state of FIG. 184 (a) to the blinking holding causes a super reach. For example, a movie in which a tiger taro runs around a fluctuating medium pattern is displayed as a notice effect of super reach. Such a notice effect is generally displayed in a large size using the entire viewable area (shown by a half line) of the display unit 41a, so that the hold display is temporarily hidden (by the player). (Including a state that is difficult to see). However, as shown in FIG. 184 (b), when the fluctuating hold is blinking hold, as described in the second line of FIG. 181, the non-display is shorter than when the fluctuating hold is normal hold. 184 is low, and, for example, as shown in FIG. 184 (b), the rate at which the suspended display is continued (not temporarily hidden) is high.

  Next, in FIG. 184 (c), the variable display game ends from the state shown in FIG. 184 (b) and ends, and a hold shift process is performed to shift the hold display on the display unit 41a (that is, the hold display is shifted). This is an example in which the display is switched such that each hold display image moves leftward by one image), and a new special figure change display game corresponding to a new change hold is started. In this case, the first standby hold before the hold shift has been shifted to the fluctuating hold, but remains flashing after the shift to the fluctuating hold. As described above, as described in the first line of FIG. 181, when the change-in-hold is the flashing hold, the change-initiated change-initiated change-initiation pattern is compared with the case where the change-on-hold is the normal hold. There is a large possibility (probability) that the display game will subsequently deviate. However, in the case of the pattern in which the holding during the change is changed from the flashing hold to another display mode before the changing display game is over, the probability of a big hit is higher than the case where the flashing hold is kept, and particularly, the special display mode is set. If it changes, the probability of a big hit is extremely high as described in the first row of FIG. 183.

Next, FIG. 185 (a) shows a state in which two start winnings have been made and a second hold has occurred during the change of the special figure. Similar to the state of FIG. 184 (a), the display unit 41a is visually recognized. Hold display is performed at the lower edge of the possible area. However, in this case, both the change-in-hold and the other hold (stand-by hold) are displayed in the normal hold (normal display mode) mode.
Next, in FIG. 185 (b), the start winning is generated from the state of FIG. 185 (a), and the number of holding displays of the standby holding is changed to three, the holding during the change is changed to the special display mode, and the second standby is displayed. This is an example in which the hold is changed to a blinking hold, and the display of the character performing the hold change (for example, the display of an animation of “Taro Taro” walking) is started. The appearance of the character performing the hold display change described in the fourth line and the like in FIG. 181 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 185 (b), and it is irrelevant whether or not it has acted on the hold display thereafter. There may be an effect pattern that disappears after appearing without acting on the hold display. In the display of the suspension during the change in this example, as a special display mode, a circular image with blackout (black painted), which is larger than the normal suspension, is displayed. The special display mode is a mode in which, for example, the size and color are flashy compared to the display of the normal hold, and the player can feel that the player is special (high hit expectation). There can be various aspects. The special display mode may be a single type, but a plurality of types are different depending on the size, the color, the shape, the pattern, and the like, and it is preferable that the big hit expectation is different for each type.

  Next, FIG. 185 (c) shows a display in which the character performing the hold change acts on the second standby hold hold display from the state of FIG. 185 (b) to change to the special display mode (for example, This is an example in which “tiger taro” jumps and displays an animation of riding a ball on a hold-displayed circular image). In this case, the hold display of the second standby hold performed by the character “Taro Tarou” that changes the hold is performed, for example, after “Taro Tarou” jumps and rides on, the striped pattern as a special display mode is displayed. The image changes to a certain large circular image (which expresses the ball of a ball ride), indicating to the player that the jackpot expectation is high. The action on the hold display of the character performing the hold display change described in the fifth line in FIG. 181, for example, is as shown in FIG. 185 (c). Note that this example is merely an example, and there may be various modes such as an image of the character “sword” piercing the hold display image.

Next, FIGS. 186 to 188 are diagrams illustrating specific examples of the hold display including the later-described moving display at the time of the hold shift performed on the display unit 41a (display area) of the display device 41. FIG. 189 is a timing chart corresponding to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 186 to 188. In FIG. 186 and subsequent drawings, a specific display example is illustrated assuming that the visible area is the entire display unit 41a for convenience of explanation. A dotted line with an arrow in the timing chart of FIG. 189 indicates a state in which the display of standby hold is moving with the hold shift.
First, FIG. 186 (a) shows a state in which the start winning prize has occurred three times during the special figure change and a third hold has occurred (a state shown by (T1) in FIG. 189). Each hold display is performed at each predetermined position of the lower edge. The hold display is not limited to the mode performed at the lower edge portion of the viewable area of the display unit as described above, and may be performed at other positions. The display of (standby hold) is performed in different areas except during the shift of the hold display position during the hold shift. As shown in FIG. 186 (a), the images on standby hold are displayed at predetermined positions at predetermined intervals so that the images on standby hold do not overlap each other. In addition, when the standby standby images adjacent to each other are stopped and displayed in a normal state (a state in which moving display is not performed during a hold shift described later, and also referred to as a standby state), the images do not overlap each other. In addition, the display position, shape, size, and the like are set. As described above, since the display of the hold during the change and the standby hold is set so that the images do not overlap from the beginning, the display layer and the display priority for the display of the hold during the change and each hold are set in the control processing. Does not need to be considered, and control becomes easy. Here, the stop display of the image of the hold display (hold image) means a hold display in a standby state (normal state) in which the moving display is not being performed in accordance with the hold shift, and it is not necessarily a state in which the hold image is stopped. The present invention is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 186 (a), it is preferable that the display position of the pending change is more distant than the display position of the standby hold as compared with the positional relationship between the standby holds. It is desirable that the image is also different from the image on hold. Then, even if another image (for example, a square line surrounding the display of the suspension during change shown in FIG. 184 (a) or the like) for indicating the suspension during the suspension is not displayed, the suspension during the change is displayed. The difference between the waiting holds can be clearly shown to the player. In the case of FIG. 186 (a), the image of the hold display (hold image) is a white elliptical image, but as the hold image of the fluctuating hold, a much larger oval image is displayed as compared to the standby hold. ing. The display position of the fluctuating hold is located at the left end of the display unit 41a, and is set in a separate area separated from the standby hold display area in the upper left direction.
The ellipse indicated by the dotted line in FIG. 186 (a) indicates a predetermined display position when the fourth standby hold (standby hold 4) is displayed. It is not displayed. However, as an effect or in order to show the upper limit number of holdings (for example, four) to the player, a display indicating such non-occurring holdings may be displayed.
Further, in the description of the present example, the first standby hold (the hold in which the variable display game is executed next) displayed at the leftmost predetermined position in the standby hold is referred to as standby hold 1, and similarly, 2 The third may be referred to as standby hold 2, the third may be referred to as standby hold 3, and the fourth may be referred to as standby hold 4. In response to this, for example, “hold display of standby hold 1” in the timing chart of FIG. 189 indicates the display state of the first standby hold displayed at the leftmost predetermined position in the standby hold (described later). (Except during the move display accompanying the pending shift).

  Next, in FIG. 186 (b), the variable display game is deviated from the state of FIG. 186 (a), and a stop display of, for example, “848” is started as a stop symbol of the decorative special figure. A display example of a state immediately before the shift of the hold display is started (a state shown by (T2) in FIG. 189) is shown. In this example, before performing the display for moving the position of the hold display with the hold shift, first, the hold display of the fluctuating hold (the relevant hold) for which the corresponding fluctuating display has been completed is shown in FIG. 186 (b) (or FIG. As shown in 189), the control for non-display is executed, and the standby holds 1 to 3 are displayed at predetermined positions. This allows the player to clearly recognize that the change of the special figure change display game has ended, that one start memory has been exhausted, or that a hold shift is to be performed.

  Next, FIG. 186 (c) shows a state in which the display (moving display) in which the display position of the standby hold moves from the state of FIG. 186 (b) with the hold shift has started (the state shown by (T3) in FIG. 189). ). In this case, for example, an animation is displayed in which the images of the hold displays of the standby holds 1 to 3 move to the left all at once. In FIG. 186 (c), an ellipse indicated by a dotted line indicates a display position at the time of stop before each standby hold image is moved (that is, a normal state (moving display accompanying a hold shift) shown in FIG. 186 (a)). Are not shown) for convenience of explanation, and are not necessarily displayed (however, they are displayed as effects). Good). In addition, the movement in the case where there are a plurality of standby holds may be started in synchronization at the same time. However, the movement display is performed at a different timing or moving speed for each standby hold (for example, an animation in which the image of the hold display moves). May be executed.

  Next, FIG. 187 (a) shows a state in which a start winning has occurred from the state of FIG. 186 (c), and the number of standby holds has become four, including three during the moving display ((T4) in FIG. 189). (Shown state). Then, the fourth standby hold newly generated due to the start winning prize becomes the third standby hold 3 after the shift, so in this example, the third predetermined position (standby hold 3 is stopped and displayed in the normal state). At the predetermined position to be displayed), for example, from the beginning (or a display that is once displayed at the fourth predetermined position and then immediately moves to the third predetermined position), and the advance of the movement display of the standby hold is performed earlier. Depending on the situation, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), the fourth new standby hold image and the third standby hold image (the standby hold 3 before shift) for which the moving display has been started are displayed. Control for displaying in a partially polymerized (partly overlapped) state is performed. In other words, in the shift from standby hold to standby hold, even if the standby hold displayed on the front side is not hidden, the subsequent standby hold displayed on the rear side can be moved to the front side. In this case, even when the standby position during the movement is partially the same as the display position of the image with the other standby conditions, the display is kept in a superimposed state. That is, the image of the standby hold during the moving display may partially overlap with another standby hold image. This is the same for the overlap of standby hold images in FIG. 187 (b) and FIG. 187 (c) described later.

Next, in FIG. 187 (b), only the image of the third stand-by hold (standby hold 3 before shift) from the state of FIG. 187 (a) is further moved to the left to the second predetermined position (standby hold). A state where the hold 2 reaches a predetermined position where the hold 2 is stopped and displayed in a normal state) and stopped is illustrated. This state is a state indicated by (T5) in FIG. 189, in which the movement of the image of standby hold 3 before the shift has been completed, and the moved image is displayed at a predetermined position as a new image of standby hold 2. This is the state (that is, the state of the end of the new hold 2 movement). In this case as well, depending on the progress of the movement display of the previous standby hold, as shown in FIG. 187 (b), the image of this new standby hold 2 (standby hold 3 before shift) and the moving display are started. Control is performed to display the image of the second standby hold (standby hold 2 before shift) in a partially overlapped state.
As shown in FIGS. 187 (a) to 187 (c), by displaying the reserved images in a partially superimposed state, a dynamic, interesting and novel reserved display is realized, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

  Next, in FIG. 187 (c), only the image of the second stand-by hold (standby hold 2 before shift) from the state of FIG. 187 (b) is further moved to the left to the first predetermined position (standby hold). A state in which the hold 1 reaches a predetermined position where the hold 1 is stopped and displayed in a normal state) and stopped is illustrated. This state is a state indicated by (T6) in FIG. 189. The movement of the image of standby hold 2 before the shift is completed, and the moved image is displayed as a new image of standby hold 1 at a predetermined position. This is the state (that is, the state of the new hold 1 transfer end). In this case as well, depending on the progress of the movement display of the previous standby hold, as shown in FIG. 187 (c), the image of this new standby hold 1 (standby hold 2 before shift) and the movement display are started. Control is performed to display the first standby hold image (standby hold 1 before shift) image partially overlapped.

  Next, FIG. 188 (a) shows that only the image of the first stand-by hold (standby hold 1 before shift) from the state of FIG. 187 (c) moves further to the left, FIG. 189 illustrates a state (a state indicated by (T7) in FIG. 189) in which a changing display (in this case, a display in which a small elliptical image for standby hold is greatly enlarged) is started. In this case, depending on the progress of the changing display of the first standby hold, the image of the new standby hold 1 (standby hold 2 before shift) and the image of the first standby hold are changed. Control for displaying in a partially polymerized state may be performed.

  Next, FIG. 188 (b) shows that only the image of the first stand-by hold (standby hold 1 before shift) from the state of FIG. 188 (a) is further moved to the upper left, and changes to the held image. A state in which the vehicle reaches a predetermined position of the hold (a predetermined position at which the hold (suspension during change) is stopped and displayed in a normal state) and stops is shown. This state is a state indicated by (T8) in FIG. 189, and the next variable display of the decorative design (decorative special figure) has been started.

  Note that FIG. 189 shows the moving display of the images of each hold display accompanying the hold shift (as described above, the image of standby hold 1 is moved to the hold, and the image of standby hold 2 is moved to hold hold 1 At the time when all the images are completed (in this case, the image of the standby hold 1 before the shift becomes the hold image and stops at a predetermined position). Although the mode in which the display starts is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this mode. Before the moving display is completed, the decoration symbol stop time may end and the next variable display may be started, or after the moving display is completed, the set decoration symbol stop time is over. If there is no such display, the next variable display of the decorative symbol may be started after the stop time is over. However, if the moving display is terminated so that the next variation display of the decorative symbol is started at the time when the moving display is completed or at a timing later than the time, the player has to hold. It is easy to clearly recognize that the shift has been performed and the next variable display game has been started based on the standby hold 1 before the shift (the hold after the shift).

  Next, FIG. 188 (c) shows that a new image of standby hold 1 (standby hold 2 before shift) from the state of FIG. 188 (b) is displayed in a special display mode (in this case, a black star (T9 in FIG. 189). In this case, since each hold display is stopped (the normal state in which the moving display is not being performed), some or all of the adjacent hold display images change to the special display mode as shown in FIG. 188 (c). In such a case, the display position, shape, size, and the like are set so that the images do not overlap each other. In this way, since the hold display of the standby hold is set so as not to overlap when stopped, it is necessary to consider the relationship between the display layer and the display priority for the display of each standby hold during the moving display in the control processing. And control becomes easier.

Next, FIG. 190 is a diagram illustrating another specific example of the movement display at the time of the hold shift performed on the display unit 41a (display area) of the display device 41.
First, FIG. 190A shows a specific example in which the operation mode (for example, track) of the movement display accompanying the hold shift differs between the hold and the standby hold. In this case, as shown by a line with an arrow in FIG. 190 (a), in the display of the movement from the standby hold to the hold, for example, an arc-shaped trajectory is drawn so as to draw an upwardly convex arc (to jump up once). In contrast to the above, the moving display from the standby hold to the standby hold is configured to move linearly. In this way, the player can clearly understand the distinction between the movement to the hold and the movement to the standby hold, and the effect of the easy-to-understand hold display is achieved. Also, a dynamic, interesting and novel hold display is realized, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

  Next, FIG. 190 (b) shows a specific example in which an operation mode (for example, a track) of the movement display accompanying the hold shift differs between the hold displays. In this case, as indicated by a line with an arrow in FIG. 190 (b), in the movement display from standby hold 1 to the hold, for example, the image of the hold display moves in an arc-shaped orbit so as to draw the largest arc, and For example, in the display for moving from the hold 2 to the standby hold 1, the image moves so as to draw a middle-sized arc, and for the display for moving from the hold 3 to the standby hold 2, the image is drawn so as to draw the smallest arc, for example. The image is moved and the display from the standby hold 4 to the standby hold 3 is displayed so as to move linearly. As described above, if the operation mode in the movement display is made different for each hold display, the player can clearly grasp the distinction between the movement to the hold and the movement to the standby hold, and also determines what the standby hold is. It is easy to know the order from the first to the second. Also, a dynamic, interesting and innovative hold display is realized, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

  Next, FIG. 190 (c) shows that the operation mode (for example, the trajectory) of the movement display accompanying the hold shift is the hold display mode (normal display mode, change suggestion mode, special display mode, or what type of special mode). Specific examples differ depending on the display mode. In this case, as indicated by a line with an arrow in FIG. 190 (c), the image of the reserved display in the special display mode (for example, a star-shaped image) moves in, for example, an upwardly projecting arc-shaped orbit, and the normal display mode. The image in the suspended display mode is displayed, for example, so as to move linearly. Although not shown, the operation mode of the hold display (display of blinking hold) in the change suggestion mode may be the same as the normal display mode or the special display mode, or may be different from any of the operation modes (for example, convex downward). (Moving so as to draw an arc). As described above, in the configuration in which the operation mode in the moving display is different in the display mode of the hold display, the player can grasp the difference in the big hit expectation degree and the like also depending on the operation mode of the move display in the hold shift. it can. Also, a dynamic, interesting and innovative hold display is realized, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

The operation mode of the movement of the reserved image is not limited to the mode that is always constant according to the gaming state, and may be set to be different depending on the gaming state (for example, a difference in the effect mode). In this case, the player can grasp the game state in which the player is staying (for example, in which effect mode he or she is staying) simply by looking at the operation mode of the movement of the reserved image.
In addition, simply as a kind of so-called pre-reading notice, even if the display mode of the reserved image is the same, a special moving display operation mode is configured to appear for some of the reserved images, and the operation is performed with the reserved shift. A configuration that can indicate the degree of expectation (probability) of a predetermined state (for example, a big hit state) depending on the operation mode of moving and displaying the suspended image may be adopted. For example, if the operation mode in which the moving display of the hold image moves linearly, the expectation is low, and if the operation mode moves in an arcuate manner so as to jump, the expectation is set to be high. The user gazes at the moving display of the reserved image while expecting the movement of the reserved image to move in an arc shape, and the interest of the reserved image can be improved.
Further, the operation mode of the moving display is not limited to the trajectory, and for example, the speed may be changed. For example, the display for moving from standby hold to the relevant hold is a display in which the hold image moves at a much slower speed, and the display for moving from standby hold to standby hold is displayed so that the hold image moves at a relatively high speed. (Or the reverse configuration). Even with this configuration, the player can clearly understand the distinction between the move to the hold and the move to the standby hold, and the effect of the easy-to-understand hold display is achieved, and a dynamic, interesting and innovative hold display is realized. This will increase the interest of the game.

  Next, FIGS. 191 to 192 are diagrams illustrating a specific example of a hold display (a configuration in which display data of the hold display is shared) performed on the display unit 41 a (display area) of the display device 41. In the gaming machine of this example, the hold display of the hold and the hold display of the standby hold may display the same shape and the like but different sizes (vertical and horizontal sizes). As shown in FIG. 191 to FIG. 192, the hold and the standby are held and displayed using at least one common display data stored and held in the ROM (for example, the image ROM 322 or the PROM 321 in FIG. 5). The display data is image data of a still image, image data of a moving image, or image data of a plurality of frames of a still image forming a series of animations. The examples of FIGS. 191 to 192 described below illustrate a case in which data of a size that can be used as it is as the display data of the suspended display is stored and held as the common display data.

  First, FIG. 191 (a) shows a state where the first winning has occurred during the special figure change and the first hold has occurred, and each hold display is performed at a predetermined position on the display unit 41a. . As shown in the figure, as the control processing of such a hold display, as shown in the figure, the display of the change during the hold (the hold) is performed by, for example, storing the still image data stored as the common display data. Of the image data stored as the common display data is changed from the beginning (in this case, reduced) and displayed. are doing. Here, “display as it is” means displaying an image without changing its display size (displaying an image size stored as common display data as a display size). In this control process, specifically, for example, in step E224 in the flowchart of FIG. 174 described above, the common display data is set to be displayed at the holding position with the same display size, and in step E229 in the flowchart, This can be realized by changing the display size of the common display data and setting the display to be displayed at a predetermined standby hold position (in this case, the first standby hold predetermined position). Here, “the display size as it is” means an image size stored as common display data.

Next, FIG. 191 (b) illustrates a state in which a start winning has occurred from the state of FIG. In this state, similarly to the first standby hold, the display of the newly generated second standby hold is performed by changing the display size of the image data stored as the common display data from the beginning. This is realized by displaying (in this case, reduced).
Next, in FIG. 191 (c), the start winning is generated again from the state of FIG. 191 (b), and the number of standby holds becomes three. (Same image) is displayed. In this state, the display of the newly generated third standby hold is performed by displaying the image data stored as the common display data at a predetermined position in the same display size as in the case of the hold. Has been realized.

  Next, FIG. 192 (a) shows an animation in which the image of the hold display of the third standby hold is reduced from the state of FIG. 191 (c), and the normal standby shown in FIG. 191 (c) and the like are executed. FIG. 11 illustrates a state in which an image having the same size as that of the hold display is displayed as a third standby hold. In this way, for example, as a kind of the prefetch notice effect, an animation in which the size of the image is changed to the normal size after the image of the same size as the hold is once displayed as the standby hold can be displayed. As the control process for this, for example, a setting process of performing display in which the image of the hold display changes from the size of the hold to the size of the standby hold in step E230 in the flowchart of FIG. What is necessary is just to perform a process of setting a scenario table for specifying the stored motion table for a scenario layer for suspension display.

  Next, in FIG. 192 (b), the start winning is generated again from the state of FIG. 191 (b), and the number of standby holds becomes three. (Same image) is displayed at a specific position different from the predetermined position. In the display of the newly generated third standby hold in this state, similarly to the hold, the image data stored as the common display data is displayed at the specific position with the same display size as it is. Is realized.

  Next, FIG. 192 (c) illustrates a state in which an animation is executed in which the image of the hold display of the third standby hold from the state of FIG. 192 (b) is moved to a predetermined position while being reduced. . In this way, for example, as a kind of pre-reading notice effect, a display for temporarily moving to a predetermined position after a standby hold is displayed at a position different from the predetermined position is executed, and at the same time as the movement to the predetermined position, the size of the hold display is increased. It is also possible to display an animation in which the size changes from the same size as the hold to the normal size of the hold. In addition, as a control process therefor, for example, the display in which the display position moves to the predetermined position while the image of the hold display is changed from the size of the hold to the size of the standby hold in step E230 in the flowchart of FIG. A setting process to be performed (a process of setting a scenario table for specifying a motion table stored in advance for a scenario layer for suspension display) may be performed.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 191 to 192, in this example, common display data that can be used as it is for one display is stored and held, and the other display is used for displaying the hold and the standby hold. In this case, the hold display is realized by a control process of changing the display size of the common display data (vertical and horizontal size or vertical or horizontal size is enlarged or reduced). While realizing various on-hold display effects, the display data to be stored and held can be reduced by half compared to the case where different display data are stored and held by both, and the storage capacity of the display data can be reduced. . Also, compared to a case where the holding image of the holding (changing holding) and the holding image of the standby holding are displayed in the same size, an interesting and novel holding display is realized, and the interest of the game is enhanced. In particular, as shown in FIG. 191 (c) and FIGS. 192 (a) to (c), when the display size is changed after being once displayed in the same size as the common display data, dynamic, interesting and novel Hold display is realized, and the interest of the game is further enhanced.
The common display data for the hold display is not limited to one. For example, when the form of the image of the hold display is changed depending on the effect mode, different display data is stored for each effect mode. Also, the above display example is an example in which common display data that can be used as it is as a hold is stored. Conversely, common display data that can be used as it is as a standby hold is stored, and the hold is A mode in which the common display data is displayed by changing its size may be used.

  In addition, as described above, when each hold display of the hold and the standby hold is performed using the common display data, a function of changing the color of an image based on the stored display data at the time of display is provided. The color of the image of the common display data may be appropriately changed and displayed according to the function. In this way, for example, it is possible to make the color of the image of the hold display different from the normal state (the state in which the prefetching advance effect is not performed) as the prefetching advance effect without increasing the storage capacity of the display data.

  When a newly generated hold display is performed as in the display examples shown in FIGS. 192 and 192 described above, an image of the hold display previously displayed and made invisible (for example, a display layer on the front side). That was covered by another image and made invisible or made invisible by setting the transparency of the hold display image itself), but can be viewed at the timing when a new hold occurs and a new hold occurs (For example, changing the display layer displaying the hold display image to the front display layer, erasing another image covered on the front side, or viewing the transparency of the hold display image itself May be realized by making settings such as changing to For example, when the hold display shown in FIG. 191 (a) or FIG. 191 (b) is performed, for all the standby holds (standby hold 1 to 4), the image of the standby hold obtained by reducing the common display data is displayed on the near side, for example. Is displayed in each predetermined position in an invisible state by the different image (concealment image) displayed on the screen, and every time the number of the waiting hold increases due to the start winning, the corresponding waiting holding image is covered and hidden. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which another image (concealing image) is erased and switched to a viewable state, whereby a number of standby-hold images corresponding to the number of holds are displayed. In addition, control of display / non-display of the image of the suspension (suspension during fluctuation) may be similarly performed.

Next, an inventive concept that can be extracted or developed from the above-described embodiment will be described below.
(Invention concept (1))
In the present embodiment, as described in step D434 and the like and in FIGS. 101 and 145 to 149 and the like, the control means (the effect control device 300) that controls the display means (the display device 41) to perform the effect of the variable display game is provided. A state in which an image of identification information (for example, a numeral constituting a pattern of a decorative special figure) and an image of effect information (for example, a specific character (for example, the aforementioned tiger taro C7) with an animal or the like as a motif) overlap (display position is When performing an effect display with a matching state), if the image of the effect information is displayed as the back side in the overlapping portion, the effect image (eg, movie) M1) is arranged behind the image of the identification information (for example, the image of the right symbol KTR or the like), and when the effect information image is displayed as the near side in the overlapping portion, The effect image is arranged on the back side of the image of the identification information, and an image (for example, the image GM1) obtained by partially copying a part of the effect image including the image of the effect information is used as the image of the identification information. It has a function to arrange it on the near side.
In addition, "dispose on the back side" means to arrange and display on a different display layer on the back side, and "dispose on the near side" means to arrange and display on a different display layer on the near side. It is. Here, the display layer is a layer (in this embodiment, for example, a motion layer) that determines the context (display priority) as to whether the image is to be displayed as the near side or the far side. Means

  Thereby, the dynamic effect in which the image of the specific effect information is switched to the back side or the near side with respect to the image of the identification information can be easily performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, the control of the effect is such that, even if the order of the image of the effect information and the image of the identification information are different, the effect image including the image of the effect information is arranged behind the image of the identification information, Only when the information image is displayed on the near side, an image obtained by partially copying a part (or a plurality of portions) of the effect image including the effect information image in the effect image is arranged on the near side of the identification information image. It can be realized with easy control of only. In addition, since the portion arranged on the front side is only the portion including the image of the specific effect information in the effect image arranged on the back side, at least the region other than the area overlapping the portion including the image of the specific effect information is included. Is reliably visible, and the advantage that the image of the identification information (and other images disposed on the back side including the identification information) is not unnecessarily obstructed by the image on the near side is obtained.

The inventive concept (1) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Display means for displaying a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information; and control means for controlling the display means. If the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. Gaming machines that can generate
The control means includes:
In the display area (screen) of the display means, when performing an effect display in which the image of the identification information and the image of the effect information different from the identification information at least partially overlap,
In the case where the image of the effect information is displayed as the back side in the overlapping portion, the effect image including the image of the effect information is arranged on the back side of the image of the identification information,
In the case where the image of the effect information is displayed as the near side in the overlapping portion, the effect image is arranged on the back side of the image of the identification information, and the portion including the image of the effect information in the effect image. A gaming machine having a function of arranging an image obtained by partially copying (or a plurality of images) in front of the image of the identification information.
Here, the effect image may be a still image or a moving image (for example, an image of a predetermined frame of the moving image).
The effect image means an image in which effect image data (still image or moving image data) stored in a predetermined storage means (the image ROM 322 in this embodiment) is drawn as a whole. However, the display is not necessarily limited to that displayed on the entire screen.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the control unit (the effect control device 300) translucents an image (an image obtained by copying a portion including the effect information image in the effect image) arranged in front of the identification information image. It can be displayed as a shape. As a specific example, for example, it is possible to perform translucent control using the effect codes (effect 1 code, effect 2 code) of the motion table shown in the lower part of FIG. 149 described above. As a result, the advantage that the visibility of the identification information image is ensured to a certain extent even in a portion where the image arranged on the front side and the image of the identification information overlap, and the image arranged on the front side and the effect image arranged on the back side In addition, the image of the identification information and the like are overlapped, and the color and the density of the image of the effect information and the identification information and the like are changed, so that an effect of increasing interest is obtained.

The above configuration is expressed as a lower concept (1-2) of the inventive concept (1) as follows.
The control means includes:
A game machine having a function of arranging an image obtained by copying a part including the effect information image in the effect image in a semi-transparent shape in front of the identification information image.

The background of the inventive concept (1) and the like will be described below.
Conventionally, as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine having a display device capable of displaying a variable display game based on a plurality of pieces of identification information and capable of generating a state advantageous to a player according to a result of the variable display game. Are known.
In this type of gaming machine, as described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-192622, various effects including a notice suggesting a result of the variable display game and the like are provided as effects at the time of the variable display game. This is performed by the display device or the like.
By the way, in this type of gaming machine, the effects are diversified, but for example, more dynamic and interesting effects are required.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The invention concept (1) and the like of the present application have been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine having a high interest in games, and achieves this object.

(Invention concept (2))
In this embodiment, as described in step D434 and the like, and in FIGS. 145, 146, 148, 150, and 151, the control for controlling the display means (the display device 41) to perform the effect of the variable display game is performed. The means (production control device 300) is composed of an image of identification information (for example, a number constituting a design of a decorative special figure) and an image of production information (for example, a specific character (for example, the aforementioned tiger taro C7) using an animal or the like as a motif). When performing an effect display with an overlapping state, if the image of the effect information is displayed as the back side in the overlapping portion, the effect image (for example, the image of the movie M1) including the effect information image is identified. When arranged on the back side of the image of the information, and when the image of the effect information is displayed as the near side in the overlapping portion, while the effect image is arranged on the back side of the image of the identification information, It has the ability to place the serial presentation image on the front side of the image identification information as the semi-transparent.

  Thereby, the dynamic effect in which the image of the specific effect information is switched to the back side or the near side with respect to the image of the identification information can be easily performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, the control of the effect is such that, even if the order of the image of the effect information and the image of the identification information are different, the effect image including the image of the effect information is arranged behind the image of the identification information, Only when the information image is displayed on the near side, the effect image can be realized by a simple control such that the effect image is arranged in a semi-transparent shape and is arranged on the near side of the identification information image. In particular, since the image cutting operation (partial copying operation) as in the concept (1) does not occur, the processing load on the control unit can be reduced. In addition, since the effect image arranged in the front side is a translucent image, the visibility of the image of the identification information (and other images arranged on the back side including the identification information) is also ensured. it can. In addition, the effect image arranged on the near side, the effect image arranged on the back side, the image of the identification information and the like overlap, and the color of the image for the effect (including the image of the effect information) and the image of the identification information and the like are changed. The effect of changing the concentration and increasing interest is obtained.

The inventive concept (2) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Display means for displaying a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information; and control means for controlling the display means. If the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. Gaming machines that can generate
The control means includes:
In the display area (screen) of the display means, when performing an effect display in which the image of the identification information and the image of the effect information different from the identification information at least partially overlap,
In the case where the image of the effect information is displayed as the back side in the overlapping portion, the effect image including the image of the effect information is arranged on the back side of the image of the identification information,
In the case where the image of the effect information is displayed as the near side in the overlapped portion, the effect image is arranged at the far side of the image of the identification information, and the effect image is displayed in a semi-transparent shape. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of arranging it on the near side of an image.

(Invention concept (3))
In the present embodiment, as described in step D444 and the like, FIG. 102, FIGS. 155 (b) to 157 (b), and FIGS. 159 to 161 and the like, the identification information (for example, “1” to A plurality of pieces of effect information (for example, a character such as “Taro Taro” set for each piece of identification information and different for each piece of identification information) other than “9”) are displayed on the screen 41a of the display means (display device 41). Is displayed in an area (the main screen area) different from the variable display of the special figure, and depending on the combination of the displayed effect information of the plurality of pieces of the effect information, the mode or result of the special figure variable display game (in this embodiment, the presence or absence of the reach action) ) Can be executed (for example, an effect to notify occurrence of reach). Thereby, the appearance rate as a stop symbol is lower than that in the case where a notification effect is performed by using, for example, the identification information and additional information added to the identification information (for example, a character added for each number of the decorative special figure). Information and the like can appear in the notification effect, and a dynamic effect that is easy to understand can be achieved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (3) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Display means for displaying a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information; and control means for controlling the display means. If the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. Gaming machines that can generate
The control means includes:
Displaying a plurality of effect information other than the identification information in an area (a plurality of places) different from an identification information display area in which a change display of the identification information is performed in a display area (screen) of the display means; A gaming machine capable of executing a notification effect for notifying or suggesting (notifying) the mode or result of the variable display game by a combination of the displayed effect information.
The effect information may be used as additional information added to the identification information or may not be the additional information.
The “identification information display area” corresponds to the above-described variable display area H1, and the “area different from the identification information display area” corresponds to the above-described main screen area.

The background of the above inventive concept (3) will be described below.
Conventionally, as a notification effect for notifying the occurrence of reach, for example, a display effect disclosed in JP-A-2009-136516 is known. This is to execute a reach occurrence notification effect in a notification mode according to the type of the attached character when a reach state occurs during execution of the variable display of the effect symbol (variation display of the identification information). Specifically, as described in, for example, FIG. 102 and paragraph 0453 of the same gazette, types of attached characters (additional information) added to stop symbols (eg, “1”, “2”) in the reach state If the character is a male character, the display "Double Reach!" Is displayed, and if the character is a female character, a display "Double Reach!"

  As described above, in the conventional notification effect, a character (effect information) for the notification effect is arranged around the identification information (for example, “1”, “2”, etc.) constituting the decorative special figure, and is integrated with the identification information. Since it is displayed only as an image of the additional information that is displayed in a variable manner (or stopped), the following problem occurs. That is, for example, since there is a considerable difference in the appearance rate between the types of symbols (that is, the types of identification information) displayed as stop symbols in the reach state, a symbol with a low appearance rate (for example, “7” which is a probable variable symbol) There is a problem that the player rarely sees the notification effect of the attached character added to the character. Also, there is a problem that characters (effect information) other than the additional information cannot be seen. Further, since the image of the character involved in the notification effect is only displayed together with the identification information as additional information, the content of the notification effect is difficult to understand. For example, in the case of the specific example of the above publication, the player may misunderstand that the display "Double reach!" Corresponds to the female character, and the type of the character corresponding to the display of the notification effect may be misleading. However, there is a problem that it is difficult for a player to understand the effect contents.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of effect information other than the identification information is displayed in an area different from the display of the fluctuation of the identification information, and a notification effect of notifying or suggesting (notifying) by a combination of the displayed effect information is performed. Therefore, the effect information with a low appearance rate as a stop symbol (for example, a character such as “Tora-Taro C7” used as the additional information of the probable-change pattern “7” with a low appearance rate) can also appear in the notification effect. In addition, it is possible to make the presentation information that is not the additional information of the decorative special map appear, thereby increasing the interest of the game, and also to make it easy to understand and provide a dynamic notification presentation. In particular, as in the present embodiment (FIG. 156, etc.), the variable display area H1 for performing the variable display of the identification information is arranged at the corner of the screen 41a, and the remaining area in the screen is larger than the variable display area H1. Is a mode in which effect information for an information effect is displayed in a large area (main screen area), a more intelligible and dynamic information effect can be realized.
The subordinate concept (3-2) of the above inventive concept (3) is expressed as follows.
The control means includes:
In the notification effect, an identification information display area for performing a variable display of the identification information is arranged at a corner of the display area (screen), and the remaining area in the display area has an area larger than that of the identification information display area. A gaming machine displaying the effect information in a large area.

  In this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 157 (c) and the like, a movable role (for example, a movable role 700) that can move with respect to the display screen 41a of the display device 41 is provided. The effect control device 300, which is a control means of the present invention, changes the image of the effect information (eg, the image of the rope C17 described above and the image of the rope C17 pulled by the tiger C7; (Linked image) is displayed on the display screen 41a. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect related to the accessory and the display, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

The above configuration is expressed as a subordinate concept (3-3) of the inventive concept (3) as follows.
A movable member movable with respect to a display area (screen) of the display means,
The gaming machine, wherein the control means has a function of displaying an image of the effect information (the linked image) that changes in conjunction with the operation of the movable accessory in a display area of the display means.

  In addition, when viewed from the front (that is, when viewed from the player), the movable role 700 according to the present embodiment has a display screen 41a such that at least the decorative part 701 (a main part for performing an effect) covers a part of the display screen 41a. In the screen (corresponding to the standing state or the state of being raised obliquely) located on the front of the display screen 41a, and the entire or almost entire area including the decorative portion 701 is located in a place where the front of the display screen 41a is not covered. State (corresponding to the initial state). Accordingly, when performing an effect that operates in conjunction with the linked image, the main part of the accessory 700 is reliably positioned within the field of view of the player by setting the accessory 700 in the above-described arrangement state on the screen. Thus, it is possible to surely show the player the effect linked with the movable auditorium by the display. In addition, when the effect in which the movable character and the linked image are linked is not performed, if the character 700 is set to the above-described off-screen arrangement state, the visual field of the player who is paying attention to the display screen 41a is not obstructed. The display effect using the entire display screen 41a can be shown to the player.

The above configuration is expressed as a lower concept (3-4) of the inventive concept (3) as follows.
The movable auditorium, as viewed from the front, at least a main part performing the effect is arranged in a screen located at the front of the display area so as to cover a part of the display area, and the whole or substantially including the main part A gaming machine, wherein the game machine can be moved to an off-screen arrangement state in which the entirety is located so as not to cover the front surface of the display area.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 165 (c) and the like, the display device 41 is provided with an accessory that can emit light (for example, the upper accessory 801), and the effect control device 300 as a control unit is A light-emitting linked image (an image of a character such as a tiger with a predetermined item) including predetermined light-emitting effect information (for example, a rose as a predetermined item) is displayed in the main screen area as an image of the effect information. And a function of causing the accessory to emit light in conjunction with the display of the light emission linked image. Thereby, the effect by the emission of the accessory is performed in conjunction with the display of the effect information by the display means, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

The above configuration is expressed as a lower concept (3-5) of the inventive concept (3) as follows.
Equipped with a light-emitting accessory separately from the display means,
The control means displays a light emission linked image including predetermined light emission effect information as an image of the effect information, and has a function of causing the accessory to emit light in conjunction with the display of the light emission linked image. Machine.

(Invention concept (4))
In this embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 146 (b) and 146 (c) and the like, the identification information (for example, the numbers “1” to “9”) constituting the decorative special figure and the identification information It is possible to temporarily change the effect information to suggest reliability (preliminary notice) in accordance with the positional relationship of the display position with no effect information (for example, a character such as "Taro Tarou"). For this reason, a novel and dynamic production is possible, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (4) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Display means for displaying a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information; and control means for controlling the display means. If the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. Gaming machines that can generate
The control means includes:
During the variable display game, in addition to the identification information, effect information other than the identification information is displayed in a display area (screen) of the display means, and an effect display in which a display positional relationship between the identification information and the effect information changes. Can be executed, and
In the effect display, when a display positional relationship between the identification information and the effect information becomes a predetermined positional relationship, a change in a display state or a display mode of an image displayed in the display area including at least the effect information is generated. Is possible,
A gaming machine having a configuration capable of suggesting a mode of the variable display game that proceeds thereafter or a result of the variable display game that is determined thereafter, depending on the presence or absence or the mode of the effect display.
Here, the effect information may be used as additional information added to the identification information, or may not be the additional information.
The “suggestable configuration” means a configuration that allows a so-called notice, and includes, for example, the occurrence probabilities of various aspects of the variable display game that have been selected by lottery and may proceed thereafter. The setting (specifically, for example, the setting of the type of the data table used for the lottery (for example, the notice distribution table used in steps D426 and D429 described above)) is changed before the lottery. The setting is different depending on the presence or absence or the mode. With this configuration, the player can empirically predict, to some extent, the mode of the variable display game that is likely to proceed thereafter, for example, from the presence or absence or the mode of the change, thereby increasing the interest of the game. The same applies to the “suggestable configuration” for the result of the variable display game that is determined thereafter. For example, a table (for example, the notice distribution table) used for a lottery that determines the presence or absence of the change or the mode is already set. A configuration in which a table having different contents is set in accordance with the determined result of the variable display game (for example, in the case of a big hit, a table having a relatively high probability of selecting the presence of a change is used. Is used, a table having a relatively high probability that the no change is selected is used, so that it is possible to indicate to the player that, for example, there is a high possibility of a big hit due to the performance of the effect with the change. ). With this configuration, the player can empirically predict, to some extent, the result of the variable display game that is likely to be determined later, for example, from the presence or absence or the mode of the change, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The change may be, for example, a change in the aspect (display color, display size, etc.) of the character as the effect information, or a change in the type of the character as the effect information. Then, the change may be such that the character as the effect information disappears, or the entire image including the character as the effect information may be in a blackened state (black-out state). Further, the change occurs when the display positional relationship between the identification information and the effect information has a predetermined positional relationship, and temporarily returns to a state before the change when the positional relationship is lost. Alternatively, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the display is generated when the display positional relationship between the identification information and the effect information becomes a predetermined positional relationship, and once changed, the state after the change is maintained thereafter.
Further, the predetermined positional relationship may be a state in which the display positions are close to each other within a predetermined distance, a state in which the display positions match at least in part (a state in which the display is at least partially overlapped), The position range may be such that one completely enters the other image.

(Invention concept (5))
Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 154 and the like, it is possible to give a sense of incongruity and to suggest the reliability by giving a time difference or making a symmetrical image to the same movie to be superimposed. For this reason, a novel and dynamic production is possible, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (5) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Display means for displaying a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information; and control means for controlling the display means. If the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. Gaming machines that can generate
The control means includes:
During the variable display game, in the display area (screen) of the display means, it is possible to execute an effect display by a moving image in which the display position of the effect information other than the identification information changes,
In the effect display, it is possible to display a plurality of the same moving image, overlapping the front and rear of the screen by providing a difference in playback timing or inversion state,
The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to indicate a mode of the variable display game that proceeds thereafter, or a result of the variable display game that is determined thereafter, depending on whether or not there is a difference between the reproduction timing and the inversion state in the effect display. A gaming machine.
The effect information may be used as additional information added to the identification information or may not be the additional information.
The “suggestable configuration” means a configuration that allows a so-called notice, and includes, for example, the occurrence probabilities of various aspects of the variable display game that have been selected by lottery and may proceed thereafter. The setting (specifically, for example, the setting of the type of the data table used for the lottery (for example, the notice distribution table used in steps D426 and D429 described above)) is changed before the lottery. The setting is different depending on the presence or absence or the mode. With this configuration, the player can empirically predict, to some extent, the mode of the variable display game that is likely to proceed thereafter, for example, from the presence or absence or the mode of the difference, thereby increasing the interest of the game. The same applies to the “suggestable configuration” for the result of the variable display game that is determined thereafter. For example, a table (for example, the notice distribution table) used for a lottery that determines the presence or absence of the difference or the mode is already set. A configuration in which a table having different contents is set according to the determined result of the variable display game (for example, in the case of a big hit, a table having a relatively high probability of selecting the presence of a difference is used, and Is used, a table having a relatively high probability that the difference is not selected is used, so that it is possible to indicate to the player that, for example, there is a high possibility of a big hit by performing the effect with the difference. ). With this configuration, the player can empirically predict, to some extent, the result of the variable display game, which is likely to be determined later, based on the presence or absence or the mode of the difference, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

(Invention concept (6))
In this embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163 and the like, the additional information added to the identification information of the decorative special figure and integrally displayed in a fluctuating manner (added to the number or the like which is the design of the decorative special figure) Character can jump out from the identification information display area (variable display area H1) in which the identification information is fluctuated and displayed on the main screen area. Is absent (the display of the additional information integrated with the identification information disappears and disappears), and the identification information from which the additional information does not protrude is changed and displayed with the additional information added. In addition to the SD mode, the additional information that pops out performs some effect. For this reason, a novel and dynamic production is possible, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, in a mode in which the protruding additional information is absent (is no longer displayed) in the identification information display area, the fact that the specific additional information protrudes and the type of the protruding additional information becomes clearer, which is more interesting. Easy-to-understand effects can be realized.

The inventive concept (6) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Display means for displaying a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information; and control means for controlling the display means. If the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. Gaming machines that can generate
The control means includes:
During the variation display game, the variation display of the identification information is executed in the identification information display area set in a part of the display area (screen) of the display means, and the variation display is added to the identification information and integrally displayed. A gaming machine capable of executing an effect display in which the added information moved from the identification information display area to outside the identification information display area.

The lower concept (6-2) of the inventive concept (6) is expressed as follows.
The control means includes:
In the effect display, the additional information moved from the identification information display area is not displayed in the identification information display area, while the additional information not moved from the identification information display area is identified by the identification information. A gaming machine characterized by being able to perform variable display integrally with corresponding identification information in an information display area.
The lower concept (6-3) of the inventive concept (6) is expressed as follows.
The control means includes:
At the time of the effect display, arranging the identification information display area at a corner of the screen, and displaying the additional information in a remaining area in the screen having a larger area than the identification information display area. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

(Invention concept (7))
Further, in this embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 155 (b) to 157 (b) and the like, it is possible to notify or suggest the time change or the end of the period by displaying a background with a change indicating the passage of time. That is, for example, during the variation display game of the special figure, the control means (the effect control device 300) displays the first parameter (the road and the surrounding scenery scrolling) on the screen 41a of the display means (the display device 41). And the second parameter (the image that changes between morning, noon, and evening), and it is possible to display a changing background, and it is possible to express the passage of time by displaying the background. At the same time, for example, by changing the second parameter in conjunction with the end of the predetermined period during the variable display game, it is possible to notify or suggest the end of the predetermined period (for example, the period of the reach occurrence notification effect). For this reason, a novel and dynamic production is possible, and the interest of the game can be improved. In this embodiment, the time lapse and the end of the period are not simply represented by one kind of parameter (changing image), but the time lapse is represented by two kinds of parameters, and the period end is represented by one of the parameters. Because it suggests, complex, interesting and dynamic production is possible.

The inventive concept (7) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Display means for displaying a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information; and control means for controlling the display means. If the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. Gaming machines that can generate
The control means includes:
In the display area (screen) of the display means, it is possible to display a changing background including a first parameter and a second parameter indicating the passage of time, and to change the second parameter in conjunction with the end of a predetermined period of the effect. The gaming machine is capable of notifying or suggesting the end of the predetermined period by causing the game machine to perform.
The background with the change may be displayed during the variable display game, or may be displayed during a period when the variable display game is not being performed. The period during which the variable display game is not being performed is, for example, a state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result (for example, a big hit state) or a state before the start of the variable display game (a so-called customer). Waiting state). Further, the background with the change is not limited to the one displayed on the background display layer.

(Invention concept (8))
In this embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 165 (a) and 165 (b) and the like, the occurrence of a reach or a big hit depends on whether or not there is a difference in the form (pose, etc.) when the characters are displayed together. It is possible to give a suggestion of reliability (preliminary notice). Thereby, a novel and dynamic effect can be achieved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (8) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Display means for displaying a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information; and control means for controlling the display means. If the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. Gaming machines that can generate
The control means includes:
During the variable display game, it is possible to execute an effect display in which a plurality of effect information that is not the identification information is displayed at a plurality of locations in a display area (screen) of the display means. A gaming machine having a configuration capable of indicating a mode of the variable display game that proceeds thereafter or a result of the variable display game that is determined thereafter, depending on whether or not there is a difference in the form.
The effect information may be used as additional information added to the identification information or may not be the additional information.
The “suggestable configuration” means a configuration that allows a so-called notice, and includes, for example, the occurrence probabilities of various aspects of the variable display game that have been selected by lottery and may proceed thereafter. The setting of the probability of the lottery (specifically, for example, the setting of the type of the data table used for the lottery (for example, the notice distribution table used in steps D426 and D429 described above)) is made prior to the lottery. This is a configuration in which different settings are made depending on whether or not there is a difference in the form of information or the form. With this configuration, the player can empirically predict to some extent, for example, the mode of the variable display game that is likely to proceed afterwards from the presence or absence or the mode of the form of the effect information, and the interest of the game increases. . The same applies to the “suggestable configuration” of the result of the variable display game that is determined thereafter, for example, a table used for a lottery that determines whether or not there is a difference in the form of the effect information (for example, the notice distribution) (For example, in the case of a big hit, the probability that the presence of the difference in the form of the effect information is selected) is set in the table having different contents according to the result of the variable display game that has already been determined. If a relatively high table is used, and if there is a deviation, a table with a relatively high probability of selecting no difference in the form of the effect information is used. A configuration that can suggest to the player that the possibility of a big hit by the performance execution is high). With this configuration, the player can empirically predict, to some extent, the result of the variable display game that is likely to be determined later, for example, from the presence or absence or the form of the difference in the form of the presentation information, thereby increasing the interest in the game. .

(Invention concept (9))
In this embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 163 (c) and 165 (c), the effect information (for example, a character such as a tiger lock C8) different from the identification information (the design of the decorative special figure) is displayed in a predetermined display mode. (Display color, display size, display position, pose, state of holding a predetermined item or not, etc.), the form of the accessory (light emitting state) , An operating state, an operating position, etc.) can be changed, and it is also possible to give a reliability indication (notice) such as occurrence of a reach or a big hit by this effect. Thereby, a novel and dynamic effect can be achieved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (9) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Display means for displaying a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information; and control means for controlling the display means. If the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. Gaming machines that can generate
Apart from the display means, there is an accessory that can change the mode (emission state, operation state, operation position, etc.),
The control means includes:
An effect display for displaying effect information that is not the identification information in a display area (screen) of the display means can be executed, and a mode of the accessory is changed in conjunction with a display mode of the effect information in the effect display. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of causing a game machine.
The effect information may be used as additional information added to the identification information or may not be the additional information.

(Invention concept (11))
Further, in the present embodiment, as described in FIGS. 166 and 167, it is possible to perform an effect of reducing the image of a plurality of objects including the decorative large pattern of the special figure. In this effect, if the reduction ratio differs for each object. Is possible. Thereby, a novel and dynamic effect can be achieved, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, there is an effect that a required size can be held for each object. In addition, information that may affect the game, specifically, the above-mentioned holding display, holding number display, decorative small design, right-handed instruction display, and the like (a fourth design may be included) is excluded from the reduction target. Thereby, the function of notifying these images (the function of notifying the player of the number of holds and the like) can be sufficiently maintained even during the reduced effect. That is, information that is likely to affect the game is not reduced and is not reduced, and character information (for example, serif display, change frequency display) that is difficult to see even if the reduction target object is excessively reduced is reduced. Is reduced, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing or overlooking information, thereby preventing the game from being adversely affected, and suppressing the player from feeling tired or uncomfortable.

The inventive concept (11) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display unit (for example, the display device 41) capable of displaying a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information; and a control unit (for example, an effect control device 300) for controlling the display unit. When a predetermined result is obtained, in a gaming machine capable of generating an advantageous state for the player,
The control means includes:
It is possible to execute a reduced display effect in which an image of a target object including the identification information (for example, a large decorative design) displayed in a display area (display section 41a) of the display means is reduced,
A gaming machine, wherein an effect in which a reduction ratio is different for each object can be executed as the reduced display effect.
Alternatively, the above configuration is expressed as an inventive concept (11a) and an inventive concept (11b) as follows.
(Invention concept (11a))
A display unit (for example, the display device 41) capable of displaying a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information; and a control unit (for example, an effect control device 300) for controlling the display unit. When a predetermined result is obtained, in a gaming machine capable of generating an advantageous state for the player,
The control means includes:
A reduced display effect in which an image of a target area including a range in which the identification information (for example, a large decorative design) is displayed in a display area (display section 41a) of the display means is reduced,
In the reduced display effect, among the plurality of objects displayed in the target area, only the reduction target object is reduced, and the non-reduction target objects are not reduced.
(Invention concept (11b))
A gaming machine wherein an effect in which a reduction ratio is different for each object to be reduced can be executed as the reduced display effect.
The identification information includes first identification information to be reduced (for example, a large decorative pattern) and the first identification information in a normal state (a state in which a special display such as the reduced display effect is not performed). The second identification information (for example, a decorative small design) which is displayed smaller than the information and is displayed separately from the first identification information (displayed as different objects at different positions) so as to be always visible to the player. ), And the object not to be reduced includes at least the second identification information.

(Invention concept (11-1))
Further, in the present embodiment, as described in FIG. 167 (a), the configuration may be such that the display angle during or after reduction of the image to be reduced in the reduced display effect changes to a different angle for each object. Can be increased. The image to be reduced may be displayed in a state in which the image is moved so as to be three-dimensionally inclined in the front-back direction, and the display angle may be different for each object including the change in the display angle in the front-back direction. Thereby, a novel and dynamic effect can be achieved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (11-1) having the above configuration is represented as follows.
Display means for displaying a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information; and control means for controlling the display means. If the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. Gaming machines that can generate
The control means includes:
A reduced display effect in which an image of a target area including a range in which the identification information is displayed in a display area (display section 41a) of the display means is reduced,
A gaming machine, characterized in that an effect in which the display angle of an image to be reduced differs for each object can be executed as the reduced display effect.

(Invention concept (11-2))
Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 167 (b), at the time of the reduced display effect, the image of the area to be reduced and the image such as a new background located around the image of the area to be reduced are displayed. (For example, differences in brightness and color, differences in color, etc.) can be provided. By providing such a contrast, the reduced image becomes easy to see, and the display effect becomes more impressive. Thereby, a novel and dynamic effect can be achieved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (11-2) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Display means for displaying a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information; and control means for controlling the display means. If the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. Gaming machines that can generate
The control means includes:
A reduced display effect in which an image of a target area including a range in which the identification information is displayed in a display area (display section 41a) of the display means is reduced,
When executing the reduced display effect, a contrast (for example, a difference in lightness and darkness, a difference in color, and the like) between an image to be reduced and a background image located around an area where the image to be reduced is displayed is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that the effect provided can be executed.

(Invention concept (11-3))
In this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 167 (c), at the time of the reduced display effect, the image to be reduced is displayed translucently, and a new background image or another effect is provided on the back side of the image to be reduced. It is possible to perform a display in which the use image can be seen through. Thereby, a novel and dynamic effect can be achieved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (11-3) having the above configuration is represented as follows.
Display means for displaying a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information; and control means for controlling the display means. If the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. Gaming machines that can generate
The control means includes:
A reduced display effect in which an image of a target area including a range in which the identification information is displayed in a display area (display section 41a) of the display means is reduced,
When the reduced display effect is performed, an image to be reduced is displayed translucently, and an effect in which a background image or another effect image can be seen through on the back side of the reduced image can be executed. Gaming machine.

(Invention concept (11-4))
In this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 168, it is possible to perform an effect of enlarging images of a plurality of objects including a decorative large pattern of a special figure. In this effect, it is possible to vary the enlargement ratio for each object. It is possible. Thereby, a novel and dynamic effect can be achieved, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, there is an effect that an appropriate size can be held for each object. In addition, information that may affect the game, specifically, the above-described holding display, holding number display, decoration small design, right-hand instruction display, and the like (a fourth design may be included) are excluded from the enlargement target. Thus, the function of notifying these images (the function of notifying the player of the number of reservations and the like) can be sufficiently maintained even during the enlarged effect. In other words, information that is likely to affect the game is not excluded from the enlargement target and is not enlarged, and character information (for example, serif display and change count display) that is difficult to see if the object to be enlarged is excessively enlarged is not enlarged. Is reduced, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing or overlooking information, thereby preventing the game from being adversely affected, and suppressing the player from feeling tired or uncomfortable.

The inventive concept (11-4) having the above configuration is represented as follows.
A display unit (for example, the display device 41) capable of displaying a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information; and a control unit (for example, an effect control device 300) for controlling the display unit. When a predetermined result is obtained, in a gaming machine capable of generating an advantageous state for the player,
The control means includes:
It is possible to execute an enlarged display effect in which an image of a target object including the identification information (for example, a large decorative design) displayed in a display area (display section 41a) of the display means is enlarged,
A gaming machine, wherein an effect in which an enlargement ratio differs for each object can be executed as the enlarged display effect.

(Invention concept (11-5))
Further, in the present embodiment, the display angle during or after the enlargement of the image to be enlarged in the enlarged display effect may be different for each object, thereby increasing the interest. The image to be enlarged may be displayed in a state where the image moves three-dimensionally in the forward and backward directions, and the display angle may be different for each object including the change in the display angle in the forward and backward directions. Thereby, a novel and dynamic effect can be achieved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (11-5) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Display means for displaying a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information; and control means for controlling the display means. If the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. Gaming machines that can generate
The control means includes:
An enlarged display effect in which an image of the target object including the identification information displayed in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display unit is enlarged;
A gaming machine, wherein an effect in which a display angle of an image to be enlarged differs for each object can be executed as the enlarged display effect.

(Invention concept (11-6))
Further, in the present embodiment, at the time of the enlarged display effect, the image to be enlarged is displayed translucently, and the image of the new background or another image for effect can be displayed behind the image to be enlarged. It is possible. Thereby, a novel and dynamic effect can be achieved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (11-6) having the above configuration is represented as follows.
Display means for displaying a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information; and control means for controlling the display means. If the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. Gaming machines that can generate
The control means includes:
An enlarged display effect in which an image of the target object including the identification information displayed in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display unit is enlarged;
In the enlargement display effect, an image to be enlarged is displayed translucently, and an effect in which a background image or another effect image can be seen through behind the enlarged image can be executed. Machine.

(Invention concept (11-7))
Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 168 (b) and 168 (c), at the time of the enlarged display effect, an effect of variably displaying the decorative large design (identification information) in the image to be enlarged is performed. Is possible. Thereby, a novel and dynamic effect can be achieved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (11-7) having the above configuration is represented as follows.
Display means for displaying a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information; and control means for controlling the display means. If the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result, it is advantageous to the player. Gaming machines that can generate
The control means includes:
An enlarged display effect in which the image of the target object displayed in the display area (display section 41a) of the display means is enlarged;
A gaming machine capable of executing an effect of variably displaying the identification information in an enlarged image at the time of the enlarged display effect.

(Invention concept (12))
In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171 and the like, when performing animation display (moving display) as hold display, image data of the preceding hold display (still image data for each frame of animation) Alternatively, the subsequent hold display including the latest hold display can be performed by copying the image data of each frame of the animation obtained by expanding the moving image data. In other words, it is possible to execute the preceding hold display and the subsequent hold display using the same image data for each frame of the animation (for each frame of the animation). As a result, all the suspended displays of the animations are synchronized, and it is possible to realize an effect of a suspended display with an interesting animation that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. In other words, when the animation is executed as the hold display, if the animation of one hold display and the animation of the other hold display are not synchronized, there is a problem that the player may feel uncomfortable, but this can be solved. Thereby, a novel and dynamic effect can be achieved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (12) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
On the condition that there is a starting prize (winning of a game ball to the starting area), a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed on the display area (display section 41a) of the display means can be executed, A gaming machine capable of generating a state advantageous to a player when a result of the variable display game is a predetermined result,
A start storage unit (game control device 100) for extracting determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on a winning start and storing the determination information as a start memory of the variable display game;
When there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control is performed to execute the corresponding variable display game from the one with the first winning prize, and the control is performed in response to the execution of one of the variable display games. A variable display game control means (game control device 100) for performing control to erase one start memory corresponding to the variable display game;
As a start memory display (so-called hold display) in the display area corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means, animation at a plurality of positions (a plurality of positions in the display area) corresponding to the number of the start memories. Effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing display in the display area,
The effect control means,
When a plurality of start memories for executing the animation display are generated, the image data of the animation display in the previous start memory (priority hold) corresponding to the previous start winning is copied for each frame of the animation (that is, for each frame of the animation). And performing the animation display of the subsequent start memory (subsequent hold) using the copied image data (that is, the same image data for each frame as the animation display of the previous start memory). Machine.
Here, the subsequent start memory (subsequent hold) includes at least the latest start memory (latest hold) corresponding to a new start winning.
Further, "copying the image data of the animation display of the previous start memory for each frame of the animation and performing the animation display of the subsequent start memory using the copied image data" means, for example, moving image data. When performing the animation display by using the same image based on the image data for each frame of the animation developed from predetermined moving image data for the animation display of the previous start memory, the same image is displayed in the display area. Is displayed at the position where the animation display of the start memory is performed, and at the same time, the position is also displayed at the position where the animation display of the subsequent start memory is performed. "

(Invention concept (12-1))
Further, in this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 170, it is possible to copy the image data of the preceding hold display from the time of the hold shift and perform the subsequent hold display including the latest hold display. As a result, except for the period until a new start winning is generated and there is a next hold shift, all the hold displays of the animation are synchronized (see FIG. 170 (c)), and the player has a high level of interest without discomfort. The effect of holding display by animation can be realized. In other words, when the animation is executed as the hold display, if the animation of one hold display and the animation of the other hold display are not synchronized, there is a problem that the player may feel uncomfortable, but this can be solved. Thereby, a novel and dynamic effect can be achieved, and the interest of the game can be improved. Since the copy is performed from the time of the hold shift, at the time of starting the hold display of the latest hold corresponding to a new start winning, the hold display of the latest hold is executed from the beginning as illustrated in FIG. 170 (b). As a result, a state that is not synchronized with the hold display of the preceding hold temporarily occurs, but this also has the effect of improving the interest as a kind of effect.

The inventive concept (12-1) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
On the condition that there is a starting prize (winning of a game ball to the starting area), a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed on the display area (display section 41a) of the display means can be executed, A gaming machine capable of generating a state advantageous to a player when a result of the variable display game is a predetermined result,
A start storage unit (game control device 100) for extracting determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on a winning start and storing the determination information as a start memory of the variable display game;
When there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control is performed to execute the corresponding variable display game from the one with the first winning prize, and the control is performed in response to the execution of one of the variable display games. A variable display game control means (game control device 100) for performing control to erase one start memory corresponding to the variable display game;
As a start memory display (so-called hold display) in the display area corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means, animation at a plurality of positions (a plurality of positions in the display area) corresponding to the number of the start memories. Effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing display in the display area,
The start storage means stores the start memories in order of occurrence, and
The variable display game control means is configured to execute a variable display game corresponding to the oldest start memory (start memory with the earliest start winning) among the start memories stored in the start storage means. And a shift process for raising the order of the remaining start memories one by one (so-called hold shift process).
The effect control means,
During the execution of the animation display of the previous start memory (preceding hold) corresponding to the previous start winning, the subsequent start memory (succeeding hold) corresponding to the new start winning and the start memory to perform the animation display Occurs, the animation display of the subsequent start memory is temporarily started from the beginning regardless of the previous start memory, and after the shift processing is performed, the animation display of the previous start memory (priority hold) is performed. The image data of the animation display is copied for each frame of the animation (each frame of the animation), and the copied image data (that is, the same image data for each frame (for each frame) as the animation display in the previous start memory) is copied. A gaming machine characterized in that the animation display of a subsequent start memory (subsequent hold) is performed by using the animation display.

(Invention concept (12-2))
In this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 171, the image data of the preceding hold display is copied from the time of the new starting prize winning (the time of starting the subsequent hold animation display) and the subsequent hold display including the latest hold display is performed. May be displayed. With this configuration, the suspended displays of the animations are all synchronized from the beginning (see FIG. 171 (b)), and the effect of the suspended display with an interesting animation that does not make the player uncomfortable can be realized. In other words, when the animation is executed as the hold display, if the animation of one hold display and the animation of the other hold display are not synchronized, there is a problem that the player may feel uncomfortable, but this can be solved. Thereby, a novel and dynamic effect can be achieved, and the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, in particular, all the suspended displays of the animation are synchronized from the beginning, so that the effect is high.

The inventive concept (12-2) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
On the condition that there is a starting prize (winning of a game ball to the starting area), a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed on the display area (display section 41a) of the display means can be executed, A gaming machine capable of generating a state advantageous to a player when a result of the variable display game is a predetermined result,
A start storage unit (game control device 100) for extracting determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on a winning start and storing the determination information as a start memory of the variable display game;
When there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control is performed to execute the corresponding variable display game from the one with the first winning prize, and the control is performed in response to the execution of one of the variable display games. A variable display game control means (game control device 100) for performing control to erase one start memory corresponding to the variable display game;
As a start memory display (so-called hold display) in the display area corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means, animation at a plurality of positions (a plurality of positions in the display area) corresponding to the number of the start memories. Effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing display in the display area,
The effect control means,
During the execution of the animation display of the previous start memory (preceding hold) corresponding to the previous start winning, the subsequent start memory (subsequent hold) corresponding to the new start winning and the start memory to perform the animation display Occurs, the image data of the animation display in the previous start memory (preceding hold) is copied for each frame of the animation (each frame of the animation) from the start of the animation display in the subsequent start memory. Using the copied image data (that is, the same image data for each frame (frame) as the animation display of the previous start memory), the animation display of the subsequent start memory (subsequent hold) is performed. A gaming machine.

(Invention concept (13))
In this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 176 and FIG. 177, in order to synchronize the animations of all the holding displays (in this case, also including the holding while changing), all the holding animation timers, which are the same timer, are used. Can control the progress of the animation of the hold display. Due to this feature, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 176 (a) (the state of all animations of the hold display is synchronized), there is a new start winning (special figure 2), and a new hold display corresponding to the new start win Even if (the latest hold display) is started, the animation of the latest hold display is also synchronized with other hold displays from the beginning as shown in FIG. 176 (b). Thereby, a novel and dynamic effect can be achieved, and the interest of the game can be improved.
In particular, with this configuration, with a simple configuration using one timer, the suspended displays of the animations are all synchronized from the beginning, and an effect of a suspended display with an interesting animation that does not make the player uncomfortable can be realized. In other words, when the animation is executed as the hold display, if the animation of one hold display and the animation of the other hold display are not synchronized, there is a problem that the player may feel uncomfortable, but this can be solved. In addition, since all the animations of the hold display are managed by one hold animation timer, the control becomes easy.

The inventive concept (13) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
It is possible to execute a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed on the display area (display section 41a) of the display means on condition that there is a starting prize (winning of a game ball in the starting area). A gaming machine capable of generating a state advantageous to a player when a result of the display game is a predetermined result,
A start storage unit (game control device 100) for extracting determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on a winning start and storing the determination information as a start memory of the variable display game;
When there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control is performed to execute the corresponding variable display game from the one with the first winning prize, and the control is performed in response to the execution of one of the variable display games. A variable display game control means (game control device 100) for performing control to erase one start memory corresponding to the variable display game;
As a start memory display (so-called hold display) in the display area corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means, animation at a plurality of positions (a plurality of positions in the display area) corresponding to the number of the start memories. Effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing display in the display area,
The effect control means,
There is one start memory animation timer (pending animation timer) which is a timer for managing the progress of the animation display, and the start memory animation timer is constantly updated at least while at least one animation display is being executed. A game machine that manages the progress of the animation display of the plurality of start memories by the start memory animation timer when there are a plurality of the start memories that hold and perform the animation display.
Here, "managing the progress of the animation display of a plurality of start memories by the start memory animation timer" means, for example, that a frame in the middle of the animation display of the preceding start memory (a frame after the first) is displayed. When a subsequent start memory due to a new start winning is generated during execution, the animation display of the subsequent start memory is performed based on the value of the start memory animation timer in which the timekeeping operation is already in progress, based on the value of the first frame ( This means that the animation display is started and advanced from a frame (a frame later than the first frame) behind by a time corresponding to the value of the timer (first frame).
The start memory animation timer (hold animation timer) can also be called a start memory animation control timer (hold animation control timer). Further, as described with reference to FIG. 179 (a), the start memory animation timer (hold animation timer) may always be updated even if there is no start memory (suspend) (the timekeeping operation is always continued). When there is no storage (hold) (that is, when the number of holds is 0), the update may be stopped (the timing operation is stopped).

In the animation display, a plurality of modes in which the speed of the animation display (the apparent speed of the motion of the animation image) is different (when the range of the motion in which the animation makes a single cycle, in other words, a plurality of times in which the cycle time is different). And a plurality of modes (types) may be managed by using a single start-up memory animation timer. For example, as described in FIG. 177 and FIG. 179 (b), in a specific mode (type), the frame switching of the animation display is performed at a speed corresponding to the change of the value of the start memory animation timer on a one-to-one basis. (Frame advance), and in other modes (for example, the above-mentioned hold display A and hold display B) in which the speed of the animation display is different from that of the specific mode, the value of the start memory animation timer is different from the speed. One-to-one corresponds to a change in a value (for example, a value obtained by multiplication or division calculation by a predetermined number) multiplied by a corresponding coefficient (for example, 、 １, 、 ２, 2, 3,...). By performing the frame switching (frame feed) of the animation display at a speed, a plurality of modes having different animation display speeds can be changed by one timer (starting memory animation). It may be configured to implement in Activation Timer).
The inventive concept (13b) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The animation display has a plurality of modes in which the animation display speed (or cycle time) is different,
The effect control means,
By causing the animation display of each mode to proceed based on a value obtained by multiplying the value of the start storage animation timer by a coefficient as needed, even for a plurality of modes having different animation display speeds, one start storage animation A gaming machine characterized in that progress is managed by a timer.

(Invention concept (13-1))
Further, in this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 178, even if the hold display mode changes due to the effect mode switching, a new hold display mode can be displayed based on the same start memory animation timer (hold animation timer). It is. The progress of the hold display is continuously controlled based on one hold animation timer before switching to the effect mode. That is, even if the mode of the hold display is switched by the effect mode switching, the hold display of the new mode after the effect mode switching is not necessarily executed from the first frame of the animation (for example, the first frame of the movie). 179 (b), display is started from the frame corresponding to the value of the pending animation timer at that time. For this reason, it is possible to realize the effect mode switching without a sense of incongruity from the player with easy control. Thereby, a novel and dynamic effect can be achieved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (13-1) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
It is possible to execute a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed on the display area (display section 41a) of the display means on condition that there is a starting prize (winning of a game ball in the starting area). A gaming machine capable of generating a state advantageous to a player when a result of the display game is a predetermined result,
A start storage unit (game control device 100) for extracting determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on a winning start and storing the determination information as a start memory of the variable display game;
When there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control is performed to execute the corresponding variable display game from the one with the first winning prize, and the control is performed in response to the execution of one of the variable display games. A variable display game control means (game control device 100) for performing control to erase one start memory corresponding to the variable display game;
As a start memory display (so-called hold display) in the display area corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means, animation at a plurality of positions (a plurality of positions in the display area) corresponding to the number of the start memories. Effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing display in the display area,
The animation display is
The display mode or animation operation differs depending on the effect mode,
The effect control means,
It has one start memory animation timer (pending animation timer) that is a timer for managing the progress of the animation display, and the start memory animation timer is continuously updated even when the mode is switched to start a new effect mode. A gaming machine characterized in that the start-up memory animation timer manages the progress of the animation display newly started in response to a new effect mode at the time of mode switching.
Here, "the progress of the animation display newly started in response to a new effect mode at the time of mode switching is managed by the start storage animation timer" corresponds to, for example, a new effect mode at the time of mode switching. The new animation display is started based on the value of the start memory animation timer for which the timekeeping operation is already in progress, unless the value of the timer specifies the first frame. This means that the animation display is started and progressed from a frame (a frame later than the first frame) behind by a time corresponding to the value of the timer than the (frame).

(Invention concept (13-2))
As another mode of the animation display at the time of mode switching, as described with reference to FIG. 178 (b), the start storage animation timer is cleared (reset) at the time of mode switching, that is, the start storage at the time of mode switching. The timer operation of the animation timer is started from the beginning, and the progress of the animation display is managed by the start memory animation timer which started the timing operation from the beginning in this way, and when the mode is switched, the animation display is started from the beginning. There may be. In this case, the player can see the hold display in the new display mode corresponding to the new effect mode after the switching from the beginning, and at that point, the effect is enhanced. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (13-2) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
It is possible to execute a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed on the display area (display section 41a) of the display means on condition that there is a starting prize (winning of a game ball in the starting area). A gaming machine capable of generating a state advantageous to a player when a result of the display game is a predetermined result,
A start storage unit (game control device 100) for extracting determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on a winning start and storing the determination information as a start memory of the variable display game;
When there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control is performed to execute the corresponding variable display game from the one with the first winning prize, and the control is performed in response to the execution of one of the variable display games. A variable display game control means (game control device 100) for performing control to erase one start memory corresponding to the variable display game;
As a start memory display (so-called hold display) in the display area corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means, animation at a plurality of positions (a plurality of positions in the display area) corresponding to the number of the start memories. Effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing display in the display area,
The effect control means,
It has one start memory animation timer (pending animation timer) that is a timer for managing the progress of the animation display, and clears the start memory animation timer to start the timekeeping operation from the beginning when the mode is switched to start a new production mode. A gaming machine which starts and manages the progress of the animation display newly started in response to a new effect mode at the time of mode switching by the start storage animation timer.
Here, "the progress of the animation display newly started in response to a new effect mode at the time of mode switching is managed by the start storage animation timer" corresponds to, for example, a new effect mode at the time of mode switching. This means that the newly started animation display is started from the first frame (first frame) and progresses based on the value of the start storage animation timer that is cleared (reset).

(Invention concept (13-3))
In this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 177 (b), when an animation display is performed, for example, as a notice effect display that accompanies the display of the change of the decorative large design (special figure) in addition to the display of the suspension of the animation. The animation display of the effect related to the variable display is also controlled based on the common pending animation timer.
As described above, the effect display other than the hold display may be controlled by using the hold animation timer common to the hold display for controlling the effect display (such as the advance effect display of the variable display game). In addition to the above, the effects other than the hold display can be easily synchronized or linked with the hold display, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (13-3) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
It is possible to execute a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed on the display area (display section 41a) of the display means on condition that there is a starting prize (winning of a game ball in the starting area). A gaming machine capable of generating a state advantageous to a player when a result of the display game is a predetermined result,
A start storage unit (game control device 100) for extracting determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on a winning start and storing the determination information as a start memory of the variable display game;
When there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control is performed to execute the corresponding variable display game from the one with the first winning prize, and the control is performed in response to the execution of one of the variable display games. A variable display game control means (game control device 100) for performing control to erase one start memory corresponding to the variable display game;
An effect display (for example, a notice effect display) related to the change display of the identification information can be executed in the display area, and a start in the display means corresponding to a start memory stored in the start storage means. Effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing an animation display in a plurality of places (a plurality of positions in the display area) corresponding to the number of the start memories as a memory display (so-called hold display); ,
The effect control means,
A game having one start memory animation timer (hold animation timer) which is a timer for managing the progress of the animation display, wherein at least a part of the effect display is also managed by the start memory animation timer. Machine.

(Invention concept (14))
Next, in the gaming machine of the specific example, as described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 185, in the hold display on the display means (for example, the display device 41) for the player, the display mode of the hold image is changed to the normal display mode. (Normal hold), change suggestion mode (blinking hold), and special display mode (special hold). 181. The probability that the result of the fluctuation display game will be a big hit is higher in the case where the change display is normally held than in the case where the change display is displayed as blinking as shown in the first line of FIG. Is set. This makes it difficult for the hold during fluctuation to be a big hit than the normal hold when the blinking hold is the blinking hold, and makes it possible to clarify the distinction between the normal hold and the blinking hold, so that the degree of expectation in the hold display mode can be easily understood. In addition to the above, it is possible to provide a variety of effects in the hold display mode (that is, the display mode of the hold image), thereby improving the interest of the game.

As shown in the sixth row in FIG. 181, the big hit expectation in the hold display at the time of winning is set to be lower in the case where the hold display is the normal hold than in the case where the hold display is the flashing hold. I have. Accordingly, if the hold display at the time of winning is a blinking hold, it tends to be a big hit compared to the normal hold, and the distinction between the normal hold and the blinking hold can be made clearer, and the degree of expectation in the hold display mode can be easily understood. Can be performed, and the effect contents in the hold display mode can be varied, so that the interest of the game can be improved. As described above, by this setting, the player empirically feels that the blinking hold at the time of winning is easier to hit than the case of normal holding at the time of winning, but the first line in FIG. 181 described above. For example, if the blinking hold at the time of winning is continued as it is and the blinking hold is kept even after shifting to the fluctuating hold, the big hit compared to the case where the fluctuating hold is normal hold Since the probability of the game being played is low, the player watches the effect of the hold display while continuously wishing that the blinking hold at the time of winning will change thereafter (preferably changing to a special display mode), thereby improving the interest of the game. I do.
As described above, the characteristic shown in the sixth line of FIG. 181 (that is, the characteristic in which the big hit expectation is higher in the case of blinking holding than in the case of normal holding) is not limited to the time of the start winning prize. For example, at the time of the start winning, even if the standby hold displayed in the normal hold (normal display mode) is changed to the blinking hold (change suggestion mode) at any time before shifting to the changing hold, the configuration is effective. In this case, the same effect can be obtained.

As shown in the second line of FIG. 181, the rate at which the hold display is temporarily hidden (temporarily hidden) is higher in the case where the hold display is the normal hold than in the case where the hold display is the flash hold. It is set to be. As a result, the blinking hold is less likely to temporarily disappear than the normal hold, and this feature also makes it possible to clarify the distinction between the normal hold and the blinking hold, and to continue to display the blinking hold watched by the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Conventionally, the blinking hold (change suggestion mode) has only a role of suggesting a hold change, and there is no difference in the big hit expectation between the blinking hold and the normal hold. For this reason, for the player who focuses on the big hit, the blinking hold itself (the blinking hold without changing to the special hold or the blinking hold before the change to the special hold or the like) becomes a meaningless hold display mode. This has led to a problem that the interest in the game has been reduced. However, in this example, as described above, the big hit expectation and the ratio of non-display are set to have a difference from the normal hold, so that the above problem is solved.

The basic form of the inventive concept (14) having the above configuration is expressed, for example, as follows.
A variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed in the display area (display section 41a) of the display means can be executed based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition (start prize; winning of a game ball in the start area). A game machine capable of generating a special game state (big hit state) advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result,
A start storage unit (game control device 100) that extracts determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on the establishment of the execution condition and stores the determination information as start storage of the variable display game;
A variable display game control means (game control device 100) for performing control for executing the variable display game based on the start storage stored in the start storage means;
The hold image corresponding to the start memory, the change hold, which is the start memory during the execution of the change display game, and the standby hold, which is the start memory, in which the change display game is not executed, for the player. Effect control means (effects) capable of executing control of a hold display displayed in a display area (a display area that is visible to the player and preferably is a watch area of the player, for example, a display unit 41a that displays a variable display game, and so on) A control device 300).
The effect control means,
The display mode of the hold image is a special display mode (special hold), a change suggestion mode suggesting a change to the special display mode (flashing hold), and a normal display different from the special display mode and the change suggestion mode. Mode (normal hold), and any of a plurality of display modes including
The case where the suspended image of the fluctuating hold is in the normal display mode is more than the case where the fluctuating pending image (that is, the fluctuating pending image) is in the change suggesting mode. A gaming machine characterized in that the degree of expectation that the special gaming state occurs as a result of the variable display game is set to be high.
Here, "the change display game corresponding to the fluctuating hold is more suitable when the fluctuating hold hold image is in the normal display mode than when the fluctuating hold hold image is in the change suggestion mode. Is set so as to increase the degree of expectation that the special game state will occur as a result of, for example, when, from the player's point of view, the holding during the change is the blinking hold (for example, In some cases, or when the blinking is suspended after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the suspension during fluctuation is a normal suspension (for example, when the fluctuation is suspended normally, or when the fluctuation is suspended for a predetermined time after the fluctuation start) Is greater than the probability that the variable display game during the change becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. ) Incidence of each display mode as pending vary depending on which means that there is a different set.

Further, the characteristic portion of the first modification of the inventive concept (14) is expressed as follows.
The effect control means,
The display mode of the hold image is a special display mode (special hold), a change suggestion mode suggesting a change to the special display mode (flashing hold), and a normal display different from the special display mode and the change suggestion mode. Mode (normal hold), and any of a plurality of display modes including
When the suspended image of the fluctuating hold or the standby hold (that is, the fluctuating hold image or the standby hold image) is the normal display mode than the case of the change suggestion mode, Is set such that the ratio of temporarily hiding the reserved image during execution of the variable display game is higher.

The characteristic portion of the second modification of the inventive concept (14) is expressed as follows.
The effect control means,
The display mode of the hold image is a special display mode (special hold), a change suggestion mode suggesting a change to the special display mode (flashing hold), and a normal display different from the special display mode and the change suggestion mode. Mode (normal hold), and any of a plurality of display modes including
The special game state as a result of the variable display game corresponding to the standby hold is better when the standby hold image is in the change suggestion mode than when the standby hold image is in the normal display mode. A gaming machine characterized by being set to have a high degree of expectation of occurrence of an event.
Here, "standby hold" may be limited to "standby hold when the execution condition is satisfied (at the time of starting winning)".
The features of Modifications 1 and 2 of the inventive concept (14) may be combined with the basic form of the inventive concept (14), and the combination enhances the effect as described above.

(Invention concept (15))
Next, in the gaming machine of the specific example, as described with reference to FIGS. 186 to 189, the holding images of the fluctuating hold and the standby hold are different in form such as size or shape. The stop display is performed in different areas so that the hold images do not overlap (for example, a change hold is performed at a display position farther than the display position interval between the standby holds), and the stop display is also performed between the standby holds. The size, shape, and display position of each standby hold image are set so that the hold images do not overlap. In addition, the moving display (display in which the reserved image moves) in which the position of the reserved display is moved according to the reserved shift is configured to be executed after the variable pending before the reserved shift is hidden. In addition, the moving display from the standby hold to the standby hold enables the image of the standby hold on the front side to be moved to the front side even when the image of the standby hold on the front side is not hidden, and the standby display during the moving display is performed. The hold image of the hold may partially overlap another hold image of the hold.

Thereby, even if the hold images of the respective standby holds may overlap during the moving display, the moving display is performed from the state where there is no overlap, and the holding during the fluctuation and the respective standby holds do not overlap during the stop display. The display of the hold display is not difficult for the player to understand, and the relationship between the display layers and the display priority for the display of the changing hold and each standby hold in the control processing (when the images overlap, which one is displayed as the front side) Relationship) does not need to be considered, and control becomes easier. In addition, since the reserved images that did not overlap during the stop display may overlap during the moving display, it is possible to produce a dynamic, interesting and innovative pending display, and the interest of the game is improved.
In addition, in the case of the hold shift, since the moving display of the standby hold is started after the changing hold is deleted, the change of the special figure change display game is completed, the start memory is exhausted, or the hold is stopped. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the shift is performed.
In addition, the difference between the display areas of the pending images during the fluctuating hold and the standby hold, and the difference in the size or shape of the pending images during the fluctuating hold and the standby hold, the difference between the fluctuating hold and the standby hold. Is clearly shown to the player.

  Heretofore, in the related art, it is not easy to discriminate the holding images of the changing holding and the waiting holding, since each of the holding images is arranged close to each other and has a similar shape such as size and shape. Further, for example, when an effect of highlighting a part of the standby hold is performed, for example, by enlarging and displaying a part of the standby hold during the stop display of the standby hold, if the held images of the adjacent standby hold are overlapped, for example, In order to avoid such a problem that one reserved image overlaps with the reserved images on both sides and is hidden by the reserved images on both sides and becomes almost invisible, display priorities are set for the reserved images of each standby reservation (for example, the variable display). It is necessary to set display priorities in the order of execution), and there is a problem in that control becomes a burden. However, in the present embodiment, the above-described problem is solved because the standby images of the standby hold do not overlap during the stop display as described above.

The basic form of the inventive concept (15) having the above configuration is represented, for example, as follows.
A variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed in the display area (display section 41a) of the display means can be executed based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition (start prize; winning of a game ball in the start area). A game machine capable of generating a special game state (big hit state) advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result,
A start storage unit (game control device 100) that extracts determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on the establishment of the execution condition and stores the determination information as start storage of the variable display game;
The control for executing the variable display game is performed based on the start memory stored in the start storage means, and the order of the start memory (the order of the start winning or the change in the start prize) corresponding to the execution of one of the variable display games. A variable display game control means (game control device 100) for performing a hold shift for moving up a display game execution order),
The hold image corresponding to the start memory, the fluctuating hold that is the start memory during the execution of the fluctuating display game, and the standby hold that is the start memory where the fluctuating display game is not executed, for the player Effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing control of the hold display to be displayed in the display area,
The effect control means,
With the hold shift, the hold image of the hold can be moved to a predetermined display position of the previous hold image (a display including a frame (frame) that indicates a state in the middle of movement, the same applies hereinafter). And
In the normal state where the moving display is not performed, each reserved image is displayed at a predetermined display position of each reserved image that does not overlap each other,
A gaming machine, wherein during the execution of the movement display, a display in which the reserved images overlap each other can be executed.
Further, the basic form of the inventive concept (15) having the above configuration can be expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine capable of executing a variable display game based on satisfaction of a predetermined execution condition,
Starting storage means for storing information on the execution of the variable display game based on the establishment of the execution condition as a start memory and storing a predetermined number as an upper limit;
A variable display game control means for performing control for executing the variable display game based on the start memory stored in the start storage means;
An effect control unit capable of executing control for displaying a hold image corresponding to the start memory,
The variable display game control means,
When a plurality of start memories are stored in the start storage means, a holding shift is performed to advance the execution order of the start memories in accordance with the execution of one of the variable display games,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a movement display for moving a suspended image corresponding to a start memory for moving up the execution order with the suspension shift to a display position corresponding to the execution order after the advancement,
In the standby state in which the moving display is not executed, the respective reserved images do not overlap each other, and are displayed at respective display positions of the respective reserved images,
A gaming machine, wherein during the execution of the movement display, a display in which the reserved images overlap each other can be executed.
In the moving display, as in the above-described display example, the hold image of the standby hold (standby hold 1) having the first rank moves to the predetermined display position of the floating hold and the next hold image of the floating hold. May be included.

The characteristic portion of the first modification of the inventive concept (15) is expressed as follows.
The effect control means,
With the holding shift, the holding image of the waiting holding can perform a moving display in which the order moves to a predetermined display position of the preceding holding image,
A game machine characterized in that, when the moving display is started with the holding shift, the holding image of the changing hold before the holding shift is not displayed before the start of the moving display.
Note that the non-display means that the image data is deleted from the virtual drawing space (frame buffer of the VDP 312), the transparency of the image is increased, or the image is covered with another image having a higher display priority, This means that the player cannot be seen.

The characteristic portion of the second modification of the inventive concept (15) is expressed as follows.
The effect control means,
With the holding shift, the holding image of the waiting holding can perform a moving display in which the order moves to a predetermined display position of the preceding holding image,
At least in the normal state in which the moving display is not performed, the fluctuating pending image is displayed in a display area different from the standby pending image (preferably larger than the interval between the display positions of the standby pending. A gaming machine characterized by displaying a pending change at a remote display position).

The characteristic portion of the third variation of the inventive concept (15) is expressed as follows.
The effect control means,
With the holding shift, the holding image of the waiting holding can perform a moving display in which the order moves to a predetermined display position of the preceding holding image,
At least in the normal state in which the moving display is not performed, an image having a different size or form (shape, color, pattern, brightness, etc.) from the standby image of the standby standby is displayed as the floating image of the fluctuating standby. A gaming machine characterized by that:
The features of Modifications 1 to 3 of the inventive concept (15) may be combined with the basic form of the inventive concept (15), and the combination enhances the effect as described above.

(Invention concept (16))
Next, in the gaming machine of the specific example, as described with reference to FIG. 190, the operation mode of moving and displaying the reserved image may have a characteristic, and each has the following effects.
First, if the operation mode (for example, the trajectory or the moving speed) of the movement display accompanying the hold shift is different between the holding during the change and the holding on the stand, the player can move to the holding during the change and change to the holding on the hold. The distinction of the movement can be clearly grasped, and the effect of the easy-to-understand hold display is provided.
Next, regarding the movement display from the standby hold to the standby hold, if the operation mode of the movement display (for example, the trajectory or the moving speed, etc.) is different for each standby hold, the player will You can easily figure out where to move from.
Next, depending on the display mode of the suspended image (normal display mode, change suggestion mode, special display mode, or what type of special display mode), the operation mode of the moving display (eg, trajectory or moving speed, etc.) Has a different configuration, the player can grasp the difference in the big hit expectation and the like depending on the operation mode of the movement display of the hold shift.
Next, the operation mode of the movement display may be configured to be different depending on the game state (for example, a difference in the effect mode). The player can grasp only by looking at the operation mode of the movement of the reserved image.
In any of the above configurations, a dynamic, interesting and novel hold display is realized, and the interest of the game increases.

The basic form of the inventive concept (16) having the above configuration is represented, for example, as follows.
A variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed in the display area (display section 41a) of the display means can be executed based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition (start prize; winning of a game ball in the start area). A game machine capable of generating a special game state (big hit state) advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result,
A start storage unit (game control device 100) that extracts determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on the establishment of the execution condition and stores the determination information as start storage of the variable display game;
The control for executing the variable display game is performed based on the start memory stored in the start storage means, and the order of the start memory (the order of the start winning or the change in the start prize) corresponding to the execution of one of the variable display games. A variable display game control means (game control device 100) for performing a hold shift for moving up a display game execution order),
The hold image corresponding to the start memory, the fluctuating hold that is the start memory during the execution of the fluctuating display game, and the standby hold that is the start memory where the fluctuating display game is not executed, for the player Effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing control of the hold display to be displayed in the display area,
The effect control means,
With the holding shift, the holding image of the waiting holding can perform a moving display in which the order moves to a predetermined display position of the preceding holding image,
A gaming machine, wherein the movement display is different in the operation mode of the movement display between the movement to the change-hold and the movement to the standby-hold.
Note that the movement to the fluctuating hold refers to an operation in which the hold image of the standby hold (standby hold 1) having the first rank moves to the predetermined display position of the fluctuating hold and becomes the next hold image of the fluctuating hold. means. Further, the movement to the standby hold means a shift from the standby hold to the immediately preceding standby hold. For example, the hold image of the standby hold (standby hold 2) having the second rank is the standby image having the first rank. This means an operation of moving to a predetermined display position of the hold (standby hold 1) and becoming a hold image of the next standby hold 1.

The characteristic portion of the first modification of the inventive concept (16) is expressed as follows.
The effect control means,
With the holding shift, the holding image of the waiting holding can perform a moving display in which the order moves to a predetermined display position of the preceding holding image,
A gaming machine, wherein the movement display is capable of executing a different movement display for each standby hold (for example, according to a standby hold order).

The characteristic portion of the second modification of the inventive concept (16) is expressed as follows.
The effect control means,
With the holding shift, the holding image of the waiting holding can perform a moving display in which the order moves to a predetermined display position of the preceding holding image,
A gaming machine characterized in that the moving display, in which the operation mode of the moving display is different depending on the display mode of the hold image, can be executed.

The characteristic portion of the third modification of the inventive concept (16) is expressed as follows.
The effect control means,
With the holding shift, the holding image of the waiting holding can perform a moving display in which the order moves to a predetermined display position of the preceding holding image,
A gaming machine characterized in that the movement display can be executed in a different manner depending on a game state (for example, a difference in the effect mode).
The features of Modifications 1 to 3 of the inventive concept (16) may be combined with the basic form of the inventive concept (16), and the combination enhances the effect as described above.

(Invention concept (17))
Next, in the gaming machine of the specific example, as described with reference to FIG. 191 to FIG. 192, using the common display data stored and held in the ROM (for example, the image ROM 322 or the PROM 321 in FIG. There may be a configuration for performing the hold display of the hold. For example, display data that can be used as it is as the display data of either the hold display during fluctuation or the standby hold is stored and held as common display data, and the one hold display is the image of the common display data as it is. The display of the common display data is realized by changing (reducing or enlarging) the display size of the image of the common display data from the beginning or after the start of the display. .
Further, the other reserved display is realized by temporarily displaying the image of the common display data at a specific position (a display position different from the predetermined display position), and then performing a display of changing the display size and moving to the predetermined display position. There may be a configuration that performs the following.
Thereby, while realizing the effects of various hold displays, the display data to be stored and held can be reduced by half as compared with the case where different display data is stored and held both during the fluctuating hold and the standby hold, The storage capacity of the display data can be reduced. In addition, since the image of the hold display (that is, the hold image) is different between the changing hold and the standby hold due to the change in the display size, the player can easily distinguish between the two. In particular, when the display size is changed after the display is performed in the same size as the common display data, a dynamic, interesting and novel hold display is realized, and the interest of the game is further enhanced.

  Heretofore, in the related art, it is not easy to discriminate the holding images of the changing holding and the waiting holding, since each of the holding images is arranged close to each other and has a similar shape such as size and shape. It is conceivable that the display size is made different in order to clarify the distinction between the pending during fluctuation and the standby hold. However, if the configuration uses separate display data to display them, these separate display data are used. Must be stored. For this reason, especially when there are a large number of pending change patterns, both data of the enlarged version and the reduced version must be stored for each pattern, and there is a problem that the storage capacity increases. However, in this example, as described above, the display data is shared between the fluctuating hold and the standby hold, so that the above problem is remarkably improved.

The basic form of the inventive concept (17) having the above configuration is represented, for example, as follows.
A variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed in the display area (display section 41a) of the display means can be executed based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition (start prize; winning of a game ball in the start area). A game machine capable of generating a special game state (big hit state) advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result,
A start storage unit (game control device 100) that extracts determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on the establishment of the execution condition and stores the determination information as start storage of the variable display game;
The control for executing the variable display game is performed based on the start memory stored in the start storage means, and the order of the start memory (the order of the start winning or the change in the start prize) corresponding to the execution of one of the variable display games. A variable display game control means (game control device 100) for performing a hold shift for moving up a display game execution order),
The hold image corresponding to the start memory, the fluctuating hold that is the start memory during the execution of the fluctuating display game, and the standby hold that is the start memory where the fluctuating display game is not executed, for the player Effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing control of the hold display to be displayed in the display area,
The effect control means,
Display data that can be used without changing the image size as display data of any of the pending images during the fluctuating hold or standby hold is stored and held as common display data,
The one suspension display is performed by displaying the image of the common display data as it is (that is, maintaining the image size stored as the common display data),
The gaming machine, characterized in that the other hold display of the fluctuating hold or the standby hold can be executed by changing and displaying the display size of the image of the common display data from the beginning or after the start of display.
In addition, the basic form of the inventive concept (17) having the above configuration can be expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine capable of executing a variable display game based on satisfaction of a predetermined execution condition,
Starting storage means for storing information relating to the execution of the variable display game as starting storage based on establishment of the execution condition;
An effect control means capable of executing control of a hold display for displaying a hold image corresponding to the start memory,
The effect control means,
As the hold image, a change hold image corresponding to the start memory during execution of the change display game and a standby hold image corresponding to the start memory in which the change display game is not executed can be displayed. And
Display data of either the pending image during the change or the standby pending image is stored and held as common display data,
The one reserved image is displayed at an image size stored as the common display data,
The other of the fluctuating hold image or the standby hold image is displayed by changing an image size stored as the common display data to a display size corresponding to the other hold image. Gaming machine.

In addition, the characteristic portions of Modification 1 of the inventive concept (17) are expressed as follows.
The effect control means,
Display data that can be used without changing the image size as display data of any of the pending images during the fluctuating hold or standby hold is stored and held as common display data,
The one suspension display is executed by displaying the image of the common display data as the image size stored as the common display data,
The other hold display of the fluctuating hold or the standby hold can be executed by changing the image size of the common display data to a display size corresponding to the other hold image after the start of display,
In the other hold display, an image of the common display data is initially displayed (at the start of display) at a specific position different from the predetermined display position, and then a display of changing the image size and moving to the predetermined display position can be executed. A gaming machine characterized by the following.
The hold display using the common display data as described above may be always executed when the hold display is performed. However, the hold display is performed only in a specific game state (for example, a specific effect mode). A mode that is not performed in the game state may be used. In the description of the above inventive concept, “executable” means that such an embodiment may be executed in some cases.

Next, modified examples of the inventions of the present application will be described.
First, the effect display (effect display in which the image of the identification information of the variable display game and the image of the effect information are at least partially overlapped) in the inventive concepts (1) and (2) is not limited to the reach start effect, For example, it may be performed as an effect before the start of the reach (the first half change of the decorative special map), an effect performed as an effect during the reach action after the start of the reach, or during a customer waiting display performed in a customer waiting state May be directed.

In addition, the effect display (notification effect by combining effect information different from identification information) in the inventive concept (3) is not limited to the presence or absence of the reach action, and informs the subsequent flow of the effect or the branching destination (migration destination) of the game flow. Or it may be a suggestion. For example, a configuration in which this effect display is performed as a part of the reach action, and functions as a notice effect indicating a development destination of the subsequent reach effect may be adopted.
In addition, the effect information displayed in the effect displays in the inventive concepts (3) and (8) is not two (two) but three or more (three or more) effect effects, and the effect information is displayed in these three or more positions. A mode in which the presence or absence of a reach action or the like is notified or suggested based on a combination of information or a difference in form may be used. For example, effect information may be displayed in three columns, left, right, and middle, respectively, as in the design of a decorative special figure.
In addition, the display of the effect information in the effect display in the inventive concepts (3) and (8) may include a variable display in which the type of the displayed effect information fluctuates, or an aspect that does not include the fluctuating display (for example, Alternatively, the display may be stopped and displayed without changing the type of the effect information that has been started.

Next, the scope of application of the invention described in the present application will be described.
(1) Even when the gaming machine uses a game ball to play a game, the invention is not limited to the example as in the embodiment, but can be applied to an enclosed ball-type gaming machine.
(2) The present invention is not limited to a gaming machine using a game ball, but is also applicable to a so-called pachislot machine (a spinning-type slot machine) that plays a game using coins (or medals). Can be.
(3) Display devices, such as display devices for decorative special maps, are not limited to display devices using liquid crystals, and display devices such as organic EL, CRT, dot LED, 7-segment LED, and devices using a bending material such as electronic paper. Any member can be used as long as the contents can be changed.

  The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1 Pachinko machines (game machines)
4 Front frame (body frame, game frame)
5 glass frame (front frame)
9 Direction buttons (operation means)
9a Touch panel (operation means)
11 Launch operation handle (operation unit)
11a Touch switch (contact detection means)
12a Upper speaker (directing means)
12b Lower speaker (production means)
14 Logo display part 16 Ball rental button 20 Game board 26 Ordinary fluctuation winning device (Ordinary electric accessory: Puden)
26a Start winning port (second starting port, starting area)
26b Opening / closing member (opening / closing door, starting opening / closing means, starting area opening / closing means)
27 Variable winning device (Special variable winning device)
27a Winning opening 27b Opening / closing member (opening / closing door)
32 General-purpose starting gate 35 Collective display device (display means, special figure display means, general-purpose display means)
41 display device (production means, display means, special figure display means, ordinary figure display means)
41a display unit (display screen, display area)
42 Panel decoration device (production means)
43 Frame decoration device (directing means)
44 board production equipment (production means)
55 external information terminal board 100 game control device (control device, control means)
101 game microcomputer 101A CPU
101B ROM
101C RAM
120 1st starting port switch (1st starting port switch)
121 Second starting port switch (Starting port 2 switch)
122 gate switch 123 winning opening switch 124 big winning opening switch 126 magnetic sensor 127 panel radio wave sensor 200 payout control device 211 glass frame (front frame) opening detection switch 212 front frame (main body frame) opening detection switch 300 production control device (control device) , Control means)
311 CPU
311a RAM
312 VDP
321 PROM
322 image ROM
326 RAM
327 FeRAM (backup memory)
338 Volume SW
339 LED for setting confirmation
500 Power supply device 600 Starting port distribution device 607 Special figure 1 starting port (first starting port, starting area)
608 Special figure 2 starting port (second starting port, starting area)
700 Movable character 701 Decorating part 801 Upper movable character (movable character, light-emitting character)
802 Left-hand movable character (movable character)
803 Right movable object (movable object)
H1 fluctuation display area (identification information display area)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a variable display game based on satisfaction of a predetermined execution condition,
Starting storage means for storing information on the execution of the variable display game based on the establishment of the execution condition as a start memory and storing a predetermined number as an upper limit;
A variable display game control means for performing control for executing the variable display game based on the start memory stored in the start storage means;
An effect control unit capable of executing control for displaying a hold image corresponding to the start memory,
The variable display game control means,
When a plurality of start memories are stored in the start storage means, in response to the execution of one of the change display games, a hold shift is performed to raise the execution order of the start memories that do not correspond to the executed variable display game. ,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a movement display for moving a suspended image corresponding to a start memory for moving up the execution order with the suspension shift to a display position corresponding to the execution order after the advancement,
In the standby state in which the moving display is not executed, the respective reserved images do not overlap each other, and are displayed at respective display positions of the respective reserved images,
Wherein during movement display is running, Ri executable der display the hold image moving display overlaps another hold image, in order from the pending images corresponding to new the start memory, the corresponding reach a new display position gaming machine is moved to and said Rukoto.

Images